hcq/MaxScale
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Actions Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

MXS-2732 Remove old sqlite-src-3110100 directory

Browse Source
This commit is contained in:
Johan Wikman
2019-10-30 12:05:53 +02:00
parent 4af67e95ff
commit 88e0c3dc37
496 changed files with 0 additions and 406507 deletions
Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

1259
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/Makefile.in
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

123
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/Makefile.linux-gcc
View File

@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
#!/usr/make
#
# Makefile for SQLITE
#
# This is a template makefile for SQLite. Most people prefer to
# use the autoconf generated "configure" script to generate the
# makefile automatically. But that does not work for everybody
# and in every situation. If you are having problems with the
# "configure" script, you might want to try this makefile as an
# alternative. Create a copy of this file, edit the parameters
# below and type "make".
#
#### The toplevel directory of the source tree. This is the directory
# that contains this "Makefile.in" and the "configure.in" script.
#
TOP = ../sqlite
#### C Compiler and options for use in building executables that
# will run on the platform that is doing the build.
#
BCC = gcc -g -O2
#BCC = /opt/ancic/bin/c89 -0
#### If the target operating system supports the "usleep()" system
# call, then define the HAVE_USLEEP macro for all C modules.
#
#USLEEP =
USLEEP = -DHAVE_USLEEP=1
#### If you want the SQLite library to be safe for use within a
# multi-threaded program, then define the following macro
# appropriately:
#
#THREADSAFE = -DTHREADSAFE=1
THREADSAFE = -DTHREADSAFE=0
#### Specify any extra linker options needed to make the library
# thread safe
#
#THREADLIB = -lpthread
THREADLIB =
#### Specify any extra libraries needed to access required functions.
#
#TLIBS = -lrt # fdatasync on Solaris 8
TLIBS =
#### Leave SQLITE_DEBUG undefined for maximum speed. Use SQLITE_DEBUG=1
# to check for memory leaks. Use SQLITE_DEBUG=2 to print a log of all
# malloc()s and free()s in order to track down memory leaks.
#
# SQLite uses some expensive assert() statements in the inner loop.
# You can make the library go almost twice as fast if you compile
# with -DNDEBUG=1
#
#OPTS = -DSQLITE_DEBUG=2
#OPTS = -DSQLITE_DEBUG=1
#OPTS =
OPTS = -DNDEBUG=1
OPTS += -DHAVE_FDATASYNC=1
#### The suffix to add to executable files. ".exe" for windows.
# Nothing for unix.
#
#EXE = .exe
EXE =
#### C Compile and options for use in building executables that
# will run on the target platform. This is usually the same
# as BCC, unless you are cross-compiling.
#
TCC = gcc -O6
#TCC = gcc -g -O0 -Wall
#TCC = gcc -g -O0 -Wall -fprofile-arcs -ftest-coverage
#TCC = /opt/mingw/bin/i386-mingw32-gcc -O6
#TCC = /opt/ansic/bin/c89 -O +z -Wl,-a,archive
#### Tools used to build a static library.
#
AR = ar cr
#AR = /opt/mingw/bin/i386-mingw32-ar cr
RANLIB = ranlib
#RANLIB = /opt/mingw/bin/i386-mingw32-ranlib
MKSHLIB = gcc -shared
SO = so
SHPREFIX = lib
# SO = dll
# SHPREFIX =
#### Extra compiler options needed for programs that use the TCL library.
#
#TCL_FLAGS =
#TCL_FLAGS = -DSTATIC_BUILD=1
TCL_FLAGS = -I/home/drh/tcltk/8.5linux
#TCL_FLAGS = -I/home/drh/tcltk/8.5win -DSTATIC_BUILD=1
#TCL_FLAGS = -I/home/drh/tcltk/8.3hpux
#### Linker options needed to link against the TCL library.
#
#LIBTCL = -ltcl -lm -ldl
LIBTCL = /home/drh/tcltk/8.5linux/libtcl8.5g.a -lm -ldl
#LIBTCL = /home/drh/tcltk/8.5win/libtcl85s.a -lmsvcrt
#LIBTCL = /home/drh/tcltk/8.3hpux/libtcl8.3.a -ldld -lm -lc
#### Additional objects for SQLite library when TCL support is enabled.
#TCLOBJ =
TCLOBJ = tclsqlite.o
#### Compiler options needed for programs that use the readline() library.
#
READLINE_FLAGS =
#READLINE_FLAGS = -DHAVE_READLINE=1 -I/usr/include/readline
#### Linker options needed by programs using readline() must link against.
#
LIBREADLINE =
#LIBREADLINE = -static -lreadline -ltermcap
# You should not have to change anything below this line
###############################################################################
include $(TOP)/main.mk

2070
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/Makefile.msc
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

230
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/README.md
View File

@ -1,230 +0,0 @@
<h1 align="center">SQLite Source Repository</h1>
This repository contains the complete source code for the SQLite database
engine. Some test scripts are also include. However, many other test scripts
and most of the documentation are managed separately.
If you are reading this on a Git mirror someplace, you are doing it wrong.
The [official repository](https://www.sqlite.org/src/) is better. Go there
now.
## Compiling
First create a directory in which to place
the build products. It is recommended, but not required, that the
build directory be separate from the source directory. Cd into the
build directory and then from the build directory run the configure
script found at the root of the source tree. Then run "make".
For example:
tar xzf sqlite.tar.gz ;# Unpack the source tree into "sqlite"
mkdir bld ;# Build will occur in a sibling directory
cd bld ;# Change to the build directory
../sqlite/configure ;# Run the configure script
make ;# Run the makefile.
make sqlite3.c ;# Build the "amalgamation" source file
make test ;# Run some tests (requires Tcl)
See the makefile for additional targets.
The configure script uses autoconf 2.61 and libtool. If the configure
script does not work out for you, there is a generic makefile named
"Makefile.linux-gcc" in the top directory of the source tree that you
can copy and edit to suit your needs. Comments on the generic makefile
show what changes are needed.
## Using MSVC
On Windows, all applicable build products can be compiled with MSVC.
First open the command prompt window associated with the desired compiler
version (e.g. "Developer Command Prompt for VS2013"). Next, use NMAKE
with the provided "Makefile.msc" to build one of the supported targets.
For example:
mkdir bld
cd bld
nmake /f Makefile.msc TOP=..\sqlite
nmake /f Makefile.msc sqlite3.c TOP=..\sqlite
nmake /f Makefile.msc sqlite3.dll TOP=..\sqlite
nmake /f Makefile.msc sqlite3.exe TOP=..\sqlite
nmake /f Makefile.msc test TOP=..\sqlite
There are several build options that can be set via the NMAKE command
line. For example, to build for WinRT, simply add "FOR_WINRT=1" argument
to the "sqlite3.dll" command line above. When debugging into the SQLite
code, adding the "DEBUG=1" argument to one of the above command lines is
recommended.
SQLite does not require [Tcl](http://www.tcl.tk/) to run, but a Tcl installation
is required by the makefiles (including those for MSVC). SQLite contains
a lot of generated code and Tcl is used to do much of that code generation.
The makefiles also require AWK.
## Source Code Tour
Most of the core source files are in the **src/** subdirectory. But
src/ also contains files used to build the "testfixture" test harness;
those file all begin with "test". And src/ contains the "shell.c" file
which is the main program for the "sqlite3.exe" command-line shell and
the "tclsqlite.c" file which implements the bindings to SQLite from the
Tcl programming language. (Historical note: SQLite began as a Tcl
extension and only later escaped to the wild as an independent library.)
Test scripts and programs are found in the **test/** subdirectory.
There are other test suites for SQLite (see
[How SQLite Is Tested](http://www.sqlite.org/testing.html))
but those other test suites are
in separate source repositories.
The **ext/** subdirectory contains code for extensions. The
Full-text search engine is in **ext/fts3**. The R-Tree engine is in
**ext/rtree**. The **ext/misc** subdirectory contains a number of
smaller, single-file extensions, such as a REGEXP operator.
The **tool/** subdirectory contains various scripts and programs used
for building generated source code files or for testing or for generating
accessory programs such as "sqlite3_analyzer(.exe)".
### Generated Source Code Files
Several of the C-language source files used by SQLite are generated from
other sources rather than being typed in manually by a programmer. This
section will summarize those automatically-generated files. To create all
of the automatically-generated files, simply run "make target&#95;source".
The "target&#95;source" make target will create a subdirectory "tsrc/" and
fill it with all the source files needed to build SQLite, both
manually-edited files and automatically-generated files.
The SQLite interface is defined by the **sqlite3.h** header file, which is
generated from src/sqlite.h.in, ./manifest.uuid, and ./VERSION. The
[Tcl script](http://www.tcl.tk) at tool/mksqlite3h.tcl does the conversion.
The manifest.uuid file contains the SHA1 hash of the particular check-in
and is used to generate the SQLITE\_SOURCE\_ID macro. The VERSION file
contains the current SQLite version number. The sqlite3.h header is really
just a copy of src/sqlite.h.in with the source-id and version number inserted
at just the right spots. Note that comment text in the sqlite3.h file is
used to generate much of the SQLite API documentation. The Tcl scripts
used to generate that documentation are in a separate source repository.
The SQL language parser is **parse.c** which is generate from a grammar in
the src/parse.y file. The conversion of "parse.y" into "parse.c" is done
by the [lemon](./doc/lemon.html) LALR(1) parser generator. The source code
for lemon is at tool/lemon.c. Lemon uses a
template for generating its parser. A generic template is in tool/lempar.c,
but SQLite uses a slightly modified template found in src/lempar.c.
Lemon also generates the **parse.h** header file, at the same time it
generates parse.c. But the parse.h header file is
modified further (to add additional symbols) using the ./addopcodes.awk
AWK script.
The **opcodes.h** header file contains macros that define the numbers
corresponding to opcodes in the "VDBE" virtual machine. The opcodes.h
file is generated by the scanning the src/vdbe.c source file. The
AWK script at ./mkopcodeh.awk does this scan and generates opcodes.h.
A second AWK script, ./mkopcodec.awk, then scans opcodes.h to generate
the **opcodes.c** source file, which contains a reverse mapping from
opcode-number to opcode-name that is used for EXPLAIN output.
The **keywordhash.h** header file contains the definition of a hash table
that maps SQL language keywords (ex: "CREATE", "SELECT", "INDEX", etc.) into
the numeric codes used by the parse.c parser. The keywordhash.h file is
generated by a C-language program at tool mkkeywordhash.c.
### The Amalgamation
All of the individual C source code and header files (both manually-edited
and automatically-generated) can be combined into a single big source file
**sqlite3.c** called "the amalgamation". The amalgamation is the recommended
way of using SQLite in a larger application. Combining all individual
source code files into a single big source code file allows the C compiler
to perform more cross-procedure analysis and generate better code. SQLite
runs about 5% faster when compiled from the amalgamation versus when compiled
from individual source files.
The amalgamation is generated from the tool/mksqlite3c.tcl Tcl script.
First, all of the individual source files must be gathered into the tsrc/
subdirectory (using the equivalent of "make target_source") then the
tool/mksqlite3c.tcl script is run to copy them all together in just the
right order while resolving internal "#include" references.
The amalgamation source file is more than 100K lines long. Some symbolic
debuggers (most notably MSVC) are unable to deal with files longer than 64K
lines. To work around this, a separate Tcl script, tool/split-sqlite3c.tcl,
can be run on the amalgamation to break it up into a single small C file
called **sqlite3-all.c** that does #include on about five other files
named **sqlite3-1.c**, **sqlite3-2.c**, ..., **sqlite3-5.c**. In this way,
all of the source code is contained within a single translation unit so
that the compiler can do extra cross-procedure optimization, but no
individual source file exceeds 32K lines in length.
## How It All Fits Together
SQLite is modular in design.
See the [architectural description](http://www.sqlite.org/arch.html)
for details. Other documents that are useful in
(helping to understand how SQLite works include the
[file format](http://www.sqlite.org/fileformat2.html) description,
the [virtual machine](http://www.sqlite.org/vdbe.html) that runs
prepared statements, the description of
[how transactions work](http://www.sqlite.org/atomiccommit.html), and
the [overview of the query planner](http://www.sqlite.org/optoverview.html).
Unfortunately, years of effort have gone into optimizating SQLite, both
for small size and high performance. And optimizations tend to result in
complex code. So there is a lot of complexity in the SQLite implementation.
Key files:
* **sqlite.h.in** - This file defines the public interface to the SQLite
library. Readers will need to be familiar with this interface before
trying to understand how the library works internally.
* **sqliteInt.h** - this header file defines many of the data objects
used internally by SQLite.
* **parse.y** - This file describes the LALR(1) grammer that SQLite uses
to parse SQL statements, and the actions that are taken at each step
in the parsing process.
* **vdbe.c** - This file implements the virtual machine that runs
prepared statements. There are various helper files whose names
begin with "vdbe". The VDBE has access to the vdbeInt.h header file
which defines internal data objects. The rest of SQLite interacts
with the VDBE through an interface defined by vdbe.h.
* **where.c** - This file analyzes the WHERE clause and generates
virtual machine code to run queries efficiently. This file is
sometimes called the "query optimizer". It has its own private
header file, whereInt.h, that defines data objects used internally.
* **btree.c** - This file contains the implementation of the B-Tree
storage engine used by SQLite.
* **pager.c** - This file contains the "pager" implementation, the
module that implements transactions.
* **os_unix.c** and **os_win.c** - These two files implement the interface
between SQLite and the underlying operating system using the run-time
pluggable VFS interface.
* **shell.c** - This file is not part of the core SQLite library. This
is the file that, when linked against sqlite3.a, generates the
"sqlite3.exe" command-line shell.
* **tclsqlite.c** - This file implements the Tcl bindings for SQLite. It
is not part of the core SQLite library. But as most of the tests in this
repository are written in Tcl, the Tcl language bindings are important.
There are many other source files. Each has a suscinct header comment that
describes its purpose and role within the larger system.
## Contacts
The main SQLite webpage is [http://www.sqlite.org/](http://www.sqlite.org/)
with geographically distributed backup servers at
[http://www2.sqlite.org/](http://www2.sqlite.org) and
[http://www3.sqlite.org/](http://www3.sqlite.org).

1
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/VERSION
View File

@ -1 +0,0 @@
3.11.1

7972
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/aclocal.m4 vendored
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

5333
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/art/sqlite370.eps
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

BIN
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/art/sqlite370.ico
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 2.2 KiB

BIN
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/art/sqlite370.jpg
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 79 KiB

370
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/INSTALL
View File

@ -1,370 +0,0 @@
Installation Instructions
*************************
Copyright (C) 1994-1996, 1999-2002, 2004-2011 Free Software Foundation,
Inc.
Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification,
are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright
notice and this notice are preserved. This file is offered as-is,
without warranty of any kind.
Basic Installation
==================
Briefly, the shell commands `./configure; make; make install' should
configure, build, and install this package. The following
more-detailed instructions are generic; see the `README' file for
instructions specific to this package. Some packages provide this
`INSTALL' file but do not implement all of the features documented
below. The lack of an optional feature in a given package is not
necessarily a bug. More recommendations for GNU packages can be found
in *note Makefile Conventions: (standards)Makefile Conventions.
The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for
various system-dependent variables used during compilation. It uses
those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package.
It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent
definitions. Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that
you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, and a
file `config.log' containing compiler output (useful mainly for
debugging `configure').
It can also use an optional file (typically called `config.cache'
and enabled with `--cache-file=config.cache' or simply `-C') that saves
the results of its tests to speed up reconfiguring. Caching is
disabled by default to prevent problems with accidental use of stale
cache files.
If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try
to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail
diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can
be considered for the next release. If you are using the cache, and at
some point `config.cache' contains results you don't want to keep, you
may remove or edit it.
The file `configure.ac' (or `configure.in') is used to create
`configure' by a program called `autoconf'. You need `configure.ac' if
you want to change it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version
of `autoconf'.
The simplest way to compile this package is:
1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type
`./configure' to configure the package for your system.
Running `configure' might take a while. While running, it prints
some messages telling which features it is checking for.
2. Type `make' to compile the package.
3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with
the package, generally using the just-built uninstalled binaries.
4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and
documentation. When installing into a prefix owned by root, it is
recommended that the package be configured and built as a regular
user, and only the `make install' phase executed with root
privileges.
5. Optionally, type `make installcheck' to repeat any self-tests, but
this time using the binaries in their final installed location.
This target does not install anything. Running this target as a
regular user, particularly if the prior `make install' required
root privileges, verifies that the installation completed
correctly.
6. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the
source code directory by typing `make clean'. To also remove the
files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for
a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'. There is
also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly
for the package's developers. If you use it, you may have to get
all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came
with the distribution.
7. Often, you can also type `make uninstall' to remove the installed
files again. In practice, not all packages have tested that
uninstallation works correctly, even though it is required by the
GNU Coding Standards.
8. Some packages, particularly those that use Automake, provide `make
distcheck', which can by used by developers to test that all other
targets like `make install' and `make uninstall' work correctly.
This target is generally not run by end users.
Compilers and Options
=====================
Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that
the `configure' script does not know about. Run `./configure --help'
for details on some of the pertinent environment variables.
You can give `configure' initial values for configuration parameters
by setting variables in the command line or in the environment. Here
is an example:
./configure CC=c99 CFLAGS=-g LIBS=-lposix
*Note Defining Variables::, for more details.
Compiling For Multiple Architectures
====================================
You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the
same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their
own directory. To do this, you can use GNU `make'. `cd' to the
directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run
the `configure' script. `configure' automatically checks for the
source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'. This
is known as a "VPATH" build.
With a non-GNU `make', it is safer to compile the package for one
architecture at a time in the source code directory. After you have
installed the package for one architecture, use `make distclean' before
reconfiguring for another architecture.
On MacOS X 10.5 and later systems, you can create libraries and
executables that work on multiple system types--known as "fat" or
"universal" binaries--by specifying multiple `-arch' options to the
compiler but only a single `-arch' option to the preprocessor. Like
this:
./configure CC="gcc -arch i386 -arch x86_64 -arch ppc -arch ppc64" \
CXX="g++ -arch i386 -arch x86_64 -arch ppc -arch ppc64" \
CPP="gcc -E" CXXCPP="g++ -E"
This is not guaranteed to produce working output in all cases, you
may have to build one architecture at a time and combine the results
using the `lipo' tool if you have problems.
Installation Names
==================
By default, `make install' installs the package's commands under
`/usr/local/bin', include files under `/usr/local/include', etc. You
can specify an installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving
`configure' the option `--prefix=PREFIX', where PREFIX must be an
absolute file name.
You can specify separate installation prefixes for
architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files. If you
pass the option `--exec-prefix=PREFIX' to `configure', the package uses
PREFIX as the prefix for installing programs and libraries.
Documentation and other data files still use the regular prefix.
In addition, if you use an unusual directory layout you can give
options like `--bindir=DIR' to specify different values for particular
kinds of files. Run `configure --help' for a list of the directories
you can set and what kinds of files go in them. In general, the
default for these options is expressed in terms of `${prefix}', so that
specifying just `--prefix' will affect all of the other directory
specifications that were not explicitly provided.
The most portable way to affect installation locations is to pass the
correct locations to `configure'; however, many packages provide one or
both of the following shortcuts of passing variable assignments to the
`make install' command line to change installation locations without
having to reconfigure or recompile.
The first method involves providing an override variable for each
affected directory. For example, `make install
prefix=/alternate/directory' will choose an alternate location for all
directory configuration variables that were expressed in terms of
`${prefix}'. Any directories that were specified during `configure',
but not in terms of `${prefix}', must each be overridden at install
time for the entire installation to be relocated. The approach of
makefile variable overrides for each directory variable is required by
the GNU Coding Standards, and ideally causes no recompilation.
However, some platforms have known limitations with the semantics of
shared libraries that end up requiring recompilation when using this
method, particularly noticeable in packages that use GNU Libtool.
The second method involves providing the `DESTDIR' variable. For
example, `make install DESTDIR=/alternate/directory' will prepend
`/alternate/directory' before all installation names. The approach of
`DESTDIR' overrides is not required by the GNU Coding Standards, and
does not work on platforms that have drive letters. On the other hand,
it does better at avoiding recompilation issues, and works well even
when some directory options were not specified in terms of `${prefix}'
at `configure' time.
Optional Features
=================
If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed
with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the
option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'.
Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to
`configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package.
They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE
is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System). The
`README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the
package recognizes.
For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually
find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't,
you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and
`--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations.
Some packages offer the ability to configure how verbose the
execution of `make' will be. For these packages, running `./configure
--enable-silent-rules' sets the default to minimal output, which can be
overridden with `make V=1'; while running `./configure
--disable-silent-rules' sets the default to verbose, which can be
overridden with `make V=0'.
Particular systems
==================
On HP-UX, the default C compiler is not ANSI C compatible. If GNU
CC is not installed, it is recommended to use the following options in
order to use an ANSI C compiler:
./configure CC="cc -Ae -D_XOPEN_SOURCE=500"
and if that doesn't work, install pre-built binaries of GCC for HP-UX.
HP-UX `make' updates targets which have the same time stamps as
their prerequisites, which makes it generally unusable when shipped
generated files such as `configure' are involved. Use GNU `make'
instead.
On OSF/1 a.k.a. Tru64, some versions of the default C compiler cannot
parse its `<wchar.h>' header file. The option `-nodtk' can be used as
a workaround. If GNU CC is not installed, it is therefore recommended
to try
./configure CC="cc"
and if that doesn't work, try
./configure CC="cc -nodtk"
On Solaris, don't put `/usr/ucb' early in your `PATH'. This
directory contains several dysfunctional programs; working variants of
these programs are available in `/usr/bin'. So, if you need `/usr/ucb'
in your `PATH', put it _after_ `/usr/bin'.
On Haiku, software installed for all users goes in `/boot/common',
not `/usr/local'. It is recommended to use the following options:
./configure --prefix=/boot/common
Specifying the System Type
==========================
There may be some features `configure' cannot figure out
automatically, but needs to determine by the type of machine the package
will run on. Usually, assuming the package is built to be run on the
_same_ architectures, `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints
a message saying it cannot guess the machine type, give it the
`--build=TYPE' option. TYPE can either be a short name for the system
type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name which has the form:
CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM
where SYSTEM can have one of these forms:
OS
KERNEL-OS
See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field. If
`config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't
need to know the machine type.
If you are _building_ compiler tools for cross-compiling, you should
use the option `--target=TYPE' to select the type of system they will
produce code for.
If you want to _use_ a cross compiler, that generates code for a
platform different from the build platform, you should specify the
"host" platform (i.e., that on which the generated programs will
eventually be run) with `--host=TYPE'.
Sharing Defaults
================
If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share,
you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives
default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'.
`configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then
`PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists. Or, you can set the
`CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script.
A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script.
Defining Variables
==================
Variables not defined in a site shell script can be set in the
environment passed to `configure'. However, some packages may run
configure again during the build, and the customized values of these
variables may be lost. In order to avoid this problem, you should set
them in the `configure' command line, using `VAR=value'. For example:
./configure CC=/usr/local2/bin/gcc
causes the specified `gcc' to be used as the C compiler (unless it is
overridden in the site shell script).
Unfortunately, this technique does not work for `CONFIG_SHELL' due to
an Autoconf bug. Until the bug is fixed you can use this workaround:
CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash /bin/bash ./configure CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash
`configure' Invocation
======================
`configure' recognizes the following options to control how it
operates.
`--help'
`-h'
Print a summary of all of the options to `configure', and exit.
`--help=short'
`--help=recursive'
Print a summary of the options unique to this package's
`configure', and exit. The `short' variant lists options used
only in the top level, while the `recursive' variant lists options
also present in any nested packages.
`--version'
`-V'
Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure'
script, and exit.
`--cache-file=FILE'
Enable the cache: use and save the results of the tests in FILE,
traditionally `config.cache'. FILE defaults to `/dev/null' to
disable caching.
`--config-cache'
`-C'
Alias for `--cache-file=config.cache'.
`--quiet'
`--silent'
`-q'
Do not print messages saying which checks are being made. To
suppress all normal output, redirect it to `/dev/null' (any error
messages will still be shown).
`--srcdir=DIR'
Look for the package's source code in directory DIR. Usually
`configure' can determine that directory automatically.
`--prefix=DIR'
Use DIR as the installation prefix. *note Installation Names::
for more details, including other options available for fine-tuning
the installation locations.
`--no-create'
`-n'
Run the configure checks, but stop before creating any output
files.
`configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options. Run
`configure --help' for more details.

20
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/Makefile.am
View File

@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
AM_CFLAGS = @THREADSAFE_FLAGS@ @DYNAMIC_EXTENSION_FLAGS@ @FTS5_FLAGS@ @JSON1_FLAGS@ -DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3 -DSQLITE_ENABLE_RTREE
lib_LTLIBRARIES = libsqlite3.la
libsqlite3_la_SOURCES = sqlite3.c
libsqlite3_la_LDFLAGS = -no-undefined -version-info 8:6:8
bin_PROGRAMS = sqlite3
sqlite3_SOURCES = shell.c sqlite3.c sqlite3.h
sqlite3_LDADD = @READLINE_LIBS@
sqlite3_DEPENDENCIES = @EXTRA_SHELL_OBJ@
sqlite3_CFLAGS = $(AM_CFLAGS) -DSQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS
include_HEADERS = sqlite3.h sqlite3ext.h
EXTRA_DIST = sqlite3.1 tea Makefile.msc sqlite3.rc README.txt
pkgconfigdir = ${libdir}/pkgconfig
pkgconfig_DATA = sqlite3.pc
man_MANS = sqlite3.1

930
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/Makefile.msc
View File

@ -1,930 +0,0 @@
#### DO NOT EDIT ####
# This makefile is automatically generated from the Makefile.msc at
# the root of the canonical SQLite source tree (not the
# amalgamation tarball) using the tool/mkmsvcmin.tcl
# script.
#
#
# nmake Makefile for SQLite
#
###############################################################################
############################## START OF OPTIONS ###############################
###############################################################################
# The toplevel directory of the source tree. This is the directory
# that contains this "Makefile.msc".
#
TOP = .
# Set this non-0 to enable full warnings (-W4, etc) when compiling.
#
!IFNDEF USE_FULLWARN
USE_FULLWARN = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to use "stdcall" calling convention for the core library
# and shell executable.
#
!IFNDEF USE_STDCALL
USE_STDCALL = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to have the shell executable link against the core dynamic
# link library.
#
!IFNDEF DYNAMIC_SHELL
DYNAMIC_SHELL = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to enable extra code that attempts to detect misuse of the
# SQLite API.
#
!IFNDEF API_ARMOR
API_ARMOR = 0
!ENDIF
# If necessary, create a list of harmless compiler warnings to disable when
# compiling the various tools. For the SQLite source code itself, warnings,
# if any, will be disabled from within it.
#
!IFNDEF NO_WARN
!IF $(USE_FULLWARN)!=0
NO_WARN = -wd4054 -wd4055 -wd4100 -wd4127 -wd4130 -wd4152 -wd4189 -wd4206
NO_WARN = $(NO_WARN) -wd4210 -wd4232 -wd4305 -wd4306 -wd4702 -wd4706
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to use the library paths and other options necessary for
# Windows Phone 8.1.
#
!IFNDEF USE_WP81_OPTS
USE_WP81_OPTS = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to split the SQLite amalgamation file into chunks to
# be used for debugging with Visual Studio.
#
!IFNDEF SPLIT_AMALGAMATION
SPLIT_AMALGAMATION = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to dynamically link to the MSVC runtime library.
#
!IFNDEF USE_CRT_DLL
USE_CRT_DLL = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to link to the RPCRT4 library.
#
!IFNDEF USE_RPCRT4_LIB
USE_RPCRT4_LIB = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to generate assembly code listings for the source code
# files.
#
!IFNDEF USE_LISTINGS
USE_LISTINGS = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to attempt setting the native compiler automatically
# for cross-compiling the command line tools needed during the compilation
# process.
#
!IFNDEF XCOMPILE
XCOMPILE = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to use the native libraries paths for cross-compiling
# the command line tools needed during the compilation process.
#
!IFNDEF USE_NATIVE_LIBPATHS
USE_NATIVE_LIBPATHS = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this 0 to skip the compiling and embedding of version resources.
#
!IFNDEF USE_RC
USE_RC = 1
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to compile binaries suitable for the WinRT environment.
# This setting does not apply to any binaries that require Tcl to operate
# properly (i.e. the text fixture, etc).
#
!IFNDEF FOR_WINRT
FOR_WINRT = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to compile binaries suitable for the UWP environment.
# This setting does not apply to any binaries that require Tcl to operate
# properly (i.e. the text fixture, etc).
#
!IFNDEF FOR_UWP
FOR_UWP = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this non-0 to compile binaries suitable for the Windows 10 platform.
#
!IFNDEF FOR_WIN10
FOR_WIN10 = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this to non-0 to create and use PDBs.
#
!IFNDEF SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS = 1
!ENDIF
# Set this to non-0 to use the SQLite debugging heap subsystem.
#
!IFNDEF MEMDEBUG
MEMDEBUG = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this to non-0 to use the Win32 native heap subsystem.
#
!IFNDEF WIN32HEAP
WIN32HEAP = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this to non-0 to enable OSTRACE() macros, which can be useful when
# debugging.
#
!IFNDEF OSTRACE
OSTRACE = 0
!ENDIF
# Set this to one of the following values to enable various debugging
# features. Each level includes the debugging options from the previous
# levels. Currently, the recognized values for DEBUG are:
#
# 0 == NDEBUG: Disables assert() and other runtime diagnostics.
# 1 == SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR: extra attempts to detect misuse of the API.
# 2 == Disables NDEBUG and all optimizations and then enables PDBs.
# 3 == SQLITE_DEBUG: Enables various diagnostics messages and code.
# 4 == SQLITE_WIN32_MALLOC_VALIDATE: Validate the Win32 native heap per call.
# 5 == SQLITE_DEBUG_OS_TRACE: Enables output from the OSTRACE() macros.
# 6 == SQLITE_ENABLE_IOTRACE: Enables output from the IOTRACE() macros.
#
!IFNDEF DEBUG
DEBUG = 0
!ENDIF
# Enable use of available compiler optimizations? Normally, this should be
# non-zero. Setting this to zero, thus disabling all compiler optimizations,
# can be useful for testing.
#
!IFNDEF OPTIMIZATIONS
OPTIMIZATIONS = 2
!ENDIF
# Set the source code file to be used by executables and libraries when
# they need the amalgamation.
#
!IFNDEF SQLITE3C
!IF $(SPLIT_AMALGAMATION)!=0
SQLITE3C = sqlite3-all.c
!ELSE
SQLITE3C = sqlite3.c
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# Set the include code file to be used by executables and libraries when
# they need SQLite.
#
!IFNDEF SQLITE3H
SQLITE3H = sqlite3.h
!ENDIF
# This is the name to use for the SQLite dynamic link library (DLL).
#
!IFNDEF SQLITE3DLL
!IF $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
SQLITE3DLL = winsqlite3.dll
!ELSE
SQLITE3DLL = sqlite3.dll
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# This is the name to use for the SQLite import library (LIB).
#
!IFNDEF SQLITE3LIB
!IF $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
SQLITE3LIB = winsqlite3.lib
!ELSE
SQLITE3LIB = sqlite3.lib
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# This is the name to use for the SQLite shell executable (EXE).
#
!IFNDEF SQLITE3EXE
!IF $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
SQLITE3EXE = winsqlite3shell.exe
!ELSE
SQLITE3EXE = sqlite3.exe
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# This is the argument used to set the program database (PDB) file for the
# SQLite shell executable (EXE).
#
!IFNDEF SQLITE3EXEPDB
!IF $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
SQLITE3EXEPDB =
!ELSE
SQLITE3EXEPDB = /pdb:sqlite3sh.pdb
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# These are the "standard" SQLite compilation options used when compiling for
# the Windows platform.
#
!IFNDEF OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS = $(OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS) -DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3=1
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS = $(OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS) -DSQLITE_ENABLE_RTREE=1
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS = $(OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS) -DSQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA=1
!ENDIF
# These are the "extended" SQLite compilation options used when compiling for
# the Windows 10 platform.
#
!IFNDEF EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS
!IF $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS = $(EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS) -DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4=1
EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS = $(EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS) -DSQLITE_SYSTEM_MALLOC=1
EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS = $(EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS) -DSQLITE_OMIT_LOCALTIME=1
!ELSE
EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS =
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
###############################################################################
############################### END OF OPTIONS ################################
###############################################################################
# When compiling for the Windows 10 platform, the PLATFORM macro must be set
# to an appropriate value (e.g. x86, x64, arm, arm64, etc).
#
!IF $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
!IFNDEF PLATFORM
!ERROR Using the FOR_WIN10 option requires a value for PLATFORM.
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# This assumes that MSVC is always installed in 32-bit Program Files directory
# and sets the variable for use in locating other 32-bit installs accordingly.
#
PROGRAMFILES_X86 = $(VCINSTALLDIR)\..\..
PROGRAMFILES_X86 = $(PROGRAMFILES_X86:\\=\)
# Check for the predefined command macro CC. This should point to the compiler
# binary for the target platform. If it is not defined, simply define it to
# the legacy default value 'cl.exe'.
#
!IFNDEF CC
CC = cl.exe
!ENDIF
# Check for the command macro LD. This should point to the linker binary for
# the target platform. If it is not defined, simply define it to the legacy
# default value 'link.exe'.
#
!IFNDEF LD
LD = link.exe
!ENDIF
# Check for the predefined command macro RC. This should point to the resource
# compiler binary for the target platform. If it is not defined, simply define
# it to the legacy default value 'rc.exe'.
#
!IFNDEF RC
RC = rc.exe
!ENDIF
# Check for the MSVC runtime library path macro. Otherwise, this value will
# default to the 'lib' directory underneath the MSVC installation directory.
#
!IFNDEF CRTLIBPATH
CRTLIBPATH = $(VCINSTALLDIR)\lib
!ENDIF
CRTLIBPATH = $(CRTLIBPATH:\\=\)
# Check for the command macro NCC. This should point to the compiler binary
# for the platform the compilation process is taking place on. If it is not
# defined, simply define it to have the same value as the CC macro. When
# cross-compiling, it is suggested that this macro be modified via the command
# line (since nmake itself does not provide a built-in method to guess it).
# For example, to use the x86 compiler when cross-compiling for x64, a command
# line similar to the following could be used (all on one line):
#
# nmake /f Makefile.msc sqlite3.dll
# XCOMPILE=1 USE_NATIVE_LIBPATHS=1
#
# Alternatively, the full path and file name to the compiler binary for the
# platform the compilation process is taking place may be specified (all on
# one line):
#
# nmake /f Makefile.msc sqlite3.dll
# "NCC=""%VCINSTALLDIR%\bin\cl.exe"""
# USE_NATIVE_LIBPATHS=1
#
!IFDEF NCC
NCC = $(NCC:\\=\)
!ELSEIF $(XCOMPILE)!=0
NCC = "$(VCINSTALLDIR)\bin\$(CC)"
NCC = $(NCC:\\=\)
!ELSE
NCC = $(CC)
!ENDIF
# Check for the MSVC native runtime library path macro. Otherwise,
# this value will default to the 'lib' directory underneath the MSVC
# installation directory.
#
!IFNDEF NCRTLIBPATH
NCRTLIBPATH = $(VCINSTALLDIR)\lib
!ENDIF
NCRTLIBPATH = $(NCRTLIBPATH:\\=\)
# Check for the Platform SDK library path macro. Otherwise, this
# value will default to the 'lib' directory underneath the Windows
# SDK installation directory (the environment variable used appears
# to be available when using Visual C++ 2008 or later via the
# command line).
#
!IFNDEF NSDKLIBPATH
NSDKLIBPATH = $(WINDOWSSDKDIR)\lib
!ENDIF
NSDKLIBPATH = $(NSDKLIBPATH:\\=\)
# Check for the UCRT library path macro. Otherwise, this value will
# default to the version-specific, platform-specific 'lib' directory
# underneath the Windows SDK installation directory.
#
!IFNDEF UCRTLIBPATH
UCRTLIBPATH = $(WINDOWSSDKDIR)\lib\$(WINDOWSSDKLIBVERSION)\ucrt\$(PLATFORM)
!ENDIF
UCRTLIBPATH = $(UCRTLIBPATH:\\=\)
# C compiler and options for use in building executables that
# will run on the platform that is doing the build.
#
!IF $(USE_FULLWARN)!=0
BCC = $(NCC) -nologo -W4 $(CCOPTS) $(BCCOPTS)
!ELSE
BCC = $(NCC) -nologo -W3 $(CCOPTS) $(BCCOPTS)
!ENDIF
# Check if assembly code listings should be generated for the source
# code files to be compiled.
#
!IF $(USE_LISTINGS)!=0
BCC = $(BCC) -FAcs
!ENDIF
# Check if the native library paths should be used when compiling
# the command line tools used during the compilation process. If
# so, set the necessary macro now.
#
!IF $(USE_NATIVE_LIBPATHS)!=0
NLTLIBPATHS = "/LIBPATH:$(NCRTLIBPATH)" "/LIBPATH:$(NSDKLIBPATH)"
!IFDEF NUCRTLIBPATH
NUCRTLIBPATH = $(NUCRTLIBPATH:\\=\)
NLTLIBPATHS = $(NLTLIBPATHS) "/LIBPATH:$(NUCRTLIBPATH)"
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# C compiler and options for use in building executables that
# will run on the target platform. (BCC and TCC are usually the
# same unless your are cross-compiling.)
#
!IF $(USE_FULLWARN)!=0
TCC = $(CC) -nologo -W4 -DINCLUDE_MSVC_H=1 $(CCOPTS) $(TCCOPTS)
!ELSE
TCC = $(CC) -nologo -W3 $(CCOPTS) $(TCCOPTS)
!ENDIF
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_OS_WIN=1 -I. -I$(TOP) -fp:precise
RCC = $(RC) -DSQLITE_OS_WIN=1 -I. -I$(TOP) $(RCOPTS) $(RCCOPTS)
# Check if we want to use the "stdcall" calling convention when compiling.
# This is not supported by the compilers for non-x86 platforms. It should
# also be noted here that building any target with these "stdcall" options
# will most likely fail if the Tcl library is also required. This is due
# to how the Tcl library functions are declared and exported (i.e. without
# an explicit calling convention, which results in "cdecl").
#
!IF $(USE_STDCALL)!=0 || $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
!IF "$(PLATFORM)"=="x86"
CORE_CCONV_OPTS = -Gz -DSQLITE_CDECL=__cdecl -DSQLITE_STDCALL=__stdcall
SHELL_CCONV_OPTS = -Gz -DSQLITE_CDECL=__cdecl -DSQLITE_STDCALL=__stdcall
!ELSE
!IFNDEF PLATFORM
CORE_CCONV_OPTS = -Gz -DSQLITE_CDECL=__cdecl -DSQLITE_STDCALL=__stdcall
SHELL_CCONV_OPTS = -Gz -DSQLITE_CDECL=__cdecl -DSQLITE_STDCALL=__stdcall
!ELSE
CORE_CCONV_OPTS =
SHELL_CCONV_OPTS =
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
!ELSE
CORE_CCONV_OPTS =
SHELL_CCONV_OPTS =
!ENDIF
# These are additional compiler options used for the core library.
#
!IFNDEF CORE_COMPILE_OPTS
!IF $(DYNAMIC_SHELL)!=0 || $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
CORE_COMPILE_OPTS = $(CORE_CCONV_OPTS) -DSQLITE_API=__declspec(dllexport)
!ELSE
CORE_COMPILE_OPTS = $(CORE_CCONV_OPTS)
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# These are the additional targets that the core library should depend on
# when linking.
#
!IFNDEF CORE_LINK_DEP
!IF $(DYNAMIC_SHELL)!=0
CORE_LINK_DEP =
!ELSEIF $(FOR_WIN10)==0 || "$(PLATFORM)"=="x86"
CORE_LINK_DEP =
!ELSE
CORE_LINK_DEP =
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# These are additional linker options used for the core library.
#
!IFNDEF CORE_LINK_OPTS
!IF $(DYNAMIC_SHELL)!=0
CORE_LINK_OPTS =
!ELSEIF $(FOR_WIN10)==0 || "$(PLATFORM)"=="x86"
CORE_LINK_OPTS =
!ELSE
CORE_LINK_OPTS =
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# These are additional compiler options used for the shell executable.
#
!IFNDEF SHELL_COMPILE_OPTS
!IF $(DYNAMIC_SHELL)!=0 || $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
SHELL_COMPILE_OPTS = $(SHELL_CCONV_OPTS) -DSQLITE_API=__declspec(dllimport)
!ELSE
SHELL_COMPILE_OPTS = $(SHELL_CCONV_OPTS)
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# This is the source code that the shell executable should be compiled
# with.
#
!IFNDEF SHELL_CORE_SRC
!IF $(DYNAMIC_SHELL)!=0 || $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
SHELL_CORE_SRC =
!ELSE
SHELL_CORE_SRC = $(SQLITE3C)
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# This is the core library that the shell executable should depend on.
#
!IFNDEF SHELL_CORE_DEP
!IF $(DYNAMIC_SHELL)!=0 || $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
SHELL_CORE_DEP = $(SQLITE3DLL)
!ELSE
SHELL_CORE_DEP =
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# This is the core library that the shell executable should link with.
#
!IFNDEF SHELL_CORE_LIB
!IF $(DYNAMIC_SHELL)!=0 || $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
SHELL_CORE_LIB = $(SQLITE3LIB)
!ELSE
SHELL_CORE_LIB =
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# These are additional linker options used for the shell executable.
#
!IFNDEF SHELL_LINK_OPTS
SHELL_LINK_OPTS = $(SHELL_CORE_LIB)
!ENDIF
# Check if assembly code listings should be generated for the source
# code files to be compiled.
#
!IF $(USE_LISTINGS)!=0
TCC = $(TCC) -FAcs
!ENDIF
# When compiling the library for use in the WinRT environment,
# the following compile-time options must be used as well to
# disable use of Win32 APIs that are not available and to enable
# use of Win32 APIs that are specific to Windows 8 and/or WinRT.
#
!IF $(FOR_WINRT)!=0
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_OS_WINRT=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_OS_WINRT=1
TCC = $(TCC) -DWINAPI_FAMILY=WINAPI_FAMILY_APP
RCC = $(RCC) -DWINAPI_FAMILY=WINAPI_FAMILY_APP
!ENDIF
# C compiler options for the Windows 10 platform (needs MSVC 2015).
#
!IF $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
TCC = $(TCC) /d2guard4 -D_ARM_WINAPI_PARTITION_DESKTOP_SDK_AVAILABLE
BCC = $(BCC) /d2guard4 -D_ARM_WINAPI_PARTITION_DESKTOP_SDK_AVAILABLE
!ENDIF
# Also, we need to dynamically link to the correct MSVC runtime
# when compiling for WinRT (e.g. debug or release) OR if the
# USE_CRT_DLL option is set to force dynamically linking to the
# MSVC runtime library.
#
!IF $(FOR_WINRT)!=0 || $(USE_CRT_DLL)!=0
!IF $(DEBUG)>1
TCC = $(TCC) -MDd
BCC = $(BCC) -MDd
!ELSE
TCC = $(TCC) -MD
BCC = $(BCC) -MD
!ENDIF
!ELSE
!IF $(DEBUG)>1
TCC = $(TCC) -MTd
BCC = $(BCC) -MTd
!ELSE
TCC = $(TCC) -MT
BCC = $(BCC) -MT
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# Define -DNDEBUG to compile without debugging (i.e., for production usage)
# Omitting the define will cause extra debugging code to be inserted and
# includes extra comments when "EXPLAIN stmt" is used.
#
!IF $(DEBUG)==0
TCC = $(TCC) -DNDEBUG
BCC = $(BCC) -DNDEBUG
RCC = $(RCC) -DNDEBUG
!ENDIF
!IF $(DEBUG)>0 || $(API_ARMOR)!=0 || $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR=1
!ENDIF
!IF $(DEBUG)>2
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_DEBUG=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_DEBUG=1
!ENDIF
!IF $(DEBUG)>4 || $(OSTRACE)!=0
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_FORCE_OS_TRACE=1 -DSQLITE_DEBUG_OS_TRACE=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_FORCE_OS_TRACE=1 -DSQLITE_DEBUG_OS_TRACE=1
!ENDIF
!IF $(DEBUG)>5
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_ENABLE_IOTRACE=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_ENABLE_IOTRACE=1
!ENDIF
# Prevent warnings about "insecure" MSVC runtime library functions
# being used.
#
TCC = $(TCC) -D_CRT_SECURE_NO_DEPRECATE -D_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
BCC = $(BCC) -D_CRT_SECURE_NO_DEPRECATE -D_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
RCC = $(RCC) -D_CRT_SECURE_NO_DEPRECATE -D_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
# Prevent warnings about "deprecated" POSIX functions being used.
#
TCC = $(TCC) -D_CRT_NONSTDC_NO_DEPRECATE -D_CRT_NONSTDC_NO_WARNINGS
BCC = $(BCC) -D_CRT_NONSTDC_NO_DEPRECATE -D_CRT_NONSTDC_NO_WARNINGS
RCC = $(RCC) -D_CRT_NONSTDC_NO_DEPRECATE -D_CRT_NONSTDC_NO_WARNINGS
# Use the SQLite debugging heap subsystem?
#
!IF $(MEMDEBUG)!=0
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_MEMDEBUG=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_MEMDEBUG=1
# Use native Win32 heap subsystem instead of malloc/free?
#
!ELSEIF $(WIN32HEAP)!=0
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_WIN32_MALLOC=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_WIN32_MALLOC=1
# Validate the heap on every call into the native Win32 heap subsystem?
#
!IF $(DEBUG)>3
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_WIN32_MALLOC_VALIDATE=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_WIN32_MALLOC_VALIDATE=1
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# Compiler options needed for programs that use the readline() library.
#
!IFNDEF READLINE_FLAGS
READLINE_FLAGS = -DHAVE_READLINE=0
!ENDIF
# The library that programs using readline() must link against.
#
!IFNDEF LIBREADLINE
LIBREADLINE =
!ENDIF
# Should the database engine be compiled threadsafe
#
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_THREADSAFE=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_THREADSAFE=1
# Do threads override each others locks by default (1), or do we test (-1)
#
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_THREAD_OVERRIDE_LOCK=-1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_THREAD_OVERRIDE_LOCK=-1
# Any target libraries which libsqlite must be linked against
#
!IFNDEF TLIBS
TLIBS =
!ENDIF
# Flags controlling use of the in memory btree implementation
#
# SQLITE_TEMP_STORE is 0 to force temporary tables to be in a file, 1 to
# default to file, 2 to default to memory, and 3 to force temporary
# tables to always be in memory.
#
TCC = $(TCC) -DSQLITE_TEMP_STORE=1
RCC = $(RCC) -DSQLITE_TEMP_STORE=1
# Enable/disable loadable extensions, and other optional features
# based on configuration. (-DSQLITE_OMIT*, -DSQLITE_ENABLE*).
# The same set of OMIT and ENABLE flags should be passed to the
# LEMON parser generator and the mkkeywordhash tool as well.
# These are the required SQLite compilation options used when compiling for
# the Windows platform.
#
REQ_FEATURE_FLAGS = $(REQ_FEATURE_FLAGS) -DSQLITE_MAX_TRIGGER_DEPTH=100
# If we are linking to the RPCRT4 library, enable features that need it.
#
!IF $(USE_RPCRT4_LIB)!=0
REQ_FEATURE_FLAGS = $(REQ_FEATURE_FLAGS) -DSQLITE_WIN32_USE_UUID=1
!ENDIF
# Add the required and optional SQLite compilation options into the command
# lines used to invoke the MSVC code and resource compilers.
#
TCC = $(TCC) $(REQ_FEATURE_FLAGS) $(OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS) $(EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS)
RCC = $(RCC) $(REQ_FEATURE_FLAGS) $(OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS) $(EXT_FEATURE_FLAGS)
# Add in any optional parameters specified on the commane line, e.g.
# nmake /f Makefile.msc all "OPTS=-DSQLITE_ENABLE_FOO=1 -DSQLITE_OMIT_FOO=1"
#
TCC = $(TCC) $(OPTS)
RCC = $(RCC) $(OPTS)
# If compiling for debugging, add some defines.
#
!IF $(DEBUG)>1
TCC = $(TCC) -D_DEBUG
BCC = $(BCC) -D_DEBUG
RCC = $(RCC) -D_DEBUG
!ENDIF
# If optimizations are enabled or disabled (either implicitly or
# explicitly), add the necessary flags.
#
!IF $(DEBUG)>1 || $(OPTIMIZATIONS)==0
TCC = $(TCC) -Od
BCC = $(BCC) -Od
!ELSEIF $(OPTIMIZATIONS)>=3
TCC = $(TCC) -Ox
BCC = $(BCC) -Ox
!ELSEIF $(OPTIMIZATIONS)==2
TCC = $(TCC) -O2
BCC = $(BCC) -O2
!ELSEIF $(OPTIMIZATIONS)==1
TCC = $(TCC) -O1
BCC = $(BCC) -O1
!ENDIF
# If symbols are enabled (or compiling for debugging), enable PDBs.
#
!IF $(DEBUG)>1 || $(SYMBOLS)!=0
TCC = $(TCC) -Zi
BCC = $(BCC) -Zi
!ENDIF
# Command line prefixes for compiling code, compiling resources,
# linking, etc.
#
LTCOMPILE = $(TCC) -Fo$@
LTRCOMPILE = $(RCC) -r
LTLIB = lib.exe
LTLINK = $(TCC) -Fe$@
# If requested, link to the RPCRT4 library.
#
!IF $(USE_RPCRT4_LIB)!=0
LTLINK = $(LTLINK) rpcrt4.lib
!ENDIF
# If a platform was set, force the linker to target that.
# Note that the vcvars*.bat family of batch files typically
# set this for you. Otherwise, the linker will attempt
# to deduce the binary type based on the object files.
!IFDEF PLATFORM
LTLINKOPTS = /NOLOGO /MACHINE:$(PLATFORM)
LTLIBOPTS = /NOLOGO /MACHINE:$(PLATFORM)
!ELSE
LTLINKOPTS = /NOLOGO
LTLIBOPTS = /NOLOGO
!ENDIF
# When compiling for use in the WinRT environment, the following
# linker option must be used to mark the executable as runnable
# only in the context of an application container.
#
!IF $(FOR_WINRT)!=0
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) /APPCONTAINER
!IF "$(VISUALSTUDIOVERSION)"=="12.0" || "$(VISUALSTUDIOVERSION)"=="14.0"
!IFNDEF STORELIBPATH
!IF "$(PLATFORM)"=="x86"
STORELIBPATH = $(CRTLIBPATH)\store
!ELSEIF "$(PLATFORM)"=="x64"
STORELIBPATH = $(CRTLIBPATH)\store\amd64
!ELSEIF "$(PLATFORM)"=="ARM"
STORELIBPATH = $(CRTLIBPATH)\store\arm
!ELSE
STORELIBPATH = $(CRTLIBPATH)\store
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
STORELIBPATH = $(STORELIBPATH:\\=\)
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) "/LIBPATH:$(STORELIBPATH)"
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# When compiling for Windows Phone 8.1, an extra library path is
# required.
#
!IF $(USE_WP81_OPTS)!=0
!IFNDEF WP81LIBPATH
!IF "$(PLATFORM)"=="x86"
WP81LIBPATH = $(PROGRAMFILES_X86)\Windows Phone Kits\8.1\lib\x86
!ELSEIF "$(PLATFORM)"=="ARM"
WP81LIBPATH = $(PROGRAMFILES_X86)\Windows Phone Kits\8.1\lib\ARM
!ELSE
WP81LIBPATH = $(PROGRAMFILES_X86)\Windows Phone Kits\8.1\lib\x86
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# When compiling for Windows Phone 8.1, some extra linker options
# are also required.
#
!IF $(USE_WP81_OPTS)!=0
!IFDEF WP81LIBPATH
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) "/LIBPATH:$(WP81LIBPATH)"
!ENDIF
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) /DYNAMICBASE
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) WindowsPhoneCore.lib RuntimeObject.lib PhoneAppModelHost.lib
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) /NODEFAULTLIB:kernel32.lib /NODEFAULTLIB:ole32.lib
!ENDIF
# When compiling for UWP or the Windows 10 platform, some extra linker
# options are also required.
#
!IF $(FOR_UWP)!=0 || $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) /DYNAMICBASE /NODEFAULTLIB:kernel32.lib
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) mincore.lib
!IFDEF PSDKLIBPATH
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) "/LIBPATH:$(PSDKLIBPATH)"
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
!IF $(FOR_WIN10)!=0
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) /guard:cf "/LIBPATH:$(UCRTLIBPATH)"
!IF $(DEBUG)>1
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) /NODEFAULTLIB:libucrtd.lib /DEFAULTLIB:ucrtd.lib
!ELSE
LTLINKOPTS = $(LTLINKOPTS) /NODEFAULTLIB:libucrt.lib /DEFAULTLIB:ucrt.lib
!ENDIF
!ENDIF
# If either debugging or symbols are enabled, enable PDBs.
#
!IF $(DEBUG)>1 || $(SYMBOLS)!=0
LDFLAGS = /DEBUG $(LDOPTS)
!ELSE
LDFLAGS = $(LDOPTS)
!ENDIF
# You should not have to change anything below this line
###############################################################################
# Object files for the amalgamation.
#
LIBOBJS1 = sqlite3.lo
# Determine the real value of LIBOBJ based on the 'configure' script
#
LIBOBJ = $(LIBOBJS1)
# Determine if embedded resource compilation and usage are enabled.
#
!IF $(USE_RC)!=0
LIBRESOBJS = sqlite3res.lo
!ELSE
LIBRESOBJS =
!ENDIF
# Additional compiler options for the shell. These are only effective
# when the shell is not being dynamically linked.
#
!IF $(DYNAMIC_SHELL)==0 && $(FOR_WIN10)==0
SHELL_COMPILE_OPTS = $(SHELL_COMPILE_OPTS) -DSQLITE_SHELL_JSON1 -DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4 -DSQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS
!ENDIF
# This is the default Makefile target. The objects listed here
# are what get build when you type just "make" with no arguments.
#
all: dll shell
# Dynamic link library section.
#
dll: $(SQLITE3DLL)
# Shell executable.
#
shell: $(SQLITE3EXE)
$(SQLITE3DLL): $(LIBOBJ) $(LIBRESOBJS) $(CORE_LINK_DEP)
$(LD) $(LDFLAGS) $(LTLINKOPTS) $(LTLIBPATHS) /DLL $(CORE_LINK_OPTS) /OUT:$@ $(LIBOBJ) $(LIBRESOBJS) $(LTLIBS) $(TLIBS)
$(SQLITE3EXE): $(TOP)\shell.c $(SHELL_CORE_DEP) $(LIBRESOBJS) $(SHELL_CORE_SRC) $(SQLITE3H)
$(LTLINK) $(SHELL_COMPILE_OPTS) $(READLINE_FLAGS) $(TOP)\shell.c $(SHELL_CORE_SRC) \
/link $(SQLITE3EXEPDB) $(LDFLAGS) $(LTLINKOPTS) $(SHELL_LINK_OPTS) $(LTLIBPATHS) $(LIBRESOBJS) $(LIBREADLINE) $(LTLIBS) $(TLIBS)
# Rule to build the amalgamation
#
sqlite3.lo: $(SQLITE3C)
$(LTCOMPILE) $(CORE_COMPILE_OPTS) -c $(SQLITE3C)
# Rule to build the Win32 resources object file.
#
!IF $(USE_RC)!=0
_HASHCHAR=^#
!IF ![echo !IFNDEF VERSION > rcver.vc] && \
![for /F "delims=" %V in ('type "$(SQLITE3H)" ^| find "$(_HASHCHAR)define SQLITE_VERSION "') do (echo VERSION = ^^%V >> rcver.vc)] && \
![echo !ENDIF >> rcver.vc]
!INCLUDE rcver.vc
!ENDIF
RESOURCE_VERSION = $(VERSION:^#=)
RESOURCE_VERSION = $(RESOURCE_VERSION:define=)
RESOURCE_VERSION = $(RESOURCE_VERSION:SQLITE_VERSION=)
RESOURCE_VERSION = $(RESOURCE_VERSION:"=)
RESOURCE_VERSION = $(RESOURCE_VERSION:.=,)
$(LIBRESOBJS): $(TOP)\sqlite3.rc rcver.vc $(SQLITE3H)
echo #ifndef SQLITE_RESOURCE_VERSION > sqlite3rc.h
echo #define SQLITE_RESOURCE_VERSION $(RESOURCE_VERSION) >> sqlite3rc.h
echo #endif >> sqlite3rc.h
$(LTRCOMPILE) -fo $(LIBRESOBJS) -DRC_VERONLY $(TOP)\sqlite3.rc
!ENDIF
clean:
del /Q *.exp *.lo *.ilk *.lib *.obj *.ncb *.pdb *.sdf *.suo 2>NUL
del /Q *.bsc *.def *.cod *.da *.bb *.bbg *.vc gmon.out 2>NUL
del /Q $(SQLITE3EXE) $(SQLITE3DLL) 2>NUL

11
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/README.first
View File

@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
This directory contains components use to build an autoconf-ready package
of the SQLite amalgamation: sqlite-autoconf-30XXXXXX.tar.gz
To build the autoconf amalgamation, run from the top-level:
./configure
make amalgamation-tarball
The amalgamation-tarball target (also available in "main.mk") runs the
script tool/mkautoconfamal.sh which does the work. Refer to that script
for details.

113
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/README.txt
View File

@ -1,113 +0,0 @@
This package contains:
* the SQLite library amalgamation source code file: sqlite3.c
* the sqlite3.h and sqlite3ext.h header files that define the C-language
interface to the sqlite3.c library file
* the shell.c file used to build the sqlite3 command-line shell program
* autoconf/automake installation infrastucture for building on POSIX
compliant systems
* a Makefile.msc and sqlite3.rc for building with Microsoft Visual C++ on
Windows
SUMMARY OF HOW TO BUILD
=======================
Unix: ./configure; make
Windows: nmake /f Makefile.msc
BUILDING ON POSIX
=================
The generic installation instructions for autoconf/automake are found
in the INSTALL file.
The following SQLite specific boolean options are supported:
--enable-readline use readline in shell tool [default=yes]
--enable-threadsafe build a thread-safe library [default=yes]
--enable-dynamic-extensions support loadable extensions [default=yes]
The default value for the CFLAGS variable (options passed to the C
compiler) includes debugging symbols in the build, resulting in larger
binaries than are necessary. Override it on the configure command
line like this:
$ CFLAGS="-Os" ./configure
to produce a smaller installation footprint.
Other SQLite compilation parameters can also be set using CFLAGS. For
example:
$ CFLAGS="-Os -DSQLITE_THREADSAFE=0" ./configure
BUILDING WITH MICROSOFT VISUAL C++
==================================
To compile for Windows using Microsoft Visual C++:
$ nmake /f Makefile.msc
Using Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 (or later) is recommended. Several Windows
platform variants may be built by adding additional macros to the NMAKE
command line.
Building for WinRT 8.0
----------------------
FOR_WINRT=1
Using Microsoft Visual C++ 2012 (or later) is required. When using the
above, something like the following macro will need to be added to the
NMAKE command line as well:
"NSDKLIBPATH=%WindowsSdkDir%\..\8.0\lib\win8\um\x86"
Building for WinRT 8.1
----------------------
FOR_WINRT=1
Using Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 (or later) is required. When using the
above, something like the following macro will need to be added to the
NMAKE command line as well:
"NSDKLIBPATH=%WindowsSdkDir%\..\8.1\lib\winv6.3\um\x86"
Building for UWP 10.0
---------------------
FOR_WINRT=1 FOR_UWP=1
Using Microsoft Visual C++ 2015 (or later) is required. When using the
above, something like the following macros will need to be added to the
NMAKE command line as well:
"NSDKLIBPATH=%WindowsSdkDir%\..\10\lib\10.0.10586.0\um\x86"
"PSDKLIBPATH=%WindowsSdkDir%\..\10\lib\10.0.10586.0\um\x86"
"NUCRTLIBPATH=%UniversalCRTSdkDir%\..\10\lib\10.0.10586.0\ucrt\x86"
Building for the Windows 10 SDK
-------------------------------
FOR_WIN10=1
Using Microsoft Visual C++ 2015 (or later) is required. When using the
above, no other macros should be needed on the NMAKE command line.
Other preprocessor defines
--------------------------
Additionally, preprocessor defines may be specified by using the OPTS macro
on the NMAKE command line. However, not all possible preprocessor defines
may be specified in this manner as some require the amalgamation to be built
with them enabled (see http://www.sqlite.org/compile.html). For example, the
following will work:
"OPTS=-DSQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4=1 -DSQLITE_ENABLE_JSON1=1"
However, the following will not compile unless the amalgamation was built
with it enabled:
"OPTS=-DSQLITE_ENABLE_UPDATE_DELETE_LIMIT=1"

167
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/configure.ac
View File

@ -1,167 +0,0 @@
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Supports the following non-standard switches.
#
# --enable-threadsafe
# --enable-readline
# --enable-editline
# --enable-static-shell
# --enable-dynamic-extensions
#
AC_PREREQ(2.61)
AC_INIT(sqlite, --SQLITE-VERSION--, http://www.sqlite.org)
AC_CONFIG_SRCDIR([sqlite3.c])
# Use automake.
AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE([foreign])
AC_SYS_LARGEFILE
# Check for required programs.
AC_PROG_CC
AC_PROG_LIBTOOL
AC_PROG_MKDIR_P
# Check for library functions that SQLite can optionally use.
AC_CHECK_FUNCS([fdatasync usleep fullfsync localtime_r gmtime_r])
AC_FUNC_STRERROR_R
AC_CONFIG_FILES([Makefile sqlite3.pc])
AC_SUBST(BUILD_CFLAGS)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# --enable-editline
# --enable-readline
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(editline, [AS_HELP_STRING(
[--enable-editline],
[use BSD libedit])],
[], [enable_editline=yes])
AC_ARG_ENABLE(readline, [AS_HELP_STRING(
[--enable-readline],
[use readline])],
[], [enable_readline=no])
if test x"$enable_editline" != xno ; then
sLIBS=$LIBS
LIBS=""
AC_SEARCH_LIBS([readline],[edit],[enable_readline=no],[enable_editline=no])
READLINE_LIBS=$LIBS
if test x"$LIBS" != "x"; then
AC_DEFINE([HAVE_EDITLINE],1,Define to use BSD editline)
else
unset ac_cv_search_readline
fi
LIBS=$sLIBS
fi
if test x"$enable_readline" != xno ; then
sLIBS=$LIBS
LIBS=""
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(tgetent, curses ncurses ncursesw, [], [])
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(readline, readline, [], [enable_readline=no])
AC_CHECK_FUNCS(readline, [], [])
READLINE_LIBS=$LIBS
LIBS=$sLIBS
fi
AC_SUBST(READLINE_LIBS)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# --enable-threadsafe
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(threadsafe, [AS_HELP_STRING(
[--enable-threadsafe], [build a thread-safe library [default=yes]])],
[], [enable_threadsafe=yes])
THREADSAFE_FLAGS=-DSQLITE_THREADSAFE=0
if test x"$enable_threadsafe" != "xno"; then
THREADSAFE_FLAGS="-D_REENTRANT=1 -DSQLITE_THREADSAFE=1"
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(pthread_create, pthread)
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(pthread_mutexattr_init, pthread)
fi
AC_SUBST(THREADSAFE_FLAGS)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# --enable-dynamic-extensions
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(dynamic-extensions, [AS_HELP_STRING(
[--enable-dynamic-extensions], [support loadable extensions [default=yes]])],
[], [enable_dynamic_extensions=yes])
if test x"$enable_dynamic_extensions" != "xno"; then
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(dlopen, dl)
else
DYNAMIC_EXTENSION_FLAGS=-DSQLITE_OMIT_LOAD_EXTENSION=1
fi
AC_MSG_CHECKING([for whether to support dynamic extensions])
AC_MSG_RESULT($enable_dynamic_extensions)
AC_SUBST(DYNAMIC_EXTENSION_FLAGS)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# --enable-fts5
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(fts5, [AS_HELP_STRING(
[--enable-fts5], [include fts5 support [default=no]])],
[], [enable_fts5=no])
if test x"$enable_fts5" == "xyes"; then
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(log, m)
FTS5_FLAGS=-DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS5
fi
AC_SUBST(FTS5_FLAGS)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# --enable-json1
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(json1, [AS_HELP_STRING(
[--enable-json1], [include json1 support [default=no]])],
[], [enable_json1=no])
if test x"$enable_json1" == "xyes"; then
JSON1_FLAGS=-DSQLITE_ENABLE_JSON1
fi
AC_SUBST(JSON1_FLAGS)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# --enable-static-shell
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(static-shell, [AS_HELP_STRING(
[--enable-static-shell],
[statically link libsqlite3 into shell tool [default=yes]])],
[], [enable_static_shell=yes])
if test x"$enable_static_shell" == "xyes"; then
EXTRA_SHELL_OBJ=sqlite3.$OBJEXT
else
EXTRA_SHELL_OBJ=libsqlite3.la
fi
AC_SUBST(EXTRA_SHELL_OBJ)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
AC_CHECK_FUNCS(posix_fallocate)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# UPDATE: Maybe it's better if users just set CFLAGS before invoking
# configure. This option doesn't really add much...
#
# --enable-tempstore
#
# AC_ARG_ENABLE(tempstore, [AS_HELP_STRING(
# [--enable-tempstore],
# [in-memory temporary tables (never, no, yes, always) [default=no]])],
# [], [enable_tempstore=no])
# AC_MSG_CHECKING([for whether or not to store temp tables in-memory])
# case "$enable_tempstore" in
# never ) TEMP_STORE=0 ;;
# no ) TEMP_STORE=1 ;;
# always ) TEMP_STORE=3 ;;
# yes ) TEMP_STORE=3 ;;
# * )
# TEMP_STORE=1
# enable_tempstore=yes
# ;;
# esac
# AC_MSG_RESULT($enable_tempstore)
# AC_SUBST(TEMP_STORE)
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
AC_OUTPUT

440
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/Makefile.in
View File

@ -1,440 +0,0 @@
# Makefile.in --
#
# This file is a Makefile for Sample TEA Extension. If it has the name
# "Makefile.in" then it is a template for a Makefile; to generate the
# actual Makefile, run "./configure", which is a configuration script
# generated by the "autoconf" program (constructs like "@foo@" will get
# replaced in the actual Makefile.
#
# Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation.
# Copyright (c) 2002-2005 ActiveState Corporation.
#
# See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
# of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
#
# RCS: @(#) $Id: Makefile.in,v 1.59 2005/07/26 19:17:02 mdejong Exp $
#========================================================================
# Add additional lines to handle any additional AC_SUBST cases that
# have been added in a customized configure script.
#========================================================================
#SAMPLE_NEW_VAR = @SAMPLE_NEW_VAR@
#========================================================================
# Nothing of the variables below this line should need to be changed.
# Please check the TARGETS section below to make sure the make targets
# are correct.
#========================================================================
#========================================================================
# The names of the source files is defined in the configure script.
# The object files are used for linking into the final library.
# This will be used when a dist target is added to the Makefile.
# It is not important to specify the directory, as long as it is the
# $(srcdir) or in the generic, win or unix subdirectory.
#========================================================================
PKG_SOURCES = @PKG_SOURCES@
PKG_OBJECTS = @PKG_OBJECTS@
PKG_STUB_SOURCES = @PKG_STUB_SOURCES@
PKG_STUB_OBJECTS = @PKG_STUB_OBJECTS@
#========================================================================
# PKG_TCL_SOURCES identifies Tcl runtime files that are associated with
# this package that need to be installed, if any.
#========================================================================
PKG_TCL_SOURCES = @PKG_TCL_SOURCES@
#========================================================================
# This is a list of public header files to be installed, if any.
#========================================================================
PKG_HEADERS = @PKG_HEADERS@
#========================================================================
# "PKG_LIB_FILE" refers to the library (dynamic or static as per
# configuration options) composed of the named objects.
#========================================================================
PKG_LIB_FILE = @PKG_LIB_FILE@
PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE = @PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE@
lib_BINARIES = $(PKG_LIB_FILE)
BINARIES = $(lib_BINARIES)
SHELL = @SHELL@
srcdir = @srcdir@
prefix = @prefix@
exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
bindir = @bindir@
libdir = @libdir@
datarootdir = @datarootdir@
datadir = @datadir@
mandir = @mandir@
includedir = @includedir@
DESTDIR =
PKG_DIR = $(PACKAGE_NAME)$(PACKAGE_VERSION)
pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/$(PKG_DIR)
pkglibdir = $(libdir)/$(PKG_DIR)
pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/$(PKG_DIR)
top_builddir = .
INSTALL = @INSTALL@
INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@
INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@
PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@
PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
CC = @CC@
CFLAGS_DEFAULT = @CFLAGS_DEFAULT@
CFLAGS_WARNING = @CFLAGS_WARNING@
CLEANFILES = @CLEANFILES@
EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@
LDFLAGS_DEFAULT = @LDFLAGS_DEFAULT@
MAKE_LIB = @MAKE_LIB@
MAKE_SHARED_LIB = @MAKE_SHARED_LIB@
MAKE_STATIC_LIB = @MAKE_STATIC_LIB@
MAKE_STUB_LIB = @MAKE_STUB_LIB@
OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@
RANLIB = @RANLIB@
RANLIB_STUB = @RANLIB_STUB@
SHLIB_CFLAGS = @SHLIB_CFLAGS@
SHLIB_LD = @SHLIB_LD@
SHLIB_LD_LIBS = @SHLIB_LD_LIBS@
STLIB_LD = @STLIB_LD@
#TCL_DEFS = @TCL_DEFS@
TCL_BIN_DIR = @TCL_BIN_DIR@
TCL_SRC_DIR = @TCL_SRC_DIR@
#TK_BIN_DIR = @TK_BIN_DIR@
#TK_SRC_DIR = @TK_SRC_DIR@
# This is no longer necessary even for packages that use private Tcl headers
#TCL_TOP_DIR_NATIVE = @TCL_TOP_DIR_NATIVE@
# Not used, but retained for reference of what libs Tcl required
#TCL_LIBS = @TCL_LIBS@
#========================================================================
# TCLLIBPATH seeds the auto_path in Tcl's init.tcl so we can test our
# package without installing. The other environment variables allow us
# to test against an uninstalled Tcl. Add special env vars that you
# require for testing here (like TCLX_LIBRARY).
#========================================================================
EXTRA_PATH = $(top_builddir):$(TCL_BIN_DIR)
#EXTRA_PATH = $(top_builddir):$(TCL_BIN_DIR):$(TK_BIN_DIR)
TCLLIBPATH = $(top_builddir)
TCLSH_ENV = TCL_LIBRARY=`@CYGPATH@ $(TCL_SRC_DIR)/library` \
@LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR@="$(EXTRA_PATH):$(@LD_LIBRARY_PATH_VAR@)" \
PATH="$(EXTRA_PATH):$(PATH)" \
TCLLIBPATH="$(TCLLIBPATH)"
# TK_LIBRARY=`@CYGPATH@ $(TK_SRC_DIR)/library`
TCLSH_PROG = @TCLSH_PROG@
TCLSH = $(TCLSH_ENV) $(TCLSH_PROG)
#WISH_PROG = @WISH_PROG@
#WISH = $(TCLSH_ENV) $(WISH_PROG)
SHARED_BUILD = @SHARED_BUILD@
INCLUDES = @PKG_INCLUDES@ @TCL_INCLUDES@ -I$(srcdir)/..
#INCLUDES = @PKG_INCLUDES@ @TCL_INCLUDES@ @TK_INCLUDES@ @TK_XINCLUDES@
PKG_CFLAGS = @PKG_CFLAGS@
# TCL_DEFS is not strictly need here, but if you remove it, then you
# must make sure that configure.in checks for the necessary components
# that your library may use. TCL_DEFS can actually be a problem if
# you do not compile with a similar machine setup as the Tcl core was
# compiled with.
#DEFS = $(TCL_DEFS) @DEFS@ $(PKG_CFLAGS)
DEFS = @DEFS@ $(PKG_CFLAGS)
CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = Makefile pkgIndex.tcl
CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@
LIBS = @PKG_LIBS@ @LIBS@
AR = @AR@
CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@
COMPILE = $(CC) $(DEFS) $(INCLUDES) $(AM_CPPFLAGS) $(CPPFLAGS) $(AM_CFLAGS) $(CFLAGS)
#========================================================================
# Start of user-definable TARGETS section
#========================================================================
#========================================================================
# TEA TARGETS. Please note that the "libraries:" target refers to platform
# independent files, and the "binaries:" target inclues executable programs and
# platform-dependent libraries. Modify these targets so that they install
# the various pieces of your package. The make and install rules
# for the BINARIES that you specified above have already been done.
#========================================================================
all: binaries libraries doc
#========================================================================
# The binaries target builds executable programs, Windows .dll's, unix
# shared/static libraries, and any other platform-dependent files.
# The list of targets to build for "binaries:" is specified at the top
# of the Makefile, in the "BINARIES" variable.
#========================================================================
binaries: $(BINARIES)
libraries:
#========================================================================
# Your doc target should differentiate from doc builds (by the developer)
# and doc installs (see install-doc), which just install the docs on the
# end user machine when building from source.
#========================================================================
doc:
@echo "If you have documentation to create, place the commands to"
@echo "build the docs in the 'doc:' target. For example:"
@echo " xml2nroff sample.xml > sample.n"
@echo " xml2html sample.xml > sample.html"
install: all install-binaries install-libraries install-doc
install-binaries: binaries install-lib-binaries install-bin-binaries
#========================================================================
# This rule installs platform-independent files, such as header files.
# The list=...; for p in $$list handles the empty list case x-platform.
#========================================================================
install-libraries: libraries
@mkdir -p $(DESTDIR)$(includedir)
@echo "Installing header files in $(DESTDIR)$(includedir)"
@list='$(PKG_HEADERS)'; for i in $$list; do \
echo "Installing $(srcdir)/$$i" ; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/$$i $(DESTDIR)$(includedir) ; \
done;
#========================================================================
# Install documentation. Unix manpages should go in the $(mandir)
# directory.
#========================================================================
install-doc: doc
@mkdir -p $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)/mann
@echo "Installing documentation in $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)"
@list='$(srcdir)/doc/*.n'; for i in $$list; do \
echo "Installing $$i"; \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)/mann/`basename $$i`; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$i $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)/mann ; \
done
test: binaries libraries
@echo "SQLite TEA distribution does not include tests"
shell: binaries libraries
@$(TCLSH) $(SCRIPT)
gdb:
$(TCLSH_ENV) gdb $(TCLSH_PROG) $(SCRIPT)
depend:
#========================================================================
# $(PKG_LIB_FILE) should be listed as part of the BINARIES variable
# mentioned above. That will ensure that this target is built when you
# run "make binaries".
#
# The $(PKG_OBJECTS) objects are created and linked into the final
# library. In most cases these object files will correspond to the
# source files above.
#========================================================================
$(PKG_LIB_FILE): $(PKG_OBJECTS)
-rm -f $(PKG_LIB_FILE)
${MAKE_LIB}
$(RANLIB) $(PKG_LIB_FILE)
$(PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE): $(PKG_STUB_OBJECTS)
-rm -f $(PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE)
${MAKE_STUB_LIB}
$(RANLIB_STUB) $(PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE)
#========================================================================
# We need to enumerate the list of .c to .o lines here.
#
# In the following lines, $(srcdir) refers to the toplevel directory
# containing your extension. If your sources are in a subdirectory,
# you will have to modify the paths to reflect this:
#
# sample.$(OBJEXT): $(srcdir)/generic/sample.c
# $(COMPILE) -c `@CYGPATH@ $(srcdir)/generic/sample.c` -o $@
#
# Setting the VPATH variable to a list of paths will cause the makefile
# to look into these paths when resolving .c to .obj dependencies.
# As necessary, add $(srcdir):$(srcdir)/compat:....
#========================================================================
VPATH = $(srcdir):$(srcdir)/generic:$(srcdir)/unix:$(srcdir)/win
.c.@OBJEXT@:
$(COMPILE) -c `@CYGPATH@ $<` -o $@
#========================================================================
# Distribution creation
# You may need to tweak this target to make it work correctly.
#========================================================================
#COMPRESS = tar cvf $(PKG_DIR).tar $(PKG_DIR); compress $(PKG_DIR).tar
COMPRESS = gtar zcvf $(PKG_DIR).tar.gz $(PKG_DIR)
DIST_ROOT = /tmp/dist
DIST_DIR = $(DIST_ROOT)/$(PKG_DIR)
dist-clean:
rm -rf $(DIST_DIR) $(DIST_ROOT)/$(PKG_DIR).tar.*
dist: dist-clean
mkdir -p $(DIST_DIR)
cp -p $(srcdir)/README* $(srcdir)/license* \
$(srcdir)/aclocal.m4 $(srcdir)/configure $(srcdir)/*.in \
$(DIST_DIR)/
chmod 664 $(DIST_DIR)/Makefile.in $(DIST_DIR)/aclocal.m4
chmod 775 $(DIST_DIR)/configure $(DIST_DIR)/configure.in
for i in $(srcdir)/*.[ch]; do \
if [ -f $$i ]; then \
cp -p $$i $(DIST_DIR)/ ; \
fi; \
done;
mkdir $(DIST_DIR)/tclconfig
cp $(srcdir)/tclconfig/install-sh $(srcdir)/tclconfig/tcl.m4 \
$(DIST_DIR)/tclconfig/
chmod 664 $(DIST_DIR)/tclconfig/tcl.m4
chmod +x $(DIST_DIR)/tclconfig/install-sh
list='demos doc generic library mac tests unix win'; \
for p in $$list; do \
if test -d $(srcdir)/$$p ; then \
mkdir $(DIST_DIR)/$$p; \
cp -p $(srcdir)/$$p/*.* $(DIST_DIR)/$$p/; \
fi; \
done
(cd $(DIST_ROOT); $(COMPRESS);)
#========================================================================
# End of user-definable section
#========================================================================
#========================================================================
# Don't modify the file to clean here. Instead, set the "CLEANFILES"
# variable in configure.in
#========================================================================
clean:
-test -z "$(BINARIES)" || rm -f $(BINARIES)
-rm -f *.$(OBJEXT) core *.core
-test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES)
distclean: clean
-rm -f *.tab.c
-rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)
-rm -f config.h config.cache config.log config.status
#========================================================================
# Install binary object libraries. On Windows this includes both .dll and
# .lib files. Because the .lib files are not explicitly listed anywhere,
# we need to deduce their existence from the .dll file of the same name.
# Library files go into the lib directory.
# In addition, this will generate the pkgIndex.tcl
# file in the install location (assuming it can find a usable tclsh shell)
#
# You should not have to modify this target.
#========================================================================
install-lib-binaries: binaries
@mkdir -p $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)
@list='$(lib_BINARIES)'; for p in $$list; do \
if test -f $$p; then \
echo " $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p"; \
$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p; \
stub=`echo $$p|sed -e "s/.*\(stub\).*/\1/"`; \
if test "x$$stub" = "xstub"; then \
echo " $(RANLIB_STUB) $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p"; \
$(RANLIB_STUB) $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p; \
else \
echo " $(RANLIB) $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p"; \
$(RANLIB) $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p; \
fi; \
ext=`echo $$p|sed -e "s/.*\.//"`; \
if test "x$$ext" = "xdll"; then \
lib=`basename $$p|sed -e 's/.[^.]*$$//'`.lib; \
if test -f $$lib; then \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$lib $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$lib"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$lib $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$lib; \
fi; \
fi; \
fi; \
done
@list='$(PKG_TCL_SOURCES)'; for p in $$list; do \
if test -f $(srcdir)/$$p; then \
destp=`basename $$p`; \
echo " Install $$destp $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$destp"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/$$p $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$destp; \
fi; \
done
@if test "x$(SHARED_BUILD)" = "x1"; then \
echo " Install pkgIndex.tcl $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) pkgIndex.tcl $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir); \
fi
#========================================================================
# Install binary executables (e.g. .exe files and dependent .dll files)
# This is for files that must go in the bin directory (located next to
# wish and tclsh), like dependent .dll files on Windows.
#
# You should not have to modify this target, except to define bin_BINARIES
# above if necessary.
#========================================================================
install-bin-binaries: binaries
@mkdir -p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)
@list='$(bin_BINARIES)'; for p in $$list; do \
if test -f $$p; then \
echo " $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/$$p"; \
$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/$$p; \
fi; \
done
.SUFFIXES: .c .$(OBJEXT)
Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status
cd $(top_builddir) \
&& CONFIG_FILES=$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status
uninstall-binaries:
list='$(lib_BINARIES)'; for p in $$list; do \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p; \
done
list='$(PKG_TCL_SOURCES)'; for p in $$list; do \
p=`basename $$p`; \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(pkglibdir)/$$p; \
done
list='$(bin_BINARIES)'; for p in $$list; do \
rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/$$p; \
done
.PHONY: all binaries clean depend distclean doc install libraries test
# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables.
# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded.
.NOEXPORT:

36
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/README
View File

@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
This is the SQLite extension for Tcl using the Tcl Extension
Architecture (TEA). For additional information on SQLite see
http://www.sqlite.org/
UNIX BUILD
==========
Building under most UNIX systems is easy, just run the configure script
and then run make. For more information about the build process, see
the tcl/unix/README file in the Tcl src dist. The following minimal
example will install the extension in the /opt/tcl directory.
$ cd sqlite-*-tea
$ ./configure --prefix=/opt/tcl
$ make
$ make install
WINDOWS BUILD
=============
The recommended method to build extensions under windows is to use the
Msys + Mingw build process. This provides a Unix-style build while
generating native Windows binaries. Using the Msys + Mingw build tools
means that you can use the same configure script as per the Unix build
to create a Makefile. See the tcl/win/README file for the URL of
the Msys + Mingw download.
If you have VC++ then you may wish to use the files in the win
subdirectory and build the extension using just VC++. These files have
been designed to be as generic as possible but will require some
additional maintenance by the project developer to synchronise with
the TEA configure.in and Makefile.in files. Instructions for using the
VC++ makefile are written in the first part of the Makefile.vc
file.

9
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/aclocal.m4 vendored
View File

@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
#
# Include the TEA standard macro set
#
builtin(include,tclconfig/tcl.m4)
#
# Add here whatever m4 macros you want to define for your package
#

202
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/configure.ac
View File

@ -1,202 +0,0 @@
#!/bin/bash -norc
dnl This file is an input file used by the GNU "autoconf" program to
dnl generate the file "configure", which is run during Tcl installation
dnl to configure the system for the local environment.
#
# RCS: @(#) $Id: configure.in,v 1.43 2005/07/26 19:17:05 mdejong Exp $
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Sample configure.in for Tcl Extensions. The only places you should
# need to modify this file are marked by the string __CHANGE__
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# __CHANGE__
# Set your package name and version numbers here.
#
# This initializes the environment with PACKAGE_NAME and PACKAGE_VERSION
# set as provided. These will also be added as -D defs in your Makefile
# so you can encode the package version directly into the source files.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
AC_INIT([sqlite], [3.7.4])
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# Call TEA_INIT as the first TEA_ macro to set up initial vars.
# This will define a ${TEA_PLATFORM} variable == "unix" or "windows"
# as well as PKG_LIB_FILE and PKG_STUB_LIB_FILE.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_INIT([3.9])
AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR(tclconfig)
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# Load the tclConfig.sh file
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_PATH_TCLCONFIG
TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# Load the tkConfig.sh file if necessary (Tk extension)
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
#TEA_PATH_TKCONFIG
#TEA_LOAD_TKCONFIG
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Handle the --prefix=... option by defaulting to what Tcl gave.
# Must be called after TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG and before TEA_SETUP_COMPILER.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_PREFIX
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Standard compiler checks.
# This sets up CC by using the CC env var, or looks for gcc otherwise.
# This also calls AC_PROG_CC, AC_PROG_INSTALL and a few others to create
# the basic setup necessary to compile executables.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_SETUP_COMPILER
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# __CHANGE__
# Specify the C source files to compile in TEA_ADD_SOURCES,
# public headers that need to be installed in TEA_ADD_HEADERS,
# stub library C source files to compile in TEA_ADD_STUB_SOURCES,
# and runtime Tcl library files in TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES.
# This defines PKG(_STUB)_SOURCES, PKG(_STUB)_OBJECTS, PKG_HEADERS
# and PKG_TCL_SOURCES.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_ADD_SOURCES([tclsqlite3.c])
TEA_ADD_HEADERS([])
TEA_ADD_INCLUDES([-I\"`\${CYGPATH} \${srcdir}/generic`\"])
TEA_ADD_LIBS([])
TEA_ADD_CFLAGS([-DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3=1])
TEA_ADD_CFLAGS([-DSQLITE_3_SUFFIX_ONLY=1])
TEA_ADD_CFLAGS([-DSQLITE_ENABLE_RTREE=1])
TEA_ADD_CFLAGS([-DSQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED=1])
TEA_ADD_STUB_SOURCES([])
TEA_ADD_TCL_SOURCES([])
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# The --with-system-sqlite causes the TCL bindings to SQLite to use
# the system shared library for SQLite rather than statically linking
# against its own private copy. This is dangerous and leads to
# undersirable dependences and is not recommended.
# Patchs from rmax.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
AC_ARG_WITH([system-sqlite],
[AC_HELP_STRING([--with-system-sqlite],
[use a system-supplied libsqlite3 instead of the bundled one])],
[], [with_system_sqlite=no])
if test x$with_system_sqlite != xno; then
AC_CHECK_HEADER([sqlite3.h],
[AC_CHECK_LIB([sqlite3],[sqlite3_initialize],
[AC_DEFINE(USE_SYSTEM_SQLITE)
LIBS="$LIBS -lsqlite3"])])
fi
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# __CHANGE__
# Choose which headers you need. Extension authors should try very
# hard to only rely on the Tcl public header files. Internal headers
# contain private data structures and are subject to change without
# notice.
# This MUST be called after TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG / TEA_LOAD_TKCONFIG
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_PUBLIC_TCL_HEADERS
#TEA_PRIVATE_TCL_HEADERS
#TEA_PUBLIC_TK_HEADERS
#TEA_PRIVATE_TK_HEADERS
#TEA_PATH_X
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# Check whether --enable-threads or --disable-threads was given.
# This auto-enables if Tcl was compiled threaded.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_ENABLE_THREADS
if test "${TCL_THREADS}" = "1" ; then
AC_DEFINE(SQLITE_THREADSAFE, 1, [Trigger sqlite threadsafe build])
# Not automatically added by Tcl because its assumed Tcl links to them,
# but it may not if it isn't really a threaded build.
TEA_ADD_LIBS([$THREADS_LIBS])
else
AC_DEFINE(SQLITE_THREADSAFE, 0, [Trigger sqlite non-threadsafe build])
fi
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# The statement below defines a collection of symbols related to
# building as a shared library instead of a static library.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_ENABLE_SHARED
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# This macro figures out what flags to use with the compiler/linker
# when building shared/static debug/optimized objects. This information
# can be taken from the tclConfig.sh file, but this figures it all out.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_CONFIG_CFLAGS
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# Set the default compiler switches based on the --enable-symbols option.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_ENABLE_SYMBOLS
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# Everyone should be linking against the Tcl stub library. If you
# can't for some reason, remove this definition. If you aren't using
# stubs, you also need to modify the SHLIB_LD_LIBS setting below to
# link against the non-stubbed Tcl library. Add Tk too if necessary.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
AC_DEFINE(USE_TCL_STUBS, 1, [Use Tcl stubs])
#AC_DEFINE(USE_TK_STUBS, 1, [Use Tk stubs])
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# Redefine fdatasync as fsync on systems that lack fdatasync
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
#
#AC_CHECK_FUNC(fdatasync, , AC_DEFINE(fdatasync, fsync))
# Check for library functions that SQLite can optionally use.
AC_CHECK_FUNCS([fdatasync usleep fullfsync localtime_r gmtime_r])
AC_FUNC_STRERROR_R
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# This macro generates a line to use when building a library. It
# depends on values set by the TEA_ENABLE_SHARED, TEA_ENABLE_SYMBOLS,
# and TEA_LOAD_TCLCONFIG macros above.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_MAKE_LIB
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# Determine the name of the tclsh and/or wish executables in the
# Tcl and Tk build directories or the location they were installed
# into. These paths are used to support running test cases only,
# the Makefile should not be making use of these paths to generate
# a pkgIndex.tcl file or anything else at extension build time.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
TEA_PROG_TCLSH
#TEA_PROG_WISH
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# Finally, substitute all of the various values into the Makefile.
# You may alternatively have a special pkgIndex.tcl.in or other files
# which require substituting th AC variables in. Include these here.
#--------------------------------------------------------------------
AC_OUTPUT([Makefile pkgIndex.tcl])

15
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/doc/sqlite3.n
View File

@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
.TH sqlite3 n 4.1 "Tcl-Extensions"
.HS sqlite3 tcl
.BS
.SH NAME
sqlite3 \- an interface to the SQLite3 database engine
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBsqlite3\fI command_name ?filename?\fR
.br
.SH DESCRIPTION
SQLite3 is a self-contains, zero-configuration, transactional SQL database
engine. This extension provides an easy to use interface for accessing
SQLite database files from Tcl.
.PP
For full documentation see \fIhttp://www.sqlite.org/\fR and
in particular \fIhttp://www.sqlite.org/tclsqlite.html\fR.

6
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/license.terms
View File

@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
a legal notice, here is a blessing:
May you do good and not evil.
May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
May you share freely, never taking more than you give.

7
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/pkgIndex.tcl.in
View File

@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
#
# Tcl package index file
#
# Note sqlite*3* init specifically
#
package ifneeded sqlite3 @PACKAGE_VERSION@ \
[list load [file join $dir @PKG_LIB_FILE@] Sqlite3]

528
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/tclconfig/install-sh
View File

@ -1,528 +0,0 @@
#!/bin/sh
# install - install a program, script, or datafile
scriptversion=2011-04-20.01; # UTC
# This originates from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh), which was
# later released in X11R6 (xc/config/util/install.sh) with the
# following copyright and license.
#
# Copyright (C) 1994 X Consortium
#
# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
# of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
# deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
# rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
# sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
# furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
#
# The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
# all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
#
# THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
# IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
# FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
# X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
# AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNEC-
# TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
#
# Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not
# be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal-
# ings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consor-
# tium.
#
#
# FSF changes to this file are in the public domain.
#
# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent
# `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it
# when there is no Makefile.
#
# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
# from scratch.
nl='
'
IFS=" "" $nl"
# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
doit=${DOITPROG-}
if test -z "$doit"; then
doit_exec=exec
else
doit_exec=$doit
fi
# Put in absolute file names if you don't have them in your path;
# or use environment vars.
chgrpprog=${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}
chmodprog=${CHMODPROG-chmod}
chownprog=${CHOWNPROG-chown}
cmpprog=${CMPPROG-cmp}
cpprog=${CPPROG-cp}
mkdirprog=${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}
mvprog=${MVPROG-mv}
rmprog=${RMPROG-rm}
stripprog=${STRIPPROG-strip}
posix_glob='?'
initialize_posix_glob='
test "$posix_glob" != "?" || {
if (set -f) 2>/dev/null; then
posix_glob=
else
posix_glob=:
fi
}
'
posix_mkdir=
# Desired mode of installed file.
mode=0755
chgrpcmd=
chmodcmd=$chmodprog
chowncmd=
mvcmd=$mvprog
rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
stripcmd=
src=
dst=
dir_arg=
dst_arg=
copy_on_change=false
no_target_directory=
usage="\
Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [-T] SRCFILE DSTFILE
or: $0 [OPTION]... SRCFILES... DIRECTORY
or: $0 [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SRCFILES...
or: $0 [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORIES...
In the 1st form, copy SRCFILE to DSTFILE.
In the 2nd and 3rd, copy all SRCFILES to DIRECTORY.
In the 4th, create DIRECTORIES.
Options:
--help display this help and exit.
--version display version info and exit.
-c (ignored)
-C install only if different (preserve the last data modification time)
-d create directories instead of installing files.
-g GROUP $chgrpprog installed files to GROUP.
-m MODE $chmodprog installed files to MODE.
-o USER $chownprog installed files to USER.
-s $stripprog installed files.
-S $stripprog installed files.
-t DIRECTORY install into DIRECTORY.
-T report an error if DSTFILE is a directory.
Environment variables override the default commands:
CHGRPPROG CHMODPROG CHOWNPROG CMPPROG CPPROG MKDIRPROG MVPROG
RMPROG STRIPPROG
"
while test $# -ne 0; do
case $1 in
-c) ;;
-C) copy_on_change=true;;
-d) dir_arg=true;;
-g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
shift;;
--help) echo "$usage"; exit $?;;
-m) mode=$2
case $mode in
*' '* | *' '* | *'
'* | *'*'* | *'?'* | *'['*)
echo "$0: invalid mode: $mode" >&2
exit 1;;
esac
shift;;
-o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
shift;;
-s) stripcmd=$stripprog;;
-S) stripcmd="$stripprog $2"
shift;;
-t) dst_arg=$2
shift;;
-T) no_target_directory=true;;
--version) echo "$0 $scriptversion"; exit $?;;
--) shift
break;;
-*) echo "$0: invalid option: $1" >&2
exit 1;;
*) break;;
esac
shift
done
if test $# -ne 0 && test -z "$dir_arg$dst_arg"; then
# When -d is used, all remaining arguments are directories to create.
# When -t is used, the destination is already specified.
# Otherwise, the last argument is the destination. Remove it from $@.
for arg
do
if test -n "$dst_arg"; then
# $@ is not empty: it contains at least $arg.
set fnord "$@" "$dst_arg"
shift # fnord
fi
shift # arg
dst_arg=$arg
done
fi
if test $# -eq 0; then
if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
echo "$0: no input file specified." >&2
exit 1
fi
# It's OK to call `install-sh -d' without argument.
# This can happen when creating conditional directories.
exit 0
fi
if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
do_exit='(exit $ret); exit $ret'
trap "ret=129; $do_exit" 1
trap "ret=130; $do_exit" 2
trap "ret=141; $do_exit" 13
trap "ret=143; $do_exit" 15
# Set umask so as not to create temps with too-generous modes.
# However, 'strip' requires both read and write access to temps.
case $mode in
# Optimize common cases.
*644) cp_umask=133;;
*755) cp_umask=22;;
*[0-7])
if test -z "$stripcmd"; then
u_plus_rw=
else
u_plus_rw='% 200'
fi
cp_umask=`expr '(' 777 - $mode % 1000 ')' $u_plus_rw`;;
*)
if test -z "$stripcmd"; then
u_plus_rw=
else
u_plus_rw=,u+rw
fi
cp_umask=$mode$u_plus_rw;;
esac
fi
for src
do
# Protect names starting with `-'.
case $src in
-*) src=./$src;;
esac
if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
dst=$src
dstdir=$dst
test -d "$dstdir"
dstdir_status=$?
else
# Waiting for this to be detected by the "$cpprog $src $dsttmp" command
# might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad
# if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
if test ! -f "$src" && test ! -d "$src"; then
echo "$0: $src does not exist." >&2
exit 1
fi
if test -z "$dst_arg"; then
echo "$0: no destination specified." >&2
exit 1
fi
dst=$dst_arg
# Protect names starting with `-'.
case $dst in
-*) dst=./$dst;;
esac
# If destination is a directory, append the input filename; won't work
# if double slashes aren't ignored.
if test -d "$dst"; then
if test -n "$no_target_directory"; then
echo "$0: $dst_arg: Is a directory" >&2
exit 1
fi
dstdir=$dst
dst=$dstdir/`basename "$src"`
dstdir_status=0
else
# Prefer dirname, but fall back on a substitute if dirname fails.
dstdir=`
(dirname "$dst") 2>/dev/null ||
expr X"$dst" : 'X\(.*[^/]\)//*[^/][^/]*/*$' \| \
X"$dst" : 'X\(//\)[^/]' \| \
X"$dst" : 'X\(//\)$' \| \
X"$dst" : 'X\(/\)' \| . 2>/dev/null ||
echo X"$dst" |
sed '/^X\(.*[^/]\)\/\/*[^/][^/]*\/*$/{
s//\1/
q
}
/^X\(\/\/\)[^/].*/{
s//\1/
q
}
/^X\(\/\/\)$/{
s//\1/
q
}
/^X\(\/\).*/{
s//\1/
q
}
s/.*/./; q'
`
test -d "$dstdir"
dstdir_status=$?
fi
fi
obsolete_mkdir_used=false
if test $dstdir_status != 0; then
case $posix_mkdir in
'')
# Create intermediate dirs using mode 755 as modified by the umask.
# This is like FreeBSD 'install' as of 1997-10-28.
umask=`umask`
case $stripcmd.$umask in
# Optimize common cases.
*[2367][2367]) mkdir_umask=$umask;;
.*0[02][02] | .[02][02] | .[02]) mkdir_umask=22;;
*[0-7])
mkdir_umask=`expr $umask + 22 \
- $umask % 100 % 40 + $umask % 20 \
- $umask % 10 % 4 + $umask % 2
`;;
*) mkdir_umask=$umask,go-w;;
esac
# With -d, create the new directory with the user-specified mode.
# Otherwise, rely on $mkdir_umask.
if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
mkdir_mode=-m$mode
else
mkdir_mode=
fi
posix_mkdir=false
case $umask in
*[123567][0-7][0-7])
# POSIX mkdir -p sets u+wx bits regardless of umask, which
# is incompatible with FreeBSD 'install' when (umask & 300) != 0.
;;
*)
tmpdir=${TMPDIR-/tmp}/ins$RANDOM-$$
trap 'ret=$?; rmdir "$tmpdir/d" "$tmpdir" 2>/dev/null; exit $ret' 0
if (umask $mkdir_umask &&
exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$tmpdir/d") >/dev/null 2>&1
then
if test -z "$dir_arg" || {
# Check for POSIX incompatibilities with -m.
# HP-UX 11.23 and IRIX 6.5 mkdir -m -p sets group- or
# other-writeable bit of parent directory when it shouldn't.
# FreeBSD 6.1 mkdir -m -p sets mode of existing directory.
ls_ld_tmpdir=`ls -ld "$tmpdir"`
case $ls_ld_tmpdir in
d????-?r-*) different_mode=700;;
d????-?--*) different_mode=755;;
*) false;;
esac &&
$mkdirprog -m$different_mode -p -- "$tmpdir" && {
ls_ld_tmpdir_1=`ls -ld "$tmpdir"`
test "$ls_ld_tmpdir" = "$ls_ld_tmpdir_1"
}
}
then posix_mkdir=:
fi
rmdir "$tmpdir/d" "$tmpdir"
else
# Remove any dirs left behind by ancient mkdir implementations.
rmdir ./$mkdir_mode ./-p ./-- 2>/dev/null
fi
trap '' 0;;
esac;;
esac
if
$posix_mkdir && (
umask $mkdir_umask &&
$doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir"
)
then :
else
# The umask is ridiculous, or mkdir does not conform to POSIX,
# or it failed possibly due to a race condition. Create the
# directory the slow way, step by step, checking for races as we go.
case $dstdir in
/*) prefix='/';;
-*) prefix='./';;
*) prefix='';;
esac
eval "$initialize_posix_glob"
oIFS=$IFS
IFS=/
$posix_glob set -f
set fnord $dstdir
shift
$posix_glob set +f
IFS=$oIFS
prefixes=
for d
do
test -z "$d" && continue
prefix=$prefix$d
if test -d "$prefix"; then
prefixes=
else
if $posix_mkdir; then
(umask=$mkdir_umask &&
$doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir") && break
# Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently.
test -d "$prefix" || exit 1
else
case $prefix in
*\'*) qprefix=`echo "$prefix" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;;
*) qprefix=$prefix;;
esac
prefixes="$prefixes '$qprefix'"
fi
fi
prefix=$prefix/
done
if test -n "$prefixes"; then
# Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently.
(umask $mkdir_umask &&
eval "\$doit_exec \$mkdirprog $prefixes") ||
test -d "$dstdir" || exit 1
obsolete_mkdir_used=true
fi
fi
fi
if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
{ test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dst"; } &&
{ test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dst"; } &&
{ test "$obsolete_mkdir_used$chowncmd$chgrpcmd" = false ||
test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dst"; } || exit 1
else
# Make a couple of temp file names in the proper directory.
dsttmp=$dstdir/_inst.$$_
rmtmp=$dstdir/_rm.$$_
# Trap to clean up those temp files at exit.
trap 'ret=$?; rm -f "$dsttmp" "$rmtmp" && exit $ret' 0
# Copy the file name to the temp name.
(umask $cp_umask && $doit_exec $cpprog "$src" "$dsttmp") &&
# and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits.
#
# If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to
# ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
# errors from the above "$doit $cpprog $src $dsttmp" command.
#
{ test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dsttmp"; } &&
{ test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dsttmp"; } &&
{ test -z "$stripcmd" || $doit $stripcmd "$dsttmp"; } &&
{ test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dsttmp"; } &&
# If -C, don't bother to copy if it wouldn't change the file.
if $copy_on_change &&
old=`LC_ALL=C ls -dlL "$dst" 2>/dev/null` &&
new=`LC_ALL=C ls -dlL "$dsttmp" 2>/dev/null` &&
eval "$initialize_posix_glob" &&
$posix_glob set -f &&
set X $old && old=:$2:$4:$5:$6 &&
set X $new && new=:$2:$4:$5:$6 &&
$posix_glob set +f &&
test "$old" = "$new" &&
$cmpprog "$dst" "$dsttmp" >/dev/null 2>&1
then
rm -f "$dsttmp"
else
# Rename the file to the real destination.
$doit $mvcmd -f "$dsttmp" "$dst" 2>/dev/null ||
# The rename failed, perhaps because mv can't rename something else
# to itself, or perhaps because mv is so ancient that it does not
# support -f.
{
# Now remove or move aside any old file at destination location.
# We try this two ways since rm can't unlink itself on some
# systems and the destination file might be busy for other
# reasons. In this case, the final cleanup might fail but the new
# file should still install successfully.
{
test ! -f "$dst" ||
$doit $rmcmd -f "$dst" 2>/dev/null ||
{ $doit $mvcmd -f "$dst" "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null &&
{ $doit $rmcmd -f "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null; :; }
} ||
{ echo "$0: cannot unlink or rename $dst" >&2
(exit 1); exit 1
}
} &&
# Now rename the file to the real destination.
$doit $mvcmd "$dsttmp" "$dst"
}
fi || exit 1
trap '' 0
fi
done
# Local variables:
# eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
# time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
# time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC"
# time-stamp-end: "; # UTC"
# End:

4168
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/tclconfig/tcl.m4
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

414
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/win/makefile.vc
View File

@ -1,414 +0,0 @@
# makefile.vc -- -*- Makefile -*-
#
# Microsoft Visual C++ makefile for use with nmake.exe v1.62+ (VC++ 5.0+)
#
# This makefile is based upon the Tcl 8.4 Makefile.vc and modified to
# make it suitable as a general package makefile. Look for the word EDIT
# which marks sections that may need modification. As a minumum you will
# need to change the PROJECT, DOTVERSION and DLLOBJS variables to values
# relevant to your package.
#
# See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
# of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
#
# Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
# Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions.
# Copyright (c) 2001 ActiveState Corporation.
# Copyright (c) 2001-2002 David Gravereaux.
# Copyright (c) 2003 Pat Thoyts
#
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
# RCS: @(#)$Id: makefile.vc,v 1.4 2004/07/26 08:22:05 patthoyts Exp $
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
!if !defined(MSDEVDIR) && !defined(MSVCDIR) && !defined(VCINSTALLDIR) && !defined(MSSDK) && !defined(WINDOWSSDKDIR)
MSG = ^
You will need to run vcvars32.bat from Developer Studio, first, to setup^
the environment. Jump to this line to read the new instructions.
!error $(MSG)
!endif
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# HOW TO USE this makefile:
#
# 1) It is now necessary to have %MSVCDir% set in the environment. This is
# used as a check to see if vcvars32.bat had been run prior to running
# nmake or during the installation of Microsoft Visual C++, MSVCDir had
# been set globally and the PATH adjusted. Either way is valid.
#
# You'll need to run vcvars32.bat contained in the MsDev's vc(98)/bin
# directory to setup the proper environment, if needed, for your current
# setup. This is a needed bootstrap requirement and allows the swapping of
# different environments to be easier.
#
# 2) To use the Platform SDK (not expressly needed), run setenv.bat after
# vcvars32.bat according to the instructions for it. This can also turn on
# the 64-bit compiler, if your SDK has it.
#
# 3) Targets are:
# all -- Builds everything.
# <project> -- Builds the project (eg: nmake sample)
# test -- Builds and runs the test suite.
# install -- Installs the built binaries and libraries to $(INSTALLDIR)
# in an appropriate subdirectory.
# clean/realclean/distclean -- varying levels of cleaning.
#
# 4) Macros usable on the commandline:
# INSTALLDIR=<path>
# Sets where to install Tcl from the built binaries.
# C:\Progra~1\Tcl is assumed when not specified.
#
# OPTS=static,msvcrt,staticpkg,threads,symbols,profile,loimpact,none
# Sets special options for the core. The default is for none.
# Any combination of the above may be used (comma separated).
# 'none' will over-ride everything to nothing.
#
# static = Builds a static library of the core instead of a
# dll. The shell will be static (and large), as well.
# msvcrt = Effects the static option only to switch it from
# using libcmt(d) as the C runtime [by default] to
# msvcrt(d). This is useful for static embedding
# support.
# staticpkg = Effects the static option only to switch
# tclshXX.exe to have the dde and reg extension linked
# inside it.
# threads = Turns on full multithreading support.
# thrdalloc = Use the thread allocator (shared global free pool).
# symbols = Adds symbols for step debugging.
# profile = Adds profiling hooks. Map file is assumed.
# loimpact = Adds a flag for how NT treats the heap to keep memory
# in use, low. This is said to impact alloc performance.
#
# STATS=memdbg,compdbg,none
# Sets optional memory and bytecode compiler debugging code added
# to the core. The default is for none. Any combination of the
# above may be used (comma separated). 'none' will over-ride
# everything to nothing.
#
# memdbg = Enables the debugging memory allocator.
# compdbg = Enables byte compilation logging.
#
# MACHINE=(IX86|IA64|ALPHA)
# Set the machine type used for the compiler, linker, and
# resource compiler. This hook is needed to tell the tools
# when alternate platforms are requested. IX86 is the default
# when not specified.
#
# TMP_DIR=<path>
# OUT_DIR=<path>
# Hooks to allow the intermediate and output directories to be
# changed. $(OUT_DIR) is assumed to be
# $(BINROOT)\(Release|Debug) based on if symbols are requested.
# $(TMP_DIR) will de $(OUT_DIR)\<buildtype> by default.
#
# TESTPAT=<file>
# Reads the tests requested to be run from this file.
#
# CFG_ENCODING=encoding
# name of encoding for configuration information. Defaults
# to cp1252
#
# 5) Examples:
#
# Basic syntax of calling nmake looks like this:
# nmake [-nologo] -f makefile.vc [target|macrodef [target|macrodef] [...]]
#
# Standard (no frills)
# c:\tcl_src\win\>c:\progra~1\micros~1\vc98\bin\vcvars32.bat
# Setting environment for using Microsoft Visual C++ tools.
# c:\tcl_src\win\>nmake -f makefile.vc all
# c:\tcl_src\win\>nmake -f makefile.vc install INSTALLDIR=c:\progra~1\tcl
#
# Building for Win64
# c:\tcl_src\win\>c:\progra~1\micros~1\vc98\bin\vcvars32.bat
# Setting environment for using Microsoft Visual C++ tools.
# c:\tcl_src\win\>c:\progra~1\platfo~1\setenv.bat /pre64 /RETAIL
# Targeting Windows pre64 RETAIL
# c:\tcl_src\win\>nmake -f makefile.vc MACHINE=IA64
#
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
#==============================================================================
###############################################################################
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
!if !exist("makefile.vc")
MSG = ^
You must run this makefile only from the directory it is in.^
Please `cd` to its location first.
!error $(MSG)
!endif
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Project specific information (EDIT)
#
# You should edit this with the name and version of your project. This
# information is used to generate the name of the package library and
# it's install location.
#
# For example, the sample extension is going to build sample04.dll and
# would install it into $(INSTALLDIR)\lib\sample04
#
# You need to specify the object files that need to be linked into your
# binary here.
#
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
PROJECT = sqlite3
!include "rules.vc"
# nmakehelp -V <file> <tag> will search the file for tag, skips until a
# number and returns all character until a character not in [0-9.ab]
# is read.
!if [echo REM = This file is generated from Makefile.vc > versions.vc]
!endif
# get project version from row "AC_INIT([sqlite], [3.7.14])"
!if [echo DOTVERSION = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V ..\configure.in AC_INIT >> versions.vc]
!endif
!include "versions.vc"
VERSION = $(DOTVERSION:.=)
STUBPREFIX = $(PROJECT)stub
DLLOBJS = \
$(TMP_DIR)\tclsqlite3.obj
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Target names and paths ( shouldn't need changing )
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
BINROOT = .
ROOT = ..
PRJIMPLIB = $(OUT_DIR)\$(PROJECT)$(VERSION)$(SUFX).lib
PRJLIBNAME = $(PROJECT)$(VERSION)$(SUFX).$(EXT)
PRJLIB = $(OUT_DIR)\$(PRJLIBNAME)
PRJSTUBLIBNAME = $(STUBPREFIX)$(VERSION).lib
PRJSTUBLIB = $(OUT_DIR)\$(PRJSTUBLIBNAME)
### Make sure we use backslash only.
PRJ_INSTALL_DIR = $(_INSTALLDIR)\$(PROJECT)$(DOTVERSION)
LIB_INSTALL_DIR = $(PRJ_INSTALL_DIR)
BIN_INSTALL_DIR = $(PRJ_INSTALL_DIR)
DOC_INSTALL_DIR = $(PRJ_INSTALL_DIR)
SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR = $(PRJ_INSTALL_DIR)
INCLUDE_INSTALL_DIR = $(_TCLDIR)\include
### The following paths CANNOT have spaces in them.
GENERICDIR = $(ROOT)\generic
WINDIR = $(ROOT)\win
LIBDIR = $(ROOT)\library
DOCDIR = $(ROOT)\doc
TOOLSDIR = $(ROOT)\tools
COMPATDIR = $(ROOT)\compat
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
# Compile flags
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
!if !$(DEBUG)
!if $(OPTIMIZING)
### This cranks the optimization level to maximize speed
cdebug = -O2 -Op -Gs
!else
cdebug =
!endif
!else if "$(MACHINE)" == "IA64"
### Warnings are too many, can't support warnings into errors.
cdebug = -Z7 -Od -GZ
!else
cdebug = -Z7 -WX -Od -GZ
!endif
### Declarations common to all compiler options
cflags = -nologo -c -W3 -YX -Fp$(TMP_DIR)^\
!if $(MSVCRT)
!if $(DEBUG)
crt = -MDd
!else
crt = -MD
!endif
!else
!if $(DEBUG)
crt = -MTd
!else
crt = -MT
!endif
!endif
INCLUDES = $(TCL_INCLUDES) -I"$(WINDIR)" -I"$(GENERICDIR)" \
-I"$(ROOT)\.."
BASE_CLFAGS = $(cflags) $(cdebug) $(crt) $(INCLUDES) \
-DSQLITE_3_SUFFIX_ONLY=1 -DSQLITE_ENABLE_RTREE=1 \
-DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3=1 -DSQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED=1
CON_CFLAGS = $(cflags) $(cdebug) $(crt) -DCONSOLE -DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3=1
TCL_CFLAGS = -DBUILD_sqlite -DUSE_TCL_STUBS \
-DPACKAGE_VERSION="\"$(DOTVERSION)\"" $(BASE_CLFAGS) \
$(OPTDEFINES)
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
# Link flags
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
!if $(DEBUG)
ldebug = -debug:full -debugtype:cv
!else
ldebug = -release -opt:ref -opt:icf,3
!endif
### Declarations common to all linker options
lflags = -nologo -machine:$(MACHINE) $(ldebug)
!if $(PROFILE)
lflags = $(lflags) -profile
!endif
!if $(ALIGN98_HACK) && !$(STATIC_BUILD)
### Align sections for PE size savings.
lflags = $(lflags) -opt:nowin98
!else if !$(ALIGN98_HACK) && $(STATIC_BUILD)
### Align sections for speed in loading by choosing the virtual page size.
lflags = $(lflags) -align:4096
!endif
!if $(LOIMPACT)
lflags = $(lflags) -ws:aggressive
!endif
dlllflags = $(lflags) -dll
conlflags = $(lflags) -subsystem:console
guilflags = $(lflags) -subsystem:windows
baselibs = $(TCLSTUBLIB)
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
# TclTest flags
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
!IF "$(TESTPAT)" != ""
TESTFLAGS = $(TESTFLAGS) -file $(TESTPAT)
!ENDIF
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
# Project specific targets (EDIT)
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
all: setup $(PROJECT)
$(PROJECT): setup $(PRJLIB)
install: install-binaries install-libraries install-docs
# Tests need to ensure we load the right dll file we
# have to handle the output differently on Win9x.
#
!if "$(OS)" == "Windows_NT" || "$(MSVCDIR)" == "IDE"
test: setup $(PROJECT)
set TCL_LIBRARY=$(ROOT)/library
$(TCLSH) <<
load $(PRJLIB:\=/)
cd "$(ROOT)/tests"
set argv "$(TESTFLAGS)"
source all.tcl
<<
!else
test: setup $(PROJECT)
echo Please wait while the test results are collected
set TCL_LIBRARY=$(ROOT)/library
$(TCLSH) << >tests.log
load $(PRJLIB:\=/)
cd "$(ROOT)/tests"
set argv "$(TESTFLAGS)"
source all.tcl
<<
type tests.log | more
!endif
setup:
@if not exist $(OUT_DIR)\nul mkdir $(OUT_DIR)
@if not exist $(TMP_DIR)\nul mkdir $(TMP_DIR)
$(PRJLIB): $(DLLOBJS)
$(link32) $(dlllflags) -out:$@ $(baselibs) @<<
$**
<<
-@del $*.exp
$(PRJSTUBLIB): $(PRJSTUBOBJS)
$(lib32) -nologo -out:$@ $(PRJSTUBOBJS)
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
# Implicit rules
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
{$(WINDIR)}.c{$(TMP_DIR)}.obj::
$(cc32) $(TCL_CFLAGS) -DBUILD_$(PROJECT) -Fo$(TMP_DIR)\ @<<
$<
<<
{$(GENERICDIR)}.c{$(TMP_DIR)}.obj::
$(cc32) $(TCL_CFLAGS) -DBUILD_$(PROJECT) -Fo$(TMP_DIR)\ @<<
$<
<<
{$(COMPATDIR)}.c{$(TMP_DIR)}.obj::
$(cc32) $(TCL_CFLAGS) -DBUILD_$(PROJECT) -Fo$(TMP_DIR)\ @<<
$<
<<
{$(WINDIR)}.rc{$(TMP_DIR)}.res:
$(rc32) -fo $@ -r -i "$(GENERICDIR)" -D__WIN32__ \
!if $(DEBUG)
-d DEBUG \
!endif
!if $(TCL_THREADS)
-d TCL_THREADS \
!endif
!if $(STATIC_BUILD)
-d STATIC_BUILD \
!endif
$<
.SUFFIXES:
.SUFFIXES:.c .rc
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
# Installation. (EDIT)
#
# You may need to modify this section to reflect the final distribution
# of your files and possibly to generate documentation.
#
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
install-binaries:
@echo Installing binaries to '$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)'
@if not exist "$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)" mkdir "$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)"
@$(CPY) $(PRJLIB) "$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)" >NUL
install-libraries:
@echo Installing libraries to '$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)'
@if exist $(LIBDIR) $(CPY) $(LIBDIR)\*.tcl "$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)"
@echo Installing package index in '$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)'
@type << >"$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)\pkgIndex.tcl"
package ifneeded $(PROJECT) $(DOTVERSION) \
[list load [file join $$dir $(PRJLIBNAME)] sqlite3]
<<
install-docs:
@echo Installing documentation files to '$(DOC_INSTALL_DIR)'
@if exist $(DOCDIR) $(CPY) $(DOCDIR)\*.n "$(DOC_INSTALL_DIR)"
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
# Clean up
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
clean:
@if exist $(TMP_DIR)\nul $(RMDIR) $(TMP_DIR)
@if exist $(WINDIR)\version.vc del $(WINDIR)\version.vc
realclean: clean
@if exist $(OUT_DIR)\nul $(RMDIR) $(OUT_DIR)
distclean: realclean
@if exist $(WINDIR)\nmakehlp.exe del $(WINDIR)\nmakehlp.exe
@if exist $(WINDIR)\nmakehlp.obj del $(WINDIR)\nmakehlp.obj

694
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/win/nmakehlp.c
View File

@ -1,694 +0,0 @@
/*
* ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
* nmakehlp.c --
*
* This is used to fix limitations within nmake and the environment.
*
* Copyright (c) 2002 by David Gravereaux.
* Copyright (c) 2006 by Pat Thoyts
*
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
* this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
* ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_DEPRECATE
#include <windows.h>
#define NO_SHLWAPI_GDI
#define NO_SHLWAPI_STREAM
#define NO_SHLWAPI_REG
#include <shlwapi.h>
#pragma comment (lib, "user32.lib")
#pragma comment (lib, "kernel32.lib")
#pragma comment (lib, "shlwapi.lib")
#include <stdio.h>
#include <math.h>
/*
* This library is required for x64 builds with _some_ versions of MSVC
*/
#if defined(_M_IA64) || defined(_M_AMD64)
#if _MSC_VER >= 1400 && _MSC_VER < 1500
#pragma comment(lib, "bufferoverflowU")
#endif
#endif
/* ISO hack for dumb VC++ */
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#define snprintf _snprintf
#endif
/* protos */
static int CheckForCompilerFeature(const char *option);
static int CheckForLinkerFeature(const char *option);
static int IsIn(const char *string, const char *substring);
static int SubstituteFile(const char *substs, const char *filename);
static int QualifyPath(const char *path);
static const char *GetVersionFromFile(const char *filename, const char *match);
static DWORD WINAPI ReadFromPipe(LPVOID args);
/* globals */
#define CHUNK 25
#define STATICBUFFERSIZE 1000
typedef struct {
HANDLE pipe;
char buffer[STATICBUFFERSIZE];
} pipeinfo;
pipeinfo Out = {INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE, '\0'};
pipeinfo Err = {INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE, '\0'};
/*
* exitcodes: 0 == no, 1 == yes, 2 == error
*/
int
main(
int argc,
char *argv[])
{
char msg[300];
DWORD dwWritten;
int chars;
/*
* Make sure children (cl.exe and link.exe) are kept quiet.
*/
SetErrorMode(SEM_FAILCRITICALERRORS | SEM_NOOPENFILEERRORBOX);
/*
* Make sure the compiler and linker aren't effected by the outside world.
*/
SetEnvironmentVariable("CL", "");
SetEnvironmentVariable("LINK", "");
if (argc > 1 && *argv[1] == '-') {
switch (*(argv[1]+1)) {
case 'c':
if (argc != 3) {
chars = snprintf(msg, sizeof(msg) - 1,
"usage: %s -c <compiler option>\n"
"Tests for whether cl.exe supports an option\n"
"exitcodes: 0 == no, 1 == yes, 2 == error\n", argv[0]);
WriteFile(GetStdHandle(STD_ERROR_HANDLE), msg, chars,
&dwWritten, NULL);
return 2;
}
return CheckForCompilerFeature(argv[2]);
case 'l':
if (argc != 3) {
chars = snprintf(msg, sizeof(msg) - 1,
"usage: %s -l <linker option>\n"
"Tests for whether link.exe supports an option\n"
"exitcodes: 0 == no, 1 == yes, 2 == error\n", argv[0]);
WriteFile(GetStdHandle(STD_ERROR_HANDLE), msg, chars,
&dwWritten, NULL);
return 2;
}
return CheckForLinkerFeature(argv[2]);
case 'f':
if (argc == 2) {
chars = snprintf(msg, sizeof(msg) - 1,
"usage: %s -f <string> <substring>\n"
"Find a substring within another\n"
"exitcodes: 0 == no, 1 == yes, 2 == error\n", argv[0]);
WriteFile(GetStdHandle(STD_ERROR_HANDLE), msg, chars,
&dwWritten, NULL);
return 2;
} else if (argc == 3) {
/*
* If the string is blank, there is no match.
*/
return 0;
} else {
return IsIn(argv[2], argv[3]);
}
case 's':
if (argc == 2) {
chars = snprintf(msg, sizeof(msg) - 1,
"usage: %s -s <substitutions file> <file>\n"
"Perform a set of string map type substutitions on a file\n"
"exitcodes: 0\n",
argv[0]);
WriteFile(GetStdHandle(STD_ERROR_HANDLE), msg, chars,
&dwWritten, NULL);
return 2;
}
return SubstituteFile(argv[2], argv[3]);
case 'V':
if (argc != 4) {
chars = snprintf(msg, sizeof(msg) - 1,
"usage: %s -V filename matchstring\n"
"Extract a version from a file:\n"
"eg: pkgIndex.tcl \"package ifneeded http\"",
argv[0]);
WriteFile(GetStdHandle(STD_ERROR_HANDLE), msg, chars,
&dwWritten, NULL);
return 0;
}
printf("%s\n", GetVersionFromFile(argv[2], argv[3]));
return 0;
case 'Q':
if (argc != 3) {
chars = snprintf(msg, sizeof(msg) - 1,
"usage: %s -Q path\n"
"Emit the fully qualified path\n"
"exitcodes: 0 == no, 1 == yes, 2 == error\n", argv[0]);
WriteFile(GetStdHandle(STD_ERROR_HANDLE), msg, chars,
&dwWritten, NULL);
return 2;
}
return QualifyPath(argv[2]);
}
}
chars = snprintf(msg, sizeof(msg) - 1,
"usage: %s -c|-f|-l|-Q|-s|-V ...\n"
"This is a little helper app to equalize shell differences between WinNT and\n"
"Win9x and get nmake.exe to accomplish its job.\n",
argv[0]);
WriteFile(GetStdHandle(STD_ERROR_HANDLE), msg, chars, &dwWritten, NULL);
return 2;
}
static int
CheckForCompilerFeature(
const char *option)
{
STARTUPINFO si;
PROCESS_INFORMATION pi;
SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES sa;
DWORD threadID;
char msg[300];
BOOL ok;
HANDLE hProcess, h, pipeThreads[2];
char cmdline[100];
hProcess = GetCurrentProcess();
ZeroMemory(&pi, sizeof(PROCESS_INFORMATION));
ZeroMemory(&si, sizeof(STARTUPINFO));
si.cb = sizeof(STARTUPINFO);
si.dwFlags = STARTF_USESTDHANDLES;
si.hStdInput = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE;
ZeroMemory(&sa, sizeof(SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES));
sa.nLength = sizeof(SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES);
sa.lpSecurityDescriptor = NULL;
sa.bInheritHandle = FALSE;
/*
* Create a non-inheritible pipe.
*/
CreatePipe(&Out.pipe, &h, &sa, 0);
/*
* Dupe the write side, make it inheritible, and close the original.
*/
DuplicateHandle(hProcess, h, hProcess, &si.hStdOutput, 0, TRUE,
DUPLICATE_SAME_ACCESS | DUPLICATE_CLOSE_SOURCE);
/*
* Same as above, but for the error side.
*/
CreatePipe(&Err.pipe, &h, &sa, 0);
DuplicateHandle(hProcess, h, hProcess, &si.hStdError, 0, TRUE,
DUPLICATE_SAME_ACCESS | DUPLICATE_CLOSE_SOURCE);
/*
* Base command line.
*/
lstrcpy(cmdline, "cl.exe -nologo -c -TC -Zs -X -Fp.\\_junk.pch ");
/*
* Append our option for testing
*/
lstrcat(cmdline, option);
/*
* Filename to compile, which exists, but is nothing and empty.
*/
lstrcat(cmdline, " .\\nul");
ok = CreateProcess(
NULL, /* Module name. */
cmdline, /* Command line. */
NULL, /* Process handle not inheritable. */
NULL, /* Thread handle not inheritable. */
TRUE, /* yes, inherit handles. */
DETACHED_PROCESS, /* No console for you. */
NULL, /* Use parent's environment block. */
NULL, /* Use parent's starting directory. */
&si, /* Pointer to STARTUPINFO structure. */
&pi); /* Pointer to PROCESS_INFORMATION structure. */
if (!ok) {
DWORD err = GetLastError();
int chars = snprintf(msg, sizeof(msg) - 1,
"Tried to launch: \"%s\", but got error [%u]: ", cmdline, err);
FormatMessage(FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_SYSTEM|FORMAT_MESSAGE_IGNORE_INSERTS|
FORMAT_MESSAGE_MAX_WIDTH_MASK, 0L, err, 0, (LPVOID)&msg[chars],
(300-chars), 0);
WriteFile(GetStdHandle(STD_ERROR_HANDLE), msg, lstrlen(msg), &err,NULL);
return 2;
}
/*
* Close our references to the write handles that have now been inherited.
*/
CloseHandle(si.hStdOutput);
CloseHandle(si.hStdError);
WaitForInputIdle(pi.hProcess, 5000);
CloseHandle(pi.hThread);
/*
* Start the pipe reader threads.
*/
pipeThreads[0] = CreateThread(NULL, 0, ReadFromPipe, &Out, 0, &threadID);
pipeThreads[1] = CreateThread(NULL, 0, ReadFromPipe, &Err, 0, &threadID);
/*
* Block waiting for the process to end.
*/
WaitForSingleObject(pi.hProcess, INFINITE);
CloseHandle(pi.hProcess);
/*
* Wait for our pipe to get done reading, should it be a little slow.
*/
WaitForMultipleObjects(2, pipeThreads, TRUE, 500);
CloseHandle(pipeThreads[0]);
CloseHandle(pipeThreads[1]);
/*
* Look for the commandline warning code in both streams.
* - in MSVC 6 & 7 we get D4002, in MSVC 8 we get D9002.
*/
return !(strstr(Out.buffer, "D4002") != NULL
|| strstr(Err.buffer, "D4002") != NULL
|| strstr(Out.buffer, "D9002") != NULL
|| strstr(Err.buffer, "D9002") != NULL
|| strstr(Out.buffer, "D2021") != NULL
|| strstr(Err.buffer, "D2021") != NULL);
}
static int
CheckForLinkerFeature(
const char *option)
{
STARTUPINFO si;
PROCESS_INFORMATION pi;
SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES sa;
DWORD threadID;
char msg[300];
BOOL ok;
HANDLE hProcess, h, pipeThreads[2];
char cmdline[100];
hProcess = GetCurrentProcess();
ZeroMemory(&pi, sizeof(PROCESS_INFORMATION));
ZeroMemory(&si, sizeof(STARTUPINFO));
si.cb = sizeof(STARTUPINFO);
si.dwFlags = STARTF_USESTDHANDLES;
si.hStdInput = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE;
ZeroMemory(&sa, sizeof(SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES));
sa.nLength = sizeof(SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES);
sa.lpSecurityDescriptor = NULL;
sa.bInheritHandle = TRUE;
/*
* Create a non-inheritible pipe.
*/
CreatePipe(&Out.pipe, &h, &sa, 0);
/*
* Dupe the write side, make it inheritible, and close the original.
*/
DuplicateHandle(hProcess, h, hProcess, &si.hStdOutput, 0, TRUE,
DUPLICATE_SAME_ACCESS | DUPLICATE_CLOSE_SOURCE);
/*
* Same as above, but for the error side.
*/
CreatePipe(&Err.pipe, &h, &sa, 0);
DuplicateHandle(hProcess, h, hProcess, &si.hStdError, 0, TRUE,
DUPLICATE_SAME_ACCESS | DUPLICATE_CLOSE_SOURCE);
/*
* Base command line.
*/
lstrcpy(cmdline, "link.exe -nologo ");
/*
* Append our option for testing.
*/
lstrcat(cmdline, option);
ok = CreateProcess(
NULL, /* Module name. */
cmdline, /* Command line. */
NULL, /* Process handle not inheritable. */
NULL, /* Thread handle not inheritable. */
TRUE, /* yes, inherit handles. */
DETACHED_PROCESS, /* No console for you. */
NULL, /* Use parent's environment block. */
NULL, /* Use parent's starting directory. */
&si, /* Pointer to STARTUPINFO structure. */
&pi); /* Pointer to PROCESS_INFORMATION structure. */
if (!ok) {
DWORD err = GetLastError();
int chars = snprintf(msg, sizeof(msg) - 1,
"Tried to launch: \"%s\", but got error [%u]: ", cmdline, err);
FormatMessage(FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_SYSTEM|FORMAT_MESSAGE_IGNORE_INSERTS|
FORMAT_MESSAGE_MAX_WIDTH_MASK, 0L, err, 0, (LPVOID)&msg[chars],
(300-chars), 0);
WriteFile(GetStdHandle(STD_ERROR_HANDLE), msg, lstrlen(msg), &err,NULL);
return 2;
}
/*
* Close our references to the write handles that have now been inherited.
*/
CloseHandle(si.hStdOutput);
CloseHandle(si.hStdError);
WaitForInputIdle(pi.hProcess, 5000);
CloseHandle(pi.hThread);
/*
* Start the pipe reader threads.
*/
pipeThreads[0] = CreateThread(NULL, 0, ReadFromPipe, &Out, 0, &threadID);
pipeThreads[1] = CreateThread(NULL, 0, ReadFromPipe, &Err, 0, &threadID);
/*
* Block waiting for the process to end.
*/
WaitForSingleObject(pi.hProcess, INFINITE);
CloseHandle(pi.hProcess);
/*
* Wait for our pipe to get done reading, should it be a little slow.
*/
WaitForMultipleObjects(2, pipeThreads, TRUE, 500);
CloseHandle(pipeThreads[0]);
CloseHandle(pipeThreads[1]);
/*
* Look for the commandline warning code in the stderr stream.
*/
return !(strstr(Out.buffer, "LNK1117") != NULL ||
strstr(Err.buffer, "LNK1117") != NULL ||
strstr(Out.buffer, "LNK4044") != NULL ||
strstr(Err.buffer, "LNK4044") != NULL);
}
static DWORD WINAPI
ReadFromPipe(
LPVOID args)
{
pipeinfo *pi = (pipeinfo *) args;
char *lastBuf = pi->buffer;
DWORD dwRead;
BOOL ok;
again:
if (lastBuf - pi->buffer + CHUNK > STATICBUFFERSIZE) {
CloseHandle(pi->pipe);
return (DWORD)-1;
}
ok = ReadFile(pi->pipe, lastBuf, CHUNK, &dwRead, 0L);
if (!ok || dwRead == 0) {
CloseHandle(pi->pipe);
return 0;
}
lastBuf += dwRead;
goto again;
return 0; /* makes the compiler happy */
}
static int
IsIn(
const char *string,
const char *substring)
{
return (strstr(string, substring) != NULL);
}
/*
* GetVersionFromFile --
* Looks for a match string in a file and then returns the version
* following the match where a version is anything acceptable to
* package provide or package ifneeded.
*/
static const char *
GetVersionFromFile(
const char *filename,
const char *match)
{
size_t cbBuffer = 100;
static char szBuffer[100];
char *szResult = NULL;
FILE *fp = fopen(filename, "rt");
if (fp != NULL) {
/*
* Read data until we see our match string.
*/
while (fgets(szBuffer, cbBuffer, fp) != NULL) {
LPSTR p, q;
p = strstr(szBuffer, match);
if (p != NULL) {
/*
* Skip to first digit.
*/
while (*p && !isdigit(*p)) {
++p;
}
/*
* Find ending whitespace.
*/
q = p;
while (*q && (isalnum(*q) || *q == '.')) {
++q;
}
memcpy(szBuffer, p, q - p);
szBuffer[q-p] = 0;
szResult = szBuffer;
break;
}
}
fclose(fp);
}
return szResult;
}
/*
* List helpers for the SubstituteFile function
*/
typedef struct list_item_t {
struct list_item_t *nextPtr;
char * key;
char * value;
} list_item_t;
/* insert a list item into the list (list may be null) */
static list_item_t *
list_insert(list_item_t **listPtrPtr, const char *key, const char *value)
{
list_item_t *itemPtr = malloc(sizeof(list_item_t));
if (itemPtr) {
itemPtr->key = strdup(key);
itemPtr->value = strdup(value);
itemPtr->nextPtr = NULL;
while(*listPtrPtr) {
listPtrPtr = &(*listPtrPtr)->nextPtr;
}
*listPtrPtr = itemPtr;
}
return itemPtr;
}
static void
list_free(list_item_t **listPtrPtr)
{
list_item_t *tmpPtr, *listPtr = *listPtrPtr;
while (listPtr) {
tmpPtr = listPtr;
listPtr = listPtr->nextPtr;
free(tmpPtr->key);
free(tmpPtr->value);
free(tmpPtr);
}
}
/*
* SubstituteFile --
* As windows doesn't provide anything useful like sed and it's unreliable
* to use the tclsh you are building against (consider x-platform builds -
* eg compiling AMD64 target from IX86) we provide a simple substitution
* option here to handle autoconf style substitutions.
* The substitution file is whitespace and line delimited. The file should
* consist of lines matching the regular expression:
* \s*\S+\s+\S*$
*
* Usage is something like:
* nmakehlp -S << $** > $@
* @PACKAGE_NAME@ $(PACKAGE_NAME)
* @PACKAGE_VERSION@ $(PACKAGE_VERSION)
* <<
*/
static int
SubstituteFile(
const char *substitutions,
const char *filename)
{
size_t cbBuffer = 1024;
static char szBuffer[1024], szCopy[1024];
char *szResult = NULL;
list_item_t *substPtr = NULL;
FILE *fp, *sp;
fp = fopen(filename, "rt");
if (fp != NULL) {
/*
* Build a list of substutitions from the first filename
*/
sp = fopen(substitutions, "rt");
if (sp != NULL) {
while (fgets(szBuffer, cbBuffer, sp) != NULL) {
unsigned char *ks, *ke, *vs, *ve;
ks = (unsigned char*)szBuffer;
while (ks && *ks && isspace(*ks)) ++ks;
ke = ks;
while (ke && *ke && !isspace(*ke)) ++ke;
vs = ke;
while (vs && *vs && isspace(*vs)) ++vs;
ve = vs;
while (ve && *ve && !(*ve == '\r' || *ve == '\n')) ++ve;
*ke = 0, *ve = 0;
list_insert(&substPtr, (char*)ks, (char*)vs);
}
fclose(sp);
}
/* debug: dump the list */
#ifdef _DEBUG
{
int n = 0;
list_item_t *p = NULL;
for (p = substPtr; p != NULL; p = p->nextPtr, ++n) {
fprintf(stderr, "% 3d '%s' => '%s'\n", n, p->key, p->value);
}
}
#endif
/*
* Run the substitutions over each line of the input
*/
while (fgets(szBuffer, cbBuffer, fp) != NULL) {
list_item_t *p = NULL;
for (p = substPtr; p != NULL; p = p->nextPtr) {
char *m = strstr(szBuffer, p->key);
if (m) {
char *cp, *op, *sp;
cp = szCopy;
op = szBuffer;
while (op != m) *cp++ = *op++;
sp = p->value;
while (sp && *sp) *cp++ = *sp++;
op += strlen(p->key);
while (*op) *cp++ = *op++;
*cp = 0;
memcpy(szBuffer, szCopy, sizeof(szCopy));
}
}
printf(szBuffer);
}
list_free(&substPtr);
}
fclose(fp);
return 0;
}
/*
* QualifyPath --
*
* This composes the current working directory with a provided path
* and returns the fully qualified and normalized path.
* Mostly needed to setup paths for testing.
*/
static int
QualifyPath(
const char *szPath)
{
char szCwd[MAX_PATH + 1];
char szTmp[MAX_PATH + 1];
char *p;
GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH, szCwd);
while ((p = strchr(szPath, '/')) && *p)
*p = '\\';
PathCombine(szTmp, szCwd, szPath);
PathCanonicalize(szCwd, szTmp);
printf("%s\n", szCwd);
return 0;
}
/*
* Local variables:
* mode: c
* c-basic-offset: 4
* fill-column: 78
* indent-tabs-mode: t
* tab-width: 8
* End:
*/

711
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/autoconf/tea/win/rules.vc
View File

@ -1,711 +0,0 @@
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# rules.vc --
#
# Microsoft Visual C++ makefile include for decoding the commandline
# macros. This file does not need editing to build Tcl.
#
# See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
# of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
#
# Copyright (c) 2001-2003 David Gravereaux.
# Copyright (c) 2003-2008 Patrick Thoyts
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
!ifndef _RULES_VC
_RULES_VC = 1
cc32 = $(CC) # built-in default.
link32 = link
lib32 = lib
rc32 = $(RC) # built-in default.
!ifndef INSTALLDIR
### Assume the normal default.
_INSTALLDIR = C:\Program Files\Tcl
!else
### Fix the path separators.
_INSTALLDIR = $(INSTALLDIR:/=\)
!endif
#----------------------------------------------------------
# Set the proper copy method to avoid overwrite questions
# to the user when copying files and selecting the right
# "delete all" method.
#----------------------------------------------------------
!if "$(OS)" == "Windows_NT"
RMDIR = rmdir /S /Q
ERRNULL = 2>NUL
!if ![ver | find "4.0" > nul]
CPY = echo y | xcopy /i >NUL
COPY = copy >NUL
!else
CPY = xcopy /i /y >NUL
COPY = copy /y >NUL
!endif
!else # "$(OS)" != "Windows_NT"
CPY = xcopy /i >_JUNK.OUT # On Win98 NUL does not work here.
COPY = copy >_JUNK.OUT # On Win98 NUL does not work here.
RMDIR = deltree /Y
NULL = \NUL # Used in testing directory existence
ERRNULL = >NUL # Win9x shell cannot redirect stderr
!endif
MKDIR = mkdir
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Determine the host and target architectures and compiler version.
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_HASH=^#
_VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE=
_VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL=
VCVER=0
!if ![echo VCVERSION=_MSC_VER > vercl.x] \
&& ![echo $(_HASH)if defined(_M_IX86) >> vercl.x] \
&& ![echo ARCH=IX86 >> vercl.x] \
&& ![echo $(_HASH)elif defined(_M_AMD64) >> vercl.x] \
&& ![echo ARCH=AMD64 >> vercl.x] \
&& ![echo $(_HASH)endif >> vercl.x] \
&& ![cl -nologo -TC -P vercl.x $(ERRNULL)]
!include vercl.i
!if ![echo VCVER= ^\> vercl.vc] \
&& ![set /a $(VCVERSION) / 100 - 6 >> vercl.vc]
!include vercl.vc
!endif
!endif
!if ![del $(ERRNUL) /q/f vercl.x vercl.i vercl.vc]
!endif
!if ![reg query HKLM\Hardware\Description\System\CentralProcessor\0 /v Identifier | findstr /i x86]
NATIVE_ARCH=IX86
!else
NATIVE_ARCH=AMD64
!endif
# Since MSVC8 we must deal with manifest resources.
!if $(VCVERSION) >= 1400
_VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_EXE=if exist $@.manifest mt -nologo -manifest $@.manifest -outputresource:$@;1
_VC_MANIFEST_EMBED_DLL=if exist $@.manifest mt -nologo -manifest $@.manifest -outputresource:$@;2
!endif
!ifndef MACHINE
MACHINE=$(ARCH)
!endif
!ifndef CFG_ENCODING
CFG_ENCODING = \"cp1252\"
!endif
!message ===============================================================================
#----------------------------------------------------------
# build the helper app we need to overcome nmake's limiting
# environment.
#----------------------------------------------------------
!if !exist(nmakehlp.exe)
!if [$(cc32) -nologo nmakehlp.c -link -subsystem:console > nul]
!endif
!endif
#----------------------------------------------------------
# Test for compiler features
#----------------------------------------------------------
### test for optimizations
!if [nmakehlp -c -Ot]
!message *** Compiler has 'Optimizations'
OPTIMIZING = 1
!else
!message *** Compiler does not have 'Optimizations'
OPTIMIZING = 0
!endif
OPTIMIZATIONS =
!if [nmakehlp -c -Ot]
OPTIMIZATIONS = $(OPTIMIZATIONS) -Ot
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -c -Oi]
OPTIMIZATIONS = $(OPTIMIZATIONS) -Oi
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -c -Op]
OPTIMIZATIONS = $(OPTIMIZATIONS) -Op
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -c -fp:strict]
OPTIMIZATIONS = $(OPTIMIZATIONS) -fp:strict
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -c -Gs]
OPTIMIZATIONS = $(OPTIMIZATIONS) -Gs
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -c -GS]
OPTIMIZATIONS = $(OPTIMIZATIONS) -GS
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -c -GL]
OPTIMIZATIONS = $(OPTIMIZATIONS) -GL
!endif
DEBUGFLAGS =
!if [nmakehlp -c -RTC1]
DEBUGFLAGS = $(DEBUGFLAGS) -RTC1
!elseif [nmakehlp -c -GZ]
DEBUGFLAGS = $(DEBUGFLAGS) -GZ
!endif
COMPILERFLAGS =-W3 -DUNICODE -D_UNICODE
# In v13 -GL and -YX are incompatible.
!if [nmakehlp -c -YX]
!if ![nmakehlp -c -GL]
OPTIMIZATIONS = $(OPTIMIZATIONS) -YX
!endif
!endif
!if "$(MACHINE)" == "IX86"
### test for pentium errata
!if [nmakehlp -c -QI0f]
!message *** Compiler has 'Pentium 0x0f fix'
COMPILERFLAGS = $(COMPILERFLAGS) -QI0f
!else
!message *** Compiler does not have 'Pentium 0x0f fix'
!endif
!endif
!if "$(MACHINE)" == "IA64"
### test for Itanium errata
!if [nmakehlp -c -QIA64_Bx]
!message *** Compiler has 'B-stepping errata workarounds'
COMPILERFLAGS = $(COMPILERFLAGS) -QIA64_Bx
!else
!message *** Compiler does not have 'B-stepping errata workarounds'
!endif
!endif
!if "$(MACHINE)" == "IX86"
### test for -align:4096, when align:512 will do.
!if [nmakehlp -l -opt:nowin98]
!message *** Linker has 'Win98 alignment problem'
ALIGN98_HACK = 1
!else
!message *** Linker does not have 'Win98 alignment problem'
ALIGN98_HACK = 0
!endif
!else
ALIGN98_HACK = 0
!endif
LINKERFLAGS =
!if [nmakehlp -l -ltcg]
LINKERFLAGS =-ltcg
!endif
#----------------------------------------------------------
# Decode the options requested.
#----------------------------------------------------------
!if "$(OPTS)" == "" || [nmakehlp -f "$(OPTS)" "none"]
STATIC_BUILD = 0
TCL_THREADS = 1
DEBUG = 0
SYMBOLS = 0
PROFILE = 0
PGO = 0
MSVCRT = 0
LOIMPACT = 0
TCL_USE_STATIC_PACKAGES = 0
USE_THREAD_ALLOC = 1
UNCHECKED = 0
!else
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "static"]
!message *** Doing static
STATIC_BUILD = 1
!else
STATIC_BUILD = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "msvcrt"]
!message *** Doing msvcrt
MSVCRT = 1
!else
MSVCRT = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "staticpkg"]
!message *** Doing staticpkg
TCL_USE_STATIC_PACKAGES = 1
!else
TCL_USE_STATIC_PACKAGES = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "nothreads"]
!message *** Compile explicitly for non-threaded tcl
TCL_THREADS = 0
!else
TCL_THREADS = 1
USE_THREAD_ALLOC= 1
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "symbols"]
!message *** Doing symbols
DEBUG = 1
!else
DEBUG = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "pdbs"]
!message *** Doing pdbs
SYMBOLS = 1
!else
SYMBOLS = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "profile"]
!message *** Doing profile
PROFILE = 1
!else
PROFILE = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "pgi"]
!message *** Doing profile guided optimization instrumentation
PGO = 1
!elseif [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "pgo"]
!message *** Doing profile guided optimization
PGO = 2
!else
PGO = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "loimpact"]
!message *** Doing loimpact
LOIMPACT = 1
!else
LOIMPACT = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "thrdalloc"]
!message *** Doing thrdalloc
USE_THREAD_ALLOC = 1
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "tclalloc"]
!message *** Doing tclalloc
USE_THREAD_ALLOC = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(OPTS) "unchecked"]
!message *** Doing unchecked
UNCHECKED = 1
!else
UNCHECKED = 0
!endif
!endif
!if !$(STATIC_BUILD)
# Make sure we don't build overly fat DLLs.
MSVCRT = 1
# We shouldn't statically put the extensions inside the shell when dynamic.
TCL_USE_STATIC_PACKAGES = 0
!endif
#----------------------------------------------------------
# Figure-out how to name our intermediate and output directories.
# We wouldn't want different builds to use the same .obj files
# by accident.
#----------------------------------------------------------
#----------------------------------------
# Naming convention:
# t = full thread support.
# s = static library (as opposed to an
# import library)
# g = linked to the debug enabled C
# run-time.
# x = special static build when it
# links to the dynamic C run-time.
#----------------------------------------
SUFX = tsgx
!if $(DEBUG)
BUILDDIRTOP = Debug
!else
BUILDDIRTOP = Release
!endif
!if "$(MACHINE)" != "IX86"
BUILDDIRTOP =$(BUILDDIRTOP)_$(MACHINE)
!endif
!if $(VCVER) > 6
BUILDDIRTOP =$(BUILDDIRTOP)_VC$(VCVER)
!endif
!if !$(DEBUG) || $(DEBUG) && $(UNCHECKED)
SUFX = $(SUFX:g=)
!endif
TMP_DIRFULL = .\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\$(PROJECT)_ThreadedDynamicStaticX
!if !$(STATIC_BUILD)
TMP_DIRFULL = $(TMP_DIRFULL:Static=)
SUFX = $(SUFX:s=)
EXT = dll
!if $(MSVCRT)
TMP_DIRFULL = $(TMP_DIRFULL:X=)
SUFX = $(SUFX:x=)
!endif
!else
TMP_DIRFULL = $(TMP_DIRFULL:Dynamic=)
EXT = lib
!if !$(MSVCRT)
TMP_DIRFULL = $(TMP_DIRFULL:X=)
SUFX = $(SUFX:x=)
!endif
!endif
!if !$(TCL_THREADS)
TMP_DIRFULL = $(TMP_DIRFULL:Threaded=)
SUFX = $(SUFX:t=)
!endif
!ifndef TMP_DIR
TMP_DIR = $(TMP_DIRFULL)
!ifndef OUT_DIR
OUT_DIR = .\$(BUILDDIRTOP)
!endif
!else
!ifndef OUT_DIR
OUT_DIR = $(TMP_DIR)
!endif
!endif
#----------------------------------------------------------
# Decode the statistics requested.
#----------------------------------------------------------
!if "$(STATS)" == "" || [nmakehlp -f "$(STATS)" "none"]
TCL_MEM_DEBUG = 0
TCL_COMPILE_DEBUG = 0
!else
!if [nmakehlp -f $(STATS) "memdbg"]
!message *** Doing memdbg
TCL_MEM_DEBUG = 1
!else
TCL_MEM_DEBUG = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(STATS) "compdbg"]
!message *** Doing compdbg
TCL_COMPILE_DEBUG = 1
!else
TCL_COMPILE_DEBUG = 0
!endif
!endif
#----------------------------------------------------------
# Decode the checks requested.
#----------------------------------------------------------
!if "$(CHECKS)" == "" || [nmakehlp -f "$(CHECKS)" "none"]
TCL_NO_DEPRECATED = 0
WARNINGS = -W3
!else
!if [nmakehlp -f $(CHECKS) "nodep"]
!message *** Doing nodep check
TCL_NO_DEPRECATED = 1
!else
TCL_NO_DEPRECATED = 0
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(CHECKS) "fullwarn"]
!message *** Doing full warnings check
WARNINGS = -W4
!if [nmakehlp -l -warn:3]
LINKERFLAGS = $(LINKERFLAGS) -warn:3
!endif
!else
WARNINGS = -W3
!endif
!if [nmakehlp -f $(CHECKS) "64bit"] && [nmakehlp -c -Wp64]
!message *** Doing 64bit portability warnings
WARNINGS = $(WARNINGS) -Wp64
!endif
!endif
!if $(PGO) > 1
!if [nmakehlp -l -ltcg:pgoptimize]
LINKERFLAGS = $(LINKERFLAGS:-ltcg=) -ltcg:pgoptimize
!else
MSG=^
This compiler does not support profile guided optimization.
!error $(MSG)
!endif
!elseif $(PGO) > 0
!if [nmakehlp -l -ltcg:pginstrument]
LINKERFLAGS = $(LINKERFLAGS:-ltcg=) -ltcg:pginstrument
!else
MSG=^
This compiler does not support profile guided optimization.
!error $(MSG)
!endif
!endif
#----------------------------------------------------------
# Set our defines now armed with our options.
#----------------------------------------------------------
OPTDEFINES = -DTCL_CFGVAL_ENCODING=$(CFG_ENCODING) -DSTDC_HEADERS
!if $(TCL_MEM_DEBUG)
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DTCL_MEM_DEBUG
!endif
!if $(TCL_COMPILE_DEBUG)
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DTCL_COMPILE_DEBUG -DTCL_COMPILE_STATS
!endif
!if $(TCL_THREADS)
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DTCL_THREADS=1
!if $(USE_THREAD_ALLOC)
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DUSE_THREAD_ALLOC=1
!endif
!endif
!if $(STATIC_BUILD)
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DSTATIC_BUILD
!endif
!if $(TCL_NO_DEPRECATED)
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DTCL_NO_DEPRECATED
!endif
!if !$(DEBUG)
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DNDEBUG
!if $(OPTIMIZING)
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DTCL_CFG_OPTIMIZED
!endif
!endif
!if $(PROFILE)
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DTCL_CFG_PROFILED
!endif
!if "$(MACHINE)" == "IA64" || "$(MACHINE)" == "AMD64"
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DTCL_CFG_DO64BIT
!endif
!if $(VCVERSION) < 1300
OPTDEFINES = $(OPTDEFINES) -DNO_STRTOI64
!endif
#----------------------------------------------------------
# Locate the Tcl headers to build against
#----------------------------------------------------------
!if "$(PROJECT)" == "tcl"
_TCL_H = ..\generic\tcl.h
!else
# If INSTALLDIR set to tcl root dir then reset to the lib dir.
!if exist("$(_INSTALLDIR)\include\tcl.h")
_INSTALLDIR=$(_INSTALLDIR)\lib
!endif
!if !defined(TCLDIR)
!if exist("$(_INSTALLDIR)\..\include\tcl.h")
TCLINSTALL = 1
_TCLDIR = $(_INSTALLDIR)\..
_TCL_H = $(_INSTALLDIR)\..\include\tcl.h
TCLDIR = $(_INSTALLDIR)\..
!else
MSG=^
Failed to find tcl.h. Set the TCLDIR macro.
!error $(MSG)
!endif
!else
_TCLDIR = $(TCLDIR:/=\)
!if exist("$(_TCLDIR)\include\tcl.h")
TCLINSTALL = 1
_TCL_H = $(_TCLDIR)\include\tcl.h
!elseif exist("$(_TCLDIR)\generic\tcl.h")
TCLINSTALL = 0
_TCL_H = $(_TCLDIR)\generic\tcl.h
!else
MSG =^
Failed to find tcl.h. The TCLDIR macro does not appear correct.
!error $(MSG)
!endif
!endif
!endif
#--------------------------------------------------------------
# Extract various version numbers from tcl headers
# The generated file is then included in the makefile.
#--------------------------------------------------------------
!if [echo REM = This file is generated from rules.vc > versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo TCL_MAJOR_VERSION = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V "$(_TCL_H)" TCL_MAJOR_VERSION >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo TCL_MINOR_VERSION = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V "$(_TCL_H)" TCL_MINOR_VERSION >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo TCL_PATCH_LEVEL = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V "$(_TCL_H)" TCL_PATCH_LEVEL >> versions.vc]
!endif
# If building the tcl core then we need additional package versions
!if "$(PROJECT)" == "tcl"
!if [echo PKG_HTTP_VER = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V ..\library\http\pkgIndex.tcl http >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo PKG_TCLTEST_VER = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V ..\library\tcltest\pkgIndex.tcl tcltest >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo PKG_MSGCAT_VER = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V ..\library\msgcat\pkgIndex.tcl msgcat >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo PKG_PLATFORM_VER = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V ..\library\platform\pkgIndex.tcl "platform " >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo PKG_SHELL_VER = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V ..\library\platform\pkgIndex.tcl "platform::shell" >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo PKG_DDE_VER = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V ..\library\dde\pkgIndex.tcl "dde " >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo PKG_REG_VER =\>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V ..\library\reg\pkgIndex.tcl registry >> versions.vc]
!endif
!endif
!include versions.vc
#--------------------------------------------------------------
# Setup tcl version dependent stuff headers
#--------------------------------------------------------------
!if "$(PROJECT)" != "tcl"
TCL_VERSION = $(TCL_MAJOR_VERSION)$(TCL_MINOR_VERSION)
!if $(TCL_VERSION) < 81
TCL_DOES_STUBS = 0
!else
TCL_DOES_STUBS = 1
!endif
!if $(TCLINSTALL)
TCLSH = "$(_TCLDIR)\bin\tclsh$(TCL_VERSION)$(SUFX).exe"
!if !exist($(TCLSH)) && $(TCL_THREADS)
TCLSH = "$(_TCLDIR)\bin\tclsh$(TCL_VERSION)t$(SUFX).exe"
!endif
TCLSTUBLIB = "$(_TCLDIR)\lib\tclstub$(TCL_VERSION).lib"
TCLIMPLIB = "$(_TCLDIR)\lib\tcl$(TCL_VERSION)$(SUFX).lib"
TCL_LIBRARY = $(_TCLDIR)\lib
TCLREGLIB = "$(_TCLDIR)\lib\tclreg13$(SUFX:t=).lib"
TCLDDELIB = "$(_TCLDIR)\lib\tcldde14$(SUFX:t=).lib"
COFFBASE = \must\have\tcl\sources\to\build\this\target
TCLTOOLSDIR = \must\have\tcl\sources\to\build\this\target
TCL_INCLUDES = -I"$(_TCLDIR)\include"
!else
TCLSH = "$(_TCLDIR)\win\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\tclsh$(TCL_VERSION)$(SUFX).exe"
!if !exist($(TCLSH)) && $(TCL_THREADS)
TCLSH = "$(_TCLDIR)\win\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\tclsh$(TCL_VERSION)t$(SUFX).exe"
!endif
TCLSTUBLIB = "$(_TCLDIR)\win\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\tclstub$(TCL_VERSION).lib"
TCLIMPLIB = "$(_TCLDIR)\win\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\tcl$(TCL_VERSION)$(SUFX).lib"
TCL_LIBRARY = $(_TCLDIR)\library
TCLREGLIB = "$(_TCLDIR)\win\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\tclreg13$(SUFX:t=).lib"
TCLDDELIB = "$(_TCLDIR)\win\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\tcldde14$(SUFX:t=).lib"
COFFBASE = "$(_TCLDIR)\win\coffbase.txt"
TCLTOOLSDIR = $(_TCLDIR)\tools
TCL_INCLUDES = -I"$(_TCLDIR)\generic" -I"$(_TCLDIR)\win"
!endif
!endif
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Locate the Tk headers to build against
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
!if "$(PROJECT)" == "tk"
_TK_H = ..\generic\tk.h
_INSTALLDIR = $(_INSTALLDIR)\..
!endif
!ifdef PROJECT_REQUIRES_TK
!if !defined(TKDIR)
!if exist("$(_INSTALLDIR)\..\include\tk.h")
TKINSTALL = 1
_TKDIR = $(_INSTALLDIR)\..
_TK_H = $(_TKDIR)\include\tk.h
TKDIR = $(_TKDIR)
!elseif exist("$(_TCLDIR)\include\tk.h")
TKINSTALL = 1
_TKDIR = $(_TCLDIR)
_TK_H = $(_TKDIR)\include\tk.h
TKDIR = $(_TKDIR)
!endif
!else
_TKDIR = $(TKDIR:/=\)
!if exist("$(_TKDIR)\include\tk.h")
TKINSTALL = 1
_TK_H = $(_TKDIR)\include\tk.h
!elseif exist("$(_TKDIR)\generic\tk.h")
TKINSTALL = 0
_TK_H = $(_TKDIR)\generic\tk.h
!else
MSG =^
Failed to find tk.h. The TKDIR macro does not appear correct.
!error $(MSG)
!endif
!endif
!endif
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Extract Tk version numbers
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
!if defined(PROJECT_REQUIRES_TK) || "$(PROJECT)" == "tk"
!if [echo TK_MAJOR_VERSION = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V $(_TK_H) TK_MAJOR_VERSION >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo TK_MINOR_VERSION = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V $(_TK_H) TK_MINOR_VERSION >> versions.vc]
!endif
!if [echo TK_PATCH_LEVEL = \>> versions.vc] \
&& [nmakehlp -V $(_TK_H) TK_PATCH_LEVEL >> versions.vc]
!endif
!include versions.vc
TK_DOTVERSION = $(TK_MAJOR_VERSION).$(TK_MINOR_VERSION)
TK_VERSION = $(TK_MAJOR_VERSION)$(TK_MINOR_VERSION)
!if "$(PROJECT)" != "tk"
!if $(TKINSTALL)
WISH = "$(_TKDIR)\bin\wish$(TK_VERSION)$(SUFX).exe"
TKSTUBLIB = "$(_TKDIR)\lib\tkstub$(TK_VERSION).lib"
TKIMPLIB = "$(_TKDIR)\lib\tk$(TK_VERSION)$(SUFX).lib"
TK_INCLUDES = -I"$(_TKDIR)\include"
!else
WISH = "$(_TKDIR)\win\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\wish$(TCL_VERSION)$(SUFX).exe"
TKSTUBLIB = "$(_TKDIR)\win\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\tkstub$(TCL_VERSION).lib"
TKIMPLIB = "$(_TKDIR)\win\$(BUILDDIRTOP)\tk$(TCL_VERSION)$(SUFX).lib"
TK_INCLUDES = -I"$(_TKDIR)\generic" -I"$(_TKDIR)\win" -I"$(_TKDIR)\xlib"
!endif
!endif
!endif
#----------------------------------------------------------
# Display stats being used.
#----------------------------------------------------------
!message *** Intermediate directory will be '$(TMP_DIR)'
!message *** Output directory will be '$(OUT_DIR)'
!message *** Suffix for binaries will be '$(SUFX)'
!message *** Optional defines are '$(OPTDEFINES)'
!message *** Compiler version $(VCVER). Target machine is $(MACHINE)
!message *** Host architecture is $(NATIVE_ARCH)
!message *** Compiler options '$(COMPILERFLAGS) $(OPTIMIZATIONS) $(DEBUGFLAGS) $(WARNINGS)'
!message *** Link options '$(LINKERFLAGS)'
!endif

1535
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/config.guess vendored
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

119
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/config.h.in
View File

@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
/* config.h.in. Generated from configure.ac by autoheader. */
/* Define to 1 if you have the <dlfcn.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_DLFCN_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the `fdatasync' function. */
#undef HAVE_FDATASYNC
/* Define to 1 if you have the `gmtime_r' function. */
#undef HAVE_GMTIME_R
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `int16_t'. */
#undef HAVE_INT16_T
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `int32_t'. */
#undef HAVE_INT32_T
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `int64_t'. */
#undef HAVE_INT64_T
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `int8_t'. */
#undef HAVE_INT8_T
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `intptr_t'. */
#undef HAVE_INTPTR_T
/* Define to 1 if you have the <inttypes.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_INTTYPES_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the `isnan' function. */
#undef HAVE_ISNAN
/* Define to 1 if you have the `localtime_r' function. */
#undef HAVE_LOCALTIME_R
/* Define to 1 if you have the `localtime_s' function. */
#undef HAVE_LOCALTIME_S
/* Define to 1 if you have the <malloc.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_MALLOC_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the `malloc_usable_size' function. */
#undef HAVE_MALLOC_USABLE_SIZE
/* Define to 1 if you have the <memory.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_MEMORY_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the <stdint.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_STDINT_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the <stdlib.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_STDLIB_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the strchrnul() function */
#undef HAVE_STRCHRNUL
/* Define to 1 if you have the <strings.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_STRINGS_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the <string.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_STRING_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the <sys/stat.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_SYS_STAT_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the <sys/types.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_SYS_TYPES_H
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `uint16_t'. */
#undef HAVE_UINT16_T
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `uint32_t'. */
#undef HAVE_UINT32_T
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `uint64_t'. */
#undef HAVE_UINT64_T
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `uint8_t'. */
#undef HAVE_UINT8_T
/* Define to 1 if the system has the type `uintptr_t'. */
#undef HAVE_UINTPTR_T
/* Define to 1 if you have the <unistd.h> header file. */
#undef HAVE_UNISTD_H
/* Define to 1 if you have the `usleep' function. */
#undef HAVE_USLEEP
/* Define to 1 if you have the utime() library function. */
#undef HAVE_UTIME
/* Define to the sub-directory in which libtool stores uninstalled libraries.
*/
#undef LT_OBJDIR
/* Define to the address where bug reports for this package should be sent. */
#undef PACKAGE_BUGREPORT
/* Define to the full name of this package. */
#undef PACKAGE_NAME
/* Define to the full name and version of this package. */
#undef PACKAGE_STRING
/* Define to the one symbol short name of this package. */
#undef PACKAGE_TARNAME
/* Define to the version of this package. */
#undef PACKAGE_VERSION
/* Define to 1 if you have the ANSI C header files. */
#undef STDC_HEADERS
/* Number of bits in a file offset, on hosts where this is settable. */
#undef _FILE_OFFSET_BITS
/* Define for large files, on AIX-style hosts. */
#undef _LARGE_FILES

1644
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/config.sub vendored
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

13777
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/configure vendored
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

702
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/configure.ac
View File

@ -1,702 +0,0 @@
#
# The build process allows for using a cross-compiler. But the default
# action is to target the same platform that we are running on. The
# configure script needs to discover the following properties of the
# build and target systems:
#
# srcdir
#
# The is the name of the directory that contains the
# "configure" shell script. All source files are
# located relative to this directory.
#
# bindir
#
# The name of the directory where executables should be
# written by the "install" target of the makefile.
#
# program_prefix
#
# Add this prefix to the names of all executables that run
# on the target machine. Default: ""
#
# ENABLE_SHARED
#
# True if shared libraries should be generated.
#
# BUILD_CC
#
# The name of a command that is used to convert C
# source files into executables that run on the build
# platform.
#
# BUILD_CFLAGS
#
# Switches that the build compiler needs in order to construct
# command-line programs.
#
# BUILD_LIBS
#
# Libraries that the build compiler needs in order to construct
# command-line programs.
#
# BUILD_EXEEXT
#
# The filename extension for executables on the build
# platform. "" for Unix and ".exe" for Windows.
#
# TCL_*
#
# Lots of values are read in from the tclConfig.sh script,
# if that script is available. This values are used for
# constructing and installing the TCL extension.
#
# TARGET_READLINE_LIBS
#
# This is the library directives passed to the target linker
# that cause the executable to link against the readline library.
# This might be a switch like "-lreadline" or pathnames of library
# file like "../../src/libreadline.a".
#
# TARGET_READLINE_INC
#
# This variables define the directory that contain header
# files for the readline library. If the compiler is able
# to find <readline.h> on its own, then this can be blank.
#
# TARGET_EXEEXT
#
# The filename extension for executables on the
# target platform. "" for Unix and ".exe" for windows.
#
# This configure.in file is easy to reuse on other projects. Just
# change the argument to AC_INIT(). And disable any features that
# you don't need (for example BLT) by erasing or commenting out
# the corresponding code.
#
AC_INIT(sqlite, m4_esyscmd([cat VERSION | tr -d '\n']))
dnl Make sure the local VERSION file matches this configure script
sqlite_version_sanity_check=`cat $srcdir/VERSION | tr -d '\n'`
if test "$PACKAGE_VERSION" != "$sqlite_version_sanity_check" ; then
AC_MSG_ERROR([configure script is out of date:
configure \$PACKAGE_VERSION = $PACKAGE_VERSION
top level VERSION file = $sqlite_version_sanity_check
please regen with autoconf])
fi
#########
# Programs needed
#
AC_PROG_LIBTOOL
AC_PROG_INSTALL
#########
# Enable large file support (if special flags are necessary)
#
AC_SYS_LARGEFILE
#########
# Check for needed/wanted data types
AC_CHECK_TYPES([int8_t, int16_t, int32_t, int64_t, intptr_t, uint8_t,
uint16_t, uint32_t, uint64_t, uintptr_t])
#########
# Check for needed/wanted headers
AC_CHECK_HEADERS([sys/types.h stdlib.h stdint.h inttypes.h malloc.h])
#########
# Figure out whether or not we have these functions
#
AC_CHECK_FUNCS([fdatasync gmtime_r isnan localtime_r localtime_s malloc_usable_size strchrnul usleep utime])
#########
# By default, we use the amalgamation (this may be changed below...)
#
USE_AMALGAMATION=1
#########
# See whether we can run specific tclsh versions known to work well;
# if not, then we fall back to plain tclsh.
# TODO: try other versions before falling back?
#
AC_CHECK_PROGS(TCLSH_CMD, [tclsh8.6 tclsh8.5 tclsh], none)
if test "$TCLSH_CMD" = "none"; then
# If we can't find a local tclsh, then building the amalgamation will fail.
# We act as though --disable-amalgamation has been used.
echo "Warning: can't find tclsh - defaulting to non-amalgamation build."
USE_AMALGAMATION=0
TCLSH_CMD="tclsh"
fi
AC_SUBST(TCLSH_CMD)
AC_ARG_VAR([TCLLIBDIR], [Where to install tcl plugin])
if test "x${TCLLIBDIR+set}" != "xset" ; then
TCLLIBDIR='$(libdir)'
for i in `echo 'puts stdout $auto_path' | ${TCLSH_CMD}` ; do
TCLLIBDIR=$i
break
done
TCLLIBDIR="${TCLLIBDIR}/sqlite3"
fi
#########
# Set up an appropriate program prefix
#
if test "$program_prefix" = "NONE"; then
program_prefix=""
fi
AC_SUBST(program_prefix)
VERSION=[`cat $srcdir/VERSION | sed 's/^\([0-9]*\.*[0-9]*\).*/\1/'`]
AC_MSG_NOTICE(Version set to $VERSION)
AC_SUBST(VERSION)
RELEASE=`cat $srcdir/VERSION`
AC_MSG_NOTICE(Release set to $RELEASE)
AC_SUBST(RELEASE)
VERSION_NUMBER=[`cat $srcdir/VERSION \
| sed 's/[^0-9]/ /g' \
| awk '{printf "%d%03d%03d",$1,$2,$3}'`]
AC_MSG_NOTICE(Version number set to $VERSION_NUMBER)
AC_SUBST(VERSION_NUMBER)
#########
# Locate a compiler for the build machine. This compiler should
# generate command-line programs that run on the build machine.
#
if test x"$cross_compiling" = xno; then
BUILD_CC=$CC
BUILD_CFLAGS=$CFLAGS
else
if test "${BUILD_CC+set}" != set; then
AC_CHECK_PROGS(BUILD_CC, gcc cc cl)
fi
if test "${BUILD_CFLAGS+set}" != set; then
BUILD_CFLAGS="-g"
fi
fi
AC_SUBST(BUILD_CC)
##########
# Do we want to support multithreaded use of sqlite
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(threadsafe,
AC_HELP_STRING([--disable-threadsafe],[Disable mutexing]),,enable_threadsafe=yes)
AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to support threadsafe operation])
if test "$enable_threadsafe" = "no"; then
SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0
AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
else
SQLITE_THREADSAFE=1
AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
fi
AC_SUBST(SQLITE_THREADSAFE)
if test "$SQLITE_THREADSAFE" = "1"; then
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(pthread_create, pthread)
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(pthread_mutexattr_init, pthread)
fi
##########
# Do we want to support release
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(releasemode,
AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-releasemode],[Support libtool link to release mode]),,enable_releasemode=no)
AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to support shared library linked as release mode or not])
if test "$enable_releasemode" = "no"; then
ALLOWRELEASE=""
AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
else
ALLOWRELEASE="-release `cat $srcdir/VERSION`"
AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
fi
AC_SUBST(ALLOWRELEASE)
##########
# Do we want temporary databases in memory
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(tempstore,
AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-tempstore],[Use an in-ram database for temporary tables (never,no,yes,always)]),,enable_tempstore=no)
AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to use an in-ram database for temporary tables])
case "$enable_tempstore" in
never )
TEMP_STORE=0
AC_MSG_RESULT([never])
;;
no )
TEMP_STORE=1
AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
;;
yes )
TEMP_STORE=2
AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
;;
always )
TEMP_STORE=3
AC_MSG_RESULT([always])
;;
* )
TEMP_STORE=1
AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
;;
esac
AC_SUBST(TEMP_STORE)
###########
# Lots of things are different if we are compiling for Windows using
# the CYGWIN environment. So check for that special case and handle
# things accordingly.
#
AC_MSG_CHECKING([if executables have the .exe suffix])
if test "$config_BUILD_EXEEXT" = ".exe"; then
CYGWIN=yes
AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
else
AC_MSG_RESULT(unknown)
fi
if test "$CYGWIN" != "yes"; then
AC_CYGWIN
fi
if test "$CYGWIN" = "yes"; then
BUILD_EXEEXT=.exe
else
BUILD_EXEEXT=$EXEEXT
fi
if test x"$cross_compiling" = xno; then
TARGET_EXEEXT=$BUILD_EXEEXT
else
TARGET_EXEEXT=$config_TARGET_EXEEXT
fi
if test "$TARGET_EXEEXT" = ".exe"; then
SQLITE_OS_UNIX=0
SQLITE_OS_WIN=1
CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -DSQLITE_OS_WIN=1"
else
SQLITE_OS_UNIX=1
SQLITE_OS_WIN=0
CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -DSQLITE_OS_UNIX=1"
fi
AC_SUBST(BUILD_EXEEXT)
AC_SUBST(SQLITE_OS_UNIX)
AC_SUBST(SQLITE_OS_WIN)
AC_SUBST(TARGET_EXEEXT)
##########
# Figure out all the parameters needed to compile against Tcl.
#
# This code is derived from the SC_PATH_TCLCONFIG and SC_LOAD_TCLCONFIG
# macros in the in the tcl.m4 file of the standard TCL distribution.
# Those macros could not be used directly since we have to make some
# minor changes to accomodate systems that do not have TCL installed.
#
AC_ARG_ENABLE(tcl, AC_HELP_STRING([--disable-tcl],[do not build TCL extension]),
[use_tcl=$enableval],[use_tcl=yes])
if test "${use_tcl}" = "yes" ; then
AC_ARG_WITH(tcl, AC_HELP_STRING([--with-tcl=DIR],[directory containing tcl configuration (tclConfig.sh)]), with_tclconfig=${withval})
AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Tcl configuration])
AC_CACHE_VAL(ac_cv_c_tclconfig,[
# First check to see if --with-tcl was specified.
if test x"${with_tclconfig}" != x ; then
if test -f "${with_tclconfig}/tclConfig.sh" ; then
ac_cv_c_tclconfig=`(cd ${with_tclconfig}; pwd)`
else
AC_MSG_ERROR([${with_tclconfig} directory doesn't contain tclConfig.sh])
fi
fi
# Start autosearch by asking tclsh
if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
if test x"$cross_compiling" = xno; then
for i in `echo 'puts stdout $auto_path' | ${TCLSH_CMD}`
do
if test -f "$i/tclConfig.sh" ; then
ac_cv_c_tclconfig="$i"
break
fi
done
fi
fi
# On ubuntu 14.10, $auto_path on tclsh is not quite correct.
# So try again after applying corrections.
if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
if test x"$cross_compiling" = xno; then
for i in `echo 'puts stdout $auto_path' | ${TCLSH_CMD} | sed 's,/tcltk/tcl,/tcl,g'`
do
if test -f "$i/tclConfig.sh" ; then
ac_cv_c_tclconfig="$i"
break
fi
done
fi
fi
# then check for a private Tcl installation
if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
for i in \
../tcl \
`ls -dr ../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -dr ../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -dr ../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
../../tcl \
`ls -dr ../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -dr ../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -dr ../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
../../../tcl \
`ls -dr ../../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -dr ../../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -dr ../../../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null`
do
if test -f "$i/unix/tclConfig.sh" ; then
ac_cv_c_tclconfig=`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`
break
fi
done
fi
# check in a few common install locations
if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
for i in \
`ls -d ${libdir} 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -d /usr/local/lib 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -d /usr/contrib/lib 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -d /usr/lib 2>/dev/null`
do
if test -f "$i/tclConfig.sh" ; then
ac_cv_c_tclconfig=`(cd $i; pwd)`
break
fi
done
fi
# check in a few other private locations
if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
for i in \
${srcdir}/../tcl \
`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]] 2>/dev/null` \
`ls -dr ${srcdir}/../tcl[[8-9]].[[0-9]]* 2>/dev/null`
do
if test -f "$i/unix/tclConfig.sh" ; then
ac_cv_c_tclconfig=`(cd $i/unix; pwd)`
break
fi
done
fi
])
if test x"${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}" = x ; then
use_tcl=no
AC_MSG_WARN(Can't find Tcl configuration definitions)
AC_MSG_WARN(*** Without Tcl the regression tests cannot be executed ***)
AC_MSG_WARN(*** Consider using --with-tcl=... to define location of Tcl ***)
else
TCL_BIN_DIR=${ac_cv_c_tclconfig}
AC_MSG_RESULT(found $TCL_BIN_DIR/tclConfig.sh)
AC_MSG_CHECKING([for existence of $TCL_BIN_DIR/tclConfig.sh])
if test -f "$TCL_BIN_DIR/tclConfig.sh" ; then
AC_MSG_RESULT([loading])
. $TCL_BIN_DIR/tclConfig.sh
else
AC_MSG_RESULT([file not found])
fi
#
# If the TCL_BIN_DIR is the build directory (not the install directory),
# then set the common variable name to the value of the build variables.
# For example, the variable TCL_LIB_SPEC will be set to the value
# of TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC. An extension should make use of TCL_LIB_SPEC
# instead of TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC since it will work with both an
# installed and uninstalled version of Tcl.
#
if test -f $TCL_BIN_DIR/Makefile ; then
TCL_LIB_SPEC=${TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC}
TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC=${TCL_BUILD_STUB_LIB_SPEC}
TCL_STUB_LIB_PATH=${TCL_BUILD_STUB_LIB_PATH}
fi
#
# eval is required to do the TCL_DBGX substitution
#
eval "TCL_LIB_FILE=\"${TCL_LIB_FILE}\""
eval "TCL_LIB_FLAG=\"${TCL_LIB_FLAG}\""
eval "TCL_LIB_SPEC=\"${TCL_LIB_SPEC}\""
eval "TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE=\"${TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE}\""
eval "TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG=\"${TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG}\""
eval "TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC=\"${TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC}\""
AC_SUBST(TCL_VERSION)
AC_SUBST(TCL_BIN_DIR)
AC_SUBST(TCL_SRC_DIR)
AC_SUBST(TCL_INCLUDE_SPEC)
AC_SUBST(TCL_LIB_FILE)
AC_SUBST(TCL_LIB_FLAG)
AC_SUBST(TCL_LIB_SPEC)
AC_SUBST(TCL_STUB_LIB_FILE)
AC_SUBST(TCL_STUB_LIB_FLAG)
AC_SUBST(TCL_STUB_LIB_SPEC)
AC_SUBST(TCL_SHLIB_SUFFIX)
fi
fi
if test "${use_tcl}" = "no" ; then
HAVE_TCL=""
else
HAVE_TCL=1
fi
AC_SUBST(HAVE_TCL)
##########
# Figure out what C libraries are required to compile programs
# that use "readline()" library.
#
TARGET_READLINE_LIBS=""
TARGET_READLINE_INC=""
TARGET_HAVE_READLINE=0
TARGET_HAVE_EDITLINE=0
AC_ARG_ENABLE([editline],
[AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-editline],[enable BSD editline support])],
[with_editline=$enableval],
[with_editline=auto])
AC_ARG_ENABLE([readline],
[AC_HELP_STRING([--disable-readline],[disable readline support])],
[with_readline=$enableval],
[with_readline=auto])
if test x"$with_editline" != xno; then
sLIBS=$LIBS
LIBS=""
TARGET_HAVE_EDITLINE=1
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(readline,edit,[with_readline=no],[TARGET_HAVE_EDITLINE=0])
TARGET_READLINE_LIBS=$LIBS
LIBS=$sLIBS
fi
if test x"$with_readline" != xno; then
found="yes"
AC_ARG_WITH([readline-lib],
[AC_HELP_STRING([--with-readline-lib],[specify readline library])],
[with_readline_lib=$withval],
[with_readline_lib="auto"])
if test "x$with_readline_lib" = xauto; then
save_LIBS="$LIBS"
LIBS=""
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(tgetent, [readline ncurses curses termcap], [term_LIBS="$LIBS"], [term_LIBS=""])
AC_CHECK_LIB([readline], [readline], [TARGET_READLINE_LIBS="-lreadline"], [found="no"])
TARGET_READLINE_LIBS="$TARGET_READLINE_LIBS $term_LIBS"
LIBS="$save_LIBS"
else
TARGET_READLINE_LIBS="$with_readline_lib"
fi
AC_ARG_WITH([readline-inc],
[AC_HELP_STRING([--with-readline-inc],[specify readline include paths])],
[with_readline_inc=$withval],
[with_readline_inc="auto"])
if test "x$with_readline_inc" = xauto; then
AC_CHECK_HEADER(readline.h, [found="yes"], [
found="no"
if test "$cross_compiling" != yes; then
for dir in /usr /usr/local /usr/local/readline /usr/contrib /mingw; do
for subdir in include include/readline; do
AC_CHECK_FILE($dir/$subdir/readline.h, found=yes)
if test "$found" = "yes"; then
TARGET_READLINE_INC="-I$dir/$subdir"
break
fi
done
test "$found" = "yes" && break
done
fi
])
else
TARGET_READLINE_INC="$with_readline_inc"
fi
if test x"$found" = xno; then
TARGET_READLINE_LIBS=""
TARGET_READLINE_INC=""
TARGET_HAVE_READLINE=0
else
TARGET_HAVE_READLINE=1
fi
fi
AC_SUBST(TARGET_READLINE_LIBS)
AC_SUBST(TARGET_READLINE_INC)
AC_SUBST(TARGET_HAVE_READLINE)
AC_SUBST(TARGET_HAVE_EDITLINE)
##########
# Figure out what C libraries are required to compile programs
# that use "fdatasync()" function.
#
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(fdatasync, [rt])
#########
# check for debug enabled
AC_ARG_ENABLE(debug, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-debug],[enable debugging & verbose explain]),
[use_debug=$enableval],[use_debug=no])
if test "${use_debug}" = "yes" ; then
TARGET_DEBUG="-DSQLITE_DEBUG=1"
else
TARGET_DEBUG="-DNDEBUG"
fi
AC_SUBST(TARGET_DEBUG)
#########
# See whether we should use the amalgamation to build
AC_ARG_ENABLE(amalgamation, AC_HELP_STRING([--disable-amalgamation],
[Disable the amalgamation and instead build all files separately]),
[use_amalgamation=$enableval],[use_amalgamation=yes])
if test "${use_amalgamation}" != "yes" ; then
USE_AMALGAMATION=0
fi
AC_SUBST(USE_AMALGAMATION)
#########
# See whether we should allow loadable extensions
AC_ARG_ENABLE(load-extension, AC_HELP_STRING([--disable-load-extension],
[Disable loading of external extensions]),
[use_loadextension=$enableval],[use_loadextension=yes])
if test "${use_loadextension}" = "yes" ; then
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS=""
AC_SEARCH_LIBS(dlopen, dl)
else
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS="-DSQLITE_OMIT_LOAD_EXTENSION=1"
fi
#########
# See whether we should enable Full Text Search extensions
AC_ARG_ENABLE(fts3, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-fts3],
[Enable the FTS3 extension]),
[enable_fts3=yes],[enable_fts3=no])
if test "${enable_fts3}" = "yes" ; then
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS+=" -DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3"
fi
AC_ARG_ENABLE(fts4, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-fts4],
[Enable the FTS4 extension]),
[enable_fts4=yes],[enable_fts4=no])
if test "${enable_fts4}" = "yes" ; then
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS+=" -DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4"
AC_SEARCH_LIBS([log],[m])
fi
AC_ARG_ENABLE(fts5, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-fts5],
[Enable the FTS5 extension]),
[enable_fts5=yes],[enable_fts5=no])
if test "${enable_fts5}" = "yes" ; then
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS+=" -DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS5"
AC_SEARCH_LIBS([log],[m])
fi
#########
# See whether we should enable JSON1
AC_ARG_ENABLE(json1, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-json1],
[Enable the JSON1 extension]),
[enable_json1=yes],[enable_json1=no])
if test "${enable_json1}" = "yes" ; then
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS+=" -DSQLITE_ENABLE_JSON1"
fi
#########
# See whether we should enable RTREE
AC_ARG_ENABLE(rtree, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-rtree],
[Enable the RTREE extension]),
[enable_rtree=yes],[enable_rtree=no])
if test "${enable_rtree}" = "yes" ; then
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS+=" -DSQLITE_ENABLE_RTREE"
fi
#########
# See whether we should enable MaxScale
AC_ARG_ENABLE(maxscale, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-maxscale],
[Enable MaxScale extensions]),
[enable_maxscale=yes],[enable_maxscale=no])
if test "${enable_maxscale}" = "yes" ; then
OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS+=" -DMAXSCALE -DSQLITE_ENABLE_UPDATE_DELETE_LIMIT -DSQLITE_OMIT_ATTACH -DSQLITE_OMIT_REINDEX -DSQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM -DSQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA"
fi
#########
# attempt to duplicate any OMITS and ENABLES into the $(OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS) parameter
for option in $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS
do
case $option in
-DSQLITE_OMIT*) OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS="$OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS $option";;
-DSQLITE_ENABLE*) OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS="$OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS $option";;
esac
done
AC_SUBST(OPT_FEATURE_FLAGS)
# attempt to remove any OMITS and ENABLES from the $(CFLAGS) parameter
ac_temp_CFLAGS=""
for option in $CFLAGS
do
case $option in
-DSQLITE_OMIT*) ;;
-DSQLITE_ENABLE*) ;;
*) ac_temp_CFLAGS="$ac_temp_CFLAGS $option";;
esac
done
CFLAGS=$ac_temp_CFLAGS
# attempt to remove any OMITS and ENABLES from the $(CPPFLAGS) parameter
ac_temp_CPPFLAGS=""
for option in $CPPFLAGS
do
case $option in
-DSQLITE_OMIT*) ;;
-DSQLITE_ENABLE*) ;;
*) ac_temp_CPPFLAGS="$ac_temp_CPPFLAGS $option";;
esac
done
CPPFLAGS=$ac_temp_CPPFLAGS
# attempt to remove any OMITS and ENABLES from the $(BUILD_CFLAGS) parameter
ac_temp_BUILD_CFLAGS=""
for option in $BUILD_CFLAGS
do
case $option in
-DSQLITE_OMIT*) ;;
-DSQLITE_ENABLE*) ;;
*) ac_temp_BUILD_CFLAGS="$ac_temp_BUILD_CFLAGS $option";;
esac
done
BUILD_CFLAGS=$ac_temp_BUILD_CFLAGS
#########
# See whether we should use GCOV
AC_ARG_ENABLE(gcov, AC_HELP_STRING([--enable-gcov],
[Enable coverage testing using gcov]),
[use_gcov=$enableval],[use_gcov=no])
if test "${use_gcov}" = "yes" ; then
USE_GCOV=1
else
USE_GCOV=0
fi
AC_SUBST(USE_GCOV)
#########
# Output the config header
AC_CONFIG_HEADERS(config.h)
#########
# Generate the output files.
#
AC_SUBST(BUILD_CFLAGS)
AC_OUTPUT([
Makefile
sqlite3.pc
])

679
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/contrib/sqlitecon.tcl
View File

@ -1,679 +0,0 @@
# A Tk console widget for SQLite. Invoke sqlitecon::create with a window name,
# a prompt string, a title to set a new top-level window, and the SQLite
# database handle. For example:
#
# sqlitecon::create .sqlcon {sql:- } {SQL Console} db
#
# A toplevel window is created that allows you to type in SQL commands to
# be processed on the spot.
#
# A limited set of dot-commands are supported:
#
# .table
# .schema ?TABLE?
# .mode list|column|multicolumn|line
# .exit
#
# In addition, a new SQL function named "edit()" is created. This function
# takes a single text argument and returns a text result. Whenever the
# the function is called, it pops up a new toplevel window containing a
# text editor screen initialized to the argument. When the "OK" button
# is pressed, whatever revised text is in the text editor is returned as
# the result of the edit() function. This allows text fields of SQL tables
# to be edited quickly and easily as follows:
#
# UPDATE table1 SET dscr = edit(dscr) WHERE rowid=15;
#
# Create a namespace to work in
#
namespace eval ::sqlitecon {
# do nothing
}
# Create a console widget named $w. The prompt string is $prompt.
# The title at the top of the window is $title. The database connection
# object is $db
#
proc sqlitecon::create {w prompt title db} {
upvar #0 $w.t v
if {[winfo exists $w]} {destroy $w}
if {[info exists v]} {unset v}
toplevel $w
wm title $w $title
wm iconname $w $title
frame $w.mb -bd 2 -relief raised
pack $w.mb -side top -fill x
menubutton $w.mb.file -text File -menu $w.mb.file.m
menubutton $w.mb.edit -text Edit -menu $w.mb.edit.m
pack $w.mb.file $w.mb.edit -side left -padx 8 -pady 1
set m [menu $w.mb.file.m -tearoff 0]
$m add command -label {Close} -command "destroy $w"
sqlitecon::create_child $w $prompt $w.mb.edit.m
set v(db) $db
$db function edit ::sqlitecon::_edit
}
# This routine creates a console as a child window within a larger
# window. It also creates an edit menu named "$editmenu" if $editmenu!="".
# The calling function is responsible for posting the edit menu.
#
proc sqlitecon::create_child {w prompt editmenu} {
upvar #0 $w.t v
if {$editmenu!=""} {
set m [menu $editmenu -tearoff 0]
$m add command -label Cut -command "sqlitecon::Cut $w.t"
$m add command -label Copy -command "sqlitecon::Copy $w.t"
$m add command -label Paste -command "sqlitecon::Paste $w.t"
$m add command -label {Clear Screen} -command "sqlitecon::Clear $w.t"
$m add separator
$m add command -label {Save As...} -command "sqlitecon::SaveFile $w.t"
catch {$editmenu config -postcommand "sqlitecon::EnableEditMenu $w"}
}
scrollbar $w.sb -orient vertical -command "$w.t yview"
pack $w.sb -side right -fill y
text $w.t -font fixed -yscrollcommand "$w.sb set"
pack $w.t -side right -fill both -expand 1
bindtags $w.t Sqlitecon
set v(editmenu) $editmenu
set v(history) 0
set v(historycnt) 0
set v(current) -1
set v(prompt) $prompt
set v(prior) {}
set v(plength) [string length $v(prompt)]
set v(x) 0
set v(y) 0
set v(mode) column
set v(header) on
$w.t mark set insert end
$w.t tag config ok -foreground blue
$w.t tag config err -foreground red
$w.t insert end $v(prompt)
$w.t mark set out 1.0
after idle "focus $w.t"
}
bind Sqlitecon <1> {sqlitecon::Button1 %W %x %y}
bind Sqlitecon <B1-Motion> {sqlitecon::B1Motion %W %x %y}
bind Sqlitecon <B1-Leave> {sqlitecon::B1Leave %W %x %y}
bind Sqlitecon <B1-Enter> {sqlitecon::cancelMotor %W}
bind Sqlitecon <ButtonRelease-1> {sqlitecon::cancelMotor %W}
bind Sqlitecon <KeyPress> {sqlitecon::Insert %W %A}
bind Sqlitecon <Left> {sqlitecon::Left %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Control-b> {sqlitecon::Left %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Right> {sqlitecon::Right %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Control-f> {sqlitecon::Right %W}
bind Sqlitecon <BackSpace> {sqlitecon::Backspace %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Control-h> {sqlitecon::Backspace %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Delete> {sqlitecon::Delete %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Control-d> {sqlitecon::Delete %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Home> {sqlitecon::Home %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Control-a> {sqlitecon::Home %W}
bind Sqlitecon <End> {sqlitecon::End %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Control-e> {sqlitecon::End %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Return> {sqlitecon::Enter %W}
bind Sqlitecon <KP_Enter> {sqlitecon::Enter %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Up> {sqlitecon::Prior %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Control-p> {sqlitecon::Prior %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Down> {sqlitecon::Next %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Control-n> {sqlitecon::Next %W}
bind Sqlitecon <Control-k> {sqlitecon::EraseEOL %W}
bind Sqlitecon <<Cut>> {sqlitecon::Cut %W}
bind Sqlitecon <<Copy>> {sqlitecon::Copy %W}
bind Sqlitecon <<Paste>> {sqlitecon::Paste %W}
bind Sqlitecon <<Clear>> {sqlitecon::Clear %W}
# Insert a single character at the insertion cursor
#
proc sqlitecon::Insert {w a} {
$w insert insert $a
$w yview insert
}
# Move the cursor one character to the left
#
proc sqlitecon::Left {w} {
upvar #0 $w v
scan [$w index insert] %d.%d row col
if {$col>$v(plength)} {
$w mark set insert "insert -1c"
}
}
# Erase the character to the left of the cursor
#
proc sqlitecon::Backspace {w} {
upvar #0 $w v
scan [$w index insert] %d.%d row col
if {$col>$v(plength)} {
$w delete {insert -1c}
}
}
# Erase to the end of the line
#
proc sqlitecon::EraseEOL {w} {
upvar #0 $w v
scan [$w index insert] %d.%d row col
if {$col>=$v(plength)} {
$w delete insert {insert lineend}
}
}
# Move the cursor one character to the right
#
proc sqlitecon::Right {w} {
$w mark set insert "insert +1c"
}
# Erase the character to the right of the cursor
#
proc sqlitecon::Delete w {
$w delete insert
}
# Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line
#
proc sqlitecon::Home w {
upvar #0 $w v
scan [$w index insert] %d.%d row col
$w mark set insert $row.$v(plength)
}
# Move the cursor to the end of the current line
#
proc sqlitecon::End w {
$w mark set insert {insert lineend}
}
# Add a line to the history
#
proc sqlitecon::addHistory {w line} {
upvar #0 $w v
if {$v(historycnt)>0} {
set last [lindex $v(history) [expr $v(historycnt)-1]]
if {[string compare $last $line]} {
lappend v(history) $line
incr v(historycnt)
}
} else {
set v(history) [list $line]
set v(historycnt) 1
}
set v(current) $v(historycnt)
}
# Called when "Enter" is pressed. Do something with the line
# of text that was entered.
#
proc sqlitecon::Enter w {
upvar #0 $w v
scan [$w index insert] %d.%d row col
set start $row.$v(plength)
set line [$w get $start "$start lineend"]
$w insert end \n
$w mark set out end
if {$v(prior)==""} {
set cmd $line
} else {
set cmd $v(prior)\n$line
}
if {[string index $cmd 0]=="." || [$v(db) complete $cmd]} {
regsub -all {\n} [string trim $cmd] { } cmd2
addHistory $w $cmd2
set rc [catch {DoCommand $w $cmd} res]
if {![winfo exists $w]} return
if {$rc} {
$w insert end $res\n err
} elseif {[string length $res]>0} {
$w insert end $res\n ok
}
set v(prior) {}
$w insert end $v(prompt)
} else {
set v(prior) $cmd
regsub -all {[^ ]} $v(prompt) . x
$w insert end $x
}
$w mark set insert end
$w mark set out {insert linestart}
$w yview insert
}
# Execute a single SQL command. Pay special attention to control
# directives that begin with "."
#
# The return value is the text output from the command, properly
# formatted.
#
proc sqlitecon::DoCommand {w cmd} {
upvar #0 $w v
set mode $v(mode)
set header $v(header)
if {[regexp {^(\.[a-z]+)} $cmd all word]} {
if {$word==".mode"} {
regexp {^.[a-z]+ +([a-z]+)} $cmd all v(mode)
return {}
} elseif {$word==".exit"} {
destroy [winfo toplevel $w]
return {}
} elseif {$word==".header"} {
regexp {^.[a-z]+ +([a-z]+)} $cmd all v(header)
return {}
} elseif {$word==".tables"} {
set mode multicolumn
set cmd {SELECT name FROM sqlite_master WHERE type='table'
UNION ALL
SELECT name FROM sqlite_temp_master WHERE type='table'}
$v(db) eval {PRAGMA database_list} {
if {$name!="temp" && $name!="main"} {
append cmd "UNION ALL SELECT name FROM $name.sqlite_master\
WHERE type='table'"
}
}
append cmd { ORDER BY 1}
} elseif {$word==".fullschema"} {
set pattern %
regexp {^.[a-z]+ +([^ ]+)} $cmd all pattern
set mode list
set header 0
set cmd "SELECT sql FROM sqlite_master WHERE tbl_name LIKE '$pattern'
AND sql NOT NULL UNION ALL SELECT sql FROM sqlite_temp_master
WHERE tbl_name LIKE '$pattern' AND sql NOT NULL"
$v(db) eval {PRAGMA database_list} {
if {$name!="temp" && $name!="main"} {
append cmd " UNION ALL SELECT sql FROM $name.sqlite_master\
WHERE tbl_name LIKE '$pattern' AND sql NOT NULL"
}
}
} elseif {$word==".schema"} {
set pattern %
regexp {^.[a-z]+ +([^ ]+)} $cmd all pattern
set mode list
set header 0
set cmd "SELECT sql FROM sqlite_master WHERE name LIKE '$pattern'
AND sql NOT NULL UNION ALL SELECT sql FROM sqlite_temp_master
WHERE name LIKE '$pattern' AND sql NOT NULL"
$v(db) eval {PRAGMA database_list} {
if {$name!="temp" && $name!="main"} {
append cmd " UNION ALL SELECT sql FROM $name.sqlite_master\
WHERE name LIKE '$pattern' AND sql NOT NULL"
}
}
} else {
return \
".exit\n.mode line|list|column\n.schema ?TABLENAME?\n.tables"
}
}
set res {}
if {$mode=="list"} {
$v(db) eval $cmd x {
set sep {}
foreach col $x(*) {
append res $sep$x($col)
set sep |
}
append res \n
}
if {[info exists x(*)] && $header} {
set sep {}
set hdr {}
foreach col $x(*) {
append hdr $sep$col
set sep |
}
set res $hdr\n$res
}
} elseif {[string range $mode 0 2]=="col"} {
set y {}
$v(db) eval $cmd x {
foreach col $x(*) {
if {![info exists cw($col)] || $cw($col)<[string length $x($col)]} {
set cw($col) [string length $x($col)]
}
lappend y $x($col)
}
}
if {[info exists x(*)] && $header} {
set hdr {}
set ln {}
set dash ---------------------------------------------------------------
append dash ------------------------------------------------------------
foreach col $x(*) {
if {![info exists cw($col)] || $cw($col)<[string length $col]} {
set cw($col) [string length $col]
}
lappend hdr $col
lappend ln [string range $dash 1 $cw($col)]
}
set y [concat $hdr $ln $y]
}
if {[info exists x(*)]} {
set format {}
set arglist {}
set arglist2 {}
set i 0
foreach col $x(*) {
lappend arglist x$i
append arglist2 " \$x$i"
incr i
append format " %-$cw($col)s"
}
set format [string trimleft $format]\n
if {[llength $arglist]>0} {
foreach $arglist $y "append res \[format [list $format] $arglist2\]"
}
}
} elseif {$mode=="multicolumn"} {
set y [$v(db) eval $cmd]
set max 0
foreach e $y {
if {$max<[string length $e]} {set max [string length $e]}
}
set ncol [expr {int(80/($max+2))}]
if {$ncol<1} {set ncol 1}
set nelem [llength $y]
set nrow [expr {($nelem+$ncol-1)/$ncol}]
set format "%-${max}s"
for {set i 0} {$i<$nrow} {incr i} {
set j $i
while 1 {
append res [format $format [lindex $y $j]]
incr j $nrow
if {$j>=$nelem} break
append res { }
}
append res \n
}
} else {
$v(db) eval $cmd x {
foreach col $x(*) {append res "$col = $x($col)\n"}
append res \n
}
}
return [string trimright $res]
}
# Change the line to the previous line
#
proc sqlitecon::Prior w {
upvar #0 $w v
if {$v(current)<=0} return
incr v(current) -1
set line [lindex $v(history) $v(current)]
sqlitecon::SetLine $w $line
}
# Change the line to the next line
#
proc sqlitecon::Next w {
upvar #0 $w v
if {$v(current)>=$v(historycnt)} return
incr v(current) 1
set line [lindex $v(history) $v(current)]
sqlitecon::SetLine $w $line
}
# Change the contents of the entry line
#
proc sqlitecon::SetLine {w line} {
upvar #0 $w v
scan [$w index insert] %d.%d row col
set start $row.$v(plength)
$w delete $start end
$w insert end $line
$w mark set insert end
$w yview insert
}
# Called when the mouse button is pressed at position $x,$y on
# the console widget.
#
proc sqlitecon::Button1 {w x y} {
global tkPriv
upvar #0 $w v
set v(mouseMoved) 0
set v(pressX) $x
set p [sqlitecon::nearestBoundry $w $x $y]
scan [$w index insert] %d.%d ix iy
scan $p %d.%d px py
if {$px==$ix} {
$w mark set insert $p
}
$w mark set anchor $p
focus $w
}
# Find the boundry between characters that is nearest
# to $x,$y
#
proc sqlitecon::nearestBoundry {w x y} {
set p [$w index @$x,$y]
set bb [$w bbox $p]
if {![string compare $bb ""]} {return $p}
if {($x-[lindex $bb 0])<([lindex $bb 2]/2)} {return $p}
$w index "$p + 1 char"
}
# This routine extends the selection to the point specified by $x,$y
#
proc sqlitecon::SelectTo {w x y} {
upvar #0 $w v
set cur [sqlitecon::nearestBoundry $w $x $y]
if {[catch {$w index anchor}]} {
$w mark set anchor $cur
}
set anchor [$w index anchor]
if {[$w compare $cur != $anchor] || (abs($v(pressX) - $x) >= 3)} {
if {$v(mouseMoved)==0} {
$w tag remove sel 0.0 end
}
set v(mouseMoved) 1
}
if {[$w compare $cur < anchor]} {
set first $cur
set last anchor
} else {
set first anchor
set last $cur
}
if {$v(mouseMoved)} {
$w tag remove sel 0.0 $first
$w tag add sel $first $last
$w tag remove sel $last end
update idletasks
}
}
# Called whenever the mouse moves while button-1 is held down.
#
proc sqlitecon::B1Motion {w x y} {
upvar #0 $w v
set v(y) $y
set v(x) $x
sqlitecon::SelectTo $w $x $y
}
# Called whenever the mouse leaves the boundries of the widget
# while button 1 is held down.
#
proc sqlitecon::B1Leave {w x y} {
upvar #0 $w v
set v(y) $y
set v(x) $x
sqlitecon::motor $w
}
# This routine is called to automatically scroll the window when
# the mouse drags offscreen.
#
proc sqlitecon::motor w {
upvar #0 $w v
if {![winfo exists $w]} return
if {$v(y)>=[winfo height $w]} {
$w yview scroll 1 units
} elseif {$v(y)<0} {
$w yview scroll -1 units
} else {
return
}
sqlitecon::SelectTo $w $v(x) $v(y)
set v(timer) [after 50 sqlitecon::motor $w]
}
# This routine cancels the scrolling motor if it is active
#
proc sqlitecon::cancelMotor w {
upvar #0 $w v
catch {after cancel $v(timer)}
catch {unset v(timer)}
}
# Do a Copy operation on the stuff currently selected.
#
proc sqlitecon::Copy w {
if {![catch {set text [$w get sel.first sel.last]}]} {
clipboard clear -displayof $w
clipboard append -displayof $w $text
}
}
# Return 1 if the selection exists and is contained
# entirely on the input line. Return 2 if the selection
# exists but is not entirely on the input line. Return 0
# if the selection does not exist.
#
proc sqlitecon::canCut w {
set r [catch {
scan [$w index sel.first] %d.%d s1x s1y
scan [$w index sel.last] %d.%d s2x s2y
scan [$w index insert] %d.%d ix iy
}]
if {$r==1} {return 0}
if {$s1x==$ix && $s2x==$ix} {return 1}
return 2
}
# Do a Cut operation if possible. Cuts are only allowed
# if the current selection is entirely contained on the
# current input line.
#
proc sqlitecon::Cut w {
if {[sqlitecon::canCut $w]==1} {
sqlitecon::Copy $w
$w delete sel.first sel.last
}
}
# Do a paste opeation.
#
proc sqlitecon::Paste w {
if {[sqlitecon::canCut $w]==1} {
$w delete sel.first sel.last
}
if {[catch {selection get -displayof $w -selection CLIPBOARD} topaste]
&& [catch {selection get -displayof $w -selection PRIMARY} topaste]} {
return
}
if {[info exists ::$w]} {
set prior 0
foreach line [split $topaste \n] {
if {$prior} {
sqlitecon::Enter $w
update
}
set prior 1
$w insert insert $line
}
} else {
$w insert insert $topaste
}
}
# Enable or disable entries in the Edit menu
#
proc sqlitecon::EnableEditMenu w {
upvar #0 $w.t v
set m $v(editmenu)
if {$m=="" || ![winfo exists $m]} return
switch [sqlitecon::canCut $w.t] {
0 {
$m entryconf Copy -state disabled
$m entryconf Cut -state disabled
}
1 {
$m entryconf Copy -state normal
$m entryconf Cut -state normal
}
2 {
$m entryconf Copy -state normal
$m entryconf Cut -state disabled
}
}
}
# Prompt the user for the name of a writable file. Then write the
# entire contents of the console screen to that file.
#
proc sqlitecon::SaveFile w {
set types {
{{Text Files} {.txt}}
{{All Files} *}
}
set f [tk_getSaveFile -filetypes $types -title "Write Screen To..."]
if {$f!=""} {
if {[catch {open $f w} fd]} {
tk_messageBox -type ok -icon error -message $fd
} else {
puts $fd [string trimright [$w get 1.0 end] \n]
close $fd
}
}
}
# Erase everything from the console above the insertion line.
#
proc sqlitecon::Clear w {
$w delete 1.0 {insert linestart}
}
# An in-line editor for SQL
#
proc sqlitecon::_edit {origtxt {title {}}} {
for {set i 0} {[winfo exists .ed$i]} {incr i} continue
set w .ed$i
toplevel $w
wm protocol $w WM_DELETE_WINDOW "$w.b.can invoke"
wm title $w {Inline SQL Editor}
frame $w.b
pack $w.b -side bottom -fill x
button $w.b.can -text Cancel -width 6 -command [list set ::$w 0]
button $w.b.ok -text OK -width 6 -command [list set ::$w 1]
button $w.b.cut -text Cut -width 6 -command [list ::sqlitecon::Cut $w.t]
button $w.b.copy -text Copy -width 6 -command [list ::sqlitecon::Copy $w.t]
button $w.b.paste -text Paste -width 6 -command [list ::sqlitecon::Paste $w.t]
set ::$w {}
pack $w.b.cut $w.b.copy $w.b.paste $w.b.can $w.b.ok\
-side left -padx 5 -pady 5 -expand 1
if {$title!=""} {
label $w.title -text $title
pack $w.title -side top -padx 5 -pady 5
}
text $w.t -bg white -fg black -yscrollcommand [list $w.sb set]
pack $w.t -side left -fill both -expand 1
scrollbar $w.sb -orient vertical -command [list $w.t yview]
pack $w.sb -side left -fill y
$w.t insert end $origtxt
vwait ::$w
if {[set ::$w]} {
set txt [string trimright [$w.t get 1.0 end]]
} else {
set txt $origtxt
}
destroy $w
return $txt
}

892
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/doc/lemon.html
View File

@ -1,892 +0,0 @@
<html>
<head>
<title>The Lemon Parser Generator</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=white>
<h1 align=center>The Lemon Parser Generator</h1>
<p>Lemon is an LALR(1) parser generator for C or C++.
It does the same job as ``bison'' and ``yacc''.
But lemon is not another bison or yacc clone. It
uses a different grammar syntax which is designed to
reduce the number of coding errors. Lemon also uses a more
sophisticated parsing engine that is faster than yacc and
bison and which is both reentrant and thread-safe.
Furthermore, Lemon implements features that can be used
to eliminate resource leaks, making is suitable for use
in long-running programs such as graphical user interfaces
or embedded controllers.</p>
<p>This document is an introduction to the Lemon
parser generator.</p>
<h2>Theory of Operation</h2>
<p>The main goal of Lemon is to translate a context free grammar (CFG)
for a particular language into C code that implements a parser for
that language.
The program has two inputs:
<ul>
<li>The grammar specification.
<li>A parser template file.
</ul>
Typically, only the grammar specification is supplied by the programmer.
Lemon comes with a default parser template which works fine for most
applications. But the user is free to substitute a different parser
template if desired.</p>
<p>Depending on command-line options, Lemon will generate between
one and three files of outputs.
<ul>
<li>C code to implement the parser.
<li>A header file defining an integer ID for each terminal symbol.
<li>An information file that describes the states of the generated parser
automaton.
</ul>
By default, all three of these output files are generated.
The header file is suppressed if the ``-m'' command-line option is
used and the report file is omitted when ``-q'' is selected.</p>
<p>The grammar specification file uses a ``.y'' suffix, by convention.
In the examples used in this document, we'll assume the name of the
grammar file is ``gram.y''. A typical use of Lemon would be the
following command:
<pre>
lemon gram.y
</pre>
This command will generate three output files named ``gram.c'',
``gram.h'' and ``gram.out''.
The first is C code to implement the parser. The second
is the header file that defines numerical values for all
terminal symbols, and the last is the report that explains
the states used by the parser automaton.</p>
<h3>Command Line Options</h3>
<p>The behavior of Lemon can be modified using command-line options.
You can obtain a list of the available command-line options together
with a brief explanation of what each does by typing
<pre>
lemon -?
</pre>
As of this writing, the following command-line options are supported:
<ul>
<li><tt>-b</tt>
<li><tt>-c</tt>
<li><tt>-g</tt>
<li><tt>-m</tt>
<li><tt>-q</tt>
<li><tt>-s</tt>
<li><tt>-x</tt>
</ul>
The ``-b'' option reduces the amount of text in the report file by
printing only the basis of each parser state, rather than the full
configuration.
The ``-c'' option suppresses action table compression. Using -c
will make the parser a little larger and slower but it will detect
syntax errors sooner.
The ``-g'' option causes no output files to be generated at all.
Instead, the input grammar file is printed on standard output but
with all comments, actions and other extraneous text deleted. This
is a useful way to get a quick summary of a grammar.
The ``-m'' option causes the output C source file to be compatible
with the ``makeheaders'' program.
Makeheaders is a program that automatically generates header files
from C source code. When the ``-m'' option is used, the header
file is not output since the makeheaders program will take care
of generated all header files automatically.
The ``-q'' option suppresses the report file.
Using ``-s'' causes a brief summary of parser statistics to be
printed. Like this:
<pre>
Parser statistics: 74 terminals, 70 nonterminals, 179 rules
340 states, 2026 parser table entries, 0 conflicts
</pre>
Finally, the ``-x'' option causes Lemon to print its version number
and then stops without attempting to read the grammar or generate a parser.</p>
<h3>The Parser Interface</h3>
<p>Lemon doesn't generate a complete, working program. It only generates
a few subroutines that implement a parser. This section describes
the interface to those subroutines. It is up to the programmer to
call these subroutines in an appropriate way in order to produce a
complete system.</p>
<p>Before a program begins using a Lemon-generated parser, the program
must first create the parser.
A new parser is created as follows:
<pre>
void *pParser = ParseAlloc( malloc );
</pre>
The ParseAlloc() routine allocates and initializes a new parser and
returns a pointer to it.
The actual data structure used to represent a parser is opaque --
its internal structure is not visible or usable by the calling routine.
For this reason, the ParseAlloc() routine returns a pointer to void
rather than a pointer to some particular structure.
The sole argument to the ParseAlloc() routine is a pointer to the
subroutine used to allocate memory. Typically this means ``malloc()''.</p>
<p>After a program is finished using a parser, it can reclaim all
memory allocated by that parser by calling
<pre>
ParseFree(pParser, free);
</pre>
The first argument is the same pointer returned by ParseAlloc(). The
second argument is a pointer to the function used to release bulk
memory back to the system.</p>
<p>After a parser has been allocated using ParseAlloc(), the programmer
must supply the parser with a sequence of tokens (terminal symbols) to
be parsed. This is accomplished by calling the following function
once for each token:
<pre>
Parse(pParser, hTokenID, sTokenData, pArg);
</pre>
The first argument to the Parse() routine is the pointer returned by
ParseAlloc().
The second argument is a small positive integer that tells the parse the
type of the next token in the data stream.
There is one token type for each terminal symbol in the grammar.
The gram.h file generated by Lemon contains #define statements that
map symbolic terminal symbol names into appropriate integer values.
(A value of 0 for the second argument is a special flag to the
parser to indicate that the end of input has been reached.)
The third argument is the value of the given token. By default,
the type of the third argument is integer, but the grammar will
usually redefine this type to be some kind of structure.
Typically the second argument will be a broad category of tokens
such as ``identifier'' or ``number'' and the third argument will
be the name of the identifier or the value of the number.</p>
<p>The Parse() function may have either three or four arguments,
depending on the grammar. If the grammar specification file request
it, the Parse() function will have a fourth parameter that can be
of any type chosen by the programmer. The parser doesn't do anything
with this argument except to pass it through to action routines.
This is a convenient mechanism for passing state information down
to the action routines without having to use global variables.</p>
<p>A typical use of a Lemon parser might look something like the
following:
<pre>
01 ParseTree *ParseFile(const char *zFilename){
02 Tokenizer *pTokenizer;
03 void *pParser;
04 Token sToken;
05 int hTokenId;
06 ParserState sState;
07
08 pTokenizer = TokenizerCreate(zFilename);
09 pParser = ParseAlloc( malloc );
10 InitParserState(&sState);
11 while( GetNextToken(pTokenizer, &hTokenId, &sToken) ){
12 Parse(pParser, hTokenId, sToken, &sState);
13 }
14 Parse(pParser, 0, sToken, &sState);
15 ParseFree(pParser, free );
16 TokenizerFree(pTokenizer);
17 return sState.treeRoot;
18 }
</pre>
This example shows a user-written routine that parses a file of
text and returns a pointer to the parse tree.
(We've omitted all error-handling from this example to keep it
simple.)
We assume the existence of some kind of tokenizer which is created
using TokenizerCreate() on line 8 and deleted by TokenizerFree()
on line 16. The GetNextToken() function on line 11 retrieves the
next token from the input file and puts its type in the
integer variable hTokenId. The sToken variable is assumed to be
some kind of structure that contains details about each token,
such as its complete text, what line it occurs on, etc. </p>
<p>This example also assumes the existence of structure of type
ParserState that holds state information about a particular parse.
An instance of such a structure is created on line 6 and initialized
on line 10. A pointer to this structure is passed into the Parse()
routine as the optional 4th argument.
The action routine specified by the grammar for the parser can use
the ParserState structure to hold whatever information is useful and
appropriate. In the example, we note that the treeRoot field of
the ParserState structure is left pointing to the root of the parse
tree.</p>
<p>The core of this example as it relates to Lemon is as follows:
<pre>
ParseFile(){
pParser = ParseAlloc( malloc );
while( GetNextToken(pTokenizer,&hTokenId, &sToken) ){
Parse(pParser, hTokenId, sToken);
}
Parse(pParser, 0, sToken);
ParseFree(pParser, free );
}
</pre>
Basically, what a program has to do to use a Lemon-generated parser
is first create the parser, then send it lots of tokens obtained by
tokenizing an input source. When the end of input is reached, the
Parse() routine should be called one last time with a token type
of 0. This step is necessary to inform the parser that the end of
input has been reached. Finally, we reclaim memory used by the
parser by calling ParseFree().</p>
<p>There is one other interface routine that should be mentioned
before we move on.
The ParseTrace() function can be used to generate debugging output
from the parser. A prototype for this routine is as follows:
<pre>
ParseTrace(FILE *stream, char *zPrefix);
</pre>
After this routine is called, a short (one-line) message is written
to the designated output stream every time the parser changes states
or calls an action routine. Each such message is prefaced using
the text given by zPrefix. This debugging output can be turned off
by calling ParseTrace() again with a first argument of NULL (0).</p>
<h3>Differences With YACC and BISON</h3>
<p>Programmers who have previously used the yacc or bison parser
generator will notice several important differences between yacc and/or
bison and Lemon.
<ul>
<li>In yacc and bison, the parser calls the tokenizer. In Lemon,
the tokenizer calls the parser.
<li>Lemon uses no global variables. Yacc and bison use global variables
to pass information between the tokenizer and parser.
<li>Lemon allows multiple parsers to be running simultaneously. Yacc
and bison do not.
</ul>
These differences may cause some initial confusion for programmers
with prior yacc and bison experience.
But after years of experience using Lemon, I firmly
believe that the Lemon way of doing things is better.</p>
<h2>Input File Syntax</h2>
<p>The main purpose of the grammar specification file for Lemon is
to define the grammar for the parser. But the input file also
specifies additional information Lemon requires to do its job.
Most of the work in using Lemon is in writing an appropriate
grammar file.</p>
<p>The grammar file for lemon is, for the most part, free format.
It does not have sections or divisions like yacc or bison. Any
declaration can occur at any point in the file.
Lemon ignores whitespace (except where it is needed to separate
tokens) and it honors the same commenting conventions as C and C++.</p>
<h3>Terminals and Nonterminals</h3>
<p>A terminal symbol (token) is any string of alphanumeric
and underscore characters
that begins with an upper case letter.
A terminal can contain lowercase letters after the first character,
but the usual convention is to make terminals all upper case.
A nonterminal, on the other hand, is any string of alphanumeric
and underscore characters than begins with a lower case letter.
Again, the usual convention is to make nonterminals use all lower
case letters.</p>
<p>In Lemon, terminal and nonterminal symbols do not need to
be declared or identified in a separate section of the grammar file.
Lemon is able to generate a list of all terminals and nonterminals
by examining the grammar rules, and it can always distinguish a
terminal from a nonterminal by checking the case of the first
character of the name.</p>
<p>Yacc and bison allow terminal symbols to have either alphanumeric
names or to be individual characters included in single quotes, like
this: ')' or '$'. Lemon does not allow this alternative form for
terminal symbols. With Lemon, all symbols, terminals and nonterminals,
must have alphanumeric names.</p>
<h3>Grammar Rules</h3>
<p>The main component of a Lemon grammar file is a sequence of grammar
rules.
Each grammar rule consists of a nonterminal symbol followed by
the special symbol ``::='' and then a list of terminals and/or nonterminals.
The rule is terminated by a period.
The list of terminals and nonterminals on the right-hand side of the
rule can be empty.
Rules can occur in any order, except that the left-hand side of the
first rule is assumed to be the start symbol for the grammar (unless
specified otherwise using the <tt>%start</tt> directive described below.)
A typical sequence of grammar rules might look something like this:
<pre>
expr ::= expr PLUS expr.
expr ::= expr TIMES expr.
expr ::= LPAREN expr RPAREN.
expr ::= VALUE.
</pre>
</p>
<p>There is one non-terminal in this example, ``expr'', and five
terminal symbols or tokens: ``PLUS'', ``TIMES'', ``LPAREN'',
``RPAREN'' and ``VALUE''.</p>
<p>Like yacc and bison, Lemon allows the grammar to specify a block
of C code that will be executed whenever a grammar rule is reduced
by the parser.
In Lemon, this action is specified by putting the C code (contained
within curly braces <tt>{...}</tt>) immediately after the
period that closes the rule.
For example:
<pre>
expr ::= expr PLUS expr. { printf("Doing an addition...\n"); }
</pre>
</p>
<p>In order to be useful, grammar actions must normally be linked to
their associated grammar rules.
In yacc and bison, this is accomplished by embedding a ``$$'' in the
action to stand for the value of the left-hand side of the rule and
symbols ``$1'', ``$2'', and so forth to stand for the value of
the terminal or nonterminal at position 1, 2 and so forth on the
right-hand side of the rule.
This idea is very powerful, but it is also very error-prone. The
single most common source of errors in a yacc or bison grammar is
to miscount the number of symbols on the right-hand side of a grammar
rule and say ``$7'' when you really mean ``$8''.</p>
<p>Lemon avoids the need to count grammar symbols by assigning symbolic
names to each symbol in a grammar rule and then using those symbolic
names in the action.
In yacc or bison, one would write this:
<pre>
expr -> expr PLUS expr { $$ = $1 + $3; };
</pre>
But in Lemon, the same rule becomes the following:
<pre>
expr(A) ::= expr(B) PLUS expr(C). { A = B+C; }
</pre>
In the Lemon rule, any symbol in parentheses after a grammar rule
symbol becomes a place holder for that symbol in the grammar rule.
This place holder can then be used in the associated C action to
stand for the value of that symbol.<p>
<p>The Lemon notation for linking a grammar rule with its reduce
action is superior to yacc/bison on several counts.
First, as mentioned above, the Lemon method avoids the need to
count grammar symbols.
Secondly, if a terminal or nonterminal in a Lemon grammar rule
includes a linking symbol in parentheses but that linking symbol
is not actually used in the reduce action, then an error message
is generated.
For example, the rule
<pre>
expr(A) ::= expr(B) PLUS expr(C). { A = B; }
</pre>
will generate an error because the linking symbol ``C'' is used
in the grammar rule but not in the reduce action.</p>
<p>The Lemon notation for linking grammar rules to reduce actions
also facilitates the use of destructors for reclaiming memory
allocated by the values of terminals and nonterminals on the
right-hand side of a rule.</p>
<h3>Precedence Rules</h3>
<p>Lemon resolves parsing ambiguities in exactly the same way as
yacc and bison. A shift-reduce conflict is resolved in favor
of the shift, and a reduce-reduce conflict is resolved by reducing
whichever rule comes first in the grammar file.</p>
<p>Just like in
yacc and bison, Lemon allows a measure of control
over the resolution of paring conflicts using precedence rules.
A precedence value can be assigned to any terminal symbol
using the %left, %right or %nonassoc directives. Terminal symbols
mentioned in earlier directives have a lower precedence that
terminal symbols mentioned in later directives. For example:</p>
<p><pre>
%left AND.
%left OR.
%nonassoc EQ NE GT GE LT LE.
%left PLUS MINUS.
%left TIMES DIVIDE MOD.
%right EXP NOT.
</pre></p>
<p>In the preceding sequence of directives, the AND operator is
defined to have the lowest precedence. The OR operator is one
precedence level higher. And so forth. Hence, the grammar would
attempt to group the ambiguous expression
<pre>
a AND b OR c
</pre>
like this
<pre>
a AND (b OR c).
</pre>
The associativity (left, right or nonassoc) is used to determine
the grouping when the precedence is the same. AND is left-associative
in our example, so
<pre>
a AND b AND c
</pre>
is parsed like this
<pre>
(a AND b) AND c.
</pre>
The EXP operator is right-associative, though, so
<pre>
a EXP b EXP c
</pre>
is parsed like this
<pre>
a EXP (b EXP c).
</pre>
The nonassoc precedence is used for non-associative operators.
So
<pre>
a EQ b EQ c
</pre>
is an error.</p>
<p>The precedence of non-terminals is transferred to rules as follows:
The precedence of a grammar rule is equal to the precedence of the
left-most terminal symbol in the rule for which a precedence is
defined. This is normally what you want, but in those cases where
you want to precedence of a grammar rule to be something different,
you can specify an alternative precedence symbol by putting the
symbol in square braces after the period at the end of the rule and
before any C-code. For example:</p>
<p><pre>
expr = MINUS expr. [NOT]
</pre></p>
<p>This rule has a precedence equal to that of the NOT symbol, not the
MINUS symbol as would have been the case by default.</p>
<p>With the knowledge of how precedence is assigned to terminal
symbols and individual
grammar rules, we can now explain precisely how parsing conflicts
are resolved in Lemon. Shift-reduce conflicts are resolved
as follows:
<ul>
<li> If either the token to be shifted or the rule to be reduced
lacks precedence information, then resolve in favor of the
shift, but report a parsing conflict.
<li> If the precedence of the token to be shifted is greater than
the precedence of the rule to reduce, then resolve in favor
of the shift. No parsing conflict is reported.
<li> If the precedence of the token it be shifted is less than the
precedence of the rule to reduce, then resolve in favor of the
reduce action. No parsing conflict is reported.
<li> If the precedences are the same and the shift token is
right-associative, then resolve in favor of the shift.
No parsing conflict is reported.
<li> If the precedences are the same the shift token is
left-associative, then resolve in favor of the reduce.
No parsing conflict is reported.
<li> Otherwise, resolve the conflict by doing the shift and
report the parsing conflict.
</ul>
Reduce-reduce conflicts are resolved this way:
<ul>
<li> If either reduce rule
lacks precedence information, then resolve in favor of the
rule that appears first in the grammar and report a parsing
conflict.
<li> If both rules have precedence and the precedence is different
then resolve the dispute in favor of the rule with the highest
precedence and do not report a conflict.
<li> Otherwise, resolve the conflict by reducing by the rule that
appears first in the grammar and report a parsing conflict.
</ul>
<h3>Special Directives</h3>
<p>The input grammar to Lemon consists of grammar rules and special
directives. We've described all the grammar rules, so now we'll
talk about the special directives.</p>
<p>Directives in lemon can occur in any order. You can put them before
the grammar rules, or after the grammar rules, or in the mist of the
grammar rules. It doesn't matter. The relative order of
directives used to assign precedence to terminals is important, but
other than that, the order of directives in Lemon is arbitrary.</p>
<p>Lemon supports the following special directives:
<ul>
<li><tt>%code</tt>
<li><tt>%default_destructor</tt>
<li><tt>%default_type</tt>
<li><tt>%destructor</tt>
<li><tt>%extra_argument</tt>
<li><tt>%include</tt>
<li><tt>%left</tt>
<li><tt>%name</tt>
<li><tt>%nonassoc</tt>
<li><tt>%parse_accept</tt>
<li><tt>%parse_failure </tt>
<li><tt>%right</tt>
<li><tt>%stack_overflow</tt>
<li><tt>%stack_size</tt>
<li><tt>%start_symbol</tt>
<li><tt>%syntax_error</tt>
<li><tt>%token_destructor</tt>
<li><tt>%token_prefix</tt>
<li><tt>%token_type</tt>
<li><tt>%type</tt>
</ul>
Each of these directives will be described separately in the
following sections:</p>
<h4>The <tt>%code</tt> directive</h4>
<p>The %code directive is used to specify addition C/C++ code that
is added to the end of the main output file. This is similar to
the %include directive except that %include is inserted at the
beginning of the main output file.</p>
<p>%code is typically used to include some action routines or perhaps
a tokenizer as part of the output file.</p>
<h4>The <tt>%default_destructor</tt> directive</h4>
<p>The %default_destructor directive specifies a destructor to
use for non-terminals that do not have their own destructor
specified by a separate %destructor directive. See the documentation
on the %destructor directive below for additional information.</p>
<p>In some grammers, many different non-terminal symbols have the
same datatype and hence the same destructor. This directive is
a convenience way to specify the same destructor for all those
non-terminals using a single statement.</p>
<h4>The <tt>%default_type</tt> directive</h4>
<p>The %default_type directive specifies the datatype of non-terminal
symbols that do no have their own datatype defined using a separate
%type directive. See the documentation on %type below for addition
information.</p>
<h4>The <tt>%destructor</tt> directive</h4>
<p>The %destructor directive is used to specify a destructor for
a non-terminal symbol.
(See also the %token_destructor directive which is used to
specify a destructor for terminal symbols.)</p>
<p>A non-terminal's destructor is called to dispose of the
non-terminal's value whenever the non-terminal is popped from
the stack. This includes all of the following circumstances:
<ul>
<li> When a rule reduces and the value of a non-terminal on
the right-hand side is not linked to C code.
<li> When the stack is popped during error processing.
<li> When the ParseFree() function runs.
</ul>
The destructor can do whatever it wants with the value of
the non-terminal, but its design is to deallocate memory
or other resources held by that non-terminal.</p>
<p>Consider an example:
<pre>
%type nt {void*}
%destructor nt { free($$); }
nt(A) ::= ID NUM. { A = malloc( 100 ); }
</pre>
This example is a bit contrived but it serves to illustrate how
destructors work. The example shows a non-terminal named
``nt'' that holds values of type ``void*''. When the rule for
an ``nt'' reduces, it sets the value of the non-terminal to
space obtained from malloc(). Later, when the nt non-terminal
is popped from the stack, the destructor will fire and call
free() on this malloced space, thus avoiding a memory leak.
(Note that the symbol ``$$'' in the destructor code is replaced
by the value of the non-terminal.)</p>
<p>It is important to note that the value of a non-terminal is passed
to the destructor whenever the non-terminal is removed from the
stack, unless the non-terminal is used in a C-code action. If
the non-terminal is used by C-code, then it is assumed that the
C-code will take care of destroying it if it should really
be destroyed. More commonly, the value is used to build some
larger structure and we don't want to destroy it, which is why
the destructor is not called in this circumstance.</p>
<p>By appropriate use of destructors, it is possible to
build a parser using Lemon that can be used within a long-running
program, such as a GUI, that will not leak memory or other resources.
To do the same using yacc or bison is much more difficult.</p>
<h4>The <tt>%extra_argument</tt> directive</h4>
The %extra_argument directive instructs Lemon to add a 4th parameter
to the parameter list of the Parse() function it generates. Lemon
doesn't do anything itself with this extra argument, but it does
make the argument available to C-code action routines, destructors,
and so forth. For example, if the grammar file contains:</p>
<p><pre>
%extra_argument { MyStruct *pAbc }
</pre></p>
<p>Then the Parse() function generated will have an 4th parameter
of type ``MyStruct*'' and all action routines will have access to
a variable named ``pAbc'' that is the value of the 4th parameter
in the most recent call to Parse().</p>
<h4>The <tt>%include</tt> directive</h4>
<p>The %include directive specifies C code that is included at the
top of the generated parser. You can include any text you want --
the Lemon parser generator copies it blindly. If you have multiple
%include directives in your grammar file the value of the last
%include directive overwrites all the others.</p.
<p>The %include directive is very handy for getting some extra #include
preprocessor statements at the beginning of the generated parser.
For example:</p>
<p><pre>
%include {#include &lt;unistd.h&gt;}
</pre></p>
<p>This might be needed, for example, if some of the C actions in the
grammar call functions that are prototyed in unistd.h.</p>
<h4>The <tt>%left</tt> directive</h4>
The %left directive is used (along with the %right and
%nonassoc directives) to declare precedences of terminal
symbols. Every terminal symbol whose name appears after
a %left directive but before the next period (``.'') is
given the same left-associative precedence value. Subsequent
%left directives have higher precedence. For example:</p>
<p><pre>
%left AND.
%left OR.
%nonassoc EQ NE GT GE LT LE.
%left PLUS MINUS.
%left TIMES DIVIDE MOD.
%right EXP NOT.
</pre></p>
<p>Note the period that terminates each %left, %right or %nonassoc
directive.</p>
<p>LALR(1) grammars can get into a situation where they require
a large amount of stack space if you make heavy use or right-associative
operators. For this reason, it is recommended that you use %left
rather than %right whenever possible.</p>
<h4>The <tt>%name</tt> directive</h4>
<p>By default, the functions generated by Lemon all begin with the
five-character string ``Parse''. You can change this string to something
different using the %name directive. For instance:</p>
<p><pre>
%name Abcde
</pre></p>
<p>Putting this directive in the grammar file will cause Lemon to generate
functions named
<ul>
<li> AbcdeAlloc(),
<li> AbcdeFree(),
<li> AbcdeTrace(), and
<li> Abcde().
</ul>
The %name directive allows you to generator two or more different
parsers and link them all into the same executable.
</p>
<h4>The <tt>%nonassoc</tt> directive</h4>
<p>This directive is used to assign non-associative precedence to
one or more terminal symbols. See the section on precedence rules
or on the %left directive for additional information.</p>
<h4>The <tt>%parse_accept</tt> directive</h4>
<p>The %parse_accept directive specifies a block of C code that is
executed whenever the parser accepts its input string. To ``accept''
an input string means that the parser was able to process all tokens
without error.</p>
<p>For example:</p>
<p><pre>
%parse_accept {
printf("parsing complete!\n");
}
</pre></p>
<h4>The <tt>%parse_failure</tt> directive</h4>
<p>The %parse_failure directive specifies a block of C code that
is executed whenever the parser fails complete. This code is not
executed until the parser has tried and failed to resolve an input
error using is usual error recovery strategy. The routine is
only invoked when parsing is unable to continue.</p>
<p><pre>
%parse_failure {
fprintf(stderr,"Giving up. Parser is hopelessly lost...\n");
}
</pre></p>
<h4>The <tt>%right</tt> directive</h4>
<p>This directive is used to assign right-associative precedence to
one or more terminal symbols. See the section on precedence rules
or on the %left directive for additional information.</p>
<h4>The <tt>%stack_overflow</tt> directive</h4>
<p>The %stack_overflow directive specifies a block of C code that
is executed if the parser's internal stack ever overflows. Typically
this just prints an error message. After a stack overflow, the parser
will be unable to continue and must be reset.</p>
<p><pre>
%stack_overflow {
fprintf(stderr,"Giving up. Parser stack overflow\n");
}
</pre></p>
<p>You can help prevent parser stack overflows by avoiding the use
of right recursion and right-precedence operators in your grammar.
Use left recursion and and left-precedence operators instead, to
encourage rules to reduce sooner and keep the stack size down.
For example, do rules like this:
<pre>
list ::= list element. // left-recursion. Good!
list ::= .
</pre>
Not like this:
<pre>
list ::= element list. // right-recursion. Bad!
list ::= .
</pre>
<h4>The <tt>%stack_size</tt> directive</h4>
<p>If stack overflow is a problem and you can't resolve the trouble
by using left-recursion, then you might want to increase the size
of the parser's stack using this directive. Put an positive integer
after the %stack_size directive and Lemon will generate a parse
with a stack of the requested size. The default value is 100.</p>
<p><pre>
%stack_size 2000
</pre></p>
<h4>The <tt>%start_symbol</tt> directive</h4>
<p>By default, the start-symbol for the grammar that Lemon generates
is the first non-terminal that appears in the grammar file. But you
can choose a different start-symbol using the %start_symbol directive.</p>
<p><pre>
%start_symbol prog
</pre></p>
<h4>The <tt>%token_destructor</tt> directive</h4>
<p>The %destructor directive assigns a destructor to a non-terminal
symbol. (See the description of the %destructor directive above.)
This directive does the same thing for all terminal symbols.</p>
<p>Unlike non-terminal symbols which may each have a different data type
for their values, terminals all use the same data type (defined by
the %token_type directive) and so they use a common destructor. Other
than that, the token destructor works just like the non-terminal
destructors.</p>
<h4>The <tt>%token_prefix</tt> directive</h4>
<p>Lemon generates #defines that assign small integer constants
to each terminal symbol in the grammar. If desired, Lemon will
add a prefix specified by this directive
to each of the #defines it generates.
So if the default output of Lemon looked like this:
<pre>
#define AND 1
#define MINUS 2
#define OR 3
#define PLUS 4
</pre>
You can insert a statement into the grammar like this:
<pre>
%token_prefix TOKEN_
</pre>
to cause Lemon to produce these symbols instead:
<pre>
#define TOKEN_AND 1
#define TOKEN_MINUS 2
#define TOKEN_OR 3
#define TOKEN_PLUS 4
</pre>
<h4>The <tt>%token_type</tt> and <tt>%type</tt> directives</h4>
<p>These directives are used to specify the data types for values
on the parser's stack associated with terminal and non-terminal
symbols. The values of all terminal symbols must be of the same
type. This turns out to be the same data type as the 3rd parameter
to the Parse() function generated by Lemon. Typically, you will
make the value of a terminal symbol by a pointer to some kind of
token structure. Like this:</p>
<p><pre>
%token_type {Token*}
</pre></p>
<p>If the data type of terminals is not specified, the default value
is ``int''.</p>
<p>Non-terminal symbols can each have their own data types. Typically
the data type of a non-terminal is a pointer to the root of a parse-tree
structure that contains all information about that non-terminal.
For example:</p>
<p><pre>
%type expr {Expr*}
</pre></p>
<p>Each entry on the parser's stack is actually a union containing
instances of all data types for every non-terminal and terminal symbol.
Lemon will automatically use the correct element of this union depending
on what the corresponding non-terminal or terminal symbol is. But
the grammar designer should keep in mind that the size of the union
will be the size of its largest element. So if you have a single
non-terminal whose data type requires 1K of storage, then your 100
entry parser stack will require 100K of heap space. If you are willing
and able to pay that price, fine. You just need to know.</p>
<h3>Error Processing</h3>
<p>After extensive experimentation over several years, it has been
discovered that the error recovery strategy used by yacc is about
as good as it gets. And so that is what Lemon uses.</p>
<p>When a Lemon-generated parser encounters a syntax error, it
first invokes the code specified by the %syntax_error directive, if
any. It then enters its error recovery strategy. The error recovery
strategy is to begin popping the parsers stack until it enters a
state where it is permitted to shift a special non-terminal symbol
named ``error''. It then shifts this non-terminal and continues
parsing. But the %syntax_error routine will not be called again
until at least three new tokens have been successfully shifted.</p>
<p>If the parser pops its stack until the stack is empty, and it still
is unable to shift the error symbol, then the %parse_failed routine
is invoked and the parser resets itself to its start state, ready
to begin parsing a new file. This is what will happen at the very
first syntax error, of course, if there are no instances of the
``error'' non-terminal in your grammar.</p>
</body>
</html>

76
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/doc/pager-invariants.txt
View File

@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
*** Throughout this document, a page is deemed to have been synced
automatically as soon as it is written when PRAGMA synchronous=OFF.
Otherwise, the page is not synced until the xSync method of the VFS
is called successfully on the file containing the page.
*** Definition: A page of the database file is said to be "overwriteable" if
one or more of the following are true about the page:
(a) The original content of the page as it was at the beginning of
the transaction has been written into the rollback journal and
synced.
(b) The page was a freelist leaf page at the start of the transaction.
(c) The page number is greater than the largest page that existed in
the database file at the start of the transaction.
(1) A page of the database file is never overwritten unless one of the
following are true:
(a) The page and all other pages on the same sector are overwriteable.
(b) The atomic page write optimization is enabled, and the entire
transaction other than the update of the transaction sequence
number consists of a single page change.
(2) The content of a page written into the rollback journal exactly matches
both the content in the database when the rollback journal was written
and the content in the database at the beginning of the current
transaction.
(3) Writes to the database file are an integer multiple of the page size
in length and are aligned to a page boundary.
(4) Reads from the database file are either aligned on a page boundary and
an integer multiple of the page size in length or are taken from the
first 100 bytes of the database file.
(5) All writes to the database file are synced prior to the rollback journal
being deleted, truncated, or zeroed.
(6) If a master journal file is used, then all writes to the database file
are synced prior to the master journal being deleted.
*** Definition: Two databases (or the same database at two points it time)
are said to be "logically equivalent" if they give the same answer to
all queries. Note in particular the content of freelist leaf
pages can be changed arbitarily without effecting the logical equivalence
of the database.
(7) At any time, if any subset, including the empty set and the total set,
of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the
journal is rolled back, the resulting database file will be logical
equivalent to the database file at the beginning of the transaction.
(8) When a transaction is rolled back, the xTruncate method of the VFS
is called to restore the database file to the same size it was at
the beginning of the transaction. (In some VFSes, the xTruncate
method is a no-op, but that does not change the fact the SQLite will
invoke it.)
(9) Whenever the database file is modified, at least one bit in the range
of bytes from 24 through 39 inclusive will be changed prior to releasing
the EXCLUSIVE lock.
(10) The pattern of bits in bytes 24 through 39 shall not repeat in less
than one billion transactions.
(11) A database file is well-formed at the beginning and at the conclusion
of every transaction.
(12) An EXCLUSIVE lock must be held on the database file before making
any changes to the database file.
(13) A SHARED lock must be held on the database file before reading any
content out of the database file.

130
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/doc/vfs-shm.txt
View File

@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
The 5 states of an historical rollback lock as implemented by the
xLock, xUnlock, and xCheckReservedLock methods of the sqlite3_io_methods
objec are:
UNLOCKED
SHARED
RESERVED
PENDING
EXCLUSIVE
The wal-index file has a similar locking hierarchy implemented using
the xShmLock method of the sqlite3_vfs object, but with 7
states. Each connection to a wal-index file must be in one of
the following 7 states:
UNLOCKED
READ
READ_FULL
WRITE
PENDING
CHECKPOINT
RECOVER
These roughly correspond to the 5 states of a rollback lock except
that SHARED is split out into 2 states: READ and READ_FULL and
there is an extra RECOVER state used for wal-index reconstruction.
The meanings of the various wal-index locking states is as follows:
UNLOCKED - The wal-index is not in use.
READ - Some prefix of the wal-index is being read. Additional
wal-index information can be appended at any time. The
newly appended content will be ignored by the holder of
the READ lock.
READ_FULL - The entire wal-index is being read. No new information
can be added to the wal-index. The holder of a READ_FULL
lock promises never to read pages from the database file
that are available anywhere in the wal-index.
WRITE - It is OK to append to the wal-index file and to adjust
the header to indicate the new "last valid frame".
PENDING - Waiting on all READ locks to clear so that a
CHECKPOINT lock can be acquired.
CHECKPOINT - It is OK to write any WAL data into the database file
and zero the last valid frame field of the wal-index
header. The wal-index file itself may not be changed
other than to zero the last valid frame field in the
header.
RECOVER - Held during wal-index recovery. Used to prevent a
race if multiple clients try to recover a wal-index at
the same time.
A particular lock manager implementation may coalesce one or more of
the wal-index locking states, though with a reduction in concurrency.
For example, an implemention might implement only exclusive locking,
in which case all states would be equivalent to CHECKPOINT, meaning that
only one reader or one writer or one checkpointer could be active at a
time. Or, an implementation might combine READ and READ_FULL into
a single state equivalent to READ, meaning that a writer could
coexist with a reader, but no reader or writers could coexist with a
checkpointer.
The lock manager must obey the following rules:
(1) A READ cannot coexist with CHECKPOINT.
(2) A READ_FULL cannot coexist with WRITE.
(3) None of WRITE, PENDING, CHECKPOINT, or RECOVER can coexist.
The SQLite core will obey the next set of rules. These rules are
assertions on the behavior of the SQLite core which might be verified
during testing using an instrumented lock manager.
(5) No part of the wal-index will be read without holding either some
kind of SHM lock or an EXCLUSIVE lock on the original database.
The original database is the file named in the 2nd parameter to
the xShmOpen method.
(6) A holder of a READ_FULL will never read any page of the database
file that is contained anywhere in the wal-index.
(7) No part of the wal-index other than the header will be written nor
will the size of the wal-index grow without holding a WRITE or
an EXCLUSIVE on the original database file.
(8) The wal-index header will not be written without holding one of
WRITE, CHECKPOINT, or RECOVER on the wal-index or an EXCLUSIVE on
the original database files.
(9) A CHECKPOINT or RECOVER must be held on the wal-index, or an
EXCLUSIVE on the original database file, in order to reset the
last valid frame counter in the header of the wal-index back to zero.
(10) A WRITE can only increase the last valid frame pointer in the header.
The SQLite core will only ever send requests for UNLOCK, READ, WRITE,
CHECKPOINT, or RECOVER to the lock manager. The SQLite core will never
request a READ_FULL or PENDING lock though the lock manager may deliver
those locking states in response to READ and CHECKPOINT requests,
respectively, if and only if the requested READ or CHECKPOINT cannot
be delivered.
The following are the allowed lock transitions:
Original-State Request New-State
-------------- ---------- ----------
(11a) UNLOCK READ READ
(11b) UNLOCK READ READ_FULL
(11c) UNLOCK CHECKPOINT PENDING
(11d) UNLOCK CHECKPOINT CHECKPOINT
(11e) READ UNLOCK UNLOCK
(11f) READ WRITE WRITE
(11g) READ RECOVER RECOVER
(11h) READ_FULL UNLOCK UNLOCK
(11i) READ_FULL WRITE WRITE
(11j) READ_FULL RECOVER RECOVER
(11k) WRITE READ READ
(11l) PENDING UNLOCK UNLOCK
(11m) PENDING CHECKPOINT CHECKPOINT
(11n) CHECKPOINT UNLOCK UNLOCK
(11o) RECOVER READ READ
These 15 transitions are all that needs to be supported. The lock
manager implementation can assert that fact. The other 27 possible
transitions among the 7 locking states will never occur.

2
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/README.txt
View File

@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
Version loadable extensions to SQLite are found in subfolders
of this folder.

170
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/async/README.txt
View File

@ -1,170 +0,0 @@
NOTE (2012-11-29):
The functionality implemented by this extension has been superseded
by WAL-mode. This module is no longer supported or maintained. The
code is retained for historical reference only.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Normally, when SQLite writes to a database file, it waits until the write
operation is finished before returning control to the calling application.
Since writing to the file-system is usually very slow compared with CPU
bound operations, this can be a performance bottleneck. This directory
contains an extension that causes SQLite to perform all write requests
using a separate thread running in the background. Although this does not
reduce the overall system resources (CPU, disk bandwidth etc.) at all, it
allows SQLite to return control to the caller quickly even when writing to
the database, eliminating the bottleneck.
1. Functionality
1.1 How it Works
1.2 Limitations
1.3 Locking and Concurrency
2. Compilation and Usage
3. Porting
1. FUNCTIONALITY
With asynchronous I/O, write requests are handled by a separate thread
running in the background. This means that the thread that initiates
a database write does not have to wait for (sometimes slow) disk I/O
to occur. The write seems to happen very quickly, though in reality
it is happening at its usual slow pace in the background.
Asynchronous I/O appears to give better responsiveness, but at a price.
You lose the Durable property. With the default I/O backend of SQLite,
once a write completes, you know that the information you wrote is
safely on disk. With the asynchronous I/O, this is not the case. If
your program crashes or if a power loss occurs after the database
write but before the asynchronous write thread has completed, then the
database change might never make it to disk and the next user of the
database might not see your change.
You lose Durability with asynchronous I/O, but you still retain the
other parts of ACID: Atomic, Consistent, and Isolated. Many
appliations get along fine without the Durablity.
1.1 How it Works
Asynchronous I/O works by creating a special SQLite "vfs" structure
and registering it with sqlite3_vfs_register(). When files opened via
this vfs are written to (using the vfs xWrite() method), the data is not
written directly to disk, but is placed in the "write-queue" to be
handled by the background thread.
When files opened with the asynchronous vfs are read from
(using the vfs xRead() method), the data is read from the file on
disk and the write-queue, so that from the point of view of
the vfs reader the xWrite() appears to have already completed.
The special vfs is registered (and unregistered) by calls to the
API functions sqlite3async_initialize() and sqlite3async_shutdown().
See section "Compilation and Usage" below for details.
1.2 Limitations
In order to gain experience with the main ideas surrounding asynchronous
IO, this implementation is deliberately kept simple. Additional
capabilities may be added in the future.
For example, as currently implemented, if writes are happening at a
steady stream that exceeds the I/O capability of the background writer
thread, the queue of pending write operations will grow without bound.
If this goes on for long enough, the host system could run out of memory.
A more sophisticated module could to keep track of the quantity of
pending writes and stop accepting new write requests when the queue of
pending writes grows too large.
1.3 Locking and Concurrency
Multiple connections from within a single process that use this
implementation of asynchronous IO may access a single database
file concurrently. From the point of view of the user, if all
connections are from within a single process, there is no difference
between the concurrency offered by "normal" SQLite and SQLite
using the asynchronous backend.
If file-locking is enabled (it is enabled by default), then connections
from multiple processes may also read and write the database file.
However concurrency is reduced as follows:
* When a connection using asynchronous IO begins a database
transaction, the database is locked immediately. However the
lock is not released until after all relevant operations
in the write-queue have been flushed to disk. This means
(for example) that the database may remain locked for some
time after a "COMMIT" or "ROLLBACK" is issued.
* If an application using asynchronous IO executes transactions
in quick succession, other database users may be effectively
locked out of the database. This is because when a BEGIN
is executed, a database lock is established immediately. But
when the corresponding COMMIT or ROLLBACK occurs, the lock
is not released until the relevant part of the write-queue
has been flushed through. As a result, if a COMMIT is followed
by a BEGIN before the write-queue is flushed through, the database
is never unlocked,preventing other processes from accessing
the database.
File-locking may be disabled at runtime using the sqlite3async_control()
API (see below). This may improve performance when an NFS or other
network file-system, as the synchronous round-trips to the server be
required to establish file locks are avoided. However, if multiple
connections attempt to access the same database file when file-locking
is disabled, application crashes and database corruption is a likely
outcome.
2. COMPILATION AND USAGE
The asynchronous IO extension consists of a single file of C code
(sqlite3async.c), and a header file (sqlite3async.h) that defines the
C API used by applications to activate and control the modules
functionality.
To use the asynchronous IO extension, compile sqlite3async.c as
part of the application that uses SQLite. Then use the API defined
in sqlite3async.h to initialize and configure the module.
The asynchronous IO VFS API is described in detail in comments in
sqlite3async.h. Using the API usually consists of the following steps:
1. Register the asynchronous IO VFS with SQLite by calling the
sqlite3async_initialize() function.
2. Create a background thread to perform write operations and call
sqlite3async_run().
3. Use the normal SQLite API to read and write to databases via
the asynchronous IO VFS.
Refer to sqlite3async.h for details.
3. PORTING
Currently the asynchronous IO extension is compatible with win32 systems
and systems that support the pthreads interface, including Mac OSX, Linux,
and other varieties of Unix.
To port the asynchronous IO extension to another platform, the user must
implement mutex and condition variable primitives for the new platform.
Currently there is no externally available interface to allow this, but
modifying the code within sqlite3async.c to include the new platforms
concurrency primitives is relatively easy. Search within sqlite3async.c
for the comment string "PORTING FUNCTIONS" for details. Then implement
new versions of each of the following:
static void async_mutex_enter(int eMutex);
static void async_mutex_leave(int eMutex);
static void async_cond_wait(int eCond, int eMutex);
static void async_cond_signal(int eCond);
static void async_sched_yield(void);
The functionality required of each of the above functions is described
in comments in sqlite3async.c.

1707
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/async/sqlite3async.c
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

223
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/async/sqlite3async.h
View File

@ -1,223 +0,0 @@
#ifndef __SQLITEASYNC_H_
#define __SQLITEASYNC_H_ 1
/*
** Make sure we can call this stuff from C++.
*/
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif
#define SQLITEASYNC_VFSNAME "sqlite3async"
/*
** THREAD SAFETY NOTES:
**
** Of the four API functions in this file, the following are not threadsafe:
**
** sqlite3async_initialize()
** sqlite3async_shutdown()
**
** Care must be taken that neither of these functions is called while
** another thread may be calling either any sqlite3async_XXX() function
** or an sqlite3_XXX() API function related to a database handle that
** is using the asynchronous IO VFS.
**
** These functions:
**
** sqlite3async_run()
** sqlite3async_control()
**
** are threadsafe. It is quite safe to call either of these functions even
** if another thread may also be calling one of them or an sqlite3_XXX()
** function related to a database handle that uses the asynchronous IO VFS.
*/
/*
** Initialize the asynchronous IO VFS and register it with SQLite using
** sqlite3_vfs_register(). If the asynchronous VFS is already initialized
** and registered, this function is a no-op. The asynchronous IO VFS
** is registered as "sqlite3async".
**
** The asynchronous IO VFS does not make operating system IO requests
** directly. Instead, it uses an existing VFS implementation for all
** required file-system operations. If the first parameter to this function
** is NULL, then the current default VFS is used for IO. If it is not
** NULL, then it must be the name of an existing VFS. In other words, the
** first argument to this function is passed to sqlite3_vfs_find() to
** locate the VFS to use for all real IO operations. This VFS is known
** as the "parent VFS".
**
** If the second parameter to this function is non-zero, then the
** asynchronous IO VFS is registered as the default VFS for all SQLite
** database connections within the process. Otherwise, the asynchronous IO
** VFS is only used by connections opened using sqlite3_open_v2() that
** specifically request VFS "sqlite3async".
**
** If a parent VFS cannot be located, then SQLITE_ERROR is returned.
** In the unlikely event that operating system specific initialization
** fails (win32 systems create the required critical section and event
** objects within this function), then SQLITE_ERROR is also returned.
** Finally, if the call to sqlite3_vfs_register() returns an error, then
** the error code is returned to the user by this function. In all three
** of these cases, intialization has failed and the asynchronous IO VFS
** is not registered with SQLite.
**
** Otherwise, if no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned.
*/
int sqlite3async_initialize(const char *zParent, int isDefault);
/*
** This function unregisters the asynchronous IO VFS using
** sqlite3_vfs_unregister().
**
** On win32 platforms, this function also releases the small number of
** critical section and event objects created by sqlite3async_initialize().
*/
void sqlite3async_shutdown(void);
/*
** This function may only be called when the asynchronous IO VFS is
** installed (after a call to sqlite3async_initialize()). It processes
** zero or more queued write operations before returning. It is expected
** (but not required) that this function will be called by a different
** thread than those threads that use SQLite. The "background thread"
** that performs IO.
**
** How many queued write operations are performed before returning
** depends on the global setting configured by passing the SQLITEASYNC_HALT
** verb to sqlite3async_control() (see below for details). By default
** this function never returns - it processes all pending operations and
** then blocks waiting for new ones.
**
** If multiple simultaneous calls are made to sqlite3async_run() from two
** or more threads, then the calls are serialized internally.
*/
void sqlite3async_run(void);
/*
** This function may only be called when the asynchronous IO VFS is
** installed (after a call to sqlite3async_initialize()). It is used
** to query or configure various parameters that affect the operation
** of the asynchronous IO VFS. At present there are three parameters
** supported:
**
** * The "halt" parameter, which configures the circumstances under
** which the sqlite3async_run() parameter is configured.
**
** * The "delay" parameter. Setting the delay parameter to a non-zero
** value causes the sqlite3async_run() function to sleep for the
** configured number of milliseconds between each queued write
** operation.
**
** * The "lockfiles" parameter. This parameter determines whether or
** not the asynchronous IO VFS locks the database files it operates
** on. Disabling file locking can improve throughput.
**
** This function is always passed two arguments. When setting the value
** of a parameter, the first argument must be one of SQLITEASYNC_HALT,
** SQLITEASYNC_DELAY or SQLITEASYNC_LOCKFILES. The second argument must
** be passed the new value for the parameter as type "int".
**
** When querying the current value of a paramter, the first argument must
** be one of SQLITEASYNC_GET_HALT, GET_DELAY or GET_LOCKFILES. The second
** argument to this function must be of type (int *). The current value
** of the queried parameter is copied to the memory pointed to by the
** second argument. For example:
**
** int eCurrentHalt;
** int eNewHalt = SQLITEASYNC_HALT_IDLE;
**
** sqlite3async_control(SQLITEASYNC_HALT, eNewHalt);
** sqlite3async_control(SQLITEASYNC_GET_HALT, &eCurrentHalt);
** assert( eNewHalt==eCurrentHalt );
**
** See below for more detail on each configuration parameter.
**
** SQLITEASYNC_HALT:
**
** This is used to set the value of the "halt" parameter. The second
** argument must be one of the SQLITEASYNC_HALT_XXX symbols defined
** below (either NEVER, IDLE and NOW).
**
** If the parameter is set to NEVER, then calls to sqlite3async_run()
** never return. This is the default setting. If the parameter is set
** to IDLE, then calls to sqlite3async_run() return as soon as the
** queue of pending write operations is empty. If the parameter is set
** to NOW, then calls to sqlite3async_run() return as quickly as
** possible, without processing any pending write requests.
**
** If an attempt is made to set this parameter to an integer value other
** than SQLITEASYNC_HALT_NEVER, IDLE or NOW, then sqlite3async_control()
** returns SQLITE_MISUSE and the current value of the parameter is not
** modified.
**
** Modifying the "halt" parameter affects calls to sqlite3async_run()
** made by other threads that are currently in progress.
**
** SQLITEASYNC_DELAY:
**
** This is used to set the value of the "delay" parameter. If set to
** a non-zero value, then after completing a pending write request, the
** sqlite3async_run() function sleeps for the configured number of
** milliseconds.
**
** If an attempt is made to set this parameter to a negative value,
** sqlite3async_control() returns SQLITE_MISUSE and the current value
** of the parameter is not modified.
**
** Modifying the "delay" parameter affects calls to sqlite3async_run()
** made by other threads that are currently in progress.
**
** SQLITEASYNC_LOCKFILES:
**
** This is used to set the value of the "lockfiles" parameter. This
** parameter must be set to either 0 or 1. If set to 1, then the
** asynchronous IO VFS uses the xLock() and xUnlock() methods of the
** parent VFS to lock database files being read and/or written. If
** the parameter is set to 0, then these locks are omitted.
**
** This parameter may only be set when there are no open database
** connections using the VFS and the queue of pending write requests
** is empty. Attempting to set it when this is not true, or to set it
** to a value other than 0 or 1 causes sqlite3async_control() to return
** SQLITE_MISUSE and the value of the parameter to remain unchanged.
**
** If this parameter is set to zero, then it is only safe to access the
** database via the asynchronous IO VFS from within a single process. If
** while writing to the database via the asynchronous IO VFS the database
** is also read or written from within another process, or via another
** connection that does not use the asynchronous IO VFS within the same
** process, the results are undefined (and may include crashes or database
** corruption).
**
** Alternatively, if this parameter is set to 1, then it is safe to access
** the database from multiple connections within multiple processes using
** either the asynchronous IO VFS or the parent VFS directly.
*/
int sqlite3async_control(int op, ...);
/*
** Values that can be used as the first argument to sqlite3async_control().
*/
#define SQLITEASYNC_HALT 1
#define SQLITEASYNC_GET_HALT 2
#define SQLITEASYNC_DELAY 3
#define SQLITEASYNC_GET_DELAY 4
#define SQLITEASYNC_LOCKFILES 5
#define SQLITEASYNC_GET_LOCKFILES 6
/*
** If the first argument to sqlite3async_control() is SQLITEASYNC_HALT,
** the second argument should be one of the following.
*/
#define SQLITEASYNC_HALT_NEVER 0 /* Never halt (default value) */
#define SQLITEASYNC_HALT_NOW 1 /* Halt as soon as possible */
#define SQLITEASYNC_HALT_IDLE 2 /* Halt when write-queue is empty */
#ifdef __cplusplus
} /* End of the 'extern "C"' block */
#endif
#endif /* ifndef __SQLITEASYNC_H_ */

2
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/README.txt
View File

@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
This folder contains source code to the first full-text search
extension for SQLite.

404
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/ft_hash.c
View File

@ -1,404 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2001 September 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the implementation of generic hash-tables used in SQLite.
** We've modified it slightly to serve as a standalone hash table
** implementation for the full-text indexing module.
*/
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "ft_hash.h"
void *malloc_and_zero(int n){
void *p = malloc(n);
if( p ){
memset(p, 0, n);
}
return p;
}
/* Turn bulk memory into a hash table object by initializing the
** fields of the Hash structure.
**
** "pNew" is a pointer to the hash table that is to be initialized.
** keyClass is one of the constants HASH_INT, HASH_POINTER,
** HASH_BINARY, or HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass
** determines what kind of key the hash table will use. "copyKey" is
** true if the hash table should make its own private copy of keys and
** false if it should just use the supplied pointer. CopyKey only makes
** sense for HASH_STRING and HASH_BINARY and is ignored
** for other key classes.
*/
void HashInit(Hash *pNew, int keyClass, int copyKey){
assert( pNew!=0 );
assert( keyClass>=HASH_STRING && keyClass<=HASH_BINARY );
pNew->keyClass = keyClass;
#if 0
if( keyClass==HASH_POINTER || keyClass==HASH_INT ) copyKey = 0;
#endif
pNew->copyKey = copyKey;
pNew->first = 0;
pNew->count = 0;
pNew->htsize = 0;
pNew->ht = 0;
pNew->xMalloc = malloc_and_zero;
pNew->xFree = free;
}
/* Remove all entries from a hash table. Reclaim all memory.
** Call this routine to delete a hash table or to reset a hash table
** to the empty state.
*/
void HashClear(Hash *pH){
HashElem *elem; /* For looping over all elements of the table */
assert( pH!=0 );
elem = pH->first;
pH->first = 0;
if( pH->ht ) pH->xFree(pH->ht);
pH->ht = 0;
pH->htsize = 0;
while( elem ){
HashElem *next_elem = elem->next;
if( pH->copyKey && elem->pKey ){
pH->xFree(elem->pKey);
}
pH->xFree(elem);
elem = next_elem;
}
pH->count = 0;
}
#if 0 /* NOT USED */
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is HASH_INT
*/
static int intHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
return nKey ^ (nKey<<8) ^ (nKey>>8);
}
static int intCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
return n2 - n1;
}
#endif
#if 0 /* NOT USED */
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is HASH_POINTER
*/
static int ptrHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
uptr x = Addr(pKey);
return x ^ (x<<8) ^ (x>>8);
}
static int ptrCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
if( pKey1==pKey2 ) return 0;
if( pKey1<pKey2 ) return -1;
return 1;
}
#endif
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is HASH_STRING
*/
static int strHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
const char *z = (const char *)pKey;
int h = 0;
if( nKey<=0 ) nKey = (int) strlen(z);
while( nKey > 0 ){
h = (h<<3) ^ h ^ *z++;
nKey--;
}
return h & 0x7fffffff;
}
static int strCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
if( n1!=n2 ) return 1;
return strncmp((const char*)pKey1,(const char*)pKey2,n1);
}
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is HASH_BINARY
*/
static int binHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
int h = 0;
const char *z = (const char *)pKey;
while( nKey-- > 0 ){
h = (h<<3) ^ h ^ *(z++);
}
return h & 0x7fffffff;
}
static int binCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
if( n1!=n2 ) return 1;
return memcmp(pKey1,pKey2,n1);
}
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some
** programmers, so we provide the following additional explanation:
**
** The name of the function is "hashFunction". The function takes a
** single parameter "keyClass". The return value of hashFunction()
** is a pointer to another function. Specifically, the return value
** of hashFunction() is a pointer to a function that takes two parameters
** with types "const void*" and "int" and returns an "int".
*/
static int (*hashFunction(int keyClass))(const void*,int){
#if 0 /* HASH_INT and HASH_POINTER are never used */
switch( keyClass ){
case HASH_INT: return &intHash;
case HASH_POINTER: return &ptrHash;
case HASH_STRING: return &strHash;
case HASH_BINARY: return &binHash;;
default: break;
}
return 0;
#else
if( keyClass==HASH_STRING ){
return &strHash;
}else{
assert( keyClass==HASH_BINARY );
return &binHash;
}
#endif
}
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
** For help in interpreted the obscure C code in the function definition,
** see the header comment on the previous function.
*/
static int (*compareFunction(int keyClass))(const void*,int,const void*,int){
#if 0 /* HASH_INT and HASH_POINTER are never used */
switch( keyClass ){
case HASH_INT: return &intCompare;
case HASH_POINTER: return &ptrCompare;
case HASH_STRING: return &strCompare;
case HASH_BINARY: return &binCompare;
default: break;
}
return 0;
#else
if( keyClass==HASH_STRING ){
return &strCompare;
}else{
assert( keyClass==HASH_BINARY );
return &binCompare;
}
#endif
}
/* Link an element into the hash table
*/
static void insertElement(
Hash *pH, /* The complete hash table */
struct _ht *pEntry, /* The entry into which pNew is inserted */
HashElem *pNew /* The element to be inserted */
){
HashElem *pHead; /* First element already in pEntry */
pHead = pEntry->chain;
if( pHead ){
pNew->next = pHead;
pNew->prev = pHead->prev;
if( pHead->prev ){ pHead->prev->next = pNew; }
else { pH->first = pNew; }
pHead->prev = pNew;
}else{
pNew->next = pH->first;
if( pH->first ){ pH->first->prev = pNew; }
pNew->prev = 0;
pH->first = pNew;
}
pEntry->count++;
pEntry->chain = pNew;
}
/* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets.
** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail
** to resize if sqliteMalloc() fails.
*/
static void rehash(Hash *pH, int new_size){
struct _ht *new_ht; /* The new hash table */
HashElem *elem, *next_elem; /* For looping over existing elements */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
assert( (new_size & (new_size-1))==0 );
new_ht = (struct _ht *)pH->xMalloc( new_size*sizeof(struct _ht) );
if( new_ht==0 ) return;
if( pH->ht ) pH->xFree(pH->ht);
pH->ht = new_ht;
pH->htsize = new_size;
xHash = hashFunction(pH->keyClass);
for(elem=pH->first, pH->first=0; elem; elem = next_elem){
int h = (*xHash)(elem->pKey, elem->nKey) & (new_size-1);
next_elem = elem->next;
insertElement(pH, &new_ht[h], elem);
}
}
/* This function (for internal use only) locates an element in an
** hash table that matches the given key. The hash for this key has
** already been computed and is passed as the 4th parameter.
*/
static HashElem *findElementGivenHash(
const Hash *pH, /* The pH to be searched */
const void *pKey, /* The key we are searching for */
int nKey,
int h /* The hash for this key. */
){
HashElem *elem; /* Used to loop thru the element list */
int count; /* Number of elements left to test */
int (*xCompare)(const void*,int,const void*,int); /* comparison function */
if( pH->ht ){
struct _ht *pEntry = &pH->ht[h];
elem = pEntry->chain;
count = pEntry->count;
xCompare = compareFunction(pH->keyClass);
while( count-- && elem ){
if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
return elem;
}
elem = elem->next;
}
}
return 0;
}
/* Remove a single entry from the hash table given a pointer to that
** element and a hash on the element's key.
*/
static void removeElementGivenHash(
Hash *pH, /* The pH containing "elem" */
HashElem* elem, /* The element to be removed from the pH */
int h /* Hash value for the element */
){
struct _ht *pEntry;
if( elem->prev ){
elem->prev->next = elem->next;
}else{
pH->first = elem->next;
}
if( elem->next ){
elem->next->prev = elem->prev;
}
pEntry = &pH->ht[h];
if( pEntry->chain==elem ){
pEntry->chain = elem->next;
}
pEntry->count--;
if( pEntry->count<=0 ){
pEntry->chain = 0;
}
if( pH->copyKey && elem->pKey ){
pH->xFree(elem->pKey);
}
pH->xFree( elem );
pH->count--;
if( pH->count<=0 ){
assert( pH->first==0 );
assert( pH->count==0 );
HashClear(pH);
}
}
/* Attempt to locate an element of the hash table pH with a key
** that matches pKey,nKey. Return the data for this element if it is
** found, or NULL if there is no match.
*/
void *HashFind(const Hash *pH, const void *pKey, int nKey){
int h; /* A hash on key */
HashElem *elem; /* The element that matches key */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
if( pH==0 || pH->ht==0 ) return 0;
xHash = hashFunction(pH->keyClass);
assert( xHash!=0 );
h = (*xHash)(pKey,nKey);
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
elem = findElementGivenHash(pH,pKey,nKey, h & (pH->htsize-1));
return elem ? elem->data : 0;
}
/* Insert an element into the hash table pH. The key is pKey,nKey
** and the data is "data".
**
** If no element exists with a matching key, then a new
** element is created. A copy of the key is made if the copyKey
** flag is set. NULL is returned.
**
** If another element already exists with the same key, then the
** new data replaces the old data and the old data is returned.
** The key is not copied in this instance. If a malloc fails, then
** the new data is returned and the hash table is unchanged.
**
** If the "data" parameter to this function is NULL, then the
** element corresponding to "key" is removed from the hash table.
*/
void *HashInsert(Hash *pH, const void *pKey, int nKey, void *data){
int hraw; /* Raw hash value of the key */
int h; /* the hash of the key modulo hash table size */
HashElem *elem; /* Used to loop thru the element list */
HashElem *new_elem; /* New element added to the pH */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
assert( pH!=0 );
xHash = hashFunction(pH->keyClass);
assert( xHash!=0 );
hraw = (*xHash)(pKey, nKey);
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
h = hraw & (pH->htsize-1);
elem = findElementGivenHash(pH,pKey,nKey,h);
if( elem ){
void *old_data = elem->data;
if( data==0 ){
removeElementGivenHash(pH,elem,h);
}else{
elem->data = data;
}
return old_data;
}
if( data==0 ) return 0;
new_elem = (HashElem*)pH->xMalloc( sizeof(HashElem) );
if( new_elem==0 ) return data;
if( pH->copyKey && pKey!=0 ){
new_elem->pKey = pH->xMalloc( nKey );
if( new_elem->pKey==0 ){
pH->xFree(new_elem);
return data;
}
memcpy((void*)new_elem->pKey, pKey, nKey);
}else{
new_elem->pKey = (void*)pKey;
}
new_elem->nKey = nKey;
pH->count++;
if( pH->htsize==0 ){
rehash(pH,8);
if( pH->htsize==0 ){
pH->count = 0;
pH->xFree(new_elem);
return data;
}
}
if( pH->count > pH->htsize ){
rehash(pH,pH->htsize*2);
}
assert( pH->htsize>0 );
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
h = hraw & (pH->htsize-1);
insertElement(pH, &pH->ht[h], new_elem);
new_elem->data = data;
return 0;
}

111
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/ft_hash.h
View File

@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2001 September 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the header file for the generic hash-table implementation
** used in SQLite. We've modified it slightly to serve as a standalone
** hash table implementation for the full-text indexing module.
**
*/
#ifndef _HASH_H_
#define _HASH_H_
/* Forward declarations of structures. */
typedef struct Hash Hash;
typedef struct HashElem HashElem;
/* A complete hash table is an instance of the following structure.
** The internals of this structure are intended to be opaque -- client
** code should not attempt to access or modify the fields of this structure
** directly. Change this structure only by using the routines below.
** However, many of the "procedures" and "functions" for modifying and
** accessing this structure are really macros, so we can't really make
** this structure opaque.
*/
struct Hash {
char keyClass; /* HASH_INT, _POINTER, _STRING, _BINARY */
char copyKey; /* True if copy of key made on insert */
int count; /* Number of entries in this table */
HashElem *first; /* The first element of the array */
void *(*xMalloc)(int); /* malloc() function to use */
void (*xFree)(void *); /* free() function to use */
int htsize; /* Number of buckets in the hash table */
struct _ht { /* the hash table */
int count; /* Number of entries with this hash */
HashElem *chain; /* Pointer to first entry with this hash */
} *ht;
};
/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
**
** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
** be opaque because it is used by macros.
*/
struct HashElem {
HashElem *next, *prev; /* Next and previous elements in the table */
void *data; /* Data associated with this element */
void *pKey; int nKey; /* Key associated with this element */
};
/*
** There are 4 different modes of operation for a hash table:
**
** HASH_INT nKey is used as the key and pKey is ignored.
**
** HASH_POINTER pKey is used as the key and nKey is ignored.
**
** HASH_STRING pKey points to a string that is nKey bytes long
** (including the null-terminator, if any). Case
** is respected in comparisons.
**
** HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long.
** memcmp() is used to compare keys.
**
** A copy of the key is made for HASH_STRING and HASH_BINARY
** if the copyKey parameter to HashInit is 1.
*/
/* #define HASH_INT 1 // NOT USED */
/* #define HASH_POINTER 2 // NOT USED */
#define HASH_STRING 3
#define HASH_BINARY 4
/*
** Access routines. To delete, insert a NULL pointer.
*/
void HashInit(Hash*, int keytype, int copyKey);
void *HashInsert(Hash*, const void *pKey, int nKey, void *pData);
void *HashFind(const Hash*, const void *pKey, int nKey);
void HashClear(Hash*);
/*
** Macros for looping over all elements of a hash table. The idiom is
** like this:
**
** Hash h;
** HashElem *p;
** ...
** for(p=HashFirst(&h); p; p=HashNext(p)){
** SomeStructure *pData = HashData(p);
** // do something with pData
** }
*/
#define HashFirst(H) ((H)->first)
#define HashNext(E) ((E)->next)
#define HashData(E) ((E)->data)
#define HashKey(E) ((E)->pKey)
#define HashKeysize(E) ((E)->nKey)
/*
** Number of entries in a hash table
*/
#define HashCount(H) ((H)->count)
#endif /* _HASH_H_ */

3348
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/fts1.c
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

11
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/fts1.h
View File

@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
#include "sqlite3.h"
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
int sqlite3Fts1Init(sqlite3 *db);
#ifdef __cplusplus
} /* extern "C" */
#endif /* __cplusplus */

369
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/fts1_hash.c
View File

@ -1,369 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2001 September 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the implementation of generic hash-tables used in SQLite.
** We've modified it slightly to serve as a standalone hash table
** implementation for the full-text indexing module.
*/
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS1 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS1 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS1 is defined).
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS1)
#include "fts1_hash.h"
static void *malloc_and_zero(int n){
void *p = malloc(n);
if( p ){
memset(p, 0, n);
}
return p;
}
/* Turn bulk memory into a hash table object by initializing the
** fields of the Hash structure.
**
** "pNew" is a pointer to the hash table that is to be initialized.
** keyClass is one of the constants
** FTS1_HASH_BINARY or FTS1_HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass
** determines what kind of key the hash table will use. "copyKey" is
** true if the hash table should make its own private copy of keys and
** false if it should just use the supplied pointer.
*/
void sqlite3Fts1HashInit(fts1Hash *pNew, int keyClass, int copyKey){
assert( pNew!=0 );
assert( keyClass>=FTS1_HASH_STRING && keyClass<=FTS1_HASH_BINARY );
pNew->keyClass = keyClass;
pNew->copyKey = copyKey;
pNew->first = 0;
pNew->count = 0;
pNew->htsize = 0;
pNew->ht = 0;
pNew->xMalloc = malloc_and_zero;
pNew->xFree = free;
}
/* Remove all entries from a hash table. Reclaim all memory.
** Call this routine to delete a hash table or to reset a hash table
** to the empty state.
*/
void sqlite3Fts1HashClear(fts1Hash *pH){
fts1HashElem *elem; /* For looping over all elements of the table */
assert( pH!=0 );
elem = pH->first;
pH->first = 0;
if( pH->ht ) pH->xFree(pH->ht);
pH->ht = 0;
pH->htsize = 0;
while( elem ){
fts1HashElem *next_elem = elem->next;
if( pH->copyKey && elem->pKey ){
pH->xFree(elem->pKey);
}
pH->xFree(elem);
elem = next_elem;
}
pH->count = 0;
}
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is FTS1_HASH_STRING
*/
static int strHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
const char *z = (const char *)pKey;
int h = 0;
if( nKey<=0 ) nKey = (int) strlen(z);
while( nKey > 0 ){
h = (h<<3) ^ h ^ *z++;
nKey--;
}
return h & 0x7fffffff;
}
static int strCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
if( n1!=n2 ) return 1;
return strncmp((const char*)pKey1,(const char*)pKey2,n1);
}
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is FTS1_HASH_BINARY
*/
static int binHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
int h = 0;
const char *z = (const char *)pKey;
while( nKey-- > 0 ){
h = (h<<3) ^ h ^ *(z++);
}
return h & 0x7fffffff;
}
static int binCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
if( n1!=n2 ) return 1;
return memcmp(pKey1,pKey2,n1);
}
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some
** programmers, so we provide the following additional explanation:
**
** The name of the function is "hashFunction". The function takes a
** single parameter "keyClass". The return value of hashFunction()
** is a pointer to another function. Specifically, the return value
** of hashFunction() is a pointer to a function that takes two parameters
** with types "const void*" and "int" and returns an "int".
*/
static int (*hashFunction(int keyClass))(const void*,int){
if( keyClass==FTS1_HASH_STRING ){
return &strHash;
}else{
assert( keyClass==FTS1_HASH_BINARY );
return &binHash;
}
}
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
** For help in interpreted the obscure C code in the function definition,
** see the header comment on the previous function.
*/
static int (*compareFunction(int keyClass))(const void*,int,const void*,int){
if( keyClass==FTS1_HASH_STRING ){
return &strCompare;
}else{
assert( keyClass==FTS1_HASH_BINARY );
return &binCompare;
}
}
/* Link an element into the hash table
*/
static void insertElement(
fts1Hash *pH, /* The complete hash table */
struct _fts1ht *pEntry, /* The entry into which pNew is inserted */
fts1HashElem *pNew /* The element to be inserted */
){
fts1HashElem *pHead; /* First element already in pEntry */
pHead = pEntry->chain;
if( pHead ){
pNew->next = pHead;
pNew->prev = pHead->prev;
if( pHead->prev ){ pHead->prev->next = pNew; }
else { pH->first = pNew; }
pHead->prev = pNew;
}else{
pNew->next = pH->first;
if( pH->first ){ pH->first->prev = pNew; }
pNew->prev = 0;
pH->first = pNew;
}
pEntry->count++;
pEntry->chain = pNew;
}
/* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets.
** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail
** to resize if sqliteMalloc() fails.
*/
static void rehash(fts1Hash *pH, int new_size){
struct _fts1ht *new_ht; /* The new hash table */
fts1HashElem *elem, *next_elem; /* For looping over existing elements */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
assert( (new_size & (new_size-1))==0 );
new_ht = (struct _fts1ht *)pH->xMalloc( new_size*sizeof(struct _fts1ht) );
if( new_ht==0 ) return;
if( pH->ht ) pH->xFree(pH->ht);
pH->ht = new_ht;
pH->htsize = new_size;
xHash = hashFunction(pH->keyClass);
for(elem=pH->first, pH->first=0; elem; elem = next_elem){
int h = (*xHash)(elem->pKey, elem->nKey) & (new_size-1);
next_elem = elem->next;
insertElement(pH, &new_ht[h], elem);
}
}
/* This function (for internal use only) locates an element in an
** hash table that matches the given key. The hash for this key has
** already been computed and is passed as the 4th parameter.
*/
static fts1HashElem *findElementGivenHash(
const fts1Hash *pH, /* The pH to be searched */
const void *pKey, /* The key we are searching for */
int nKey,
int h /* The hash for this key. */
){
fts1HashElem *elem; /* Used to loop thru the element list */
int count; /* Number of elements left to test */
int (*xCompare)(const void*,int,const void*,int); /* comparison function */
if( pH->ht ){
struct _fts1ht *pEntry = &pH->ht[h];
elem = pEntry->chain;
count = pEntry->count;
xCompare = compareFunction(pH->keyClass);
while( count-- && elem ){
if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
return elem;
}
elem = elem->next;
}
}
return 0;
}
/* Remove a single entry from the hash table given a pointer to that
** element and a hash on the element's key.
*/
static void removeElementGivenHash(
fts1Hash *pH, /* The pH containing "elem" */
fts1HashElem* elem, /* The element to be removed from the pH */
int h /* Hash value for the element */
){
struct _fts1ht *pEntry;
if( elem->prev ){
elem->prev->next = elem->next;
}else{
pH->first = elem->next;
}
if( elem->next ){
elem->next->prev = elem->prev;
}
pEntry = &pH->ht[h];
if( pEntry->chain==elem ){
pEntry->chain = elem->next;
}
pEntry->count--;
if( pEntry->count<=0 ){
pEntry->chain = 0;
}
if( pH->copyKey && elem->pKey ){
pH->xFree(elem->pKey);
}
pH->xFree( elem );
pH->count--;
if( pH->count<=0 ){
assert( pH->first==0 );
assert( pH->count==0 );
fts1HashClear(pH);
}
}
/* Attempt to locate an element of the hash table pH with a key
** that matches pKey,nKey. Return the data for this element if it is
** found, or NULL if there is no match.
*/
void *sqlite3Fts1HashFind(const fts1Hash *pH, const void *pKey, int nKey){
int h; /* A hash on key */
fts1HashElem *elem; /* The element that matches key */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
if( pH==0 || pH->ht==0 ) return 0;
xHash = hashFunction(pH->keyClass);
assert( xHash!=0 );
h = (*xHash)(pKey,nKey);
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
elem = findElementGivenHash(pH,pKey,nKey, h & (pH->htsize-1));
return elem ? elem->data : 0;
}
/* Insert an element into the hash table pH. The key is pKey,nKey
** and the data is "data".
**
** If no element exists with a matching key, then a new
** element is created. A copy of the key is made if the copyKey
** flag is set. NULL is returned.
**
** If another element already exists with the same key, then the
** new data replaces the old data and the old data is returned.
** The key is not copied in this instance. If a malloc fails, then
** the new data is returned and the hash table is unchanged.
**
** If the "data" parameter to this function is NULL, then the
** element corresponding to "key" is removed from the hash table.
*/
void *sqlite3Fts1HashInsert(
fts1Hash *pH, /* The hash table to insert into */
const void *pKey, /* The key */
int nKey, /* Number of bytes in the key */
void *data /* The data */
){
int hraw; /* Raw hash value of the key */
int h; /* the hash of the key modulo hash table size */
fts1HashElem *elem; /* Used to loop thru the element list */
fts1HashElem *new_elem; /* New element added to the pH */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
assert( pH!=0 );
xHash = hashFunction(pH->keyClass);
assert( xHash!=0 );
hraw = (*xHash)(pKey, nKey);
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
h = hraw & (pH->htsize-1);
elem = findElementGivenHash(pH,pKey,nKey,h);
if( elem ){
void *old_data = elem->data;
if( data==0 ){
removeElementGivenHash(pH,elem,h);
}else{
elem->data = data;
}
return old_data;
}
if( data==0 ) return 0;
new_elem = (fts1HashElem*)pH->xMalloc( sizeof(fts1HashElem) );
if( new_elem==0 ) return data;
if( pH->copyKey && pKey!=0 ){
new_elem->pKey = pH->xMalloc( nKey );
if( new_elem->pKey==0 ){
pH->xFree(new_elem);
return data;
}
memcpy((void*)new_elem->pKey, pKey, nKey);
}else{
new_elem->pKey = (void*)pKey;
}
new_elem->nKey = nKey;
pH->count++;
if( pH->htsize==0 ){
rehash(pH,8);
if( pH->htsize==0 ){
pH->count = 0;
pH->xFree(new_elem);
return data;
}
}
if( pH->count > pH->htsize ){
rehash(pH,pH->htsize*2);
}
assert( pH->htsize>0 );
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
h = hraw & (pH->htsize-1);
insertElement(pH, &pH->ht[h], new_elem);
new_elem->data = data;
return 0;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS1) */

112
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/fts1_hash.h
View File

@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2001 September 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the header file for the generic hash-table implementation
** used in SQLite. We've modified it slightly to serve as a standalone
** hash table implementation for the full-text indexing module.
**
*/
#ifndef _FTS1_HASH_H_
#define _FTS1_HASH_H_
/* Forward declarations of structures. */
typedef struct fts1Hash fts1Hash;
typedef struct fts1HashElem fts1HashElem;
/* A complete hash table is an instance of the following structure.
** The internals of this structure are intended to be opaque -- client
** code should not attempt to access or modify the fields of this structure
** directly. Change this structure only by using the routines below.
** However, many of the "procedures" and "functions" for modifying and
** accessing this structure are really macros, so we can't really make
** this structure opaque.
*/
struct fts1Hash {
char keyClass; /* HASH_INT, _POINTER, _STRING, _BINARY */
char copyKey; /* True if copy of key made on insert */
int count; /* Number of entries in this table */
fts1HashElem *first; /* The first element of the array */
void *(*xMalloc)(int); /* malloc() function to use */
void (*xFree)(void *); /* free() function to use */
int htsize; /* Number of buckets in the hash table */
struct _fts1ht { /* the hash table */
int count; /* Number of entries with this hash */
fts1HashElem *chain; /* Pointer to first entry with this hash */
} *ht;
};
/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
**
** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
** be opaque because it is used by macros.
*/
struct fts1HashElem {
fts1HashElem *next, *prev; /* Next and previous elements in the table */
void *data; /* Data associated with this element */
void *pKey; int nKey; /* Key associated with this element */
};
/*
** There are 2 different modes of operation for a hash table:
**
** FTS1_HASH_STRING pKey points to a string that is nKey bytes long
** (including the null-terminator, if any). Case
** is respected in comparisons.
**
** FTS1_HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long.
** memcmp() is used to compare keys.
**
** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts1HashInit is 1.
*/
#define FTS1_HASH_STRING 1
#define FTS1_HASH_BINARY 2
/*
** Access routines. To delete, insert a NULL pointer.
*/
void sqlite3Fts1HashInit(fts1Hash*, int keytype, int copyKey);
void *sqlite3Fts1HashInsert(fts1Hash*, const void *pKey, int nKey, void *pData);
void *sqlite3Fts1HashFind(const fts1Hash*, const void *pKey, int nKey);
void sqlite3Fts1HashClear(fts1Hash*);
/*
** Shorthand for the functions above
*/
#define fts1HashInit sqlite3Fts1HashInit
#define fts1HashInsert sqlite3Fts1HashInsert
#define fts1HashFind sqlite3Fts1HashFind
#define fts1HashClear sqlite3Fts1HashClear
/*
** Macros for looping over all elements of a hash table. The idiom is
** like this:
**
** fts1Hash h;
** fts1HashElem *p;
** ...
** for(p=fts1HashFirst(&h); p; p=fts1HashNext(p)){
** SomeStructure *pData = fts1HashData(p);
** // do something with pData
** }
*/
#define fts1HashFirst(H) ((H)->first)
#define fts1HashNext(E) ((E)->next)
#define fts1HashData(E) ((E)->data)
#define fts1HashKey(E) ((E)->pKey)
#define fts1HashKeysize(E) ((E)->nKey)
/*
** Number of entries in a hash table
*/
#define fts1HashCount(H) ((H)->count)
#endif /* _FTS1_HASH_H_ */

643
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/fts1_porter.c
View File

@ -1,643 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 September 30
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** Implementation of the full-text-search tokenizer that implements
** a Porter stemmer.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS1 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS1 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS1 is defined).
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS1)
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include "fts1_tokenizer.h"
/*
** Class derived from sqlite3_tokenizer
*/
typedef struct porter_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base; /* Base class */
} porter_tokenizer;
/*
** Class derived from sqlit3_tokenizer_cursor
*/
typedef struct porter_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
const char *zInput; /* input we are tokenizing */
int nInput; /* size of the input */
int iOffset; /* current position in zInput */
int iToken; /* index of next token to be returned */
char *zToken; /* storage for current token */
int nAllocated; /* space allocated to zToken buffer */
} porter_tokenizer_cursor;
/* Forward declaration */
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module porterTokenizerModule;
/*
** Create a new tokenizer instance.
*/
static int porterCreate(
int argc, const char * const *argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer
){
porter_tokenizer *t;
t = (porter_tokenizer *) calloc(sizeof(*t), 1);
if( t==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
*ppTokenizer = &t->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Destroy a tokenizer
*/
static int porterDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
free(pTokenizer);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is zInput[0..nInput-1]. A cursor
** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int porterOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* The tokenizer */
const char *zInput, int nInput, /* String to be tokenized */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Tokenization cursor */
){
porter_tokenizer_cursor *c;
c = (porter_tokenizer_cursor *) malloc(sizeof(*c));
if( c==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
c->zInput = zInput;
if( zInput==0 ){
c->nInput = 0;
}else if( nInput<0 ){
c->nInput = (int)strlen(zInput);
}else{
c->nInput = nInput;
}
c->iOffset = 0; /* start tokenizing at the beginning */
c->iToken = 0;
c->zToken = NULL; /* no space allocated, yet. */
c->nAllocated = 0;
*ppCursor = &c->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Close a tokenization cursor previously opened by a call to
** porterOpen() above.
*/
static int porterClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
porter_tokenizer_cursor *c = (porter_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
free(c->zToken);
free(c);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Vowel or consonant
*/
static const char cType[] = {
0, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0,
1, 1, 1, 2, 1
};
/*
** isConsonant() and isVowel() determine if their first character in
** the string they point to is a consonant or a vowel, according
** to Porter ruls.
**
** A consonate is any letter other than 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', or 'u'.
** 'Y' is a consonant unless it follows another consonant,
** in which case it is a vowel.
**
** In these routine, the letters are in reverse order. So the 'y' rule
** is that 'y' is a consonant unless it is followed by another
** consonent.
*/
static int isVowel(const char*);
static int isConsonant(const char *z){
int j;
char x = *z;
if( x==0 ) return 0;
assert( x>='a' && x<='z' );
j = cType[x-'a'];
if( j<2 ) return j;
return z[1]==0 || isVowel(z + 1);
}
static int isVowel(const char *z){
int j;
char x = *z;
if( x==0 ) return 0;
assert( x>='a' && x<='z' );
j = cType[x-'a'];
if( j<2 ) return 1-j;
return isConsonant(z + 1);
}
/*
** Let any sequence of one or more vowels be represented by V and let
** C be sequence of one or more consonants. Then every word can be
** represented as:
**
** [C] (VC){m} [V]
**
** In prose: A word is an optional consonant followed by zero or
** vowel-consonant pairs followed by an optional vowel. "m" is the
** number of vowel consonant pairs. This routine computes the value
** of m for the first i bytes of a word.
**
** Return true if the m-value for z is 1 or more. In other words,
** return true if z contains at least one vowel that is followed
** by a consonant.
**
** In this routine z[] is in reverse order. So we are really looking
** for an instance of of a consonant followed by a vowel.
*/
static int m_gt_0(const char *z){
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z!=0;
}
/* Like mgt0 above except we are looking for a value of m which is
** exactly 1
*/
static int m_eq_1(const char *z){
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 1;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z==0;
}
/* Like mgt0 above except we are looking for a value of m>1 instead
** or m>0
*/
static int m_gt_1(const char *z){
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z!=0;
}
/*
** Return TRUE if there is a vowel anywhere within z[0..n-1]
*/
static int hasVowel(const char *z){
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z!=0;
}
/*
** Return TRUE if the word ends in a double consonant.
**
** The text is reversed here. So we are really looking at
** the first two characters of z[].
*/
static int doubleConsonant(const char *z){
return isConsonant(z) && z[0]==z[1] && isConsonant(z+1);
}
/*
** Return TRUE if the word ends with three letters which
** are consonant-vowel-consonent and where the final consonant
** is not 'w', 'x', or 'y'.
**
** The word is reversed here. So we are really checking the
** first three letters and the first one cannot be in [wxy].
*/
static int star_oh(const char *z){
return
z[0]!=0 && isConsonant(z) &&
z[0]!='w' && z[0]!='x' && z[0]!='y' &&
z[1]!=0 && isVowel(z+1) &&
z[2]!=0 && isConsonant(z+2);
}
/*
** If the word ends with zFrom and xCond() is true for the stem
** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the
** ending to zTo.
**
** The input word *pz and zFrom are both in reverse order. zTo
** is in normal order.
**
** Return TRUE if zFrom matches. Return FALSE if zFrom does not
** match. Not that TRUE is returned even if xCond() fails and
** no substitution occurs.
*/
static int stem(
char **pz, /* The word being stemmed (Reversed) */
const char *zFrom, /* If the ending matches this... (Reversed) */
const char *zTo, /* ... change the ending to this (not reversed) */
int (*xCond)(const char*) /* Condition that must be true */
){
char *z = *pz;
while( *zFrom && *zFrom==*z ){ z++; zFrom++; }
if( *zFrom!=0 ) return 0;
if( xCond && !xCond(z) ) return 1;
while( *zTo ){
*(--z) = *(zTo++);
}
*pz = z;
return 1;
}
/*
** This is the fallback stemmer used when the porter stemmer is
** inappropriate. The input word is copied into the output with
** US-ASCII case folding. If the input word is too long (more
** than 20 bytes if it contains no digits or more than 6 bytes if
** it contains digits) then word is truncated to 20 or 6 bytes
** by taking 10 or 3 bytes from the beginning and end.
*/
static void copy_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
int i, mx, j;
int hasDigit = 0;
for(i=0; i<nIn; i++){
int c = zIn[i];
if( c>='A' && c<='Z' ){
zOut[i] = c - 'A' + 'a';
}else{
if( c>='0' && c<='9' ) hasDigit = 1;
zOut[i] = c;
}
}
mx = hasDigit ? 3 : 10;
if( nIn>mx*2 ){
for(j=mx, i=nIn-mx; i<nIn; i++, j++){
zOut[j] = zOut[i];
}
i = j;
}
zOut[i] = 0;
*pnOut = i;
}
/*
** Stem the input word zIn[0..nIn-1]. Store the output in zOut.
** zOut is at least big enough to hold nIn bytes. Write the actual
** size of the output word (exclusive of the '\0' terminator) into *pnOut.
**
** Any upper-case characters in the US-ASCII character set ([A-Z])
** are converted to lower case. Upper-case UTF characters are
** unchanged.
**
** Words that are longer than about 20 bytes are stemmed by retaining
** a few bytes from the beginning and the end of the word. If the
** word contains digits, 3 bytes are taken from the beginning and
** 3 bytes from the end. For long words without digits, 10 bytes
** are taken from each end. US-ASCII case folding still applies.
**
** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not
** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just
** copies the input into the input into the output with US-ASCII
** case folding.
**
** Stemming never increases the length of the word. So there is
** no chance of overflowing the zOut buffer.
*/
static void porter_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
int i, j, c;
char zReverse[28];
char *z, *z2;
if( nIn<3 || nIn>=sizeof(zReverse)-7 ){
/* The word is too big or too small for the porter stemmer.
** Fallback to the copy stemmer */
copy_stemmer(zIn, nIn, zOut, pnOut);
return;
}
for(i=0, j=sizeof(zReverse)-6; i<nIn; i++, j--){
c = zIn[i];
if( c>='A' && c<='Z' ){
zReverse[j] = c + 'a' - 'A';
}else if( c>='a' && c<='z' ){
zReverse[j] = c;
}else{
/* The use of a character not in [a-zA-Z] means that we fallback
** to the copy stemmer */
copy_stemmer(zIn, nIn, zOut, pnOut);
return;
}
}
memset(&zReverse[sizeof(zReverse)-5], 0, 5);
z = &zReverse[j+1];
/* Step 1a */
if( z[0]=='s' ){
if(
!stem(&z, "sess", "ss", 0) &&
!stem(&z, "sei", "i", 0) &&
!stem(&z, "ss", "ss", 0)
){
z++;
}
}
/* Step 1b */
z2 = z;
if( stem(&z, "dee", "ee", m_gt_0) ){
/* Do nothing. The work was all in the test */
}else if(
(stem(&z, "gni", "", hasVowel) || stem(&z, "de", "", hasVowel))
&& z!=z2
){
if( stem(&z, "ta", "ate", 0) ||
stem(&z, "lb", "ble", 0) ||
stem(&z, "zi", "ize", 0) ){
/* Do nothing. The work was all in the test */
}else if( doubleConsonant(z) && (*z!='l' && *z!='s' && *z!='z') ){
z++;
}else if( m_eq_1(z) && star_oh(z) ){
*(--z) = 'e';
}
}
/* Step 1c */
if( z[0]=='y' && hasVowel(z+1) ){
z[0] = 'i';
}
/* Step 2 */
switch( z[1] ){
case 'a':
stem(&z, "lanoita", "ate", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "lanoit", "tion", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'c':
stem(&z, "icne", "ence", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "icna", "ance", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'e':
stem(&z, "rezi", "ize", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'g':
stem(&z, "igol", "log", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'l':
stem(&z, "ilb", "ble", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "illa", "al", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "iltne", "ent", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ile", "e", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ilsuo", "ous", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'o':
stem(&z, "noitazi", "ize", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "noita", "ate", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "rota", "ate", m_gt_0);
break;
case 's':
stem(&z, "msila", "al", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ssenevi", "ive", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ssenluf", "ful", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ssensuo", "ous", m_gt_0);
break;
case 't':
stem(&z, "itila", "al", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "itivi", "ive", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "itilib", "ble", m_gt_0);
break;
}
/* Step 3 */
switch( z[0] ){
case 'e':
stem(&z, "etaci", "ic", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "evita", "", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ezila", "al", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'i':
stem(&z, "itici", "ic", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'l':
stem(&z, "laci", "ic", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "luf", "", m_gt_0);
break;
case 's':
stem(&z, "ssen", "", m_gt_0);
break;
}
/* Step 4 */
switch( z[1] ){
case 'a':
if( z[0]=='l' && m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
break;
case 'c':
if( z[0]=='e' && z[2]=='n' && (z[3]=='a' || z[3]=='e') && m_gt_1(z+4) ){
z += 4;
}
break;
case 'e':
if( z[0]=='r' && m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
break;
case 'i':
if( z[0]=='c' && m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
break;
case 'l':
if( z[0]=='e' && z[2]=='b' && (z[3]=='a' || z[3]=='i') && m_gt_1(z+4) ){
z += 4;
}
break;
case 'n':
if( z[0]=='t' ){
if( z[2]=='a' ){
if( m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
}else if( z[2]=='e' ){
stem(&z, "tneme", "", m_gt_1) ||
stem(&z, "tnem", "", m_gt_1) ||
stem(&z, "tne", "", m_gt_1);
}
}
break;
case 'o':
if( z[0]=='u' ){
if( m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
}else if( z[3]=='s' || z[3]=='t' ){
stem(&z, "noi", "", m_gt_1);
}
break;
case 's':
if( z[0]=='m' && z[2]=='i' && m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
break;
case 't':
stem(&z, "eta", "", m_gt_1) ||
stem(&z, "iti", "", m_gt_1);
break;
case 'u':
if( z[0]=='s' && z[2]=='o' && m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
break;
case 'v':
case 'z':
if( z[0]=='e' && z[2]=='i' && m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
break;
}
/* Step 5a */
if( z[0]=='e' ){
if( m_gt_1(z+1) ){
z++;
}else if( m_eq_1(z+1) && !star_oh(z+1) ){
z++;
}
}
/* Step 5b */
if( m_gt_1(z) && z[0]=='l' && z[1]=='l' ){
z++;
}
/* z[] is now the stemmed word in reverse order. Flip it back
** around into forward order and return.
*/
*pnOut = i = strlen(z);
zOut[i] = 0;
while( *z ){
zOut[--i] = *(z++);
}
}
/*
** Characters that can be part of a token. We assume any character
** whose value is greater than 0x80 (any UTF character) can be
** part of a token. In other words, delimiters all must have
** values of 0x7f or lower.
*/
static const char isIdChar[] = {
/* x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 3x */
0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, /* 4x */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, /* 5x */
0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, /* 6x */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 7x */
};
#define idChar(C) (((ch=C)&0x80)!=0 || (ch>0x2f && isIdChar[ch-0x30]))
#define isDelim(C) (((ch=C)&0x80)==0 && (ch<0x30 || !isIdChar[ch-0x30]))
/*
** Extract the next token from a tokenization cursor. The cursor must
** have been opened by a prior call to porterOpen().
*/
static int porterNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor returned by porterOpen */
const char **pzToken, /* OUT: *pzToken is the token text */
int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Number of bytes in token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
porter_tokenizer_cursor *c = (porter_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
const char *z = c->zInput;
while( c->iOffset<c->nInput ){
int iStartOffset, ch;
/* Scan past delimiter characters */
while( c->iOffset<c->nInput && isDelim(z[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
/* Count non-delimiter characters. */
iStartOffset = c->iOffset;
while( c->iOffset<c->nInput && !isDelim(z[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
if( c->iOffset>iStartOffset ){
int n = c->iOffset-iStartOffset;
if( n>c->nAllocated ){
c->nAllocated = n+20;
c->zToken = realloc(c->zToken, c->nAllocated);
if( c->zToken==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
porter_stemmer(&z[iStartOffset], n, c->zToken, pnBytes);
*pzToken = c->zToken;
*piStartOffset = iStartOffset;
*piEndOffset = c->iOffset;
*piPosition = c->iToken++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
}
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
/*
** The set of routines that implement the porter-stemmer tokenizer
*/
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module porterTokenizerModule = {
0,
porterCreate,
porterDestroy,
porterOpen,
porterClose,
porterNext,
};
/*
** Allocate a new porter tokenizer. Return a pointer to the new
** tokenizer in *ppModule
*/
void sqlite3Fts1PorterTokenizerModule(
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule
){
*ppModule = &porterTokenizerModule;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS1) */

90
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/fts1_tokenizer.h
View File

@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 July 10
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.
**
*************************************************************************
** Defines the interface to tokenizers used by fulltext-search. There
** are three basic components:
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer_module is a singleton defining the tokenizer
** interface functions. This is essentially the class structure for
** tokenizers.
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer is used to define a particular tokenizer, perhaps
** including customization information defined at creation time.
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor is generated by a tokenizer to generate
** tokens from a particular input.
*/
#ifndef _FTS1_TOKENIZER_H_
#define _FTS1_TOKENIZER_H_
/* TODO(shess) Only used for SQLITE_OK and SQLITE_DONE at this time.
** If tokenizers are to be allowed to call sqlite3_*() functions, then
** we will need a way to register the API consistently.
*/
#include "sqlite3.h"
/*
** Structures used by the tokenizer interface.
*/
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer sqlite3_tokenizer;
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor;
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module sqlite3_tokenizer_module;
struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
int iVersion; /* currently 0 */
/*
** Create and destroy a tokenizer. argc/argv are passed down from
** the fulltext virtual table creation to allow customization.
*/
int (*xCreate)(int argc, const char *const*argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer);
int (*xDestroy)(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer);
/*
** Tokenize a particular input. Call xOpen() to prepare to
** tokenize, xNext() repeatedly until it returns SQLITE_DONE, then
** xClose() to free any internal state. The pInput passed to
** xOpen() must exist until the cursor is closed. The ppToken
** result from xNext() is only valid until the next call to xNext()
** or until xClose() is called.
*/
/* TODO(shess) current implementation requires pInput to be
** nul-terminated. This should either be fixed, or pInput/nBytes
** should be converted to zInput.
*/
int (*xOpen)(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer,
const char *pInput, int nBytes,
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor);
int (*xClose)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor);
int (*xNext)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor,
const char **ppToken, int *pnBytes,
int *piStartOffset, int *piEndOffset, int *piPosition);
};
struct sqlite3_tokenizer {
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pModule; /* The module for this tokenizer */
/* Tokenizer implementations will typically add additional fields */
};
struct sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer; /* Tokenizer for this cursor. */
/* Tokenizer implementations will typically add additional fields */
};
/*
** Get the module for a tokenizer which generates tokens based on a
** set of non-token characters. The default is to break tokens at any
** non-alnum character, though the set of delimiters can also be
** specified by the first argv argument to xCreate().
*/
/* TODO(shess) This doesn't belong here. Need some sort of
** registration process.
*/
void sqlite3Fts1SimpleTokenizerModule(sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule);
void sqlite3Fts1PorterTokenizerModule(sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule);
#endif /* _FTS1_TOKENIZER_H_ */

221
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/fts1_tokenizer1.c
View File

@ -1,221 +0,0 @@
/*
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.
**
*************************************************************************
** Implementation of the "simple" full-text-search tokenizer.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS1 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS1 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS1 is defined).
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS1)
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include "fts1_tokenizer.h"
typedef struct simple_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base;
char delim[128]; /* flag ASCII delimiters */
} simple_tokenizer;
typedef struct simple_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
const char *pInput; /* input we are tokenizing */
int nBytes; /* size of the input */
int iOffset; /* current position in pInput */
int iToken; /* index of next token to be returned */
char *pToken; /* storage for current token */
int nTokenAllocated; /* space allocated to zToken buffer */
} simple_tokenizer_cursor;
/* Forward declaration */
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module simpleTokenizerModule;
static int isDelim(simple_tokenizer *t, unsigned char c){
return c<0x80 && t->delim[c];
}
/*
** Create a new tokenizer instance.
*/
static int simpleCreate(
int argc, const char * const *argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer
){
simple_tokenizer *t;
t = (simple_tokenizer *) calloc(sizeof(*t), 1);
if( t==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
/* TODO(shess) Delimiters need to remain the same from run to run,
** else we need to reindex. One solution would be a meta-table to
** track such information in the database, then we'd only want this
** information on the initial create.
*/
if( argc>1 ){
int i, n = strlen(argv[1]);
for(i=0; i<n; i++){
unsigned char ch = argv[1][i];
/* We explicitly don't support UTF-8 delimiters for now. */
if( ch>=0x80 ){
free(t);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
t->delim[ch] = 1;
}
} else {
/* Mark non-alphanumeric ASCII characters as delimiters */
int i;
for(i=1; i<0x80; i++){
t->delim[i] = !isalnum(i);
}
}
*ppTokenizer = &t->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Destroy a tokenizer
*/
static int simpleDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
free(pTokenizer);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int simpleOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* The tokenizer */
const char *pInput, int nBytes, /* String to be tokenized */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Tokenization cursor */
){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c;
c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) malloc(sizeof(*c));
if( c==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
c->pInput = pInput;
if( pInput==0 ){
c->nBytes = 0;
}else if( nBytes<0 ){
c->nBytes = (int)strlen(pInput);
}else{
c->nBytes = nBytes;
}
c->iOffset = 0; /* start tokenizing at the beginning */
c->iToken = 0;
c->pToken = NULL; /* no space allocated, yet. */
c->nTokenAllocated = 0;
*ppCursor = &c->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Close a tokenization cursor previously opened by a call to
** simpleOpen() above.
*/
static int simpleClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
free(c->pToken);
free(c);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Extract the next token from a tokenization cursor. The cursor must
** have been opened by a prior call to simpleOpen().
*/
static int simpleNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor returned by simpleOpen */
const char **ppToken, /* OUT: *ppToken is the token text */
int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Number of bytes in token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
simple_tokenizer *t = (simple_tokenizer *) pCursor->pTokenizer;
unsigned char *p = (unsigned char *)c->pInput;
while( c->iOffset<c->nBytes ){
int iStartOffset;
/* Scan past delimiter characters */
while( c->iOffset<c->nBytes && isDelim(t, p[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
/* Count non-delimiter characters. */
iStartOffset = c->iOffset;
while( c->iOffset<c->nBytes && !isDelim(t, p[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
if( c->iOffset>iStartOffset ){
int i, n = c->iOffset-iStartOffset;
if( n>c->nTokenAllocated ){
c->nTokenAllocated = n+20;
c->pToken = realloc(c->pToken, c->nTokenAllocated);
if( c->pToken==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
for(i=0; i<n; i++){
/* TODO(shess) This needs expansion to handle UTF-8
** case-insensitivity.
*/
unsigned char ch = p[iStartOffset+i];
c->pToken[i] = ch<0x80 ? tolower(ch) : ch;
}
*ppToken = c->pToken;
*pnBytes = n;
*piStartOffset = iStartOffset;
*piEndOffset = c->iOffset;
*piPosition = c->iToken++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
}
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
/*
** The set of routines that implement the simple tokenizer
*/
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module simpleTokenizerModule = {
0,
simpleCreate,
simpleDestroy,
simpleOpen,
simpleClose,
simpleNext,
};
/*
** Allocate a new simple tokenizer. Return a pointer to the new
** tokenizer in *ppModule
*/
void sqlite3Fts1SimpleTokenizerModule(
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule
){
*ppModule = &simpleTokenizerModule;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS1) */

1511
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/fulltext.c
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

11
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/fulltext.h
View File

@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
#include "sqlite3.h"
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
int fulltext_init(sqlite3 *db);
#ifdef __cplusplus
} /* extern "C" */
#endif /* __cplusplus */

174
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/simple_tokenizer.c
View File

@ -1,174 +0,0 @@
/*
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.
**
*************************************************************************
** Implementation of the "simple" full-text-search tokenizer.
*/
#include <assert.h>
#if !defined(__APPLE__)
#include <malloc.h>
#else
#include <stdlib.h>
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include "tokenizer.h"
/* Duplicate a string; the caller must free() the returned string.
* (We don't use strdup() since it's not part of the standard C library and
* may not be available everywhere.) */
/* TODO(shess) Copied from fulltext.c, consider util.c for such
** things. */
static char *string_dup(const char *s){
char *str = malloc(strlen(s) + 1);
strcpy(str, s);
return str;
}
typedef struct simple_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base;
const char *zDelim; /* token delimiters */
} simple_tokenizer;
typedef struct simple_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
const char *pInput; /* input we are tokenizing */
int nBytes; /* size of the input */
const char *pCurrent; /* current position in pInput */
int iToken; /* index of next token to be returned */
char *zToken; /* storage for current token */
int nTokenBytes; /* actual size of current token */
int nTokenAllocated; /* space allocated to zToken buffer */
} simple_tokenizer_cursor;
static sqlite3_tokenizer_module simpleTokenizerModule;/* forward declaration */
static int simpleCreate(
int argc, const char **argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer
){
simple_tokenizer *t;
t = (simple_tokenizer *) malloc(sizeof(simple_tokenizer));
/* TODO(shess) Delimiters need to remain the same from run to run,
** else we need to reindex. One solution would be a meta-table to
** track such information in the database, then we'd only want this
** information on the initial create.
*/
if( argc>1 ){
t->zDelim = string_dup(argv[1]);
} else {
/* Build a string excluding alphanumeric ASCII characters */
char zDelim[0x80]; /* nul-terminated, so nul not a member */
int i, j;
for(i=1, j=0; i<0x80; i++){
if( !isalnum(i) ){
zDelim[j++] = i;
}
}
zDelim[j++] = '\0';
assert( j<=sizeof(zDelim) );
t->zDelim = string_dup(zDelim);
}
*ppTokenizer = &t->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
static int simpleDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
simple_tokenizer *t = (simple_tokenizer *) pTokenizer;
free((void *) t->zDelim);
free(t);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
static int simpleOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer,
const char *pInput, int nBytes,
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor
){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c;
c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) malloc(sizeof(simple_tokenizer_cursor));
c->pInput = pInput;
c->nBytes = nBytes<0 ? (int) strlen(pInput) : nBytes;
c->pCurrent = c->pInput; /* start tokenizing at the beginning */
c->iToken = 0;
c->zToken = NULL; /* no space allocated, yet. */
c->nTokenBytes = 0;
c->nTokenAllocated = 0;
*ppCursor = &c->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
static int simpleClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
if( NULL!=c->zToken ){
free(c->zToken);
}
free(c);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
static int simpleNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor,
const char **ppToken, int *pnBytes,
int *piStartOffset, int *piEndOffset, int *piPosition
){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
simple_tokenizer *t = (simple_tokenizer *) pCursor->pTokenizer;
int ii;
while( c->pCurrent-c->pInput<c->nBytes ){
int n = (int) strcspn(c->pCurrent, t->zDelim);
if( n>0 ){
if( n+1>c->nTokenAllocated ){
c->zToken = realloc(c->zToken, n+1);
}
for(ii=0; ii<n; ii++){
/* TODO(shess) This needs expansion to handle UTF-8
** case-insensitivity.
*/
char ch = c->pCurrent[ii];
c->zToken[ii] = (unsigned char)ch<0x80 ? tolower((unsigned char)ch):ch;
}
c->zToken[n] = '\0';
*ppToken = c->zToken;
*pnBytes = n;
*piStartOffset = (int) (c->pCurrent-c->pInput);
*piEndOffset = *piStartOffset+n;
*piPosition = c->iToken++;
c->pCurrent += n + 1;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
c->pCurrent += n + 1;
/* TODO(shess) could strspn() to skip delimiters en masse. Needs
** to happen in two places, though, which is annoying.
*/
}
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
static sqlite3_tokenizer_module simpleTokenizerModule = {
0,
simpleCreate,
simpleDestroy,
simpleOpen,
simpleClose,
simpleNext,
};
void get_simple_tokenizer_module(
sqlite3_tokenizer_module **ppModule
){
*ppModule = &simpleTokenizerModule;
}

89
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts1/tokenizer.h
View File

@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 July 10
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.
**
*************************************************************************
** Defines the interface to tokenizers used by fulltext-search. There
** are three basic components:
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer_module is a singleton defining the tokenizer
** interface functions. This is essentially the class structure for
** tokenizers.
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer is used to define a particular tokenizer, perhaps
** including customization information defined at creation time.
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor is generated by a tokenizer to generate
** tokens from a particular input.
*/
#ifndef _TOKENIZER_H_
#define _TOKENIZER_H_
/* TODO(shess) Only used for SQLITE_OK and SQLITE_DONE at this time.
** If tokenizers are to be allowed to call sqlite3_*() functions, then
** we will need a way to register the API consistently.
*/
#include "sqlite3.h"
/*
** Structures used by the tokenizer interface.
*/
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer sqlite3_tokenizer;
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor;
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module sqlite3_tokenizer_module;
struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
int iVersion; /* currently 0 */
/*
** Create and destroy a tokenizer. argc/argv are passed down from
** the fulltext virtual table creation to allow customization.
*/
int (*xCreate)(int argc, const char **argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer);
int (*xDestroy)(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer);
/*
** Tokenize a particular input. Call xOpen() to prepare to
** tokenize, xNext() repeatedly until it returns SQLITE_DONE, then
** xClose() to free any internal state. The pInput passed to
** xOpen() must exist until the cursor is closed. The ppToken
** result from xNext() is only valid until the next call to xNext()
** or until xClose() is called.
*/
/* TODO(shess) current implementation requires pInput to be
** nul-terminated. This should either be fixed, or pInput/nBytes
** should be converted to zInput.
*/
int (*xOpen)(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer,
const char *pInput, int nBytes,
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor);
int (*xClose)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor);
int (*xNext)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor,
const char **ppToken, int *pnBytes,
int *piStartOffset, int *piEndOffset, int *piPosition);
};
struct sqlite3_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pModule; /* The module for this tokenizer */
/* Tokenizer implementations will typically add additional fields */
};
struct sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer; /* Tokenizer for this cursor. */
/* Tokenizer implementations will typically add additional fields */
};
/*
** Get the module for a tokenizer which generates tokens based on a
** set of non-token characters. The default is to break tokens at any
** non-alnum character, though the set of delimiters can also be
** specified by the first argv argument to xCreate().
*/
/* TODO(shess) This doesn't belong here. Need some sort of
** registration process.
*/
void get_simple_tokenizer_module(sqlite3_tokenizer_module **ppModule);
#endif /* _TOKENIZER_H_ */

133
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/README.tokenizers
View File

@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
1. FTS2 Tokenizers
When creating a new full-text table, FTS2 allows the user to select
the text tokenizer implementation to be used when indexing text
by specifying a "tokenizer" clause as part of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE
statement:
CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE <table-name> USING fts2(
<columns ...> [, tokenizer <tokenizer-name> [<tokenizer-args>]]
);
The built-in tokenizers (valid values to pass as <tokenizer name>) are
"simple" and "porter".
<tokenizer-args> should consist of zero or more white-space separated
arguments to pass to the selected tokenizer implementation. The
interpretation of the arguments, if any, depends on the individual
tokenizer.
2. Custom Tokenizers
FTS2 allows users to provide custom tokenizer implementations. The
interface used to create a new tokenizer is defined and described in
the fts2_tokenizer.h source file.
Registering a new FTS2 tokenizer is similar to registering a new
virtual table module with SQLite. The user passes a pointer to a
structure containing pointers to various callback functions that
make up the implementation of the new tokenizer type. For tokenizers,
the structure (defined in fts2_tokenizer.h) is called
"sqlite3_tokenizer_module".
FTS2 does not expose a C-function that users call to register new
tokenizer types with a database handle. Instead, the pointer must
be encoded as an SQL blob value and passed to FTS2 through the SQL
engine by evaluating a special scalar function, "fts2_tokenizer()".
The fts2_tokenizer() function may be called with one or two arguments,
as follows:
SELECT fts2_tokenizer(<tokenizer-name>);
SELECT fts2_tokenizer(<tokenizer-name>, <sqlite3_tokenizer_module ptr>);
Where <tokenizer-name> is a string identifying the tokenizer and
<sqlite3_tokenizer_module ptr> is a pointer to an sqlite3_tokenizer_module
structure encoded as an SQL blob. If the second argument is present,
it is registered as tokenizer <tokenizer-name> and a copy of it
returned. If only one argument is passed, a pointer to the tokenizer
implementation currently registered as <tokenizer-name> is returned,
encoded as a blob. Or, if no such tokenizer exists, an SQL exception
(error) is raised.
SECURITY: If the fts2 extension is used in an environment where potentially
malicious users may execute arbitrary SQL (i.e. gears), they should be
prevented from invoking the fts2_tokenizer() function, possibly using the
authorisation callback.
See "Sample code" below for an example of calling the fts2_tokenizer()
function from C code.
3. ICU Library Tokenizers
If this extension is compiled with the SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU pre-processor
symbol defined, then there exists a built-in tokenizer named "icu"
implemented using the ICU library. The first argument passed to the
xCreate() method (see fts2_tokenizer.h) of this tokenizer may be
an ICU locale identifier. For example "tr_TR" for Turkish as used
in Turkey, or "en_AU" for English as used in Australia. For example:
"CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE thai_text USING fts2(text, tokenizer icu th_TH)"
The ICU tokenizer implementation is very simple. It splits the input
text according to the ICU rules for finding word boundaries and discards
any tokens that consist entirely of white-space. This may be suitable
for some applications in some locales, but not all. If more complex
processing is required, for example to implement stemming or
discard punctuation, this can be done by creating a tokenizer
implementation that uses the ICU tokenizer as part of its implementation.
When using the ICU tokenizer this way, it is safe to overwrite the
contents of the strings returned by the xNext() method (see
fts2_tokenizer.h).
4. Sample code.
The following two code samples illustrate the way C code should invoke
the fts2_tokenizer() scalar function:
int registerTokenizer(
sqlite3 *db,
char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p
){
int rc;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
const char zSql[] = "SELECT fts2_tokenizer(?, ?)";
rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
return rc;
}
sqlite3_bind_text(pStmt, 1, zName, -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3_bind_blob(pStmt, 2, &p, sizeof(p), SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3_step(pStmt);
return sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
int queryTokenizer(
sqlite3 *db,
char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
){
int rc;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
const char zSql[] = "SELECT fts2_tokenizer(?)";
*pp = 0;
rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
return rc;
}
sqlite3_bind_text(pStmt, 1, zName, -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pStmt) ){
if( sqlite3_column_type(pStmt, 0)==SQLITE_BLOB ){
memcpy(pp, sqlite3_column_blob(pStmt, 0), sizeof(*pp));
}
}
return sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}

4
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/README.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
This folder contains source code to the second full-text search
extension for SQLite. While the API is the same, this version uses a
substantially different storage schema from fts1, so tables will need
to be rebuilt.

6860
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/fts2.c
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

26
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/fts2.h
View File

@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 Oct 10
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** This header file is used by programs that want to link against the
** FTS2 library. All it does is declare the sqlite3Fts2Init() interface.
*/
#include "sqlite3.h"
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
int sqlite3Fts2Init(sqlite3 *db);
#ifdef __cplusplus
} /* extern "C" */
#endif /* __cplusplus */

376
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/fts2_hash.c
View File

@ -1,376 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2001 September 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the implementation of generic hash-tables used in SQLite.
** We've modified it slightly to serve as a standalone hash table
** implementation for the full-text indexing module.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS2 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS2 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2 is defined).
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2)
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "sqlite3.h"
#include "sqlite3ext.h"
SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3
#include "fts2_hash.h"
/*
** Malloc and Free functions
*/
static void *fts2HashMalloc(int n){
void *p = sqlite3_malloc(n);
if( p ){
memset(p, 0, n);
}
return p;
}
static void fts2HashFree(void *p){
sqlite3_free(p);
}
/* Turn bulk memory into a hash table object by initializing the
** fields of the Hash structure.
**
** "pNew" is a pointer to the hash table that is to be initialized.
** keyClass is one of the constants
** FTS2_HASH_BINARY or FTS2_HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass
** determines what kind of key the hash table will use. "copyKey" is
** true if the hash table should make its own private copy of keys and
** false if it should just use the supplied pointer.
*/
void sqlite3Fts2HashInit(fts2Hash *pNew, int keyClass, int copyKey){
assert( pNew!=0 );
assert( keyClass>=FTS2_HASH_STRING && keyClass<=FTS2_HASH_BINARY );
pNew->keyClass = keyClass;
pNew->copyKey = copyKey;
pNew->first = 0;
pNew->count = 0;
pNew->htsize = 0;
pNew->ht = 0;
}
/* Remove all entries from a hash table. Reclaim all memory.
** Call this routine to delete a hash table or to reset a hash table
** to the empty state.
*/
void sqlite3Fts2HashClear(fts2Hash *pH){
fts2HashElem *elem; /* For looping over all elements of the table */
assert( pH!=0 );
elem = pH->first;
pH->first = 0;
fts2HashFree(pH->ht);
pH->ht = 0;
pH->htsize = 0;
while( elem ){
fts2HashElem *next_elem = elem->next;
if( pH->copyKey && elem->pKey ){
fts2HashFree(elem->pKey);
}
fts2HashFree(elem);
elem = next_elem;
}
pH->count = 0;
}
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is FTS2_HASH_STRING
*/
static int strHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
const char *z = (const char *)pKey;
int h = 0;
if( nKey<=0 ) nKey = (int) strlen(z);
while( nKey > 0 ){
h = (h<<3) ^ h ^ *z++;
nKey--;
}
return h & 0x7fffffff;
}
static int strCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
if( n1!=n2 ) return 1;
return strncmp((const char*)pKey1,(const char*)pKey2,n1);
}
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is FTS2_HASH_BINARY
*/
static int binHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
int h = 0;
const char *z = (const char *)pKey;
while( nKey-- > 0 ){
h = (h<<3) ^ h ^ *(z++);
}
return h & 0x7fffffff;
}
static int binCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
if( n1!=n2 ) return 1;
return memcmp(pKey1,pKey2,n1);
}
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some
** programmers, so we provide the following additional explanation:
**
** The name of the function is "hashFunction". The function takes a
** single parameter "keyClass". The return value of hashFunction()
** is a pointer to another function. Specifically, the return value
** of hashFunction() is a pointer to a function that takes two parameters
** with types "const void*" and "int" and returns an "int".
*/
static int (*hashFunction(int keyClass))(const void*,int){
if( keyClass==FTS2_HASH_STRING ){
return &strHash;
}else{
assert( keyClass==FTS2_HASH_BINARY );
return &binHash;
}
}
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
** For help in interpreted the obscure C code in the function definition,
** see the header comment on the previous function.
*/
static int (*compareFunction(int keyClass))(const void*,int,const void*,int){
if( keyClass==FTS2_HASH_STRING ){
return &strCompare;
}else{
assert( keyClass==FTS2_HASH_BINARY );
return &binCompare;
}
}
/* Link an element into the hash table
*/
static void insertElement(
fts2Hash *pH, /* The complete hash table */
struct _fts2ht *pEntry, /* The entry into which pNew is inserted */
fts2HashElem *pNew /* The element to be inserted */
){
fts2HashElem *pHead; /* First element already in pEntry */
pHead = pEntry->chain;
if( pHead ){
pNew->next = pHead;
pNew->prev = pHead->prev;
if( pHead->prev ){ pHead->prev->next = pNew; }
else { pH->first = pNew; }
pHead->prev = pNew;
}else{
pNew->next = pH->first;
if( pH->first ){ pH->first->prev = pNew; }
pNew->prev = 0;
pH->first = pNew;
}
pEntry->count++;
pEntry->chain = pNew;
}
/* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets.
** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail
** to resize if sqliteMalloc() fails.
*/
static void rehash(fts2Hash *pH, int new_size){
struct _fts2ht *new_ht; /* The new hash table */
fts2HashElem *elem, *next_elem; /* For looping over existing elements */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
assert( (new_size & (new_size-1))==0 );
new_ht = (struct _fts2ht *)fts2HashMalloc( new_size*sizeof(struct _fts2ht) );
if( new_ht==0 ) return;
fts2HashFree(pH->ht);
pH->ht = new_ht;
pH->htsize = new_size;
xHash = hashFunction(pH->keyClass);
for(elem=pH->first, pH->first=0; elem; elem = next_elem){
int h = (*xHash)(elem->pKey, elem->nKey) & (new_size-1);
next_elem = elem->next;
insertElement(pH, &new_ht[h], elem);
}
}
/* This function (for internal use only) locates an element in an
** hash table that matches the given key. The hash for this key has
** already been computed and is passed as the 4th parameter.
*/
static fts2HashElem *findElementGivenHash(
const fts2Hash *pH, /* The pH to be searched */
const void *pKey, /* The key we are searching for */
int nKey,
int h /* The hash for this key. */
){
fts2HashElem *elem; /* Used to loop thru the element list */
int count; /* Number of elements left to test */
int (*xCompare)(const void*,int,const void*,int); /* comparison function */
if( pH->ht ){
struct _fts2ht *pEntry = &pH->ht[h];
elem = pEntry->chain;
count = pEntry->count;
xCompare = compareFunction(pH->keyClass);
while( count-- && elem ){
if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
return elem;
}
elem = elem->next;
}
}
return 0;
}
/* Remove a single entry from the hash table given a pointer to that
** element and a hash on the element's key.
*/
static void removeElementGivenHash(
fts2Hash *pH, /* The pH containing "elem" */
fts2HashElem* elem, /* The element to be removed from the pH */
int h /* Hash value for the element */
){
struct _fts2ht *pEntry;
if( elem->prev ){
elem->prev->next = elem->next;
}else{
pH->first = elem->next;
}
if( elem->next ){
elem->next->prev = elem->prev;
}
pEntry = &pH->ht[h];
if( pEntry->chain==elem ){
pEntry->chain = elem->next;
}
pEntry->count--;
if( pEntry->count<=0 ){
pEntry->chain = 0;
}
if( pH->copyKey && elem->pKey ){
fts2HashFree(elem->pKey);
}
fts2HashFree( elem );
pH->count--;
if( pH->count<=0 ){
assert( pH->first==0 );
assert( pH->count==0 );
fts2HashClear(pH);
}
}
/* Attempt to locate an element of the hash table pH with a key
** that matches pKey,nKey. Return the data for this element if it is
** found, or NULL if there is no match.
*/
void *sqlite3Fts2HashFind(const fts2Hash *pH, const void *pKey, int nKey){
int h; /* A hash on key */
fts2HashElem *elem; /* The element that matches key */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
if( pH==0 || pH->ht==0 ) return 0;
xHash = hashFunction(pH->keyClass);
assert( xHash!=0 );
h = (*xHash)(pKey,nKey);
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
elem = findElementGivenHash(pH,pKey,nKey, h & (pH->htsize-1));
return elem ? elem->data : 0;
}
/* Insert an element into the hash table pH. The key is pKey,nKey
** and the data is "data".
**
** If no element exists with a matching key, then a new
** element is created. A copy of the key is made if the copyKey
** flag is set. NULL is returned.
**
** If another element already exists with the same key, then the
** new data replaces the old data and the old data is returned.
** The key is not copied in this instance. If a malloc fails, then
** the new data is returned and the hash table is unchanged.
**
** If the "data" parameter to this function is NULL, then the
** element corresponding to "key" is removed from the hash table.
*/
void *sqlite3Fts2HashInsert(
fts2Hash *pH, /* The hash table to insert into */
const void *pKey, /* The key */
int nKey, /* Number of bytes in the key */
void *data /* The data */
){
int hraw; /* Raw hash value of the key */
int h; /* the hash of the key modulo hash table size */
fts2HashElem *elem; /* Used to loop thru the element list */
fts2HashElem *new_elem; /* New element added to the pH */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
assert( pH!=0 );
xHash = hashFunction(pH->keyClass);
assert( xHash!=0 );
hraw = (*xHash)(pKey, nKey);
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
h = hraw & (pH->htsize-1);
elem = findElementGivenHash(pH,pKey,nKey,h);
if( elem ){
void *old_data = elem->data;
if( data==0 ){
removeElementGivenHash(pH,elem,h);
}else{
elem->data = data;
}
return old_data;
}
if( data==0 ) return 0;
new_elem = (fts2HashElem*)fts2HashMalloc( sizeof(fts2HashElem) );
if( new_elem==0 ) return data;
if( pH->copyKey && pKey!=0 ){
new_elem->pKey = fts2HashMalloc( nKey );
if( new_elem->pKey==0 ){
fts2HashFree(new_elem);
return data;
}
memcpy((void*)new_elem->pKey, pKey, nKey);
}else{
new_elem->pKey = (void*)pKey;
}
new_elem->nKey = nKey;
pH->count++;
if( pH->htsize==0 ){
rehash(pH,8);
if( pH->htsize==0 ){
pH->count = 0;
fts2HashFree(new_elem);
return data;
}
}
if( pH->count > pH->htsize ){
rehash(pH,pH->htsize*2);
}
assert( pH->htsize>0 );
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
h = hraw & (pH->htsize-1);
insertElement(pH, &pH->ht[h], new_elem);
new_elem->data = data;
return 0;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2) */

110
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/fts2_hash.h
View File

@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2001 September 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the header file for the generic hash-table implementation
** used in SQLite. We've modified it slightly to serve as a standalone
** hash table implementation for the full-text indexing module.
**
*/
#ifndef _FTS2_HASH_H_
#define _FTS2_HASH_H_
/* Forward declarations of structures. */
typedef struct fts2Hash fts2Hash;
typedef struct fts2HashElem fts2HashElem;
/* A complete hash table is an instance of the following structure.
** The internals of this structure are intended to be opaque -- client
** code should not attempt to access or modify the fields of this structure
** directly. Change this structure only by using the routines below.
** However, many of the "procedures" and "functions" for modifying and
** accessing this structure are really macros, so we can't really make
** this structure opaque.
*/
struct fts2Hash {
char keyClass; /* HASH_INT, _POINTER, _STRING, _BINARY */
char copyKey; /* True if copy of key made on insert */
int count; /* Number of entries in this table */
fts2HashElem *first; /* The first element of the array */
int htsize; /* Number of buckets in the hash table */
struct _fts2ht { /* the hash table */
int count; /* Number of entries with this hash */
fts2HashElem *chain; /* Pointer to first entry with this hash */
} *ht;
};
/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
**
** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
** be opaque because it is used by macros.
*/
struct fts2HashElem {
fts2HashElem *next, *prev; /* Next and previous elements in the table */
void *data; /* Data associated with this element */
void *pKey; int nKey; /* Key associated with this element */
};
/*
** There are 2 different modes of operation for a hash table:
**
** FTS2_HASH_STRING pKey points to a string that is nKey bytes long
** (including the null-terminator, if any). Case
** is respected in comparisons.
**
** FTS2_HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long.
** memcmp() is used to compare keys.
**
** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts2HashInit is 1.
*/
#define FTS2_HASH_STRING 1
#define FTS2_HASH_BINARY 2
/*
** Access routines. To delete, insert a NULL pointer.
*/
void sqlite3Fts2HashInit(fts2Hash*, int keytype, int copyKey);
void *sqlite3Fts2HashInsert(fts2Hash*, const void *pKey, int nKey, void *pData);
void *sqlite3Fts2HashFind(const fts2Hash*, const void *pKey, int nKey);
void sqlite3Fts2HashClear(fts2Hash*);
/*
** Shorthand for the functions above
*/
#define fts2HashInit sqlite3Fts2HashInit
#define fts2HashInsert sqlite3Fts2HashInsert
#define fts2HashFind sqlite3Fts2HashFind
#define fts2HashClear sqlite3Fts2HashClear
/*
** Macros for looping over all elements of a hash table. The idiom is
** like this:
**
** fts2Hash h;
** fts2HashElem *p;
** ...
** for(p=fts2HashFirst(&h); p; p=fts2HashNext(p)){
** SomeStructure *pData = fts2HashData(p);
** // do something with pData
** }
*/
#define fts2HashFirst(H) ((H)->first)
#define fts2HashNext(E) ((E)->next)
#define fts2HashData(E) ((E)->data)
#define fts2HashKey(E) ((E)->pKey)
#define fts2HashKeysize(E) ((E)->nKey)
/*
** Number of entries in a hash table
*/
#define fts2HashCount(H) ((H)->count)
#endif /* _FTS2_HASH_H_ */

260
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/fts2_icu.c
View File

@ -1,260 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2007 June 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This file implements a tokenizer for fts2 based on the ICU library.
**
** $Id: fts2_icu.c,v 1.3 2008/12/18 05:30:26 danielk1977 Exp $
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2)
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU
#include <assert.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "fts2_tokenizer.h"
#include <unicode/ubrk.h>
#include <unicode/ucol.h>
#include <unicode/ustring.h>
#include <unicode/utf16.h>
typedef struct IcuTokenizer IcuTokenizer;
typedef struct IcuCursor IcuCursor;
struct IcuTokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base;
char *zLocale;
};
struct IcuCursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
UBreakIterator *pIter; /* ICU break-iterator object */
int nChar; /* Number of UChar elements in pInput */
UChar *aChar; /* Copy of input using utf-16 encoding */
int *aOffset; /* Offsets of each character in utf-8 input */
int nBuffer;
char *zBuffer;
int iToken;
};
/*
** Create a new tokenizer instance.
*/
static int icuCreate(
int argc, /* Number of entries in argv[] */
const char * const *argv, /* Tokenizer creation arguments */
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer /* OUT: Created tokenizer */
){
IcuTokenizer *p;
int n = 0;
if( argc>0 ){
n = strlen(argv[0])+1;
}
p = (IcuTokenizer *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(IcuTokenizer)+n);
if( !p ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
memset(p, 0, sizeof(IcuTokenizer));
if( n ){
p->zLocale = (char *)&p[1];
memcpy(p->zLocale, argv[0], n);
}
*ppTokenizer = (sqlite3_tokenizer *)p;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Destroy a tokenizer
*/
static int icuDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
IcuTokenizer *p = (IcuTokenizer *)pTokenizer;
sqlite3_free(p);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int icuOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* The tokenizer */
const char *zInput, /* Input string */
int nInput, /* Length of zInput in bytes */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Tokenization cursor */
){
IcuTokenizer *p = (IcuTokenizer *)pTokenizer;
IcuCursor *pCsr;
const int32_t opt = U_FOLD_CASE_DEFAULT;
UErrorCode status = U_ZERO_ERROR;
int nChar;
UChar32 c;
int iInput = 0;
int iOut = 0;
*ppCursor = 0;
if( nInput<0 ){
nInput = strlen(zInput);
}
nChar = nInput+1;
pCsr = (IcuCursor *)sqlite3_malloc(
sizeof(IcuCursor) + /* IcuCursor */
((nChar+3)&~3) * sizeof(UChar) + /* IcuCursor.aChar[] */
(nChar+1) * sizeof(int) /* IcuCursor.aOffset[] */
);
if( !pCsr ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
memset(pCsr, 0, sizeof(IcuCursor));
pCsr->aChar = (UChar *)&pCsr[1];
pCsr->aOffset = (int *)&pCsr->aChar[(nChar+3)&~3];
pCsr->aOffset[iOut] = iInput;
U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c);
while( c>0 ){
int isError = 0;
c = u_foldCase(c, opt);
U16_APPEND(pCsr->aChar, iOut, nChar, c, isError);
if( isError ){
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
pCsr->aOffset[iOut] = iInput;
if( iInput<nInput ){
U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c);
}else{
c = 0;
}
}
pCsr->pIter = ubrk_open(UBRK_WORD, p->zLocale, pCsr->aChar, iOut, &status);
if( !U_SUCCESS(status) ){
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
pCsr->nChar = iOut;
ubrk_first(pCsr->pIter);
*ppCursor = (sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *)pCsr;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Close a tokenization cursor previously opened by a call to icuOpen().
*/
static int icuClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
IcuCursor *pCsr = (IcuCursor *)pCursor;
ubrk_close(pCsr->pIter);
sqlite3_free(pCsr->zBuffer);
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Extract the next token from a tokenization cursor.
*/
static int icuNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor returned by simpleOpen */
const char **ppToken, /* OUT: *ppToken is the token text */
int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Number of bytes in token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
IcuCursor *pCsr = (IcuCursor *)pCursor;
int iStart = 0;
int iEnd = 0;
int nByte = 0;
while( iStart==iEnd ){
UChar32 c;
iStart = ubrk_current(pCsr->pIter);
iEnd = ubrk_next(pCsr->pIter);
if( iEnd==UBRK_DONE ){
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
while( iStart<iEnd ){
int iWhite = iStart;
U8_NEXT(pCsr->aChar, iWhite, pCsr->nChar, c);
if( u_isspace(c) ){
iStart = iWhite;
}else{
break;
}
}
assert(iStart<=iEnd);
}
do {
UErrorCode status = U_ZERO_ERROR;
if( nByte ){
char *zNew = sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->zBuffer, nByte);
if( !zNew ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
pCsr->zBuffer = zNew;
pCsr->nBuffer = nByte;
}
u_strToUTF8(
pCsr->zBuffer, pCsr->nBuffer, &nByte, /* Output vars */
&pCsr->aChar[iStart], iEnd-iStart, /* Input vars */
&status /* Output success/failure */
);
} while( nByte>pCsr->nBuffer );
*ppToken = pCsr->zBuffer;
*pnBytes = nByte;
*piStartOffset = pCsr->aOffset[iStart];
*piEndOffset = pCsr->aOffset[iEnd];
*piPosition = pCsr->iToken++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** The set of routines that implement the simple tokenizer
*/
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module icuTokenizerModule = {
0, /* iVersion */
icuCreate, /* xCreate */
icuDestroy, /* xCreate */
icuOpen, /* xOpen */
icuClose, /* xClose */
icuNext, /* xNext */
};
/*
** Set *ppModule to point at the implementation of the ICU tokenizer.
*/
void sqlite3Fts2IcuTokenizerModule(
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule
){
*ppModule = &icuTokenizerModule;
}
#endif /* defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU) */
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2) */

644
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/fts2_porter.c
View File

@ -1,644 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 September 30
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** Implementation of the full-text-search tokenizer that implements
** a Porter stemmer.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS2 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS2 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2 is defined).
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2)
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "sqlite3.h"
#include "sqlite3ext.h"
SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3
#include "fts2_tokenizer.h"
/*
** Class derived from sqlite3_tokenizer
*/
typedef struct porter_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base; /* Base class */
} porter_tokenizer;
/*
** Class derived from sqlit3_tokenizer_cursor
*/
typedef struct porter_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
const char *zInput; /* input we are tokenizing */
int nInput; /* size of the input */
int iOffset; /* current position in zInput */
int iToken; /* index of next token to be returned */
char *zToken; /* storage for current token */
int nAllocated; /* space allocated to zToken buffer */
} porter_tokenizer_cursor;
/* Forward declaration */
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module porterTokenizerModule;
/*
** Create a new tokenizer instance.
*/
static int porterCreate(
int argc, const char * const *argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer
){
porter_tokenizer *t;
t = (porter_tokenizer *) sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*t));
if( t==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(t, 0, sizeof(*t));
*ppTokenizer = &t->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Destroy a tokenizer
*/
static int porterDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
sqlite3_free(pTokenizer);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is zInput[0..nInput-1]. A cursor
** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int porterOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* The tokenizer */
const char *zInput, int nInput, /* String to be tokenized */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Tokenization cursor */
){
porter_tokenizer_cursor *c;
c = (porter_tokenizer_cursor *) sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*c));
if( c==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
c->zInput = zInput;
if( zInput==0 ){
c->nInput = 0;
}else if( nInput<0 ){
c->nInput = (int)strlen(zInput);
}else{
c->nInput = nInput;
}
c->iOffset = 0; /* start tokenizing at the beginning */
c->iToken = 0;
c->zToken = NULL; /* no space allocated, yet. */
c->nAllocated = 0;
*ppCursor = &c->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Close a tokenization cursor previously opened by a call to
** porterOpen() above.
*/
static int porterClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
porter_tokenizer_cursor *c = (porter_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
sqlite3_free(c->zToken);
sqlite3_free(c);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Vowel or consonant
*/
static const char cType[] = {
0, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0,
1, 1, 1, 2, 1
};
/*
** isConsonant() and isVowel() determine if their first character in
** the string they point to is a consonant or a vowel, according
** to Porter ruls.
**
** A consonate is any letter other than 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', or 'u'.
** 'Y' is a consonant unless it follows another consonant,
** in which case it is a vowel.
**
** In these routine, the letters are in reverse order. So the 'y' rule
** is that 'y' is a consonant unless it is followed by another
** consonent.
*/
static int isVowel(const char*);
static int isConsonant(const char *z){
int j;
char x = *z;
if( x==0 ) return 0;
assert( x>='a' && x<='z' );
j = cType[x-'a'];
if( j<2 ) return j;
return z[1]==0 || isVowel(z + 1);
}
static int isVowel(const char *z){
int j;
char x = *z;
if( x==0 ) return 0;
assert( x>='a' && x<='z' );
j = cType[x-'a'];
if( j<2 ) return 1-j;
return isConsonant(z + 1);
}
/*
** Let any sequence of one or more vowels be represented by V and let
** C be sequence of one or more consonants. Then every word can be
** represented as:
**
** [C] (VC){m} [V]
**
** In prose: A word is an optional consonant followed by zero or
** vowel-consonant pairs followed by an optional vowel. "m" is the
** number of vowel consonant pairs. This routine computes the value
** of m for the first i bytes of a word.
**
** Return true if the m-value for z is 1 or more. In other words,
** return true if z contains at least one vowel that is followed
** by a consonant.
**
** In this routine z[] is in reverse order. So we are really looking
** for an instance of of a consonant followed by a vowel.
*/
static int m_gt_0(const char *z){
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z!=0;
}
/* Like mgt0 above except we are looking for a value of m which is
** exactly 1
*/
static int m_eq_1(const char *z){
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 1;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z==0;
}
/* Like mgt0 above except we are looking for a value of m>1 instead
** or m>0
*/
static int m_gt_1(const char *z){
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z!=0;
}
/*
** Return TRUE if there is a vowel anywhere within z[0..n-1]
*/
static int hasVowel(const char *z){
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z!=0;
}
/*
** Return TRUE if the word ends in a double consonant.
**
** The text is reversed here. So we are really looking at
** the first two characters of z[].
*/
static int doubleConsonant(const char *z){
return isConsonant(z) && z[0]==z[1] && isConsonant(z+1);
}
/*
** Return TRUE if the word ends with three letters which
** are consonant-vowel-consonent and where the final consonant
** is not 'w', 'x', or 'y'.
**
** The word is reversed here. So we are really checking the
** first three letters and the first one cannot be in [wxy].
*/
static int star_oh(const char *z){
return
z[0]!=0 && isConsonant(z) &&
z[0]!='w' && z[0]!='x' && z[0]!='y' &&
z[1]!=0 && isVowel(z+1) &&
z[2]!=0 && isConsonant(z+2);
}
/*
** If the word ends with zFrom and xCond() is true for the stem
** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the
** ending to zTo.
**
** The input word *pz and zFrom are both in reverse order. zTo
** is in normal order.
**
** Return TRUE if zFrom matches. Return FALSE if zFrom does not
** match. Not that TRUE is returned even if xCond() fails and
** no substitution occurs.
*/
static int stem(
char **pz, /* The word being stemmed (Reversed) */
const char *zFrom, /* If the ending matches this... (Reversed) */
const char *zTo, /* ... change the ending to this (not reversed) */
int (*xCond)(const char*) /* Condition that must be true */
){
char *z = *pz;
while( *zFrom && *zFrom==*z ){ z++; zFrom++; }
if( *zFrom!=0 ) return 0;
if( xCond && !xCond(z) ) return 1;
while( *zTo ){
*(--z) = *(zTo++);
}
*pz = z;
return 1;
}
/*
** This is the fallback stemmer used when the porter stemmer is
** inappropriate. The input word is copied into the output with
** US-ASCII case folding. If the input word is too long (more
** than 20 bytes if it contains no digits or more than 6 bytes if
** it contains digits) then word is truncated to 20 or 6 bytes
** by taking 10 or 3 bytes from the beginning and end.
*/
static void copy_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
int i, mx, j;
int hasDigit = 0;
for(i=0; i<nIn; i++){
int c = zIn[i];
if( c>='A' && c<='Z' ){
zOut[i] = c - 'A' + 'a';
}else{
if( c>='0' && c<='9' ) hasDigit = 1;
zOut[i] = c;
}
}
mx = hasDigit ? 3 : 10;
if( nIn>mx*2 ){
for(j=mx, i=nIn-mx; i<nIn; i++, j++){
zOut[j] = zOut[i];
}
i = j;
}
zOut[i] = 0;
*pnOut = i;
}
/*
** Stem the input word zIn[0..nIn-1]. Store the output in zOut.
** zOut is at least big enough to hold nIn bytes. Write the actual
** size of the output word (exclusive of the '\0' terminator) into *pnOut.
**
** Any upper-case characters in the US-ASCII character set ([A-Z])
** are converted to lower case. Upper-case UTF characters are
** unchanged.
**
** Words that are longer than about 20 bytes are stemmed by retaining
** a few bytes from the beginning and the end of the word. If the
** word contains digits, 3 bytes are taken from the beginning and
** 3 bytes from the end. For long words without digits, 10 bytes
** are taken from each end. US-ASCII case folding still applies.
**
** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not
** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just
** copies the input into the input into the output with US-ASCII
** case folding.
**
** Stemming never increases the length of the word. So there is
** no chance of overflowing the zOut buffer.
*/
static void porter_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
int i, j, c;
char zReverse[28];
char *z, *z2;
if( nIn<3 || nIn>=sizeof(zReverse)-7 ){
/* The word is too big or too small for the porter stemmer.
** Fallback to the copy stemmer */
copy_stemmer(zIn, nIn, zOut, pnOut);
return;
}
for(i=0, j=sizeof(zReverse)-6; i<nIn; i++, j--){
c = zIn[i];
if( c>='A' && c<='Z' ){
zReverse[j] = c + 'a' - 'A';
}else if( c>='a' && c<='z' ){
zReverse[j] = c;
}else{
/* The use of a character not in [a-zA-Z] means that we fallback
** to the copy stemmer */
copy_stemmer(zIn, nIn, zOut, pnOut);
return;
}
}
memset(&zReverse[sizeof(zReverse)-5], 0, 5);
z = &zReverse[j+1];
/* Step 1a */
if( z[0]=='s' ){
if(
!stem(&z, "sess", "ss", 0) &&
!stem(&z, "sei", "i", 0) &&
!stem(&z, "ss", "ss", 0)
){
z++;
}
}
/* Step 1b */
z2 = z;
if( stem(&z, "dee", "ee", m_gt_0) ){
/* Do nothing. The work was all in the test */
}else if(
(stem(&z, "gni", "", hasVowel) || stem(&z, "de", "", hasVowel))
&& z!=z2
){
if( stem(&z, "ta", "ate", 0) ||
stem(&z, "lb", "ble", 0) ||
stem(&z, "zi", "ize", 0) ){
/* Do nothing. The work was all in the test */
}else if( doubleConsonant(z) && (*z!='l' && *z!='s' && *z!='z') ){
z++;
}else if( m_eq_1(z) && star_oh(z) ){
*(--z) = 'e';
}
}
/* Step 1c */
if( z[0]=='y' && hasVowel(z+1) ){
z[0] = 'i';
}
/* Step 2 */
switch( z[1] ){
case 'a':
stem(&z, "lanoita", "ate", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "lanoit", "tion", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'c':
stem(&z, "icne", "ence", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "icna", "ance", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'e':
stem(&z, "rezi", "ize", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'g':
stem(&z, "igol", "log", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'l':
stem(&z, "ilb", "ble", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "illa", "al", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "iltne", "ent", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ile", "e", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ilsuo", "ous", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'o':
stem(&z, "noitazi", "ize", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "noita", "ate", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "rota", "ate", m_gt_0);
break;
case 's':
stem(&z, "msila", "al", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ssenevi", "ive", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ssenluf", "ful", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ssensuo", "ous", m_gt_0);
break;
case 't':
stem(&z, "itila", "al", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "itivi", "ive", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "itilib", "ble", m_gt_0);
break;
}
/* Step 3 */
switch( z[0] ){
case 'e':
stem(&z, "etaci", "ic", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "evita", "", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "ezila", "al", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'i':
stem(&z, "itici", "ic", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'l':
stem(&z, "laci", "ic", m_gt_0) ||
stem(&z, "luf", "", m_gt_0);
break;
case 's':
stem(&z, "ssen", "", m_gt_0);
break;
}
/* Step 4 */
switch( z[1] ){
case 'a':
if( z[0]=='l' && m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
break;
case 'c':
if( z[0]=='e' && z[2]=='n' && (z[3]=='a' || z[3]=='e') && m_gt_1(z+4) ){
z += 4;
}
break;
case 'e':
if( z[0]=='r' && m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
break;
case 'i':
if( z[0]=='c' && m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
break;
case 'l':
if( z[0]=='e' && z[2]=='b' && (z[3]=='a' || z[3]=='i') && m_gt_1(z+4) ){
z += 4;
}
break;
case 'n':
if( z[0]=='t' ){
if( z[2]=='a' ){
if( m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
}else if( z[2]=='e' ){
stem(&z, "tneme", "", m_gt_1) ||
stem(&z, "tnem", "", m_gt_1) ||
stem(&z, "tne", "", m_gt_1);
}
}
break;
case 'o':
if( z[0]=='u' ){
if( m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
}else if( z[3]=='s' || z[3]=='t' ){
stem(&z, "noi", "", m_gt_1);
}
break;
case 's':
if( z[0]=='m' && z[2]=='i' && m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
break;
case 't':
stem(&z, "eta", "", m_gt_1) ||
stem(&z, "iti", "", m_gt_1);
break;
case 'u':
if( z[0]=='s' && z[2]=='o' && m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
break;
case 'v':
case 'z':
if( z[0]=='e' && z[2]=='i' && m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
break;
}
/* Step 5a */
if( z[0]=='e' ){
if( m_gt_1(z+1) ){
z++;
}else if( m_eq_1(z+1) && !star_oh(z+1) ){
z++;
}
}
/* Step 5b */
if( m_gt_1(z) && z[0]=='l' && z[1]=='l' ){
z++;
}
/* z[] is now the stemmed word in reverse order. Flip it back
** around into forward order and return.
*/
*pnOut = i = strlen(z);
zOut[i] = 0;
while( *z ){
zOut[--i] = *(z++);
}
}
/*
** Characters that can be part of a token. We assume any character
** whose value is greater than 0x80 (any UTF character) can be
** part of a token. In other words, delimiters all must have
** values of 0x7f or lower.
*/
static const char porterIdChar[] = {
/* x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 3x */
0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, /* 4x */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, /* 5x */
0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, /* 6x */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 7x */
};
#define isDelim(C) (((ch=C)&0x80)==0 && (ch<0x30 || !porterIdChar[ch-0x30]))
/*
** Extract the next token from a tokenization cursor. The cursor must
** have been opened by a prior call to porterOpen().
*/
static int porterNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor returned by porterOpen */
const char **pzToken, /* OUT: *pzToken is the token text */
int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Number of bytes in token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
porter_tokenizer_cursor *c = (porter_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
const char *z = c->zInput;
while( c->iOffset<c->nInput ){
int iStartOffset, ch;
/* Scan past delimiter characters */
while( c->iOffset<c->nInput && isDelim(z[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
/* Count non-delimiter characters. */
iStartOffset = c->iOffset;
while( c->iOffset<c->nInput && !isDelim(z[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
if( c->iOffset>iStartOffset ){
int n = c->iOffset-iStartOffset;
if( n>c->nAllocated ){
c->nAllocated = n+20;
c->zToken = sqlite3_realloc(c->zToken, c->nAllocated);
if( c->zToken==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
porter_stemmer(&z[iStartOffset], n, c->zToken, pnBytes);
*pzToken = c->zToken;
*piStartOffset = iStartOffset;
*piEndOffset = c->iOffset;
*piPosition = c->iToken++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
}
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
/*
** The set of routines that implement the porter-stemmer tokenizer
*/
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module porterTokenizerModule = {
0,
porterCreate,
porterDestroy,
porterOpen,
porterClose,
porterNext,
};
/*
** Allocate a new porter tokenizer. Return a pointer to the new
** tokenizer in *ppModule
*/
void sqlite3Fts2PorterTokenizerModule(
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule
){
*ppModule = &porterTokenizerModule;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2) */

371
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/fts2_tokenizer.c
View File

@ -1,371 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2007 June 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** This is part of an SQLite module implementing full-text search.
** This particular file implements the generic tokenizer interface.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS2 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS2 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2 is defined).
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2)
#include "sqlite3.h"
#include "sqlite3ext.h"
SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3
#include "fts2_hash.h"
#include "fts2_tokenizer.h"
#include <assert.h>
/*
** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying
** hash table. This function may be called as follows:
**
** SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>);
** SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>, <pointer>);
**
** where <function-name> is the name passed as the second argument
** to the sqlite3Fts2InitHashTable() function (e.g. 'fts2_tokenizer').
**
** If the <pointer> argument is specified, it must be a blob value
** containing a pointer to be stored as the hash data corresponding
** to the string <key-name>. If <pointer> is not specified, then
** the string <key-name> must already exist in the has table. Otherwise,
** an error is returned.
**
** Whether or not the <pointer> argument is specified, the value returned
** is a blob containing the pointer stored as the hash data corresponding
** to string <key-name> (after the hash-table is updated, if applicable).
*/
static void scalarFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
fts2Hash *pHash;
void *pPtr = 0;
const unsigned char *zName;
int nName;
assert( argc==1 || argc==2 );
pHash = (fts2Hash *)sqlite3_user_data(context);
zName = sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]);
nName = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[0])+1;
if( argc==2 ){
void *pOld;
int n = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[1]);
if( n!=sizeof(pPtr) ){
sqlite3_result_error(context, "argument type mismatch", -1);
return;
}
pPtr = *(void **)sqlite3_value_blob(argv[1]);
pOld = sqlite3Fts2HashInsert(pHash, (void *)zName, nName, pPtr);
if( pOld==pPtr ){
sqlite3_result_error(context, "out of memory", -1);
return;
}
}else{
pPtr = sqlite3Fts2HashFind(pHash, zName, nName);
if( !pPtr ){
char *zErr = sqlite3_mprintf("unknown tokenizer: %s", zName);
sqlite3_result_error(context, zErr, -1);
sqlite3_free(zErr);
return;
}
}
sqlite3_result_blob(context, (void *)&pPtr, sizeof(pPtr), SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
}
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
#include <tcl.h>
#include <string.h>
/*
** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers
** designed to be used in concert with the Tcl testing framework. This
** function must be called with two arguments:
**
** SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>, <input-string>);
** SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>, <pointer>);
**
** where <function-name> is the name passed as the second argument
** to the sqlite3Fts2InitHashTable() function (e.g. 'fts2_tokenizer')
** concatenated with the string '_test' (e.g. 'fts2_tokenizer_test').
**
** The return value is a string that may be interpreted as a Tcl
** list. For each token in the <input-string>, three elements are
** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the
** second is the token text (folded, stemmed, etc.) and the third is the
** substring of <input-string> associated with the token. For example,
** using the built-in "simple" tokenizer:
**
** SELECT fts_tokenizer_test('simple', 'I don't see how');
**
** will return the string:
**
** "{0 i I 1 dont don't 2 see see 3 how how}"
**
*/
static void testFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
fts2Hash *pHash;
sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p;
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer = 0;
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr = 0;
const char *zErr = 0;
const char *zName;
int nName;
const char *zInput;
int nInput;
const char *zArg = 0;
const char *zToken;
int nToken;
int iStart;
int iEnd;
int iPos;
Tcl_Obj *pRet;
assert( argc==2 || argc==3 );
nName = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[0]);
zName = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]);
nInput = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[argc-1]);
zInput = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(argv[argc-1]);
if( argc==3 ){
zArg = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(argv[1]);
}
pHash = (fts2Hash *)sqlite3_user_data(context);
p = (sqlite3_tokenizer_module *)sqlite3Fts2HashFind(pHash, zName, nName+1);
if( !p ){
char *zErr = sqlite3_mprintf("unknown tokenizer: %s", zName);
sqlite3_result_error(context, zErr, -1);
sqlite3_free(zErr);
return;
}
pRet = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_IncrRefCount(pRet);
if( SQLITE_OK!=p->xCreate(zArg ? 1 : 0, &zArg, &pTokenizer) ){
zErr = "error in xCreate()";
goto finish;
}
pTokenizer->pModule = p;
if( SQLITE_OK!=p->xOpen(pTokenizer, zInput, nInput, &pCsr) ){
zErr = "error in xOpen()";
goto finish;
}
pCsr->pTokenizer = pTokenizer;
while( SQLITE_OK==p->xNext(pCsr, &zToken, &nToken, &iStart, &iEnd, &iPos) ){
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(0, pRet, Tcl_NewIntObj(iPos));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(0, pRet, Tcl_NewStringObj(zToken, nToken));
zToken = &zInput[iStart];
nToken = iEnd-iStart;
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(0, pRet, Tcl_NewStringObj(zToken, nToken));
}
if( SQLITE_OK!=p->xClose(pCsr) ){
zErr = "error in xClose()";
goto finish;
}
if( SQLITE_OK!=p->xDestroy(pTokenizer) ){
zErr = "error in xDestroy()";
goto finish;
}
finish:
if( zErr ){
sqlite3_result_error(context, zErr, -1);
}else{
sqlite3_result_text(context, Tcl_GetString(pRet), -1, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(pRet);
}
static
int registerTokenizer(
sqlite3 *db,
char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p
){
int rc;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
const char zSql[] = "SELECT fts2_tokenizer(?, ?)";
rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
return rc;
}
sqlite3_bind_text(pStmt, 1, zName, -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3_bind_blob(pStmt, 2, &p, sizeof(p), SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3_step(pStmt);
return sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
static
int queryFts2Tokenizer(
sqlite3 *db,
char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
){
int rc;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
const char zSql[] = "SELECT fts2_tokenizer(?)";
*pp = 0;
rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
return rc;
}
sqlite3_bind_text(pStmt, 1, zName, -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pStmt) ){
if( sqlite3_column_type(pStmt, 0)==SQLITE_BLOB ){
memcpy(pp, sqlite3_column_blob(pStmt, 0), sizeof(*pp));
}
}
return sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
void sqlite3Fts2SimpleTokenizerModule(sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule);
/*
** Implementation of the scalar function fts2_tokenizer_internal_test().
** This function is used for testing only, it is not included in the
** build unless SQLITE_TEST is defined.
**
** The purpose of this is to test that the fts2_tokenizer() function
** can be used as designed by the C-code in the queryFts2Tokenizer and
** registerTokenizer() functions above. These two functions are repeated
** in the README.tokenizer file as an example, so it is important to
** test them.
**
** To run the tests, evaluate the fts2_tokenizer_internal_test() scalar
** function with no arguments. An assert() will fail if a problem is
** detected. i.e.:
**
** SELECT fts2_tokenizer_internal_test();
**
*/
static void intTestFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
int rc;
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p1;
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p2;
sqlite3 *db = (sqlite3 *)sqlite3_user_data(context);
/* Test the query function */
sqlite3Fts2SimpleTokenizerModule(&p1);
rc = queryFts2Tokenizer(db, "simple", &p2);
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
assert( p1==p2 );
rc = queryFts2Tokenizer(db, "nosuchtokenizer", &p2);
assert( rc==SQLITE_ERROR );
assert( p2==0 );
assert( 0==strcmp(sqlite3_errmsg(db), "unknown tokenizer: nosuchtokenizer") );
/* Test the storage function */
rc = registerTokenizer(db, "nosuchtokenizer", p1);
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
rc = queryFts2Tokenizer(db, "nosuchtokenizer", &p2);
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
assert( p2==p1 );
sqlite3_result_text(context, "ok", -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
}
#endif
/*
** Set up SQL objects in database db used to access the contents of
** the hash table pointed to by argument pHash. The hash table must
** been initialized to use string keys, and to take a private copy
** of the key when a value is inserted. i.e. by a call similar to:
**
** sqlite3Fts2HashInit(pHash, FTS2_HASH_STRING, 1);
**
** This function adds a scalar function (see header comment above
** scalarFunc() in this file for details) and, if ENABLE_TABLE is
** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header
** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both
** provide read/write access to the contents of *pHash.
**
** The third argument to this function, zName, is used as the name
** of both the scalar and, if created, the virtual table.
*/
int sqlite3Fts2InitHashTable(
sqlite3 *db,
fts2Hash *pHash,
const char *zName
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
void *p = (void *)pHash;
const int any = SQLITE_ANY;
char *zTest = 0;
char *zTest2 = 0;
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
void *pdb = (void *)db;
zTest = sqlite3_mprintf("%s_test", zName);
zTest2 = sqlite3_mprintf("%s_internal_test", zName);
if( !zTest || !zTest2 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
#endif
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK
|| (rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, zName, 1, any, p, scalarFunc, 0, 0))
|| (rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, zName, 2, any, p, scalarFunc, 0, 0))
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
|| (rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, zTest, 2, any, p, testFunc, 0, 0))
|| (rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, zTest, 3, any, p, testFunc, 0, 0))
|| (rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, zTest2, 0, any, pdb, intTestFunc, 0, 0))
#endif
);
sqlite3_free(zTest);
sqlite3_free(zTest2);
return rc;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2) */

145
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/fts2_tokenizer.h
View File

@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 July 10
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.
**
*************************************************************************
** Defines the interface to tokenizers used by fulltext-search. There
** are three basic components:
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer_module is a singleton defining the tokenizer
** interface functions. This is essentially the class structure for
** tokenizers.
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer is used to define a particular tokenizer, perhaps
** including customization information defined at creation time.
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor is generated by a tokenizer to generate
** tokens from a particular input.
*/
#ifndef _FTS2_TOKENIZER_H_
#define _FTS2_TOKENIZER_H_
/* TODO(shess) Only used for SQLITE_OK and SQLITE_DONE at this time.
** If tokenizers are to be allowed to call sqlite3_*() functions, then
** we will need a way to register the API consistently.
*/
#include "sqlite3.h"
/*
** Structures used by the tokenizer interface. When a new tokenizer
** implementation is registered, the caller provides a pointer to
** an sqlite3_tokenizer_module containing pointers to the callback
** functions that make up an implementation.
**
** When an fts2 table is created, it passes any arguments passed to
** the tokenizer clause of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement to the
** sqlite3_tokenizer_module.xCreate() function of the requested tokenizer
** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an
** sqlite3_tokenizer structure representing the specific tokenizer to
** be used for the fts2 table (customized by the tokenizer clause arguments).
**
** To tokenize an input buffer, the sqlite3_tokenizer_module.xOpen()
** method is called. It returns an sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor object
** that may be used to tokenize a specific input buffer based on
** the tokenization rules supplied by a specific sqlite3_tokenizer
** object.
*/
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module sqlite3_tokenizer_module;
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer sqlite3_tokenizer;
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor;
struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
/*
** Structure version. Should always be set to 0.
*/
int iVersion;
/*
** Create a new tokenizer. The values in the argv[] array are the
** arguments passed to the "tokenizer" clause of the CREATE VIRTUAL
** TABLE statement that created the fts2 table. For example, if
** the following SQL is executed:
**
** CREATE .. USING fts2( ... , tokenizer <tokenizer-name> arg1 arg2)
**
** then argc is set to 2, and the argv[] array contains pointers
** to the strings "arg1" and "arg2".
**
** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error
** code. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then *ppTokenizer should be set
** to point at the newly created tokenizer structure. The generic
** sqlite3_tokenizer.pModule variable should not be initialized by
** this callback. The caller will do so.
*/
int (*xCreate)(
int argc, /* Size of argv array */
const char *const*argv, /* Tokenizer argument strings */
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer /* OUT: Created tokenizer */
);
/*
** Destroy an existing tokenizer. The fts2 module calls this method
** exactly once for each successful call to xCreate().
*/
int (*xDestroy)(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer);
/*
** Create a tokenizer cursor to tokenize an input buffer. The caller
** is responsible for ensuring that the input buffer remains valid
** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method).
*/
int (*xOpen)(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* Tokenizer object */
const char *pInput, int nBytes, /* Input buffer */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Created tokenizer cursor */
);
/*
** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts2 module calls this
** method exactly once for each successful call to xOpen().
*/
int (*xClose)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor);
/*
** Retrieve the next token from the tokenizer cursor pCursor. This
** method should either return SQLITE_OK and set the values of the
** "OUT" variables identified below, or SQLITE_DONE to indicate that
** the end of the buffer has been reached, or an SQLite error code.
**
** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the
** normalized version of the token (i.e. after any case-folding and/or
** stemming has been performed). *pnBytes should be set to the length
** of this buffer in bytes. The input text that generated the token is
** identified by the byte offsets returned in *piStartOffset and
** *piEndOffset.
**
** The buffer *ppToken is set to point at is managed by the tokenizer
** implementation. It is only required to be valid until the next call
** to xNext() or xClose().
*/
/* TODO(shess) current implementation requires pInput to be
** nul-terminated. This should either be fixed, or pInput/nBytes
** should be converted to zInput.
*/
int (*xNext)(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Tokenizer cursor */
const char **ppToken, int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Normalized text for token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Byte offset of token in input buffer */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Byte offset of end of token in input buffer */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Number of tokens returned before this one */
);
};
struct sqlite3_tokenizer {
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pModule; /* The module for this tokenizer */
/* Tokenizer implementations will typically add additional fields */
};
struct sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer; /* Tokenizer for this cursor. */
/* Tokenizer implementations will typically add additional fields */
};
#endif /* _FTS2_TOKENIZER_H_ */

233
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/fts2_tokenizer1.c
View File

@ -1,233 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 Oct 10
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** Implementation of the "simple" full-text-search tokenizer.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS2 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS2 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2 is defined).
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2)
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "sqlite3.h"
#include "sqlite3ext.h"
SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3
#include "fts2_tokenizer.h"
typedef struct simple_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base;
char delim[128]; /* flag ASCII delimiters */
} simple_tokenizer;
typedef struct simple_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
const char *pInput; /* input we are tokenizing */
int nBytes; /* size of the input */
int iOffset; /* current position in pInput */
int iToken; /* index of next token to be returned */
char *pToken; /* storage for current token */
int nTokenAllocated; /* space allocated to zToken buffer */
} simple_tokenizer_cursor;
/* Forward declaration */
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module simpleTokenizerModule;
static int simpleDelim(simple_tokenizer *t, unsigned char c){
return c<0x80 && t->delim[c];
}
/*
** Create a new tokenizer instance.
*/
static int simpleCreate(
int argc, const char * const *argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer
){
simple_tokenizer *t;
t = (simple_tokenizer *) sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*t));
if( t==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(t, 0, sizeof(*t));
/* TODO(shess) Delimiters need to remain the same from run to run,
** else we need to reindex. One solution would be a meta-table to
** track such information in the database, then we'd only want this
** information on the initial create.
*/
if( argc>1 ){
int i, n = strlen(argv[1]);
for(i=0; i<n; i++){
unsigned char ch = argv[1][i];
/* We explicitly don't support UTF-8 delimiters for now. */
if( ch>=0x80 ){
sqlite3_free(t);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
t->delim[ch] = 1;
}
} else {
/* Mark non-alphanumeric ASCII characters as delimiters */
int i;
for(i=1; i<0x80; i++){
t->delim[i] = !((i>='0' && i<='9') || (i>='A' && i<='Z') ||
(i>='a' && i<='z'));
}
}
*ppTokenizer = &t->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Destroy a tokenizer
*/
static int simpleDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
sqlite3_free(pTokenizer);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int simpleOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* The tokenizer */
const char *pInput, int nBytes, /* String to be tokenized */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Tokenization cursor */
){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c;
c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*c));
if( c==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
c->pInput = pInput;
if( pInput==0 ){
c->nBytes = 0;
}else if( nBytes<0 ){
c->nBytes = (int)strlen(pInput);
}else{
c->nBytes = nBytes;
}
c->iOffset = 0; /* start tokenizing at the beginning */
c->iToken = 0;
c->pToken = NULL; /* no space allocated, yet. */
c->nTokenAllocated = 0;
*ppCursor = &c->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Close a tokenization cursor previously opened by a call to
** simpleOpen() above.
*/
static int simpleClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
sqlite3_free(c->pToken);
sqlite3_free(c);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Extract the next token from a tokenization cursor. The cursor must
** have been opened by a prior call to simpleOpen().
*/
static int simpleNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor returned by simpleOpen */
const char **ppToken, /* OUT: *ppToken is the token text */
int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Number of bytes in token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
simple_tokenizer *t = (simple_tokenizer *) pCursor->pTokenizer;
unsigned char *p = (unsigned char *)c->pInput;
while( c->iOffset<c->nBytes ){
int iStartOffset;
/* Scan past delimiter characters */
while( c->iOffset<c->nBytes && simpleDelim(t, p[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
/* Count non-delimiter characters. */
iStartOffset = c->iOffset;
while( c->iOffset<c->nBytes && !simpleDelim(t, p[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
if( c->iOffset>iStartOffset ){
int i, n = c->iOffset-iStartOffset;
if( n>c->nTokenAllocated ){
c->nTokenAllocated = n+20;
c->pToken = sqlite3_realloc(c->pToken, c->nTokenAllocated);
if( c->pToken==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
for(i=0; i<n; i++){
/* TODO(shess) This needs expansion to handle UTF-8
** case-insensitivity.
*/
unsigned char ch = p[iStartOffset+i];
c->pToken[i] = (ch>='A' && ch<='Z') ? (ch - 'A' + 'a') : ch;
}
*ppToken = c->pToken;
*pnBytes = n;
*piStartOffset = iStartOffset;
*piEndOffset = c->iOffset;
*piPosition = c->iToken++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
}
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
/*
** The set of routines that implement the simple tokenizer
*/
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module simpleTokenizerModule = {
0,
simpleCreate,
simpleDestroy,
simpleOpen,
simpleClose,
simpleNext,
};
/*
** Allocate a new simple tokenizer. Return a pointer to the new
** tokenizer in *ppModule
*/
void sqlite3Fts2SimpleTokenizerModule(
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule
){
*ppModule = &simpleTokenizerModule;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS2) */

116
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts2/mkfts2amal.tcl
View File

@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
#!/usr/bin/tclsh
#
# This script builds a single C code file holding all of FTS2 code.
# The name of the output file is fts2amal.c. To build this file,
# first do:
#
# make target_source
#
# The make target above moves all of the source code files into
# a subdirectory named "tsrc". (This script expects to find the files
# there and will not work if they are not found.)
#
# After the "tsrc" directory has been created and populated, run
# this script:
#
# tclsh mkfts2amal.tcl
#
# The amalgamated FTS2 code will be written into fts2amal.c
#
# Open the output file and write a header comment at the beginning
# of the file.
#
set out [open fts2amal.c w]
set today [clock format [clock seconds] -format "%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S UTC" -gmt 1]
puts $out [subst \
{/******************************************************************************
** This file is an amalgamation of separate C source files from the SQLite
** Full Text Search extension 2 (fts2). By combining all the individual C
** code files into this single large file, the entire code can be compiled
** as a one translation unit. This allows many compilers to do optimizations
** that would not be possible if the files were compiled separately. It also
** makes the code easier to import into other projects.
**
** This amalgamation was generated on $today.
*/}]
# These are the header files used by FTS2. The first time any of these
# files are seen in a #include statement in the C code, include the complete
# text of the file in-line. The file only needs to be included once.
#
foreach hdr {
fts2.h
fts2_hash.h
fts2_tokenizer.h
sqlite3.h
sqlite3ext.h
} {
set available_hdr($hdr) 1
}
# 78 stars used for comment formatting.
set s78 \
{*****************************************************************************}
# Insert a comment into the code
#
proc section_comment {text} {
global out s78
set n [string length $text]
set nstar [expr {60 - $n}]
set stars [string range $s78 0 $nstar]
puts $out "/************** $text $stars/"
}
# Read the source file named $filename and write it into the
# sqlite3.c output file. If any #include statements are seen,
# process them approprately.
#
proc copy_file {filename} {
global seen_hdr available_hdr out
set tail [file tail $filename]
section_comment "Begin file $tail"
set in [open $filename r]
while {![eof $in]} {
set line [gets $in]
if {[regexp {^#\s*include\s+["<]([^">]+)[">]} $line all hdr]} {
if {[info exists available_hdr($hdr)]} {
if {$available_hdr($hdr)} {
section_comment "Include $hdr in the middle of $tail"
copy_file tsrc/$hdr
section_comment "Continuing where we left off in $tail"
}
} elseif {![info exists seen_hdr($hdr)]} {
set seen_hdr($hdr) 1
puts $out $line
}
} elseif {[regexp {^#ifdef __cplusplus} $line]} {
puts $out "#if 0"
} elseif {[regexp {^#line} $line]} {
# Skip #line directives.
} else {
puts $out $line
}
}
close $in
section_comment "End of $tail"
}
# Process the source files. Process files containing commonly
# used subroutines first in order to help the compiler find
# inlining opportunities.
#
foreach file {
fts2.c
fts2_hash.c
fts2_porter.c
fts2_tokenizer.c
fts2_tokenizer1.c
fts2_icu.c
} {
copy_file tsrc/$file
}
close $out

178
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/README.content
View File

@ -1,178 +0,0 @@
FTS4 CONTENT OPTION
Normally, in order to create a full-text index on a dataset, the FTS4
module stores a copy of all indexed documents in a specially created
database table.
As of SQLite version 3.7.9, FTS4 supports a new option - "content" -
designed to extend FTS4 to support the creation of full-text indexes where:
* The indexed documents are not stored within the SQLite database
at all (a "contentless" FTS4 table), or
* The indexed documents are stored in a database table created and
managed by the user (an "external content" FTS4 table).
Because the indexed documents themselves are usually much larger than
the full-text index, the content option can sometimes be used to achieve
significant space savings.
CONTENTLESS FTS4 TABLES
In order to create an FTS4 table that does not store a copy of the indexed
documents at all, the content option should be set to an empty string.
For example, the following SQL creates such an FTS4 table with three
columns - "a", "b", and "c":
CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE t1 USING fts4(content="", a, b, c);
Data can be inserted into such an FTS4 table using an INSERT statements.
However, unlike ordinary FTS4 tables, the user must supply an explicit
integer docid value. For example:
-- This statement is Ok:
INSERT INTO t1(docid, a, b, c) VALUES(1, 'a b c', 'd e f', 'g h i');
-- This statement causes an error, as no docid value has been provided:
INSERT INTO t1(a, b, c) VALUES('j k l', 'm n o', 'p q r');
It is not possible to UPDATE or DELETE a row stored in a contentless FTS4
table. Attempting to do so is an error.
Contentless FTS4 tables also support SELECT statements. However, it is
an error to attempt to retrieve the value of any table column other than
the docid column. The auxiliary function matchinfo() may be used, but
snippet() and offsets() may not. For example:
-- The following statements are Ok:
SELECT docid FROM t1 WHERE t1 MATCH 'xxx';
SELECT docid FROM t1 WHERE a MATCH 'xxx';
SELECT matchinfo(t1) FROM t1 WHERE t1 MATCH 'xxx';
-- The following statements all cause errors, as the value of columns
-- other than docid are required to evaluate them.
SELECT * FROM t1;
SELECT a, b FROM t1 WHERE t1 MATCH 'xxx';
SELECT docid FROM t1 WHERE a LIKE 'xxx%';
SELECT snippet(t1) FROM t1 WHERE t1 MATCH 'xxx';
Errors related to attempting to retrieve column values other than docid
are runtime errors that occur within sqlite3_step(). In some cases, for
example if the MATCH expression in a SELECT query matches zero rows, there
may be no error at all even if a statement does refer to column values
other than docid.
EXTERNAL CONTENT FTS4 TABLES
An "external content" FTS4 table is similar to a contentless table, except
that if evaluation of a query requires the value of a column other than
docid, FTS4 attempts to retrieve that value from a table (or view, or
virtual table) nominated by the user (hereafter referred to as the "content
table"). The FTS4 module never writes to the content table, and writing
to the content table does not affect the full-text index. It is the
responsibility of the user to ensure that the content table and the
full-text index are consistent.
An external content FTS4 table is created by setting the content option
to the name of a table (or view, or virtual table) that may be queried by
FTS4 to retrieve column values when required. If the nominated table does
not exist, then an external content table behaves in the same way as
a contentless table. For example:
CREATE TABLE t2(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, a, b, c);
CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE t3 USING fts4(content="t2", a, c);
Assuming the nominated table does exist, then its columns must be the same
as or a superset of those defined for the FTS table.
When a users query on the FTS table requires a column value other than
docid, FTS attempts to read this value from the corresponding column of
the row in the content table with a rowid value equal to the current FTS
docid. Or, if such a row cannot be found in the content table, a NULL
value is used instead. For example:
CREATE TABLE t2(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, a, b, c, d);
CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE t3 USING fts4(content="t2", b, c);
INSERT INTO t2 VALUES(2, 'a b', 'c d', 'e f');
INSERT INTO t2 VALUES(3, 'g h', 'i j', 'k l');
INSERT INTO t3(docid, b, c) SELECT id, b, c FROM t2;
-- The following query returns a single row with two columns containing
-- the text values "i j" and "k l".
--
-- The query uses the full-text index to discover that the MATCH
-- term matches the row with docid=3. It then retrieves the values
-- of columns b and c from the row with rowid=3 in the content table
-- to return.
--
SELECT * FROM t3 WHERE t3 MATCH 'k';
-- Following the UPDATE, the query still returns a single row, this
-- time containing the text values "xxx" and "yyy". This is because the
-- full-text index still indicates that the row with docid=3 matches
-- the FTS4 query 'k', even though the documents stored in the content
-- table have been modified.
--
UPDATE t2 SET b = 'xxx', c = 'yyy' WHERE rowid = 3;
SELECT * FROM t3 WHERE t3 MATCH 'k';
-- Following the DELETE below, the query returns one row containing two
-- NULL values. NULL values are returned because FTS is unable to find
-- a row with rowid=3 within the content table.
--
DELETE FROM t2;
SELECT * FROM t3 WHERE t3 MATCH 'k';
When a row is deleted from an external content FTS4 table, FTS4 needs to
retrieve the column values of the row being deleted from the content table.
This is so that FTS4 can update the full-text index entries for each token
that occurs within the deleted row to indicate that that row has been
deleted. If the content table row cannot be found, or if it contains values
inconsistent with the contents of the FTS index, the results can be difficult
to predict. The FTS index may be left containing entries corresponding to the
deleted row, which can lead to seemingly nonsensical results being returned
by subsequent SELECT queries. The same applies when a row is updated, as
internally an UPDATE is the same as a DELETE followed by an INSERT.
Instead of writing separately to the full-text index and the content table,
some users may wish to use database triggers to keep the full-text index
up to date with respect to the set of documents stored in the content table.
For example, using the tables from earlier examples:
CREATE TRIGGER t2_bu BEFORE UPDATE ON t2 BEGIN
DELETE FROM t3 WHERE docid=old.rowid;
END;
CREATE TRIGGER t2_bd BEFORE DELETE ON t2 BEGIN
DELETE FROM t3 WHERE docid=old.rowid;
END;
CREATE TRIGGER t2_bu AFTER UPDATE ON t2 BEGIN
INSERT INTO t3(docid, b, c) VALUES(new.rowid, new.b, new.c);
END;
CREATE TRIGGER t2_bd AFTER INSERT ON t2 BEGIN
INSERT INTO t3(docid, b, c) VALUES(new.rowid, new.b, new.c);
END;
The DELETE trigger must be fired before the actual delete takes place
on the content table. This is so that FTS4 can still retrieve the original
values in order to update the full-text index. And the INSERT trigger must
be fired after the new row is inserted, so as to handle the case where the
rowid is assigned automatically within the system. The UPDATE trigger must
be split into two parts, one fired before and one after the update of the
content table, for the same reasons.
FTS4 features a special command similar to the 'optimize' command that
deletes the entire full-text index and rebuilds it based on the current
set of documents in the content table. Assuming again that "t3" is the
name of the external content FTS4 table, the command is:
INSERT INTO t3(t3) VALUES('rebuild');
This command may also be used with ordinary FTS4 tables, although it may
only be useful if the full-text index has somehow become corrupt. It is an
error to attempt to rebuild the full-text index maintained by a contentless
FTS4 table.

209
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/README.syntax
View File

@ -1,209 +0,0 @@
1. OVERVIEW
This README file describes the syntax of the arguments that may be passed to
the FTS3 MATCH operator used for full-text queries. For example, if table
"t1" is an Fts3 virtual table, the following SQL query:
SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE <col> MATCH <full-text query>
may be used to retrieve all rows that match a specified for full-text query.
The text "<col>" should be replaced by either the name of the fts3 table
(in this case "t1"), or by the name of one of the columns of the fts3
table. <full-text-query> should be replaced by an SQL expression that
computes to a string containing an Fts3 query.
If the left-hand-side of the MATCH operator is set to the name of the
fts3 table, then by default the query may be matched against any column
of the table. If it is set to a column name, then by default the query
may only match the specified column. In both cases this may be overriden
as part of the query text (see sections 2 and 3 below).
As of SQLite version 3.6.8, Fts3 supports two slightly different query
formats; the standard syntax, which is used by default, and the enhanced
query syntax which can be selected by compiling with the pre-processor
symbol SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS defined.
-DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS
2. STANDARD QUERY SYNTAX
When using the standard Fts3 query syntax, a query usually consists of a
list of terms (words) separated by white-space characters. To match a
query, a row (or column) of an Fts3 table must contain each of the specified
terms. For example, the following query:
<col> MATCH 'hello world'
matches rows (or columns, if <col> is the name of a column name) that
contain at least one instance of the token "hello", and at least one
instance of the token "world". Tokens may be grouped into phrases using
quotation marks. In this case, a matching row or column must contain each
of the tokens in the phrase in the order specified, with no intervening
tokens. For example, the query:
<col> MATCH '"hello world" joe"
matches the first of the following two documents, but not the second or
third:
"'Hello world', said Joe."
"One should always greet the world with a cheery hello, thought Joe."
"How many hello world programs could their be?"
As well as grouping tokens together by phrase, the binary NEAR operator
may be used to search for rows that contain two or more specified tokens
or phrases within a specified proximity of each other. The NEAR operator
must always be specified in upper case. The word "near" in lower or mixed
case is treated as an ordinary token. For example, the following query:
<col> MATCH 'engineering NEAR consultancy'
matches rows that contain both the "engineering" and "consultancy" tokens
in the same column with not more than 10 other words between them. It does
not matter which of the two terms occurs first in the document, only that
they be seperated by only 10 tokens or less. The user may also specify
a different required proximity by adding "/N" immediately after the NEAR
operator, where N is an integer. For example:
<col> MATCH 'engineering NEAR/5 consultancy'
searches for a row containing an instance of each specified token seperated
by not more than 5 other tokens. More than one NEAR operator can be used
in as sequence. For example this query:
<col> MATCH 'reliable NEAR/2 engineering NEAR/5 consultancy'
searches for a row that contains an instance of the token "reliable"
seperated by not more than two tokens from an instance of "engineering",
which is in turn separated by not more than 5 other tokens from an
instance of the term "consultancy". Phrases enclosed in quotes may
also be used as arguments to the NEAR operator.
Similar to the NEAR operator, one or more tokens or phrases may be
separated by OR operators. In this case, only one of the specified tokens
or phrases must appear in the document. For example, the query:
<col> MATCH 'hello OR world'
matches rows that contain either the term "hello", or the term "world",
or both. Note that unlike in many programming languages, the OR operator
has a higher precedence than the AND operators implied between white-space
separated tokens. The following query matches documents that contain the
term 'sqlite' and at least one of the terms 'fantastic' or 'impressive',
not those that contain both 'sqlite' and 'fantastic' or 'impressive':
<col> MATCH 'sqlite fantastic OR impressive'
Any token that is part of an Fts3 query expression, whether or not it is
part of a phrase enclosed in quotes, may have a '*' character appended to
it. In this case, the token matches all terms that begin with the characters
of the token, not just those that exactly match it. For example, the
following query:
<col> MATCH 'sql*'
matches all rows that contain the term "SQLite", as well as those that
contain "SQL".
A token that is not part of a quoted phrase may be preceded by a '-'
character, which indicates that matching rows must not contain the
specified term. For example, the following:
<col> MATCH '"database engine" -sqlite'
matches rows that contain the phrase "database engine" but do not contain
the term "sqlite". If the '-' character occurs inside a quoted phrase,
it is ignored. It is possible to use both the '-' prefix and the '*' postfix
on a single term. At this time, all Fts3 queries must contain at least
one term or phrase that is not preceded by the '-' prefix.
Regardless of whether or not a table name or column name is used on the
left hand side of the MATCH operator, a specific column of the fts3 table
may be associated with each token in a query by preceding a token with
a column name followed by a ':' character. For example, regardless of what
is specified for <col>, the following query requires that column "col1"
of the table contains the term "hello", and that column "col2" of the
table contains the term "world". If the table does not contain columns
named "col1" and "col2", then an error is returned and the query is
not run.
<col> MATCH 'col1:hello col2:world'
It is not possible to associate a specific table column with a quoted
phrase or a term preceded by a '-' operator. A '*' character may be
appended to a term associated with a specific column for prefix matching.
3. ENHANCED QUERY SYNTAX
The enhanced query syntax is quite similar to the standard query syntax,
with the following four differences:
1) Parenthesis are supported. When using the enhanced query syntax,
parenthesis may be used to overcome the built-in precedence of the
supplied binary operators. For example, the following query:
<col> MATCH '(hello world) OR (simple example)'
matches documents that contain both "hello" and "world", and documents
that contain both "simple" and "example". It is not possible to forumlate
such a query using the standard syntax.
2) Instead of separating tokens and phrases by whitespace, an AND operator
may be explicitly specified. This does not change query processing at
all, but may be used to improve readability. For example, the following
query is handled identically to the one above:
<col> MATCH '(hello AND world) OR (simple AND example)'
As with the OR and NEAR operators, the AND operator must be specified
in upper case. The word "and" specified in lower or mixed case is
handled as a regular token.
3) The '-' token prefix is not supported. Instead, a new binary operator,
NOT, is included. The NOT operator requires that the query specified
as its left-hand operator matches, but that the query specified as the
right-hand operator does not. For example, to query for all rows that
contain the term "example" but not the term "simple", the following
query could be used:
<col> MATCH 'example NOT simple'
As for all other operators, the NOT operator must be specified in
upper case. Otherwise it will be treated as a regular token.
4) Unlike in the standard syntax, where the OR operator has a higher
precedence than the implicit AND operator, when using the enhanced
syntax implicit and explict AND operators have a higher precedence
than OR operators. Using the enhanced syntax, the following two
queries are equivalent:
<col> MATCH 'sqlite fantastic OR impressive'
<col> MATCH '(sqlite AND fantastic) OR impressive'
however, when using the standard syntax, the query:
<col> MATCH 'sqlite fantastic OR impressive'
is equivalent to the enhanced syntax query:
<col> MATCH 'sqlite AND (fantastic OR impressive)'
The precedence of all enhanced syntax operators, in order from highest
to lowest, is:
NEAR (highest precedence, tightest grouping)
NOT
AND
OR (lowest precedence, loosest grouping)
Using the advanced syntax, it is possible to specify expressions enclosed
in parenthesis as operands to the NOT, AND and OR operators. However both
the left and right hand side operands of NEAR operators must be either
tokens or phrases. Attempting the following query will return an error:
<col> MATCH 'sqlite NEAR (fantastic OR impressive)'
Queries of this form must be re-written as:
<col> MATCH 'sqlite NEAR fantastic OR sqlite NEAR impressive'

133
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/README.tokenizers
View File

@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
1. FTS3 Tokenizers
When creating a new full-text table, FTS3 allows the user to select
the text tokenizer implementation to be used when indexing text
by specifying a "tokenize" clause as part of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE
statement:
CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE <table-name> USING fts3(
<columns ...> [, tokenize <tokenizer-name> [<tokenizer-args>]]
);
The built-in tokenizers (valid values to pass as <tokenizer name>) are
"simple", "porter" and "unicode".
<tokenizer-args> should consist of zero or more white-space separated
arguments to pass to the selected tokenizer implementation. The
interpretation of the arguments, if any, depends on the individual
tokenizer.
2. Custom Tokenizers
FTS3 allows users to provide custom tokenizer implementations. The
interface used to create a new tokenizer is defined and described in
the fts3_tokenizer.h source file.
Registering a new FTS3 tokenizer is similar to registering a new
virtual table module with SQLite. The user passes a pointer to a
structure containing pointers to various callback functions that
make up the implementation of the new tokenizer type. For tokenizers,
the structure (defined in fts3_tokenizer.h) is called
"sqlite3_tokenizer_module".
FTS3 does not expose a C-function that users call to register new
tokenizer types with a database handle. Instead, the pointer must
be encoded as an SQL blob value and passed to FTS3 through the SQL
engine by evaluating a special scalar function, "fts3_tokenizer()".
The fts3_tokenizer() function may be called with one or two arguments,
as follows:
SELECT fts3_tokenizer(<tokenizer-name>);
SELECT fts3_tokenizer(<tokenizer-name>, <sqlite3_tokenizer_module ptr>);
Where <tokenizer-name> is a string identifying the tokenizer and
<sqlite3_tokenizer_module ptr> is a pointer to an sqlite3_tokenizer_module
structure encoded as an SQL blob. If the second argument is present,
it is registered as tokenizer <tokenizer-name> and a copy of it
returned. If only one argument is passed, a pointer to the tokenizer
implementation currently registered as <tokenizer-name> is returned,
encoded as a blob. Or, if no such tokenizer exists, an SQL exception
(error) is raised.
SECURITY: If the fts3 extension is used in an environment where potentially
malicious users may execute arbitrary SQL (i.e. gears), they should be
prevented from invoking the fts3_tokenizer() function, possibly using the
authorisation callback.
See "Sample code" below for an example of calling the fts3_tokenizer()
function from C code.
3. ICU Library Tokenizers
If this extension is compiled with the SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU pre-processor
symbol defined, then there exists a built-in tokenizer named "icu"
implemented using the ICU library. The first argument passed to the
xCreate() method (see fts3_tokenizer.h) of this tokenizer may be
an ICU locale identifier. For example "tr_TR" for Turkish as used
in Turkey, or "en_AU" for English as used in Australia. For example:
"CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE thai_text USING fts3(text, tokenizer icu th_TH)"
The ICU tokenizer implementation is very simple. It splits the input
text according to the ICU rules for finding word boundaries and discards
any tokens that consist entirely of white-space. This may be suitable
for some applications in some locales, but not all. If more complex
processing is required, for example to implement stemming or
discard punctuation, this can be done by creating a tokenizer
implementation that uses the ICU tokenizer as part of its implementation.
When using the ICU tokenizer this way, it is safe to overwrite the
contents of the strings returned by the xNext() method (see
fts3_tokenizer.h).
4. Sample code.
The following two code samples illustrate the way C code should invoke
the fts3_tokenizer() scalar function:
int registerTokenizer(
sqlite3 *db,
char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p
){
int rc;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
const char zSql[] = "SELECT fts3_tokenizer(?, ?)";
rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
return rc;
}
sqlite3_bind_text(pStmt, 1, zName, -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3_bind_blob(pStmt, 2, &p, sizeof(p), SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3_step(pStmt);
return sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
int queryTokenizer(
sqlite3 *db,
char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
){
int rc;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
const char zSql[] = "SELECT fts3_tokenizer(?)";
*pp = 0;
rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
return rc;
}
sqlite3_bind_text(pStmt, 1, zName, -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pStmt) ){
if( sqlite3_column_type(pStmt, 0)==SQLITE_BLOB ){
memcpy(pp, sqlite3_column_blob(pStmt, 0), sizeof(*pp));
}
}
return sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}

4
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/README.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
This folder contains source code to the second full-text search
extension for SQLite. While the API is the same, this version uses a
substantially different storage schema from fts1, so tables will need
to be rebuilt.

5924
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3.c
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

26
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3.h
View File

@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 Oct 10
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** This header file is used by programs that want to link against the
** FTS3 library. All it does is declare the sqlite3Fts3Init() interface.
*/
#include "sqlite3.h"
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db);
#ifdef __cplusplus
} /* extern "C" */
#endif /* __cplusplus */

617
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3Int.h
View File

@ -1,617 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2009 Nov 12
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
*/
#ifndef _FTSINT_H
#define _FTSINT_H
#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
# define NDEBUG 1
#endif
/* FTS3/FTS4 require virtual tables */
#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
# undef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3
# undef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4
#endif
/*
** FTS4 is really an extension for FTS3. It is enabled using the
** SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3 macro. But to avoid confusion we also all
** the SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4 macro to serve as an alisse for SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3.
*/
#if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4) && !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
# define SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3
#endif
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
/* If not building as part of the core, include sqlite3ext.h. */
#ifndef SQLITE_CORE
# include "sqlite3ext.h"
SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3
#endif
#include "sqlite3.h"
#include "fts3_tokenizer.h"
#include "fts3_hash.h"
/*
** This constant determines the maximum depth of an FTS expression tree
** that the library will create and use. FTS uses recursion to perform
** various operations on the query tree, so the disadvantage of a large
** limit is that it may allow very large queries to use large amounts
** of stack space (perhaps causing a stack overflow).
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_FTS3_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH
# define SQLITE_FTS3_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH 12
#endif
/*
** This constant controls how often segments are merged. Once there are
** FTS3_MERGE_COUNT segments of level N, they are merged into a single
** segment of level N+1.
*/
#define FTS3_MERGE_COUNT 16
/*
** This is the maximum amount of data (in bytes) to store in the
** Fts3Table.pendingTerms hash table. Normally, the hash table is
** populated as documents are inserted/updated/deleted in a transaction
** and used to create a new segment when the transaction is committed.
** However if this limit is reached midway through a transaction, a new
** segment is created and the hash table cleared immediately.
*/
#define FTS3_MAX_PENDING_DATA (1*1024*1024)
/*
** Macro to return the number of elements in an array. SQLite has a
** similar macro called ArraySize(). Use a different name to avoid
** a collision when building an amalgamation with built-in FTS3.
*/
#define SizeofArray(X) ((int)(sizeof(X)/sizeof(X[0])))
#ifndef MIN
# define MIN(x,y) ((x)<(y)?(x):(y))
#endif
#ifndef MAX
# define MAX(x,y) ((x)>(y)?(x):(y))
#endif
/*
** Maximum length of a varint encoded integer. The varint format is different
** from that used by SQLite, so the maximum length is 10, not 9.
*/
#define FTS3_VARINT_MAX 10
/*
** FTS4 virtual tables may maintain multiple indexes - one index of all terms
** in the document set and zero or more prefix indexes. All indexes are stored
** as one or more b+-trees in the %_segments and %_segdir tables.
**
** It is possible to determine which index a b+-tree belongs to based on the
** value stored in the "%_segdir.level" column. Given this value L, the index
** that the b+-tree belongs to is (L<<10). In other words, all b+-trees with
** level values between 0 and 1023 (inclusive) belong to index 0, all levels
** between 1024 and 2047 to index 1, and so on.
**
** It is considered impossible for an index to use more than 1024 levels. In
** theory though this may happen, but only after at least
** (FTS3_MERGE_COUNT^1024) separate flushes of the pending-terms tables.
*/
#define FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL 1024
#define FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL_STR "1024"
/*
** The testcase() macro is only used by the amalgamation. If undefined,
** make it a no-op.
*/
#ifndef testcase
# define testcase(X)
#endif
/*
** Terminator values for position-lists and column-lists.
*/
#define POS_COLUMN (1) /* Column-list terminator */
#define POS_END (0) /* Position-list terminator */
/*
** This section provides definitions to allow the
** FTS3 extension to be compiled outside of the
** amalgamation.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION
/*
** Macros indicating that conditional expressions are always true or
** false.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_COVERAGE_TEST
# define ALWAYS(x) (1)
# define NEVER(X) (0)
#elif defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
# define ALWAYS(x) sqlite3Fts3Always((x)!=0)
# define NEVER(x) sqlite3Fts3Never((x)!=0)
int sqlite3Fts3Always(int b);
int sqlite3Fts3Never(int b);
#else
# define ALWAYS(x) (x)
# define NEVER(x) (x)
#endif
/*
** Internal types used by SQLite.
*/
typedef unsigned char u8; /* 1-byte (or larger) unsigned integer */
typedef short int i16; /* 2-byte (or larger) signed integer */
typedef unsigned int u32; /* 4-byte unsigned integer */
typedef sqlite3_uint64 u64; /* 8-byte unsigned integer */
typedef sqlite3_int64 i64; /* 8-byte signed integer */
/*
** Macro used to suppress compiler warnings for unused parameters.
*/
#define UNUSED_PARAMETER(x) (void)(x)
/*
** Activate assert() only if SQLITE_TEST is enabled.
*/
#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
# define NDEBUG 1
#endif
/*
** The TESTONLY macro is used to enclose variable declarations or
** other bits of code that are needed to support the arguments
** within testcase() and assert() macros.
*/
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(SQLITE_COVERAGE_TEST)
# define TESTONLY(X) X
#else
# define TESTONLY(X)
#endif
#endif /* SQLITE_AMALGAMATION */
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
int sqlite3Fts3Corrupt(void);
# define FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB sqlite3Fts3Corrupt()
#else
# define FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB SQLITE_CORRUPT_VTAB
#endif
typedef struct Fts3Table Fts3Table;
typedef struct Fts3Cursor Fts3Cursor;
typedef struct Fts3Expr Fts3Expr;
typedef struct Fts3Phrase Fts3Phrase;
typedef struct Fts3PhraseToken Fts3PhraseToken;
typedef struct Fts3Doclist Fts3Doclist;
typedef struct Fts3SegFilter Fts3SegFilter;
typedef struct Fts3DeferredToken Fts3DeferredToken;
typedef struct Fts3SegReader Fts3SegReader;
typedef struct Fts3MultiSegReader Fts3MultiSegReader;
typedef struct MatchinfoBuffer MatchinfoBuffer;
/*
** A connection to a fulltext index is an instance of the following
** structure. The xCreate and xConnect methods create an instance
** of this structure and xDestroy and xDisconnect free that instance.
** All other methods receive a pointer to the structure as one of their
** arguments.
*/
struct Fts3Table {
sqlite3_vtab base; /* Base class used by SQLite core */
sqlite3 *db; /* The database connection */
const char *zDb; /* logical database name */
const char *zName; /* virtual table name */
int nColumn; /* number of named columns in virtual table */
char **azColumn; /* column names. malloced */
u8 *abNotindexed; /* True for 'notindexed' columns */
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer; /* tokenizer for inserts and queries */
char *zContentTbl; /* content=xxx option, or NULL */
char *zLanguageid; /* languageid=xxx option, or NULL */
int nAutoincrmerge; /* Value configured by 'automerge' */
u32 nLeafAdd; /* Number of leaf blocks added this trans */
/* Precompiled statements used by the implementation. Each of these
** statements is run and reset within a single virtual table API call.
*/
sqlite3_stmt *aStmt[40];
char *zReadExprlist;
char *zWriteExprlist;
int nNodeSize; /* Soft limit for node size */
u8 bFts4; /* True for FTS4, false for FTS3 */
u8 bHasStat; /* True if %_stat table exists (2==unknown) */
u8 bHasDocsize; /* True if %_docsize table exists */
u8 bDescIdx; /* True if doclists are in reverse order */
u8 bIgnoreSavepoint; /* True to ignore xSavepoint invocations */
int nPgsz; /* Page size for host database */
char *zSegmentsTbl; /* Name of %_segments table */
sqlite3_blob *pSegments; /* Blob handle open on %_segments table */
/*
** The following array of hash tables is used to buffer pending index
** updates during transactions. All pending updates buffered at any one
** time must share a common language-id (see the FTS4 langid= feature).
** The current language id is stored in variable iPrevLangid.
**
** A single FTS4 table may have multiple full-text indexes. For each index
** there is an entry in the aIndex[] array. Index 0 is an index of all the
** terms that appear in the document set. Each subsequent index in aIndex[]
** is an index of prefixes of a specific length.
**
** Variable nPendingData contains an estimate the memory consumed by the
** pending data structures, including hash table overhead, but not including
** malloc overhead. When nPendingData exceeds nMaxPendingData, all hash
** tables are flushed to disk. Variable iPrevDocid is the docid of the most
** recently inserted record.
*/
int nIndex; /* Size of aIndex[] */
struct Fts3Index {
int nPrefix; /* Prefix length (0 for main terms index) */
Fts3Hash hPending; /* Pending terms table for this index */
} *aIndex;
int nMaxPendingData; /* Max pending data before flush to disk */
int nPendingData; /* Current bytes of pending data */
sqlite_int64 iPrevDocid; /* Docid of most recently inserted document */
int iPrevLangid; /* Langid of recently inserted document */
int bPrevDelete; /* True if last operation was a delete */
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(SQLITE_COVERAGE_TEST)
/* State variables used for validating that the transaction control
** methods of the virtual table are called at appropriate times. These
** values do not contribute to FTS functionality; they are used for
** verifying the operation of the SQLite core.
*/
int inTransaction; /* True after xBegin but before xCommit/xRollback */
int mxSavepoint; /* Largest valid xSavepoint integer */
#endif
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
/* True to disable the incremental doclist optimization. This is controled
** by special insert command 'test-no-incr-doclist'. */
int bNoIncrDoclist;
#endif
};
/*
** When the core wants to read from the virtual table, it creates a
** virtual table cursor (an instance of the following structure) using
** the xOpen method. Cursors are destroyed using the xClose method.
*/
struct Fts3Cursor {
sqlite3_vtab_cursor base; /* Base class used by SQLite core */
i16 eSearch; /* Search strategy (see below) */
u8 isEof; /* True if at End Of Results */
u8 isRequireSeek; /* True if must seek pStmt to %_content row */
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt; /* Prepared statement in use by the cursor */
Fts3Expr *pExpr; /* Parsed MATCH query string */
int iLangid; /* Language being queried for */
int nPhrase; /* Number of matchable phrases in query */
Fts3DeferredToken *pDeferred; /* Deferred search tokens, if any */
sqlite3_int64 iPrevId; /* Previous id read from aDoclist */
char *pNextId; /* Pointer into the body of aDoclist */
char *aDoclist; /* List of docids for full-text queries */
int nDoclist; /* Size of buffer at aDoclist */
u8 bDesc; /* True to sort in descending order */
int eEvalmode; /* An FTS3_EVAL_XX constant */
int nRowAvg; /* Average size of database rows, in pages */
sqlite3_int64 nDoc; /* Documents in table */
i64 iMinDocid; /* Minimum docid to return */
i64 iMaxDocid; /* Maximum docid to return */
int isMatchinfoNeeded; /* True when aMatchinfo[] needs filling in */
MatchinfoBuffer *pMIBuffer; /* Buffer for matchinfo data */
};
#define FTS3_EVAL_FILTER 0
#define FTS3_EVAL_NEXT 1
#define FTS3_EVAL_MATCHINFO 2
/*
** The Fts3Cursor.eSearch member is always set to one of the following.
** Actualy, Fts3Cursor.eSearch can be greater than or equal to
** FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH. If so, then Fts3Cursor.eSearch - 2 is the index
** of the column to be searched. For example, in
**
** CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE ex1 USING fts3(a,b,c,d);
** SELECT docid FROM ex1 WHERE b MATCH 'one two three';
**
** Because the LHS of the MATCH operator is 2nd column "b",
** Fts3Cursor.eSearch will be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+1. (+0 for a,
** +1 for b, +2 for c, +3 for d.) If the LHS of MATCH were "ex1"
** indicating that all columns should be searched,
** then eSearch would be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+4.
*/
#define FTS3_FULLSCAN_SEARCH 0 /* Linear scan of %_content table */
#define FTS3_DOCID_SEARCH 1 /* Lookup by rowid on %_content table */
#define FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH 2 /* Full-text index search */
/*
** The lower 16-bits of the sqlite3_index_info.idxNum value set by
** the xBestIndex() method contains the Fts3Cursor.eSearch value described
** above. The upper 16-bits contain a combination of the following
** bits, used to describe extra constraints on full-text searches.
*/
#define FTS3_HAVE_LANGID 0x00010000 /* languageid=? */
#define FTS3_HAVE_DOCID_GE 0x00020000 /* docid>=? */
#define FTS3_HAVE_DOCID_LE 0x00040000 /* docid<=? */
struct Fts3Doclist {
char *aAll; /* Array containing doclist (or NULL) */
int nAll; /* Size of a[] in bytes */
char *pNextDocid; /* Pointer to next docid */
sqlite3_int64 iDocid; /* Current docid (if pList!=0) */
int bFreeList; /* True if pList should be sqlite3_free()d */
char *pList; /* Pointer to position list following iDocid */
int nList; /* Length of position list */
};
/*
** A "phrase" is a sequence of one or more tokens that must match in
** sequence. A single token is the base case and the most common case.
** For a sequence of tokens contained in double-quotes (i.e. "one two three")
** nToken will be the number of tokens in the string.
*/
struct Fts3PhraseToken {
char *z; /* Text of the token */
int n; /* Number of bytes in buffer z */
int isPrefix; /* True if token ends with a "*" character */
int bFirst; /* True if token must appear at position 0 */
/* Variables above this point are populated when the expression is
** parsed (by code in fts3_expr.c). Below this point the variables are
** used when evaluating the expression. */
Fts3DeferredToken *pDeferred; /* Deferred token object for this token */
Fts3MultiSegReader *pSegcsr; /* Segment-reader for this token */
};
struct Fts3Phrase {
/* Cache of doclist for this phrase. */
Fts3Doclist doclist;
int bIncr; /* True if doclist is loaded incrementally */
int iDoclistToken;
/* Used by sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist() if this is a descendent of an
** OR condition. */
char *pOrPoslist;
i64 iOrDocid;
/* Variables below this point are populated by fts3_expr.c when parsing
** a MATCH expression. Everything above is part of the evaluation phase.
*/
int nToken; /* Number of tokens in the phrase */
int iColumn; /* Index of column this phrase must match */
Fts3PhraseToken aToken[1]; /* One entry for each token in the phrase */
};
/*
** A tree of these objects forms the RHS of a MATCH operator.
**
** If Fts3Expr.eType is FTSQUERY_PHRASE and isLoaded is true, then aDoclist
** points to a malloced buffer, size nDoclist bytes, containing the results
** of this phrase query in FTS3 doclist format. As usual, the initial
** "Length" field found in doclists stored on disk is omitted from this
** buffer.
**
** Variable aMI is used only for FTSQUERY_NEAR nodes to store the global
** matchinfo data. If it is not NULL, it points to an array of size nCol*3,
** where nCol is the number of columns in the queried FTS table. The array
** is populated as follows:
**
** aMI[iCol*3 + 0] = Undefined
** aMI[iCol*3 + 1] = Number of occurrences
** aMI[iCol*3 + 2] = Number of rows containing at least one instance
**
** The aMI array is allocated using sqlite3_malloc(). It should be freed
** when the expression node is.
*/
struct Fts3Expr {
int eType; /* One of the FTSQUERY_XXX values defined below */
int nNear; /* Valid if eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR */
Fts3Expr *pParent; /* pParent->pLeft==this or pParent->pRight==this */
Fts3Expr *pLeft; /* Left operand */
Fts3Expr *pRight; /* Right operand */
Fts3Phrase *pPhrase; /* Valid if eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE */
/* The following are used by the fts3_eval.c module. */
sqlite3_int64 iDocid; /* Current docid */
u8 bEof; /* True this expression is at EOF already */
u8 bStart; /* True if iDocid is valid */
u8 bDeferred; /* True if this expression is entirely deferred */
/* The following are used by the fts3_snippet.c module. */
int iPhrase; /* Index of this phrase in matchinfo() results */
u32 *aMI; /* See above */
};
/*
** Candidate values for Fts3Query.eType. Note that the order of the first
** four values is in order of precedence when parsing expressions. For
** example, the following:
**
** "a OR b AND c NOT d NEAR e"
**
** is equivalent to:
**
** "a OR (b AND (c NOT (d NEAR e)))"
*/
#define FTSQUERY_NEAR 1
#define FTSQUERY_NOT 2
#define FTSQUERY_AND 3
#define FTSQUERY_OR 4
#define FTSQUERY_PHRASE 5
/* fts3_write.c */
int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(sqlite3_vtab*,int,sqlite3_value**,sqlite3_int64*);
int sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(Fts3Table *);
void sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsClear(Fts3Table *);
int sqlite3Fts3Optimize(Fts3Table *);
int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(int, int, sqlite3_int64,
sqlite3_int64, sqlite3_int64, const char *, int, Fts3SegReader**);
int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderPending(
Fts3Table*,int,const char*,int,int,Fts3SegReader**);
void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFree(Fts3SegReader *);
int sqlite3Fts3AllSegdirs(Fts3Table*, int, int, int, sqlite3_stmt **);
int sqlite3Fts3ReadBlock(Fts3Table*, sqlite3_int64, char **, int*, int*);
int sqlite3Fts3SelectDoctotal(Fts3Table *, sqlite3_stmt **);
int sqlite3Fts3SelectDocsize(Fts3Table *, sqlite3_int64, sqlite3_stmt **);
#ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS4_DEFERRED
void sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredTokens(Fts3Cursor *);
int sqlite3Fts3DeferToken(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3PhraseToken *, int);
int sqlite3Fts3CacheDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *);
void sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *);
int sqlite3Fts3DeferredTokenList(Fts3DeferredToken *, char **, int *);
#else
# define sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredTokens(x)
# define sqlite3Fts3DeferToken(x,y,z) SQLITE_OK
# define sqlite3Fts3CacheDeferredDoclists(x) SQLITE_OK
# define sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredDoclists(x)
# define sqlite3Fts3DeferredTokenList(x,y,z) SQLITE_OK
#endif
void sqlite3Fts3SegmentsClose(Fts3Table *);
int sqlite3Fts3MaxLevel(Fts3Table *, int *);
/* Special values interpreted by sqlite3SegReaderCursor() */
#define FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING -1
#define FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL -2
int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart(Fts3Table*, Fts3MultiSegReader*, Fts3SegFilter*);
int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(Fts3Table *, Fts3MultiSegReader *);
void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(Fts3MultiSegReader *);
int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(Fts3Table *,
int, int, int, const char *, int, int, int, Fts3MultiSegReader *);
/* Flags allowed as part of the 4th argument to SegmentReaderIterate() */
#define FTS3_SEGMENT_REQUIRE_POS 0x00000001
#define FTS3_SEGMENT_IGNORE_EMPTY 0x00000002
#define FTS3_SEGMENT_COLUMN_FILTER 0x00000004
#define FTS3_SEGMENT_PREFIX 0x00000008
#define FTS3_SEGMENT_SCAN 0x00000010
#define FTS3_SEGMENT_FIRST 0x00000020
/* Type passed as 4th argument to SegmentReaderIterate() */
struct Fts3SegFilter {
const char *zTerm;
int nTerm;
int iCol;
int flags;
};
struct Fts3MultiSegReader {
/* Used internally by sqlite3Fts3SegReaderXXX() calls */
Fts3SegReader **apSegment; /* Array of Fts3SegReader objects */
int nSegment; /* Size of apSegment array */
int nAdvance; /* How many seg-readers to advance */
Fts3SegFilter *pFilter; /* Pointer to filter object */
char *aBuffer; /* Buffer to merge doclists in */
int nBuffer; /* Allocated size of aBuffer[] in bytes */
int iColFilter; /* If >=0, filter for this column */
int bRestart;
/* Used by fts3.c only. */
int nCost; /* Cost of running iterator */
int bLookup; /* True if a lookup of a single entry. */
/* Output values. Valid only after Fts3SegReaderStep() returns SQLITE_ROW. */
char *zTerm; /* Pointer to term buffer */
int nTerm; /* Size of zTerm in bytes */
char *aDoclist; /* Pointer to doclist buffer */
int nDoclist; /* Size of aDoclist[] in bytes */
};
int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table*,int,int);
#define fts3GetVarint32(p, piVal) ( \
(*(u8*)(p)&0x80) ? sqlite3Fts3GetVarint32(p, piVal) : (*piVal=*(u8*)(p), 1) \
)
/* fts3.c */
void sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(char**,const char*,...);
int sqlite3Fts3PutVarint(char *, sqlite3_int64);
int sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(const char *, sqlite_int64 *);
int sqlite3Fts3GetVarint32(const char *, int *);
int sqlite3Fts3VarintLen(sqlite3_uint64);
void sqlite3Fts3Dequote(char *);
void sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(int,char*,int,char**,sqlite3_int64*,int*,u8*);
int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhraseStats(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3Expr *, u32 *);
int sqlite3Fts3FirstFilter(sqlite3_int64, char *, int, char *);
void sqlite3Fts3CreateStatTable(int*, Fts3Table*);
int sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pRc);
/* fts3_tokenizer.c */
const char *sqlite3Fts3NextToken(const char *, int *);
int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(sqlite3 *, Fts3Hash *, const char *);
int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(Fts3Hash *pHash, const char *,
sqlite3_tokenizer **, char **
);
int sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(char);
/* fts3_snippet.c */
void sqlite3Fts3Offsets(sqlite3_context*, Fts3Cursor*);
void sqlite3Fts3Snippet(sqlite3_context *, Fts3Cursor *, const char *,
const char *, const char *, int, int
);
void sqlite3Fts3Matchinfo(sqlite3_context *, Fts3Cursor *, const char *);
void sqlite3Fts3MIBufferFree(MatchinfoBuffer *p);
/* fts3_expr.c */
int sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(sqlite3_tokenizer *, int,
char **, int, int, int, const char *, int, Fts3Expr **, char **
);
void sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(Fts3Expr *);
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
int sqlite3Fts3ExprInitTestInterface(sqlite3 *db);
int sqlite3Fts3InitTerm(sqlite3 *db);
#endif
int sqlite3Fts3OpenTokenizer(sqlite3_tokenizer *, int, const char *, int,
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **
);
/* fts3_aux.c */
int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db);
void sqlite3Fts3EvalPhraseCleanup(Fts3Phrase *);
int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrStart(
Fts3Table*, Fts3MultiSegReader*, int, const char*, int);
int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(
Fts3Table *, Fts3MultiSegReader *, sqlite3_int64 *, char **, int *);
int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3Expr *, int iCol, char **);
int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3MultiSegReader *, int *);
int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrRestart(Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr);
/* fts3_tokenize_vtab.c */
int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3*, Fts3Hash *);
/* fts3_unicode2.c (functions generated by parsing unicode text files) */
#ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE
int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int, int);
int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(int);
int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(int);
#endif
#endif /* !SQLITE_CORE || SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3 */
#endif /* _FTSINT_H */

550
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_aux.c
View File

@ -1,550 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2011 Jan 27
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
*/
#include "fts3Int.h"
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
#include <string.h>
#include <assert.h>
typedef struct Fts3auxTable Fts3auxTable;
typedef struct Fts3auxCursor Fts3auxCursor;
struct Fts3auxTable {
sqlite3_vtab base; /* Base class used by SQLite core */
Fts3Table *pFts3Tab;
};
struct Fts3auxCursor {
sqlite3_vtab_cursor base; /* Base class used by SQLite core */
Fts3MultiSegReader csr; /* Must be right after "base" */
Fts3SegFilter filter;
char *zStop;
int nStop; /* Byte-length of string zStop */
int iLangid; /* Language id to query */
int isEof; /* True if cursor is at EOF */
sqlite3_int64 iRowid; /* Current rowid */
int iCol; /* Current value of 'col' column */
int nStat; /* Size of aStat[] array */
struct Fts3auxColstats {
sqlite3_int64 nDoc; /* 'documents' values for current csr row */
sqlite3_int64 nOcc; /* 'occurrences' values for current csr row */
} *aStat;
};
/*
** Schema of the terms table.
*/
#define FTS3_AUX_SCHEMA \
"CREATE TABLE x(term, col, documents, occurrences, languageid HIDDEN)"
/*
** This function does all the work for both the xConnect and xCreate methods.
** These tables have no persistent representation of their own, so xConnect
** and xCreate are identical operations.
*/
static int fts3auxConnectMethod(
sqlite3 *db, /* Database connection */
void *pUnused, /* Unused */
int argc, /* Number of elements in argv array */
const char * const *argv, /* xCreate/xConnect argument array */
sqlite3_vtab **ppVtab, /* OUT: New sqlite3_vtab object */
char **pzErr /* OUT: sqlite3_malloc'd error message */
){
char const *zDb; /* Name of database (e.g. "main") */
char const *zFts3; /* Name of fts3 table */
int nDb; /* Result of strlen(zDb) */
int nFts3; /* Result of strlen(zFts3) */
int nByte; /* Bytes of space to allocate here */
int rc; /* value returned by declare_vtab() */
Fts3auxTable *p; /* Virtual table object to return */
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pUnused);
/* The user should invoke this in one of two forms:
**
** CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE xxx USING fts4aux(fts4-table);
** CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE xxx USING fts4aux(fts4-table-db, fts4-table);
*/
if( argc!=4 && argc!=5 ) goto bad_args;
zDb = argv[1];
nDb = (int)strlen(zDb);
if( argc==5 ){
if( nDb==4 && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp("temp", zDb, 4) ){
zDb = argv[3];
nDb = (int)strlen(zDb);
zFts3 = argv[4];
}else{
goto bad_args;
}
}else{
zFts3 = argv[3];
}
nFts3 = (int)strlen(zFts3);
rc = sqlite3_declare_vtab(db, FTS3_AUX_SCHEMA);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
nByte = sizeof(Fts3auxTable) + sizeof(Fts3Table) + nDb + nFts3 + 2;
p = (Fts3auxTable *)sqlite3_malloc(nByte);
if( !p ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(p, 0, nByte);
p->pFts3Tab = (Fts3Table *)&p[1];
p->pFts3Tab->zDb = (char *)&p->pFts3Tab[1];
p->pFts3Tab->zName = &p->pFts3Tab->zDb[nDb+1];
p->pFts3Tab->db = db;
p->pFts3Tab->nIndex = 1;
memcpy((char *)p->pFts3Tab->zDb, zDb, nDb);
memcpy((char *)p->pFts3Tab->zName, zFts3, nFts3);
sqlite3Fts3Dequote((char *)p->pFts3Tab->zName);
*ppVtab = (sqlite3_vtab *)p;
return SQLITE_OK;
bad_args:
sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr, "invalid arguments to fts4aux constructor");
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
/*
** This function does the work for both the xDisconnect and xDestroy methods.
** These tables have no persistent representation of their own, so xDisconnect
** and xDestroy are identical operations.
*/
static int fts3auxDisconnectMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
Fts3auxTable *p = (Fts3auxTable *)pVtab;
Fts3Table *pFts3 = p->pFts3Tab;
int i;
/* Free any prepared statements held */
for(i=0; i<SizeofArray(pFts3->aStmt); i++){
sqlite3_finalize(pFts3->aStmt[i]);
}
sqlite3_free(pFts3->zSegmentsTbl);
sqlite3_free(p);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
#define FTS4AUX_EQ_CONSTRAINT 1
#define FTS4AUX_GE_CONSTRAINT 2
#define FTS4AUX_LE_CONSTRAINT 4
/*
** xBestIndex - Analyze a WHERE and ORDER BY clause.
*/
static int fts3auxBestIndexMethod(
sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
sqlite3_index_info *pInfo
){
int i;
int iEq = -1;
int iGe = -1;
int iLe = -1;
int iLangid = -1;
int iNext = 1; /* Next free argvIndex value */
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
/* This vtab delivers always results in "ORDER BY term ASC" order. */
if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1
&& pInfo->aOrderBy[0].iColumn==0
&& pInfo->aOrderBy[0].desc==0
){
pInfo->orderByConsumed = 1;
}
/* Search for equality and range constraints on the "term" column.
** And equality constraints on the hidden "languageid" column. */
for(i=0; i<pInfo->nConstraint; i++){
if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable ){
int op = pInfo->aConstraint[i].op;
int iCol = pInfo->aConstraint[i].iColumn;
if( iCol==0 ){
if( op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ ) iEq = i;
if( op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LT ) iLe = i;
if( op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LE ) iLe = i;
if( op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GT ) iGe = i;
if( op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GE ) iGe = i;
}
if( iCol==4 ){
if( op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ ) iLangid = i;
}
}
}
if( iEq>=0 ){
pInfo->idxNum = FTS4AUX_EQ_CONSTRAINT;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iEq].argvIndex = iNext++;
pInfo->estimatedCost = 5;
}else{
pInfo->idxNum = 0;
pInfo->estimatedCost = 20000;
if( iGe>=0 ){
pInfo->idxNum += FTS4AUX_GE_CONSTRAINT;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iGe].argvIndex = iNext++;
pInfo->estimatedCost /= 2;
}
if( iLe>=0 ){
pInfo->idxNum += FTS4AUX_LE_CONSTRAINT;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iLe].argvIndex = iNext++;
pInfo->estimatedCost /= 2;
}
}
if( iLangid>=0 ){
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iLangid].argvIndex = iNext++;
pInfo->estimatedCost--;
}
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xOpen - Open a cursor.
*/
static int fts3auxOpenMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCsr){
Fts3auxCursor *pCsr; /* Pointer to cursor object to return */
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
pCsr = (Fts3auxCursor *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3auxCursor));
if( !pCsr ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(pCsr, 0, sizeof(Fts3auxCursor));
*ppCsr = (sqlite3_vtab_cursor *)pCsr;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xClose - Close a cursor.
*/
static int fts3auxCloseMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
Fts3Table *pFts3 = ((Fts3auxTable *)pCursor->pVtab)->pFts3Tab;
Fts3auxCursor *pCsr = (Fts3auxCursor *)pCursor;
sqlite3Fts3SegmentsClose(pFts3);
sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(&pCsr->csr);
sqlite3_free((void *)pCsr->filter.zTerm);
sqlite3_free(pCsr->zStop);
sqlite3_free(pCsr->aStat);
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
static int fts3auxGrowStatArray(Fts3auxCursor *pCsr, int nSize){
if( nSize>pCsr->nStat ){
struct Fts3auxColstats *aNew;
aNew = (struct Fts3auxColstats *)sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->aStat,
sizeof(struct Fts3auxColstats) * nSize
);
if( aNew==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(&aNew[pCsr->nStat], 0,
sizeof(struct Fts3auxColstats) * (nSize - pCsr->nStat)
);
pCsr->aStat = aNew;
pCsr->nStat = nSize;
}
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xNext - Advance the cursor to the next row, if any.
*/
static int fts3auxNextMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
Fts3auxCursor *pCsr = (Fts3auxCursor *)pCursor;
Fts3Table *pFts3 = ((Fts3auxTable *)pCursor->pVtab)->pFts3Tab;
int rc;
/* Increment our pretend rowid value. */
pCsr->iRowid++;
for(pCsr->iCol++; pCsr->iCol<pCsr->nStat; pCsr->iCol++){
if( pCsr->aStat[pCsr->iCol].nDoc>0 ) return SQLITE_OK;
}
rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(pFts3, &pCsr->csr);
if( rc==SQLITE_ROW ){
int i = 0;
int nDoclist = pCsr->csr.nDoclist;
char *aDoclist = pCsr->csr.aDoclist;
int iCol;
int eState = 0;
if( pCsr->zStop ){
int n = (pCsr->nStop<pCsr->csr.nTerm) ? pCsr->nStop : pCsr->csr.nTerm;
int mc = memcmp(pCsr->zStop, pCsr->csr.zTerm, n);
if( mc<0 || (mc==0 && pCsr->csr.nTerm>pCsr->nStop) ){
pCsr->isEof = 1;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
}
if( fts3auxGrowStatArray(pCsr, 2) ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(pCsr->aStat, 0, sizeof(struct Fts3auxColstats) * pCsr->nStat);
iCol = 0;
while( i<nDoclist ){
sqlite3_int64 v = 0;
i += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(&aDoclist[i], &v);
switch( eState ){
/* State 0. In this state the integer just read was a docid. */
case 0:
pCsr->aStat[0].nDoc++;
eState = 1;
iCol = 0;
break;
/* State 1. In this state we are expecting either a 1, indicating
** that the following integer will be a column number, or the
** start of a position list for column 0.
**
** The only difference between state 1 and state 2 is that if the
** integer encountered in state 1 is not 0 or 1, then we need to
** increment the column 0 "nDoc" count for this term.
*/
case 1:
assert( iCol==0 );
if( v>1 ){
pCsr->aStat[1].nDoc++;
}
eState = 2;
/* fall through */
case 2:
if( v==0 ){ /* 0x00. Next integer will be a docid. */
eState = 0;
}else if( v==1 ){ /* 0x01. Next integer will be a column number. */
eState = 3;
}else{ /* 2 or greater. A position. */
pCsr->aStat[iCol+1].nOcc++;
pCsr->aStat[0].nOcc++;
}
break;
/* State 3. The integer just read is a column number. */
default: assert( eState==3 );
iCol = (int)v;
if( fts3auxGrowStatArray(pCsr, iCol+2) ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
pCsr->aStat[iCol+1].nDoc++;
eState = 2;
break;
}
}
pCsr->iCol = 0;
rc = SQLITE_OK;
}else{
pCsr->isEof = 1;
}
return rc;
}
/*
** xFilter - Initialize a cursor to point at the start of its data.
*/
static int fts3auxFilterMethod(
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, /* The cursor used for this query */
int idxNum, /* Strategy index */
const char *idxStr, /* Unused */
int nVal, /* Number of elements in apVal */
sqlite3_value **apVal /* Arguments for the indexing scheme */
){
Fts3auxCursor *pCsr = (Fts3auxCursor *)pCursor;
Fts3Table *pFts3 = ((Fts3auxTable *)pCursor->pVtab)->pFts3Tab;
int rc;
int isScan = 0;
int iLangVal = 0; /* Language id to query */
int iEq = -1; /* Index of term=? value in apVal */
int iGe = -1; /* Index of term>=? value in apVal */
int iLe = -1; /* Index of term<=? value in apVal */
int iLangid = -1; /* Index of languageid=? value in apVal */
int iNext = 0;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(nVal);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(idxStr);
assert( idxStr==0 );
assert( idxNum==FTS4AUX_EQ_CONSTRAINT || idxNum==0
|| idxNum==FTS4AUX_LE_CONSTRAINT || idxNum==FTS4AUX_GE_CONSTRAINT
|| idxNum==(FTS4AUX_LE_CONSTRAINT|FTS4AUX_GE_CONSTRAINT)
);
if( idxNum==FTS4AUX_EQ_CONSTRAINT ){
iEq = iNext++;
}else{
isScan = 1;
if( idxNum & FTS4AUX_GE_CONSTRAINT ){
iGe = iNext++;
}
if( idxNum & FTS4AUX_LE_CONSTRAINT ){
iLe = iNext++;
}
}
if( iNext<nVal ){
iLangid = iNext++;
}
/* In case this cursor is being reused, close and zero it. */
testcase(pCsr->filter.zTerm);
sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(&pCsr->csr);
sqlite3_free((void *)pCsr->filter.zTerm);
sqlite3_free(pCsr->aStat);
memset(&pCsr->csr, 0, ((u8*)&pCsr[1]) - (u8*)&pCsr->csr);
pCsr->filter.flags = FTS3_SEGMENT_REQUIRE_POS|FTS3_SEGMENT_IGNORE_EMPTY;
if( isScan ) pCsr->filter.flags |= FTS3_SEGMENT_SCAN;
if( iEq>=0 || iGe>=0 ){
const unsigned char *zStr = sqlite3_value_text(apVal[0]);
assert( (iEq==0 && iGe==-1) || (iEq==-1 && iGe==0) );
if( zStr ){
pCsr->filter.zTerm = sqlite3_mprintf("%s", zStr);
pCsr->filter.nTerm = sqlite3_value_bytes(apVal[0]);
if( pCsr->filter.zTerm==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
}
if( iLe>=0 ){
pCsr->zStop = sqlite3_mprintf("%s", sqlite3_value_text(apVal[iLe]));
pCsr->nStop = sqlite3_value_bytes(apVal[iLe]);
if( pCsr->zStop==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
if( iLangid>=0 ){
iLangVal = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[iLangid]);
/* If the user specified a negative value for the languageid, use zero
** instead. This works, as the "languageid=?" constraint will also
** be tested by the VDBE layer. The test will always be false (since
** this module will not return a row with a negative languageid), and
** so the overall query will return zero rows. */
if( iLangVal<0 ) iLangVal = 0;
}
pCsr->iLangid = iLangVal;
rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(pFts3, iLangVal, 0, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL,
pCsr->filter.zTerm, pCsr->filter.nTerm, 0, isScan, &pCsr->csr
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart(pFts3, &pCsr->csr, &pCsr->filter);
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = fts3auxNextMethod(pCursor);
return rc;
}
/*
** xEof - Return true if the cursor is at EOF, or false otherwise.
*/
static int fts3auxEofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
Fts3auxCursor *pCsr = (Fts3auxCursor *)pCursor;
return pCsr->isEof;
}
/*
** xColumn - Return a column value.
*/
static int fts3auxColumnMethod(
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor to retrieve value from */
sqlite3_context *pCtx, /* Context for sqlite3_result_xxx() calls */
int iCol /* Index of column to read value from */
){
Fts3auxCursor *p = (Fts3auxCursor *)pCursor;
assert( p->isEof==0 );
switch( iCol ){
case 0: /* term */
sqlite3_result_text(pCtx, p->csr.zTerm, p->csr.nTerm, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
break;
case 1: /* col */
if( p->iCol ){
sqlite3_result_int(pCtx, p->iCol-1);
}else{
sqlite3_result_text(pCtx, "*", -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
}
break;
case 2: /* documents */
sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, p->aStat[p->iCol].nDoc);
break;
case 3: /* occurrences */
sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, p->aStat[p->iCol].nOcc);
break;
default: /* languageid */
assert( iCol==4 );
sqlite3_result_int(pCtx, p->iLangid);
break;
}
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xRowid - Return the current rowid for the cursor.
*/
static int fts3auxRowidMethod(
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor to retrieve value from */
sqlite_int64 *pRowid /* OUT: Rowid value */
){
Fts3auxCursor *pCsr = (Fts3auxCursor *)pCursor;
*pRowid = pCsr->iRowid;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Register the fts3aux module with database connection db. Return SQLITE_OK
** if successful or an error code if sqlite3_create_module() fails.
*/
int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){
static const sqlite3_module fts3aux_module = {
0, /* iVersion */
fts3auxConnectMethod, /* xCreate */
fts3auxConnectMethod, /* xConnect */
fts3auxBestIndexMethod, /* xBestIndex */
fts3auxDisconnectMethod, /* xDisconnect */
fts3auxDisconnectMethod, /* xDestroy */
fts3auxOpenMethod, /* xOpen */
fts3auxCloseMethod, /* xClose */
fts3auxFilterMethod, /* xFilter */
fts3auxNextMethod, /* xNext */
fts3auxEofMethod, /* xEof */
fts3auxColumnMethod, /* xColumn */
fts3auxRowidMethod, /* xRowid */
0, /* xUpdate */
0, /* xBegin */
0, /* xSync */
0, /* xCommit */
0, /* xRollback */
0, /* xFindFunction */
0, /* xRename */
0, /* xSavepoint */
0, /* xRelease */
0 /* xRollbackTo */
};
int rc; /* Return code */
rc = sqlite3_create_module(db, "fts4aux", &fts3aux_module, 0);
return rc;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) */

1309
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_expr.c
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

383
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_hash.c
View File

@ -1,383 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2001 September 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the implementation of generic hash-tables used in SQLite.
** We've modified it slightly to serve as a standalone hash table
** implementation for the full-text indexing module.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS3 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS3 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3 is defined).
*/
#include "fts3Int.h"
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "fts3_hash.h"
/*
** Malloc and Free functions
*/
static void *fts3HashMalloc(int n){
void *p = sqlite3_malloc(n);
if( p ){
memset(p, 0, n);
}
return p;
}
static void fts3HashFree(void *p){
sqlite3_free(p);
}
/* Turn bulk memory into a hash table object by initializing the
** fields of the Hash structure.
**
** "pNew" is a pointer to the hash table that is to be initialized.
** keyClass is one of the constants
** FTS3_HASH_BINARY or FTS3_HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass
** determines what kind of key the hash table will use. "copyKey" is
** true if the hash table should make its own private copy of keys and
** false if it should just use the supplied pointer.
*/
void sqlite3Fts3HashInit(Fts3Hash *pNew, char keyClass, char copyKey){
assert( pNew!=0 );
assert( keyClass>=FTS3_HASH_STRING && keyClass<=FTS3_HASH_BINARY );
pNew->keyClass = keyClass;
pNew->copyKey = copyKey;
pNew->first = 0;
pNew->count = 0;
pNew->htsize = 0;
pNew->ht = 0;
}
/* Remove all entries from a hash table. Reclaim all memory.
** Call this routine to delete a hash table or to reset a hash table
** to the empty state.
*/
void sqlite3Fts3HashClear(Fts3Hash *pH){
Fts3HashElem *elem; /* For looping over all elements of the table */
assert( pH!=0 );
elem = pH->first;
pH->first = 0;
fts3HashFree(pH->ht);
pH->ht = 0;
pH->htsize = 0;
while( elem ){
Fts3HashElem *next_elem = elem->next;
if( pH->copyKey && elem->pKey ){
fts3HashFree(elem->pKey);
}
fts3HashFree(elem);
elem = next_elem;
}
pH->count = 0;
}
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is FTS3_HASH_STRING
*/
static int fts3StrHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
const char *z = (const char *)pKey;
unsigned h = 0;
if( nKey<=0 ) nKey = (int) strlen(z);
while( nKey > 0 ){
h = (h<<3) ^ h ^ *z++;
nKey--;
}
return (int)(h & 0x7fffffff);
}
static int fts3StrCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
if( n1!=n2 ) return 1;
return strncmp((const char*)pKey1,(const char*)pKey2,n1);
}
/*
** Hash and comparison functions when the mode is FTS3_HASH_BINARY
*/
static int fts3BinHash(const void *pKey, int nKey){
int h = 0;
const char *z = (const char *)pKey;
while( nKey-- > 0 ){
h = (h<<3) ^ h ^ *(z++);
}
return h & 0x7fffffff;
}
static int fts3BinCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
if( n1!=n2 ) return 1;
return memcmp(pKey1,pKey2,n1);
}
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some
** programmers, so we provide the following additional explanation:
**
** The name of the function is "ftsHashFunction". The function takes a
** single parameter "keyClass". The return value of ftsHashFunction()
** is a pointer to another function. Specifically, the return value
** of ftsHashFunction() is a pointer to a function that takes two parameters
** with types "const void*" and "int" and returns an "int".
*/
static int (*ftsHashFunction(int keyClass))(const void*,int){
if( keyClass==FTS3_HASH_STRING ){
return &fts3StrHash;
}else{
assert( keyClass==FTS3_HASH_BINARY );
return &fts3BinHash;
}
}
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
** For help in interpreted the obscure C code in the function definition,
** see the header comment on the previous function.
*/
static int (*ftsCompareFunction(int keyClass))(const void*,int,const void*,int){
if( keyClass==FTS3_HASH_STRING ){
return &fts3StrCompare;
}else{
assert( keyClass==FTS3_HASH_BINARY );
return &fts3BinCompare;
}
}
/* Link an element into the hash table
*/
static void fts3HashInsertElement(
Fts3Hash *pH, /* The complete hash table */
struct _fts3ht *pEntry, /* The entry into which pNew is inserted */
Fts3HashElem *pNew /* The element to be inserted */
){
Fts3HashElem *pHead; /* First element already in pEntry */
pHead = pEntry->chain;
if( pHead ){
pNew->next = pHead;
pNew->prev = pHead->prev;
if( pHead->prev ){ pHead->prev->next = pNew; }
else { pH->first = pNew; }
pHead->prev = pNew;
}else{
pNew->next = pH->first;
if( pH->first ){ pH->first->prev = pNew; }
pNew->prev = 0;
pH->first = pNew;
}
pEntry->count++;
pEntry->chain = pNew;
}
/* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets.
** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail
** to resize if sqliteMalloc() fails.
**
** Return non-zero if a memory allocation error occurs.
*/
static int fts3Rehash(Fts3Hash *pH, int new_size){
struct _fts3ht *new_ht; /* The new hash table */
Fts3HashElem *elem, *next_elem; /* For looping over existing elements */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
assert( (new_size & (new_size-1))==0 );
new_ht = (struct _fts3ht *)fts3HashMalloc( new_size*sizeof(struct _fts3ht) );
if( new_ht==0 ) return 1;
fts3HashFree(pH->ht);
pH->ht = new_ht;
pH->htsize = new_size;
xHash = ftsHashFunction(pH->keyClass);
for(elem=pH->first, pH->first=0; elem; elem = next_elem){
int h = (*xHash)(elem->pKey, elem->nKey) & (new_size-1);
next_elem = elem->next;
fts3HashInsertElement(pH, &new_ht[h], elem);
}
return 0;
}
/* This function (for internal use only) locates an element in an
** hash table that matches the given key. The hash for this key has
** already been computed and is passed as the 4th parameter.
*/
static Fts3HashElem *fts3FindElementByHash(
const Fts3Hash *pH, /* The pH to be searched */
const void *pKey, /* The key we are searching for */
int nKey,
int h /* The hash for this key. */
){
Fts3HashElem *elem; /* Used to loop thru the element list */
int count; /* Number of elements left to test */
int (*xCompare)(const void*,int,const void*,int); /* comparison function */
if( pH->ht ){
struct _fts3ht *pEntry = &pH->ht[h];
elem = pEntry->chain;
count = pEntry->count;
xCompare = ftsCompareFunction(pH->keyClass);
while( count-- && elem ){
if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
return elem;
}
elem = elem->next;
}
}
return 0;
}
/* Remove a single entry from the hash table given a pointer to that
** element and a hash on the element's key.
*/
static void fts3RemoveElementByHash(
Fts3Hash *pH, /* The pH containing "elem" */
Fts3HashElem* elem, /* The element to be removed from the pH */
int h /* Hash value for the element */
){
struct _fts3ht *pEntry;
if( elem->prev ){
elem->prev->next = elem->next;
}else{
pH->first = elem->next;
}
if( elem->next ){
elem->next->prev = elem->prev;
}
pEntry = &pH->ht[h];
if( pEntry->chain==elem ){
pEntry->chain = elem->next;
}
pEntry->count--;
if( pEntry->count<=0 ){
pEntry->chain = 0;
}
if( pH->copyKey && elem->pKey ){
fts3HashFree(elem->pKey);
}
fts3HashFree( elem );
pH->count--;
if( pH->count<=0 ){
assert( pH->first==0 );
assert( pH->count==0 );
fts3HashClear(pH);
}
}
Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(
const Fts3Hash *pH,
const void *pKey,
int nKey
){
int h; /* A hash on key */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
if( pH==0 || pH->ht==0 ) return 0;
xHash = ftsHashFunction(pH->keyClass);
assert( xHash!=0 );
h = (*xHash)(pKey,nKey);
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
return fts3FindElementByHash(pH,pKey,nKey, h & (pH->htsize-1));
}
/*
** Attempt to locate an element of the hash table pH with a key
** that matches pKey,nKey. Return the data for this element if it is
** found, or NULL if there is no match.
*/
void *sqlite3Fts3HashFind(const Fts3Hash *pH, const void *pKey, int nKey){
Fts3HashElem *pElem; /* The element that matches key (if any) */
pElem = sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(pH, pKey, nKey);
return pElem ? pElem->data : 0;
}
/* Insert an element into the hash table pH. The key is pKey,nKey
** and the data is "data".
**
** If no element exists with a matching key, then a new
** element is created. A copy of the key is made if the copyKey
** flag is set. NULL is returned.
**
** If another element already exists with the same key, then the
** new data replaces the old data and the old data is returned.
** The key is not copied in this instance. If a malloc fails, then
** the new data is returned and the hash table is unchanged.
**
** If the "data" parameter to this function is NULL, then the
** element corresponding to "key" is removed from the hash table.
*/
void *sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(
Fts3Hash *pH, /* The hash table to insert into */
const void *pKey, /* The key */
int nKey, /* Number of bytes in the key */
void *data /* The data */
){
int hraw; /* Raw hash value of the key */
int h; /* the hash of the key modulo hash table size */
Fts3HashElem *elem; /* Used to loop thru the element list */
Fts3HashElem *new_elem; /* New element added to the pH */
int (*xHash)(const void*,int); /* The hash function */
assert( pH!=0 );
xHash = ftsHashFunction(pH->keyClass);
assert( xHash!=0 );
hraw = (*xHash)(pKey, nKey);
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
h = hraw & (pH->htsize-1);
elem = fts3FindElementByHash(pH,pKey,nKey,h);
if( elem ){
void *old_data = elem->data;
if( data==0 ){
fts3RemoveElementByHash(pH,elem,h);
}else{
elem->data = data;
}
return old_data;
}
if( data==0 ) return 0;
if( (pH->htsize==0 && fts3Rehash(pH,8))
|| (pH->count>=pH->htsize && fts3Rehash(pH, pH->htsize*2))
){
pH->count = 0;
return data;
}
assert( pH->htsize>0 );
new_elem = (Fts3HashElem*)fts3HashMalloc( sizeof(Fts3HashElem) );
if( new_elem==0 ) return data;
if( pH->copyKey && pKey!=0 ){
new_elem->pKey = fts3HashMalloc( nKey );
if( new_elem->pKey==0 ){
fts3HashFree(new_elem);
return data;
}
memcpy((void*)new_elem->pKey, pKey, nKey);
}else{
new_elem->pKey = (void*)pKey;
}
new_elem->nKey = nKey;
pH->count++;
assert( pH->htsize>0 );
assert( (pH->htsize & (pH->htsize-1))==0 );
h = hraw & (pH->htsize-1);
fts3HashInsertElement(pH, &pH->ht[h], new_elem);
new_elem->data = data;
return 0;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) */

112
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_hash.h
View File

@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2001 September 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the header file for the generic hash-table implementation
** used in SQLite. We've modified it slightly to serve as a standalone
** hash table implementation for the full-text indexing module.
**
*/
#ifndef _FTS3_HASH_H_
#define _FTS3_HASH_H_
/* Forward declarations of structures. */
typedef struct Fts3Hash Fts3Hash;
typedef struct Fts3HashElem Fts3HashElem;
/* A complete hash table is an instance of the following structure.
** The internals of this structure are intended to be opaque -- client
** code should not attempt to access or modify the fields of this structure
** directly. Change this structure only by using the routines below.
** However, many of the "procedures" and "functions" for modifying and
** accessing this structure are really macros, so we can't really make
** this structure opaque.
*/
struct Fts3Hash {
char keyClass; /* HASH_INT, _POINTER, _STRING, _BINARY */
char copyKey; /* True if copy of key made on insert */
int count; /* Number of entries in this table */
Fts3HashElem *first; /* The first element of the array */
int htsize; /* Number of buckets in the hash table */
struct _fts3ht { /* the hash table */
int count; /* Number of entries with this hash */
Fts3HashElem *chain; /* Pointer to first entry with this hash */
} *ht;
};
/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
**
** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
** be opaque because it is used by macros.
*/
struct Fts3HashElem {
Fts3HashElem *next, *prev; /* Next and previous elements in the table */
void *data; /* Data associated with this element */
void *pKey; int nKey; /* Key associated with this element */
};
/*
** There are 2 different modes of operation for a hash table:
**
** FTS3_HASH_STRING pKey points to a string that is nKey bytes long
** (including the null-terminator, if any). Case
** is respected in comparisons.
**
** FTS3_HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long.
** memcmp() is used to compare keys.
**
** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts3HashInit is 1.
*/
#define FTS3_HASH_STRING 1
#define FTS3_HASH_BINARY 2
/*
** Access routines. To delete, insert a NULL pointer.
*/
void sqlite3Fts3HashInit(Fts3Hash *pNew, char keyClass, char copyKey);
void *sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(Fts3Hash*, const void *pKey, int nKey, void *pData);
void *sqlite3Fts3HashFind(const Fts3Hash*, const void *pKey, int nKey);
void sqlite3Fts3HashClear(Fts3Hash*);
Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const void *, int);
/*
** Shorthand for the functions above
*/
#define fts3HashInit sqlite3Fts3HashInit
#define fts3HashInsert sqlite3Fts3HashInsert
#define fts3HashFind sqlite3Fts3HashFind
#define fts3HashClear sqlite3Fts3HashClear
#define fts3HashFindElem sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem
/*
** Macros for looping over all elements of a hash table. The idiom is
** like this:
**
** Fts3Hash h;
** Fts3HashElem *p;
** ...
** for(p=fts3HashFirst(&h); p; p=fts3HashNext(p)){
** SomeStructure *pData = fts3HashData(p);
** // do something with pData
** }
*/
#define fts3HashFirst(H) ((H)->first)
#define fts3HashNext(E) ((E)->next)
#define fts3HashData(E) ((E)->data)
#define fts3HashKey(E) ((E)->pKey)
#define fts3HashKeysize(E) ((E)->nKey)
/*
** Number of entries in a hash table
*/
#define fts3HashCount(H) ((H)->count)
#endif /* _FTS3_HASH_H_ */

262
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_icu.c
View File

@ -1,262 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2007 June 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** This file implements a tokenizer for fts3 based on the ICU library.
*/
#include "fts3Int.h"
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU
#include <assert.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "fts3_tokenizer.h"
#include <unicode/ubrk.h>
#include <unicode/ucol.h>
#include <unicode/ustring.h>
#include <unicode/utf16.h>
typedef struct IcuTokenizer IcuTokenizer;
typedef struct IcuCursor IcuCursor;
struct IcuTokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base;
char *zLocale;
};
struct IcuCursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
UBreakIterator *pIter; /* ICU break-iterator object */
int nChar; /* Number of UChar elements in pInput */
UChar *aChar; /* Copy of input using utf-16 encoding */
int *aOffset; /* Offsets of each character in utf-8 input */
int nBuffer;
char *zBuffer;
int iToken;
};
/*
** Create a new tokenizer instance.
*/
static int icuCreate(
int argc, /* Number of entries in argv[] */
const char * const *argv, /* Tokenizer creation arguments */
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer /* OUT: Created tokenizer */
){
IcuTokenizer *p;
int n = 0;
if( argc>0 ){
n = strlen(argv[0])+1;
}
p = (IcuTokenizer *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(IcuTokenizer)+n);
if( !p ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
memset(p, 0, sizeof(IcuTokenizer));
if( n ){
p->zLocale = (char *)&p[1];
memcpy(p->zLocale, argv[0], n);
}
*ppTokenizer = (sqlite3_tokenizer *)p;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Destroy a tokenizer
*/
static int icuDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
IcuTokenizer *p = (IcuTokenizer *)pTokenizer;
sqlite3_free(p);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int icuOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* The tokenizer */
const char *zInput, /* Input string */
int nInput, /* Length of zInput in bytes */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Tokenization cursor */
){
IcuTokenizer *p = (IcuTokenizer *)pTokenizer;
IcuCursor *pCsr;
const int32_t opt = U_FOLD_CASE_DEFAULT;
UErrorCode status = U_ZERO_ERROR;
int nChar;
UChar32 c;
int iInput = 0;
int iOut = 0;
*ppCursor = 0;
if( zInput==0 ){
nInput = 0;
zInput = "";
}else if( nInput<0 ){
nInput = strlen(zInput);
}
nChar = nInput+1;
pCsr = (IcuCursor *)sqlite3_malloc(
sizeof(IcuCursor) + /* IcuCursor */
((nChar+3)&~3) * sizeof(UChar) + /* IcuCursor.aChar[] */
(nChar+1) * sizeof(int) /* IcuCursor.aOffset[] */
);
if( !pCsr ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
memset(pCsr, 0, sizeof(IcuCursor));
pCsr->aChar = (UChar *)&pCsr[1];
pCsr->aOffset = (int *)&pCsr->aChar[(nChar+3)&~3];
pCsr->aOffset[iOut] = iInput;
U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c);
while( c>0 ){
int isError = 0;
c = u_foldCase(c, opt);
U16_APPEND(pCsr->aChar, iOut, nChar, c, isError);
if( isError ){
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
pCsr->aOffset[iOut] = iInput;
if( iInput<nInput ){
U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c);
}else{
c = 0;
}
}
pCsr->pIter = ubrk_open(UBRK_WORD, p->zLocale, pCsr->aChar, iOut, &status);
if( !U_SUCCESS(status) ){
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
pCsr->nChar = iOut;
ubrk_first(pCsr->pIter);
*ppCursor = (sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *)pCsr;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Close a tokenization cursor previously opened by a call to icuOpen().
*/
static int icuClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
IcuCursor *pCsr = (IcuCursor *)pCursor;
ubrk_close(pCsr->pIter);
sqlite3_free(pCsr->zBuffer);
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Extract the next token from a tokenization cursor.
*/
static int icuNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor returned by simpleOpen */
const char **ppToken, /* OUT: *ppToken is the token text */
int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Number of bytes in token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
IcuCursor *pCsr = (IcuCursor *)pCursor;
int iStart = 0;
int iEnd = 0;
int nByte = 0;
while( iStart==iEnd ){
UChar32 c;
iStart = ubrk_current(pCsr->pIter);
iEnd = ubrk_next(pCsr->pIter);
if( iEnd==UBRK_DONE ){
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
while( iStart<iEnd ){
int iWhite = iStart;
U16_NEXT(pCsr->aChar, iWhite, pCsr->nChar, c);
if( u_isspace(c) ){
iStart = iWhite;
}else{
break;
}
}
assert(iStart<=iEnd);
}
do {
UErrorCode status = U_ZERO_ERROR;
if( nByte ){
char *zNew = sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->zBuffer, nByte);
if( !zNew ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
pCsr->zBuffer = zNew;
pCsr->nBuffer = nByte;
}
u_strToUTF8(
pCsr->zBuffer, pCsr->nBuffer, &nByte, /* Output vars */
&pCsr->aChar[iStart], iEnd-iStart, /* Input vars */
&status /* Output success/failure */
);
} while( nByte>pCsr->nBuffer );
*ppToken = pCsr->zBuffer;
*pnBytes = nByte;
*piStartOffset = pCsr->aOffset[iStart];
*piEndOffset = pCsr->aOffset[iEnd];
*piPosition = pCsr->iToken++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** The set of routines that implement the simple tokenizer
*/
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module icuTokenizerModule = {
0, /* iVersion */
icuCreate, /* xCreate */
icuDestroy, /* xCreate */
icuOpen, /* xOpen */
icuClose, /* xClose */
icuNext, /* xNext */
0, /* xLanguageid */
};
/*
** Set *ppModule to point at the implementation of the ICU tokenizer.
*/
void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule
){
*ppModule = &icuTokenizerModule;
}
#endif /* defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU) */
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) */

662
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_porter.c
View File

@ -1,662 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 September 30
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
** Implementation of the full-text-search tokenizer that implements
** a Porter stemmer.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS3 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS3 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3 is defined).
*/
#include "fts3Int.h"
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "fts3_tokenizer.h"
/*
** Class derived from sqlite3_tokenizer
*/
typedef struct porter_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base; /* Base class */
} porter_tokenizer;
/*
** Class derived from sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor
*/
typedef struct porter_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
const char *zInput; /* input we are tokenizing */
int nInput; /* size of the input */
int iOffset; /* current position in zInput */
int iToken; /* index of next token to be returned */
char *zToken; /* storage for current token */
int nAllocated; /* space allocated to zToken buffer */
} porter_tokenizer_cursor;
/*
** Create a new tokenizer instance.
*/
static int porterCreate(
int argc, const char * const *argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer
){
porter_tokenizer *t;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(argc);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(argv);
t = (porter_tokenizer *) sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*t));
if( t==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(t, 0, sizeof(*t));
*ppTokenizer = &t->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Destroy a tokenizer
*/
static int porterDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
sqlite3_free(pTokenizer);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is zInput[0..nInput-1]. A cursor
** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int porterOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* The tokenizer */
const char *zInput, int nInput, /* String to be tokenized */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Tokenization cursor */
){
porter_tokenizer_cursor *c;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pTokenizer);
c = (porter_tokenizer_cursor *) sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*c));
if( c==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
c->zInput = zInput;
if( zInput==0 ){
c->nInput = 0;
}else if( nInput<0 ){
c->nInput = (int)strlen(zInput);
}else{
c->nInput = nInput;
}
c->iOffset = 0; /* start tokenizing at the beginning */
c->iToken = 0;
c->zToken = NULL; /* no space allocated, yet. */
c->nAllocated = 0;
*ppCursor = &c->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Close a tokenization cursor previously opened by a call to
** porterOpen() above.
*/
static int porterClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
porter_tokenizer_cursor *c = (porter_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
sqlite3_free(c->zToken);
sqlite3_free(c);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Vowel or consonant
*/
static const char cType[] = {
0, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0,
1, 1, 1, 2, 1
};
/*
** isConsonant() and isVowel() determine if their first character in
** the string they point to is a consonant or a vowel, according
** to Porter ruls.
**
** A consonate is any letter other than 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', or 'u'.
** 'Y' is a consonant unless it follows another consonant,
** in which case it is a vowel.
**
** In these routine, the letters are in reverse order. So the 'y' rule
** is that 'y' is a consonant unless it is followed by another
** consonent.
*/
static int isVowel(const char*);
static int isConsonant(const char *z){
int j;
char x = *z;
if( x==0 ) return 0;
assert( x>='a' && x<='z' );
j = cType[x-'a'];
if( j<2 ) return j;
return z[1]==0 || isVowel(z + 1);
}
static int isVowel(const char *z){
int j;
char x = *z;
if( x==0 ) return 0;
assert( x>='a' && x<='z' );
j = cType[x-'a'];
if( j<2 ) return 1-j;
return isConsonant(z + 1);
}
/*
** Let any sequence of one or more vowels be represented by V and let
** C be sequence of one or more consonants. Then every word can be
** represented as:
**
** [C] (VC){m} [V]
**
** In prose: A word is an optional consonant followed by zero or
** vowel-consonant pairs followed by an optional vowel. "m" is the
** number of vowel consonant pairs. This routine computes the value
** of m for the first i bytes of a word.
**
** Return true if the m-value for z is 1 or more. In other words,
** return true if z contains at least one vowel that is followed
** by a consonant.
**
** In this routine z[] is in reverse order. So we are really looking
** for an instance of a consonant followed by a vowel.
*/
static int m_gt_0(const char *z){
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z!=0;
}
/* Like mgt0 above except we are looking for a value of m which is
** exactly 1
*/
static int m_eq_1(const char *z){
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 1;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z==0;
}
/* Like mgt0 above except we are looking for a value of m>1 instead
** or m>0
*/
static int m_gt_1(const char *z){
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isVowel(z) ){ z++; }
if( *z==0 ) return 0;
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z!=0;
}
/*
** Return TRUE if there is a vowel anywhere within z[0..n-1]
*/
static int hasVowel(const char *z){
while( isConsonant(z) ){ z++; }
return *z!=0;
}
/*
** Return TRUE if the word ends in a double consonant.
**
** The text is reversed here. So we are really looking at
** the first two characters of z[].
*/
static int doubleConsonant(const char *z){
return isConsonant(z) && z[0]==z[1];
}
/*
** Return TRUE if the word ends with three letters which
** are consonant-vowel-consonent and where the final consonant
** is not 'w', 'x', or 'y'.
**
** The word is reversed here. So we are really checking the
** first three letters and the first one cannot be in [wxy].
*/
static int star_oh(const char *z){
return
isConsonant(z) &&
z[0]!='w' && z[0]!='x' && z[0]!='y' &&
isVowel(z+1) &&
isConsonant(z+2);
}
/*
** If the word ends with zFrom and xCond() is true for the stem
** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the
** ending to zTo.
**
** The input word *pz and zFrom are both in reverse order. zTo
** is in normal order.
**
** Return TRUE if zFrom matches. Return FALSE if zFrom does not
** match. Not that TRUE is returned even if xCond() fails and
** no substitution occurs.
*/
static int stem(
char **pz, /* The word being stemmed (Reversed) */
const char *zFrom, /* If the ending matches this... (Reversed) */
const char *zTo, /* ... change the ending to this (not reversed) */
int (*xCond)(const char*) /* Condition that must be true */
){
char *z = *pz;
while( *zFrom && *zFrom==*z ){ z++; zFrom++; }
if( *zFrom!=0 ) return 0;
if( xCond && !xCond(z) ) return 1;
while( *zTo ){
*(--z) = *(zTo++);
}
*pz = z;
return 1;
}
/*
** This is the fallback stemmer used when the porter stemmer is
** inappropriate. The input word is copied into the output with
** US-ASCII case folding. If the input word is too long (more
** than 20 bytes if it contains no digits or more than 6 bytes if
** it contains digits) then word is truncated to 20 or 6 bytes
** by taking 10 or 3 bytes from the beginning and end.
*/
static void copy_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
int i, mx, j;
int hasDigit = 0;
for(i=0; i<nIn; i++){
char c = zIn[i];
if( c>='A' && c<='Z' ){
zOut[i] = c - 'A' + 'a';
}else{
if( c>='0' && c<='9' ) hasDigit = 1;
zOut[i] = c;
}
}
mx = hasDigit ? 3 : 10;
if( nIn>mx*2 ){
for(j=mx, i=nIn-mx; i<nIn; i++, j++){
zOut[j] = zOut[i];
}
i = j;
}
zOut[i] = 0;
*pnOut = i;
}
/*
** Stem the input word zIn[0..nIn-1]. Store the output in zOut.
** zOut is at least big enough to hold nIn bytes. Write the actual
** size of the output word (exclusive of the '\0' terminator) into *pnOut.
**
** Any upper-case characters in the US-ASCII character set ([A-Z])
** are converted to lower case. Upper-case UTF characters are
** unchanged.
**
** Words that are longer than about 20 bytes are stemmed by retaining
** a few bytes from the beginning and the end of the word. If the
** word contains digits, 3 bytes are taken from the beginning and
** 3 bytes from the end. For long words without digits, 10 bytes
** are taken from each end. US-ASCII case folding still applies.
**
** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not
** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just
** copies the input into the input into the output with US-ASCII
** case folding.
**
** Stemming never increases the length of the word. So there is
** no chance of overflowing the zOut buffer.
*/
static void porter_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
int i, j;
char zReverse[28];
char *z, *z2;
if( nIn<3 || nIn>=(int)sizeof(zReverse)-7 ){
/* The word is too big or too small for the porter stemmer.
** Fallback to the copy stemmer */
copy_stemmer(zIn, nIn, zOut, pnOut);
return;
}
for(i=0, j=sizeof(zReverse)-6; i<nIn; i++, j--){
char c = zIn[i];
if( c>='A' && c<='Z' ){
zReverse[j] = c + 'a' - 'A';
}else if( c>='a' && c<='z' ){
zReverse[j] = c;
}else{
/* The use of a character not in [a-zA-Z] means that we fallback
** to the copy stemmer */
copy_stemmer(zIn, nIn, zOut, pnOut);
return;
}
}
memset(&zReverse[sizeof(zReverse)-5], 0, 5);
z = &zReverse[j+1];
/* Step 1a */
if( z[0]=='s' ){
if(
!stem(&z, "sess", "ss", 0) &&
!stem(&z, "sei", "i", 0) &&
!stem(&z, "ss", "ss", 0)
){
z++;
}
}
/* Step 1b */
z2 = z;
if( stem(&z, "dee", "ee", m_gt_0) ){
/* Do nothing. The work was all in the test */
}else if(
(stem(&z, "gni", "", hasVowel) || stem(&z, "de", "", hasVowel))
&& z!=z2
){
if( stem(&z, "ta", "ate", 0) ||
stem(&z, "lb", "ble", 0) ||
stem(&z, "zi", "ize", 0) ){
/* Do nothing. The work was all in the test */
}else if( doubleConsonant(z) && (*z!='l' && *z!='s' && *z!='z') ){
z++;
}else if( m_eq_1(z) && star_oh(z) ){
*(--z) = 'e';
}
}
/* Step 1c */
if( z[0]=='y' && hasVowel(z+1) ){
z[0] = 'i';
}
/* Step 2 */
switch( z[1] ){
case 'a':
if( !stem(&z, "lanoita", "ate", m_gt_0) ){
stem(&z, "lanoit", "tion", m_gt_0);
}
break;
case 'c':
if( !stem(&z, "icne", "ence", m_gt_0) ){
stem(&z, "icna", "ance", m_gt_0);
}
break;
case 'e':
stem(&z, "rezi", "ize", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'g':
stem(&z, "igol", "log", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'l':
if( !stem(&z, "ilb", "ble", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "illa", "al", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "iltne", "ent", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "ile", "e", m_gt_0)
){
stem(&z, "ilsuo", "ous", m_gt_0);
}
break;
case 'o':
if( !stem(&z, "noitazi", "ize", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "noita", "ate", m_gt_0)
){
stem(&z, "rota", "ate", m_gt_0);
}
break;
case 's':
if( !stem(&z, "msila", "al", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "ssenevi", "ive", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "ssenluf", "ful", m_gt_0)
){
stem(&z, "ssensuo", "ous", m_gt_0);
}
break;
case 't':
if( !stem(&z, "itila", "al", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "itivi", "ive", m_gt_0)
){
stem(&z, "itilib", "ble", m_gt_0);
}
break;
}
/* Step 3 */
switch( z[0] ){
case 'e':
if( !stem(&z, "etaci", "ic", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "evita", "", m_gt_0)
){
stem(&z, "ezila", "al", m_gt_0);
}
break;
case 'i':
stem(&z, "itici", "ic", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'l':
if( !stem(&z, "laci", "ic", m_gt_0) ){
stem(&z, "luf", "", m_gt_0);
}
break;
case 's':
stem(&z, "ssen", "", m_gt_0);
break;
}
/* Step 4 */
switch( z[1] ){
case 'a':
if( z[0]=='l' && m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
break;
case 'c':
if( z[0]=='e' && z[2]=='n' && (z[3]=='a' || z[3]=='e') && m_gt_1(z+4) ){
z += 4;
}
break;
case 'e':
if( z[0]=='r' && m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
break;
case 'i':
if( z[0]=='c' && m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
break;
case 'l':
if( z[0]=='e' && z[2]=='b' && (z[3]=='a' || z[3]=='i') && m_gt_1(z+4) ){
z += 4;
}
break;
case 'n':
if( z[0]=='t' ){
if( z[2]=='a' ){
if( m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
}else if( z[2]=='e' ){
if( !stem(&z, "tneme", "", m_gt_1)
&& !stem(&z, "tnem", "", m_gt_1)
){
stem(&z, "tne", "", m_gt_1);
}
}
}
break;
case 'o':
if( z[0]=='u' ){
if( m_gt_1(z+2) ){
z += 2;
}
}else if( z[3]=='s' || z[3]=='t' ){
stem(&z, "noi", "", m_gt_1);
}
break;
case 's':
if( z[0]=='m' && z[2]=='i' && m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
break;
case 't':
if( !stem(&z, "eta", "", m_gt_1) ){
stem(&z, "iti", "", m_gt_1);
}
break;
case 'u':
if( z[0]=='s' && z[2]=='o' && m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
break;
case 'v':
case 'z':
if( z[0]=='e' && z[2]=='i' && m_gt_1(z+3) ){
z += 3;
}
break;
}
/* Step 5a */
if( z[0]=='e' ){
if( m_gt_1(z+1) ){
z++;
}else if( m_eq_1(z+1) && !star_oh(z+1) ){
z++;
}
}
/* Step 5b */
if( m_gt_1(z) && z[0]=='l' && z[1]=='l' ){
z++;
}
/* z[] is now the stemmed word in reverse order. Flip it back
** around into forward order and return.
*/
*pnOut = i = (int)strlen(z);
zOut[i] = 0;
while( *z ){
zOut[--i] = *(z++);
}
}
/*
** Characters that can be part of a token. We assume any character
** whose value is greater than 0x80 (any UTF character) can be
** part of a token. In other words, delimiters all must have
** values of 0x7f or lower.
*/
static const char porterIdChar[] = {
/* x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 3x */
0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, /* 4x */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, /* 5x */
0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, /* 6x */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 7x */
};
#define isDelim(C) (((ch=C)&0x80)==0 && (ch<0x30 || !porterIdChar[ch-0x30]))
/*
** Extract the next token from a tokenization cursor. The cursor must
** have been opened by a prior call to porterOpen().
*/
static int porterNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor returned by porterOpen */
const char **pzToken, /* OUT: *pzToken is the token text */
int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Number of bytes in token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
porter_tokenizer_cursor *c = (porter_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
const char *z = c->zInput;
while( c->iOffset<c->nInput ){
int iStartOffset, ch;
/* Scan past delimiter characters */
while( c->iOffset<c->nInput && isDelim(z[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
/* Count non-delimiter characters. */
iStartOffset = c->iOffset;
while( c->iOffset<c->nInput && !isDelim(z[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
if( c->iOffset>iStartOffset ){
int n = c->iOffset-iStartOffset;
if( n>c->nAllocated ){
char *pNew;
c->nAllocated = n+20;
pNew = sqlite3_realloc(c->zToken, c->nAllocated);
if( !pNew ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
c->zToken = pNew;
}
porter_stemmer(&z[iStartOffset], n, c->zToken, pnBytes);
*pzToken = c->zToken;
*piStartOffset = iStartOffset;
*piEndOffset = c->iOffset;
*piPosition = c->iToken++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
}
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
/*
** The set of routines that implement the porter-stemmer tokenizer
*/
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module porterTokenizerModule = {
0,
porterCreate,
porterDestroy,
porterOpen,
porterClose,
porterNext,
0
};
/*
** Allocate a new porter tokenizer. Return a pointer to the new
** tokenizer in *ppModule
*/
void sqlite3Fts3PorterTokenizerModule(
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule
){
*ppModule = &porterTokenizerModule;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) */

1706
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_snippet.c
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

373
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_term.c
View File

@ -1,373 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2011 Jan 27
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** This file is not part of the production FTS code. It is only used for
** testing. It contains a virtual table implementation that provides direct
** access to the full-text index of an FTS table.
*/
#include "fts3Int.h"
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
#include <string.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
typedef struct Fts3termTable Fts3termTable;
typedef struct Fts3termCursor Fts3termCursor;
struct Fts3termTable {
sqlite3_vtab base; /* Base class used by SQLite core */
int iIndex; /* Index for Fts3Table.aIndex[] */
Fts3Table *pFts3Tab;
};
struct Fts3termCursor {
sqlite3_vtab_cursor base; /* Base class used by SQLite core */
Fts3MultiSegReader csr; /* Must be right after "base" */
Fts3SegFilter filter;
int isEof; /* True if cursor is at EOF */
char *pNext;
sqlite3_int64 iRowid; /* Current 'rowid' value */
sqlite3_int64 iDocid; /* Current 'docid' value */
int iCol; /* Current 'col' value */
int iPos; /* Current 'pos' value */
};
/*
** Schema of the terms table.
*/
#define FTS3_TERMS_SCHEMA "CREATE TABLE x(term, docid, col, pos)"
/*
** This function does all the work for both the xConnect and xCreate methods.
** These tables have no persistent representation of their own, so xConnect
** and xCreate are identical operations.
*/
static int fts3termConnectMethod(
sqlite3 *db, /* Database connection */
void *pCtx, /* Non-zero for an fts4prefix table */
int argc, /* Number of elements in argv array */
const char * const *argv, /* xCreate/xConnect argument array */
sqlite3_vtab **ppVtab, /* OUT: New sqlite3_vtab object */
char **pzErr /* OUT: sqlite3_malloc'd error message */
){
char const *zDb; /* Name of database (e.g. "main") */
char const *zFts3; /* Name of fts3 table */
int nDb; /* Result of strlen(zDb) */
int nFts3; /* Result of strlen(zFts3) */
int nByte; /* Bytes of space to allocate here */
int rc; /* value returned by declare_vtab() */
Fts3termTable *p; /* Virtual table object to return */
int iIndex = 0;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pCtx);
if( argc==5 ){
iIndex = atoi(argv[4]);
argc--;
}
/* The user should specify a single argument - the name of an fts3 table. */
if( argc!=4 ){
sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr,
"wrong number of arguments to fts4term constructor"
);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
zDb = argv[1];
nDb = (int)strlen(zDb);
zFts3 = argv[3];
nFts3 = (int)strlen(zFts3);
rc = sqlite3_declare_vtab(db, FTS3_TERMS_SCHEMA);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
nByte = sizeof(Fts3termTable) + sizeof(Fts3Table) + nDb + nFts3 + 2;
p = (Fts3termTable *)sqlite3_malloc(nByte);
if( !p ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(p, 0, nByte);
p->pFts3Tab = (Fts3Table *)&p[1];
p->pFts3Tab->zDb = (char *)&p->pFts3Tab[1];
p->pFts3Tab->zName = &p->pFts3Tab->zDb[nDb+1];
p->pFts3Tab->db = db;
p->pFts3Tab->nIndex = iIndex+1;
p->iIndex = iIndex;
memcpy((char *)p->pFts3Tab->zDb, zDb, nDb);
memcpy((char *)p->pFts3Tab->zName, zFts3, nFts3);
sqlite3Fts3Dequote((char *)p->pFts3Tab->zName);
*ppVtab = (sqlite3_vtab *)p;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** This function does the work for both the xDisconnect and xDestroy methods.
** These tables have no persistent representation of their own, so xDisconnect
** and xDestroy are identical operations.
*/
static int fts3termDisconnectMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
Fts3termTable *p = (Fts3termTable *)pVtab;
Fts3Table *pFts3 = p->pFts3Tab;
int i;
/* Free any prepared statements held */
for(i=0; i<SizeofArray(pFts3->aStmt); i++){
sqlite3_finalize(pFts3->aStmt[i]);
}
sqlite3_free(pFts3->zSegmentsTbl);
sqlite3_free(p);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
#define FTS4AUX_EQ_CONSTRAINT 1
#define FTS4AUX_GE_CONSTRAINT 2
#define FTS4AUX_LE_CONSTRAINT 4
/*
** xBestIndex - Analyze a WHERE and ORDER BY clause.
*/
static int fts3termBestIndexMethod(
sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
sqlite3_index_info *pInfo
){
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
/* This vtab naturally does "ORDER BY term, docid, col, pos". */
if( pInfo->nOrderBy ){
int i;
for(i=0; i<pInfo->nOrderBy; i++){
if( pInfo->aOrderBy[i].iColumn!=i || pInfo->aOrderBy[i].desc ) break;
}
if( i==pInfo->nOrderBy ){
pInfo->orderByConsumed = 1;
}
}
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xOpen - Open a cursor.
*/
static int fts3termOpenMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCsr){
Fts3termCursor *pCsr; /* Pointer to cursor object to return */
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
pCsr = (Fts3termCursor *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3termCursor));
if( !pCsr ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(pCsr, 0, sizeof(Fts3termCursor));
*ppCsr = (sqlite3_vtab_cursor *)pCsr;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xClose - Close a cursor.
*/
static int fts3termCloseMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
Fts3Table *pFts3 = ((Fts3termTable *)pCursor->pVtab)->pFts3Tab;
Fts3termCursor *pCsr = (Fts3termCursor *)pCursor;
sqlite3Fts3SegmentsClose(pFts3);
sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(&pCsr->csr);
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xNext - Advance the cursor to the next row, if any.
*/
static int fts3termNextMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
Fts3termCursor *pCsr = (Fts3termCursor *)pCursor;
Fts3Table *pFts3 = ((Fts3termTable *)pCursor->pVtab)->pFts3Tab;
int rc;
sqlite3_int64 v;
/* Increment our pretend rowid value. */
pCsr->iRowid++;
/* Advance to the next term in the full-text index. */
if( pCsr->csr.aDoclist==0
|| pCsr->pNext>=&pCsr->csr.aDoclist[pCsr->csr.nDoclist-1]
){
rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(pFts3, &pCsr->csr);
if( rc!=SQLITE_ROW ){
pCsr->isEof = 1;
return rc;
}
pCsr->iCol = 0;
pCsr->iPos = 0;
pCsr->iDocid = 0;
pCsr->pNext = pCsr->csr.aDoclist;
/* Read docid */
pCsr->pNext += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(pCsr->pNext, &pCsr->iDocid);
}
pCsr->pNext += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(pCsr->pNext, &v);
if( v==0 ){
pCsr->pNext += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(pCsr->pNext, &v);
pCsr->iDocid += v;
pCsr->pNext += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(pCsr->pNext, &v);
pCsr->iCol = 0;
pCsr->iPos = 0;
}
if( v==1 ){
pCsr->pNext += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(pCsr->pNext, &v);
pCsr->iCol += (int)v;
pCsr->iPos = 0;
pCsr->pNext += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(pCsr->pNext, &v);
}
pCsr->iPos += (int)(v - 2);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xFilter - Initialize a cursor to point at the start of its data.
*/
static int fts3termFilterMethod(
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, /* The cursor used for this query */
int idxNum, /* Strategy index */
const char *idxStr, /* Unused */
int nVal, /* Number of elements in apVal */
sqlite3_value **apVal /* Arguments for the indexing scheme */
){
Fts3termCursor *pCsr = (Fts3termCursor *)pCursor;
Fts3termTable *p = (Fts3termTable *)pCursor->pVtab;
Fts3Table *pFts3 = p->pFts3Tab;
int rc;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(nVal);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(idxNum);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(idxStr);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(apVal);
assert( idxStr==0 && idxNum==0 );
/* In case this cursor is being reused, close and zero it. */
testcase(pCsr->filter.zTerm);
sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(&pCsr->csr);
memset(&pCsr->csr, 0, ((u8*)&pCsr[1]) - (u8*)&pCsr->csr);
pCsr->filter.flags = FTS3_SEGMENT_REQUIRE_POS|FTS3_SEGMENT_IGNORE_EMPTY;
pCsr->filter.flags |= FTS3_SEGMENT_SCAN;
rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(pFts3, 0, p->iIndex, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL,
pCsr->filter.zTerm, pCsr->filter.nTerm, 0, 1, &pCsr->csr
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart(pFts3, &pCsr->csr, &pCsr->filter);
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = fts3termNextMethod(pCursor);
}
return rc;
}
/*
** xEof - Return true if the cursor is at EOF, or false otherwise.
*/
static int fts3termEofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
Fts3termCursor *pCsr = (Fts3termCursor *)pCursor;
return pCsr->isEof;
}
/*
** xColumn - Return a column value.
*/
static int fts3termColumnMethod(
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor to retrieve value from */
sqlite3_context *pCtx, /* Context for sqlite3_result_xxx() calls */
int iCol /* Index of column to read value from */
){
Fts3termCursor *p = (Fts3termCursor *)pCursor;
assert( iCol>=0 && iCol<=3 );
switch( iCol ){
case 0:
sqlite3_result_text(pCtx, p->csr.zTerm, p->csr.nTerm, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
break;
case 1:
sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, p->iDocid);
break;
case 2:
sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, p->iCol);
break;
default:
sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, p->iPos);
break;
}
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xRowid - Return the current rowid for the cursor.
*/
static int fts3termRowidMethod(
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor to retrieve value from */
sqlite_int64 *pRowid /* OUT: Rowid value */
){
Fts3termCursor *pCsr = (Fts3termCursor *)pCursor;
*pRowid = pCsr->iRowid;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Register the fts3term module with database connection db. Return SQLITE_OK
** if successful or an error code if sqlite3_create_module() fails.
*/
int sqlite3Fts3InitTerm(sqlite3 *db){
static const sqlite3_module fts3term_module = {
0, /* iVersion */
fts3termConnectMethod, /* xCreate */
fts3termConnectMethod, /* xConnect */
fts3termBestIndexMethod, /* xBestIndex */
fts3termDisconnectMethod, /* xDisconnect */
fts3termDisconnectMethod, /* xDestroy */
fts3termOpenMethod, /* xOpen */
fts3termCloseMethod, /* xClose */
fts3termFilterMethod, /* xFilter */
fts3termNextMethod, /* xNext */
fts3termEofMethod, /* xEof */
fts3termColumnMethod, /* xColumn */
fts3termRowidMethod, /* xRowid */
0, /* xUpdate */
0, /* xBegin */
0, /* xSync */
0, /* xCommit */
0, /* xRollback */
0, /* xFindFunction */
0, /* xRename */
0, /* xSavepoint */
0, /* xRelease */
0 /* xRollbackTo */
};
int rc; /* Return code */
rc = sqlite3_create_module(db, "fts4term", &fts3term_module, 0);
return rc;
}
#endif
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) */

584
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_test.c
View File

@ -1,584 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2011 Jun 13
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** This file is not part of the production FTS code. It is only used for
** testing. It contains a Tcl command that can be used to test if a document
** matches an FTS NEAR expression.
**
** As of March 2012, it also contains a version 1 tokenizer used for testing
** that the sqlite3_tokenizer_module.xLanguage() method is invoked correctly.
*/
#include <tcl.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <assert.h>
#if defined(SQLITE_TEST)
#if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4)
/* Required so that the "ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3" below works */
#include "fts3Int.h"
#define NM_MAX_TOKEN 12
typedef struct NearPhrase NearPhrase;
typedef struct NearDocument NearDocument;
typedef struct NearToken NearToken;
struct NearDocument {
int nToken; /* Length of token in bytes */
NearToken *aToken; /* Token array */
};
struct NearToken {
int n; /* Length of token in bytes */
const char *z; /* Pointer to token string */
};
struct NearPhrase {
int nNear; /* Preceding NEAR value */
int nToken; /* Number of tokens in this phrase */
NearToken aToken[NM_MAX_TOKEN]; /* Array of tokens in this phrase */
};
static int nm_phrase_match(
NearPhrase *p,
NearToken *aToken
){
int ii;
for(ii=0; ii<p->nToken; ii++){
NearToken *pToken = &p->aToken[ii];
if( pToken->n>0 && pToken->z[pToken->n-1]=='*' ){
if( aToken[ii].n<(pToken->n-1) ) return 0;
if( memcmp(aToken[ii].z, pToken->z, pToken->n-1) ) return 0;
}else{
if( aToken[ii].n!=pToken->n ) return 0;
if( memcmp(aToken[ii].z, pToken->z, pToken->n) ) return 0;
}
}
return 1;
}
static int nm_near_chain(
int iDir, /* Direction to iterate through aPhrase[] */
NearDocument *pDoc, /* Document to match against */
int iPos, /* Position at which iPhrase was found */
int nPhrase, /* Size of phrase array */
NearPhrase *aPhrase, /* Phrase array */
int iPhrase /* Index of phrase found */
){
int iStart;
int iStop;
int ii;
int nNear;
int iPhrase2;
NearPhrase *p;
NearPhrase *pPrev;
assert( iDir==1 || iDir==-1 );
if( iDir==1 ){
if( (iPhrase+1)==nPhrase ) return 1;
nNear = aPhrase[iPhrase+1].nNear;
}else{
if( iPhrase==0 ) return 1;
nNear = aPhrase[iPhrase].nNear;
}
pPrev = &aPhrase[iPhrase];
iPhrase2 = iPhrase+iDir;
p = &aPhrase[iPhrase2];
iStart = iPos - nNear - p->nToken;
iStop = iPos + nNear + pPrev->nToken;
if( iStart<0 ) iStart = 0;
if( iStop > pDoc->nToken - p->nToken ) iStop = pDoc->nToken - p->nToken;
for(ii=iStart; ii<=iStop; ii++){
if( nm_phrase_match(p, &pDoc->aToken[ii]) ){
if( nm_near_chain(iDir, pDoc, ii, nPhrase, aPhrase, iPhrase2) ) return 1;
}
}
return 0;
}
static int nm_match_count(
NearDocument *pDoc, /* Document to match against */
int nPhrase, /* Size of phrase array */
NearPhrase *aPhrase, /* Phrase array */
int iPhrase /* Index of phrase to count matches for */
){
int nOcc = 0;
int ii;
NearPhrase *p = &aPhrase[iPhrase];
for(ii=0; ii<(pDoc->nToken + 1 - p->nToken); ii++){
if( nm_phrase_match(p, &pDoc->aToken[ii]) ){
/* Test forward NEAR chain (i>iPhrase) */
if( 0==nm_near_chain(1, pDoc, ii, nPhrase, aPhrase, iPhrase) ) continue;
/* Test reverse NEAR chain (i<iPhrase) */
if( 0==nm_near_chain(-1, pDoc, ii, nPhrase, aPhrase, iPhrase) ) continue;
/* This is a real match. Increment the counter. */
nOcc++;
}
}
return nOcc;
}
/*
** Tclcmd: fts3_near_match DOCUMENT EXPR ?OPTIONS?
*/
static int fts3_near_match_cmd(
ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc,
Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]
){
int nTotal = 0;
int rc;
int ii;
int nPhrase;
NearPhrase *aPhrase = 0;
NearDocument doc = {0, 0};
Tcl_Obj **apDocToken;
Tcl_Obj *pRet;
Tcl_Obj *pPhrasecount = 0;
Tcl_Obj **apExprToken;
int nExprToken;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(clientData);
/* Must have 3 or more arguments. */
if( objc<3 || (objc%2)==0 ){
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "DOCUMENT EXPR ?OPTION VALUE?...");
rc = TCL_ERROR;
goto near_match_out;
}
for(ii=3; ii<objc; ii+=2){
enum NM_enum { NM_PHRASECOUNTS };
struct TestnmSubcmd {
char *zName;
enum NM_enum eOpt;
} aOpt[] = {
{ "-phrasecountvar", NM_PHRASECOUNTS },
{ 0, 0 }
};
int iOpt;
if( Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(
interp, objv[ii], aOpt, sizeof(aOpt[0]), "option", 0, &iOpt)
){
return TCL_ERROR;
}
switch( aOpt[iOpt].eOpt ){
case NM_PHRASECOUNTS:
pPhrasecount = objv[ii+1];
break;
}
}
rc = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[1], &doc.nToken, &apDocToken);
if( rc!=TCL_OK ) goto near_match_out;
doc.aToken = (NearToken *)ckalloc(doc.nToken*sizeof(NearToken));
for(ii=0; ii<doc.nToken; ii++){
doc.aToken[ii].z = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(apDocToken[ii], &doc.aToken[ii].n);
}
rc = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[2], &nExprToken, &apExprToken);
if( rc!=TCL_OK ) goto near_match_out;
nPhrase = (nExprToken + 1) / 2;
aPhrase = (NearPhrase *)ckalloc(nPhrase * sizeof(NearPhrase));
memset(aPhrase, 0, nPhrase * sizeof(NearPhrase));
for(ii=0; ii<nPhrase; ii++){
Tcl_Obj *pPhrase = apExprToken[ii*2];
Tcl_Obj **apToken;
int nToken;
int jj;
rc = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, pPhrase, &nToken, &apToken);
if( rc!=TCL_OK ) goto near_match_out;
if( nToken>NM_MAX_TOKEN ){
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Too many tokens in phrase", 0);
rc = TCL_ERROR;
goto near_match_out;
}
for(jj=0; jj<nToken; jj++){
NearToken *pT = &aPhrase[ii].aToken[jj];
pT->z = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(apToken[jj], &pT->n);
}
aPhrase[ii].nToken = nToken;
}
for(ii=1; ii<nPhrase; ii++){
Tcl_Obj *pNear = apExprToken[2*ii-1];
int nNear;
rc = Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, pNear, &nNear);
if( rc!=TCL_OK ) goto near_match_out;
aPhrase[ii].nNear = nNear;
}
pRet = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_IncrRefCount(pRet);
for(ii=0; ii<nPhrase; ii++){
int nOcc = nm_match_count(&doc, nPhrase, aPhrase, ii);
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, pRet, Tcl_NewIntObj(nOcc));
nTotal += nOcc;
}
if( pPhrasecount ){
Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, pPhrasecount, 0, pRet, 0);
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(pRet);
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(nTotal>0));
near_match_out:
ckfree((char *)aPhrase);
ckfree((char *)doc.aToken);
return rc;
}
/*
** Tclcmd: fts3_configure_incr_load ?CHUNKSIZE THRESHOLD?
**
** Normally, FTS uses hard-coded values to determine the minimum doclist
** size eligible for incremental loading, and the size of the chunks loaded
** when a doclist is incrementally loaded. This command allows the built-in
** values to be overridden for testing purposes.
**
** If present, the first argument is the chunksize in bytes to load doclists
** in. The second argument is the minimum doclist size in bytes to use
** incremental loading with.
**
** Whether or not the arguments are present, this command returns a list of
** two integers - the initial chunksize and threshold when the command is
** invoked. This can be used to restore the default behavior after running
** tests. For example:
**
** # Override incr-load settings for testing:
** set cfg [fts3_configure_incr_load $new_chunksize $new_threshold]
**
** .... run tests ....
**
** # Restore initial incr-load settings:
** eval fts3_configure_incr_load $cfg
*/
static int fts3_configure_incr_load_cmd(
ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc,
Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3
extern int test_fts3_node_chunksize;
extern int test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold;
Tcl_Obj *pRet;
if( objc!=1 && objc!=3 ){
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "?CHUNKSIZE THRESHOLD?");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
pRet = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_IncrRefCount(pRet);
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(
interp, pRet, Tcl_NewIntObj(test_fts3_node_chunksize));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(
interp, pRet, Tcl_NewIntObj(test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold));
if( objc==3 ){
int iArg1;
int iArg2;
if( Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[1], &iArg1)
|| Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &iArg2)
){
Tcl_DecrRefCount(pRet);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
test_fts3_node_chunksize = iArg1;
test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold = iArg2;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, pRet);
Tcl_DecrRefCount(pRet);
#endif
UNUSED_PARAMETER(clientData);
return TCL_OK;
}
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3
/**************************************************************************
** Beginning of test tokenizer code.
**
** For language 0, this tokenizer is similar to the default 'simple'
** tokenizer. For other languages L, the following:
**
** * Odd numbered languages are case-sensitive. Even numbered
** languages are not.
**
** * Language ids 100 or greater are considered an error.
**
** The implementation assumes that the input contains only ASCII characters
** (i.e. those that may be encoded in UTF-8 using a single byte).
*/
typedef struct test_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base;
} test_tokenizer;
typedef struct test_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
const char *aInput; /* Input being tokenized */
int nInput; /* Size of the input in bytes */
int iInput; /* Current offset in aInput */
int iToken; /* Index of next token to be returned */
char *aBuffer; /* Buffer containing current token */
int nBuffer; /* Number of bytes allocated at pToken */
int iLangid; /* Configured language id */
} test_tokenizer_cursor;
static int testTokenizerCreate(
int argc, const char * const *argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer
){
test_tokenizer *pNew;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(argc);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(argv);
pNew = sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(test_tokenizer));
if( !pNew ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(pNew, 0, sizeof(test_tokenizer));
*ppTokenizer = (sqlite3_tokenizer *)pNew;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
static int testTokenizerDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
test_tokenizer *p = (test_tokenizer *)pTokenizer;
sqlite3_free(p);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
static int testTokenizerOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* The tokenizer */
const char *pInput, int nBytes, /* String to be tokenized */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Tokenization cursor */
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */
test_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr; /* New cursor object */
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pTokenizer);
pCsr = (test_tokenizer_cursor *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(test_tokenizer_cursor));
if( pCsr==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}else{
memset(pCsr, 0, sizeof(test_tokenizer_cursor));
pCsr->aInput = pInput;
if( nBytes<0 ){
pCsr->nInput = (int)strlen(pInput);
}else{
pCsr->nInput = nBytes;
}
}
*ppCursor = (sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *)pCsr;
return rc;
}
static int testTokenizerClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
test_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr = (test_tokenizer_cursor *)pCursor;
sqlite3_free(pCsr->aBuffer);
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
static int testIsTokenChar(char c){
return (c>='a' && c<='z') || (c>='A' && c<='Z');
}
static int testTolower(char c){
char ret = c;
if( ret>='A' && ret<='Z') ret = ret - ('A'-'a');
return ret;
}
static int testTokenizerNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor returned by testTokenizerOpen */
const char **ppToken, /* OUT: *ppToken is the token text */
int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Number of bytes in token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
test_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr = (test_tokenizer_cursor *)pCursor;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
const char *p;
const char *pEnd;
p = &pCsr->aInput[pCsr->iInput];
pEnd = &pCsr->aInput[pCsr->nInput];
/* Skip past any white-space */
assert( p<=pEnd );
while( p<pEnd && testIsTokenChar(*p)==0 ) p++;
if( p==pEnd ){
rc = SQLITE_DONE;
}else{
/* Advance to the end of the token */
const char *pToken = p;
int nToken;
while( p<pEnd && testIsTokenChar(*p) ) p++;
nToken = (int)(p-pToken);
/* Copy the token into the buffer */
if( nToken>pCsr->nBuffer ){
sqlite3_free(pCsr->aBuffer);
pCsr->aBuffer = sqlite3_malloc(nToken);
}
if( pCsr->aBuffer==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}else{
int i;
if( pCsr->iLangid & 0x00000001 ){
for(i=0; i<nToken; i++) pCsr->aBuffer[i] = pToken[i];
}else{
for(i=0; i<nToken; i++) pCsr->aBuffer[i] = testTolower(pToken[i]);
}
pCsr->iToken++;
pCsr->iInput = (int)(p - pCsr->aInput);
*ppToken = pCsr->aBuffer;
*pnBytes = nToken;
*piStartOffset = (int)(pToken - pCsr->aInput);
*piEndOffset = (int)(p - pCsr->aInput);
*piPosition = pCsr->iToken;
}
}
return rc;
}
static int testTokenizerLanguage(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor,
int iLangid
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
test_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr = (test_tokenizer_cursor *)pCursor;
pCsr->iLangid = iLangid;
if( pCsr->iLangid>=100 ){
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
return rc;
}
#endif
static int fts3_test_tokenizer_cmd(
ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc,
Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module testTokenizerModule = {
1,
testTokenizerCreate,
testTokenizerDestroy,
testTokenizerOpen,
testTokenizerClose,
testTokenizerNext,
testTokenizerLanguage
};
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pPtr = &testTokenizerModule;
if( objc!=1 ){
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewByteArrayObj(
(const unsigned char *)&pPtr, sizeof(sqlite3_tokenizer_module *)
));
#endif
UNUSED_PARAMETER(clientData);
return TCL_OK;
}
static int fts3_test_varint_cmd(
ClientData clientData,
Tcl_Interp *interp,
int objc,
Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3
char aBuf[24];
int rc;
Tcl_WideInt w, w2;
int nByte, nByte2;
if( objc!=2 ){
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "INTEGER");
return TCL_ERROR;
}
rc = Tcl_GetWideIntFromObj(interp, objv[1], &w);
if( rc!=TCL_OK ) return rc;
nByte = sqlite3Fts3PutVarint(aBuf, w);
nByte2 = sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(aBuf, &w2);
if( w!=w2 || nByte!=nByte2 ){
char *zErr = sqlite3_mprintf("error testing %lld", w);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, zErr, 0);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
if( w<=2147483647 && w>=0 ){
int i;
nByte2 = fts3GetVarint32(aBuf, &i);
if( (int)w!=i || nByte!=nByte2 ){
char *zErr = sqlite3_mprintf("error testing %lld (32-bit)", w);
Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, zErr, 0);
return TCL_ERROR;
}
}
#endif
UNUSED_PARAMETER(clientData);
return TCL_OK;
}
/*
** End of tokenizer code.
**************************************************************************/
int Sqlitetestfts3_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp){
Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "fts3_near_match", fts3_near_match_cmd, 0, 0);
Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp,
"fts3_configure_incr_load", fts3_configure_incr_load_cmd, 0, 0
);
Tcl_CreateObjCommand(
interp, "fts3_test_tokenizer", fts3_test_tokenizer_cmd, 0, 0
);
Tcl_CreateObjCommand(
interp, "fts3_test_varint", fts3_test_varint_cmd, 0, 0
);
return TCL_OK;
}
#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3 || SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4 */
#endif /* ifdef SQLITE_TEST */

454
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_tokenize_vtab.c
View File

@ -1,454 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2013 Apr 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** This file contains code for the "fts3tokenize" virtual table module.
** An fts3tokenize virtual table is created as follows:
**
** CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE <tbl> USING fts3tokenize(
** <tokenizer-name>, <arg-1>, ...
** );
**
** The table created has the following schema:
**
** CREATE TABLE <tbl>(input, token, start, end, position)
**
** When queried, the query must include a WHERE clause of type:
**
** input = <string>
**
** The virtual table module tokenizes this <string>, using the FTS3
** tokenizer specified by the arguments to the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE
** statement and returns one row for each token in the result. With
** fields set as follows:
**
** input: Always set to a copy of <string>
** token: A token from the input.
** start: Byte offset of the token within the input <string>.
** end: Byte offset of the byte immediately following the end of the
** token within the input string.
** pos: Token offset of token within input.
**
*/
#include "fts3Int.h"
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
#include <string.h>
#include <assert.h>
typedef struct Fts3tokTable Fts3tokTable;
typedef struct Fts3tokCursor Fts3tokCursor;
/*
** Virtual table structure.
*/
struct Fts3tokTable {
sqlite3_vtab base; /* Base class used by SQLite core */
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pMod;
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTok;
};
/*
** Virtual table cursor structure.
*/
struct Fts3tokCursor {
sqlite3_vtab_cursor base; /* Base class used by SQLite core */
char *zInput; /* Input string */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr; /* Cursor to iterate through zInput */
int iRowid; /* Current 'rowid' value */
const char *zToken; /* Current 'token' value */
int nToken; /* Size of zToken in bytes */
int iStart; /* Current 'start' value */
int iEnd; /* Current 'end' value */
int iPos; /* Current 'pos' value */
};
/*
** Query FTS for the tokenizer implementation named zName.
*/
static int fts3tokQueryTokenizer(
Fts3Hash *pHash,
const char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp,
char **pzErr
){
sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p;
int nName = (int)strlen(zName);
p = (sqlite3_tokenizer_module *)sqlite3Fts3HashFind(pHash, zName, nName+1);
if( !p ){
sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr, "unknown tokenizer: %s", zName);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
*pp = p;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** The second argument, argv[], is an array of pointers to nul-terminated
** strings. This function makes a copy of the array and strings into a
** single block of memory. It then dequotes any of the strings that appear
** to be quoted.
**
** If successful, output parameter *pazDequote is set to point at the
** array of dequoted strings and SQLITE_OK is returned. The caller is
** responsible for eventually calling sqlite3_free() to free the array
** in this case. Or, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned.
** The final value of *pazDequote is undefined in this case.
*/
static int fts3tokDequoteArray(
int argc, /* Number of elements in argv[] */
const char * const *argv, /* Input array */
char ***pazDequote /* Output array */
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */
if( argc==0 ){
*pazDequote = 0;
}else{
int i;
int nByte = 0;
char **azDequote;
for(i=0; i<argc; i++){
nByte += (int)(strlen(argv[i]) + 1);
}
*pazDequote = azDequote = sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(char *)*argc + nByte);
if( azDequote==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}else{
char *pSpace = (char *)&azDequote[argc];
for(i=0; i<argc; i++){
int n = (int)strlen(argv[i]);
azDequote[i] = pSpace;
memcpy(pSpace, argv[i], n+1);
sqlite3Fts3Dequote(pSpace);
pSpace += (n+1);
}
}
}
return rc;
}
/*
** Schema of the tokenizer table.
*/
#define FTS3_TOK_SCHEMA "CREATE TABLE x(input, token, start, end, position)"
/*
** This function does all the work for both the xConnect and xCreate methods.
** These tables have no persistent representation of their own, so xConnect
** and xCreate are identical operations.
**
** argv[0]: module name
** argv[1]: database name
** argv[2]: table name
** argv[3]: first argument (tokenizer name)
*/
static int fts3tokConnectMethod(
sqlite3 *db, /* Database connection */
void *pHash, /* Hash table of tokenizers */
int argc, /* Number of elements in argv array */
const char * const *argv, /* xCreate/xConnect argument array */
sqlite3_vtab **ppVtab, /* OUT: New sqlite3_vtab object */
char **pzErr /* OUT: sqlite3_malloc'd error message */
){
Fts3tokTable *pTab = 0;
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pMod = 0;
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTok = 0;
int rc;
char **azDequote = 0;
int nDequote;
rc = sqlite3_declare_vtab(db, FTS3_TOK_SCHEMA);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
nDequote = argc-3;
rc = fts3tokDequoteArray(nDequote, &argv[3], &azDequote);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
const char *zModule;
if( nDequote<1 ){
zModule = "simple";
}else{
zModule = azDequote[0];
}
rc = fts3tokQueryTokenizer((Fts3Hash*)pHash, zModule, &pMod, pzErr);
}
assert( (rc==SQLITE_OK)==(pMod!=0) );
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
const char * const *azArg = (const char * const *)&azDequote[1];
rc = pMod->xCreate((nDequote>1 ? nDequote-1 : 0), azArg, &pTok);
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pTab = (Fts3tokTable *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3tokTable));
if( pTab==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
memset(pTab, 0, sizeof(Fts3tokTable));
pTab->pMod = pMod;
pTab->pTok = pTok;
*ppVtab = &pTab->base;
}else{
if( pTok ){
pMod->xDestroy(pTok);
}
}
sqlite3_free(azDequote);
return rc;
}
/*
** This function does the work for both the xDisconnect and xDestroy methods.
** These tables have no persistent representation of their own, so xDisconnect
** and xDestroy are identical operations.
*/
static int fts3tokDisconnectMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
Fts3tokTable *pTab = (Fts3tokTable *)pVtab;
pTab->pMod->xDestroy(pTab->pTok);
sqlite3_free(pTab);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xBestIndex - Analyze a WHERE and ORDER BY clause.
*/
static int fts3tokBestIndexMethod(
sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
sqlite3_index_info *pInfo
){
int i;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
for(i=0; i<pInfo->nConstraint; i++){
if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable
&& pInfo->aConstraint[i].iColumn==0
&& pInfo->aConstraint[i].op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
){
pInfo->idxNum = 1;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[i].argvIndex = 1;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[i].omit = 1;
pInfo->estimatedCost = 1;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
}
pInfo->idxNum = 0;
assert( pInfo->estimatedCost>1000000.0 );
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xOpen - Open a cursor.
*/
static int fts3tokOpenMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCsr){
Fts3tokCursor *pCsr;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
pCsr = (Fts3tokCursor *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3tokCursor));
if( pCsr==0 ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
memset(pCsr, 0, sizeof(Fts3tokCursor));
*ppCsr = (sqlite3_vtab_cursor *)pCsr;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Reset the tokenizer cursor passed as the only argument. As if it had
** just been returned by fts3tokOpenMethod().
*/
static void fts3tokResetCursor(Fts3tokCursor *pCsr){
if( pCsr->pCsr ){
Fts3tokTable *pTab = (Fts3tokTable *)(pCsr->base.pVtab);
pTab->pMod->xClose(pCsr->pCsr);
pCsr->pCsr = 0;
}
sqlite3_free(pCsr->zInput);
pCsr->zInput = 0;
pCsr->zToken = 0;
pCsr->nToken = 0;
pCsr->iStart = 0;
pCsr->iEnd = 0;
pCsr->iPos = 0;
pCsr->iRowid = 0;
}
/*
** xClose - Close a cursor.
*/
static int fts3tokCloseMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
Fts3tokCursor *pCsr = (Fts3tokCursor *)pCursor;
fts3tokResetCursor(pCsr);
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xNext - Advance the cursor to the next row, if any.
*/
static int fts3tokNextMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
Fts3tokCursor *pCsr = (Fts3tokCursor *)pCursor;
Fts3tokTable *pTab = (Fts3tokTable *)(pCursor->pVtab);
int rc; /* Return code */
pCsr->iRowid++;
rc = pTab->pMod->xNext(pCsr->pCsr,
&pCsr->zToken, &pCsr->nToken,
&pCsr->iStart, &pCsr->iEnd, &pCsr->iPos
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
fts3tokResetCursor(pCsr);
if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
return rc;
}
/*
** xFilter - Initialize a cursor to point at the start of its data.
*/
static int fts3tokFilterMethod(
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, /* The cursor used for this query */
int idxNum, /* Strategy index */
const char *idxStr, /* Unused */
int nVal, /* Number of elements in apVal */
sqlite3_value **apVal /* Arguments for the indexing scheme */
){
int rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
Fts3tokCursor *pCsr = (Fts3tokCursor *)pCursor;
Fts3tokTable *pTab = (Fts3tokTable *)(pCursor->pVtab);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(idxStr);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(nVal);
fts3tokResetCursor(pCsr);
if( idxNum==1 ){
const char *zByte = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(apVal[0]);
int nByte = sqlite3_value_bytes(apVal[0]);
pCsr->zInput = sqlite3_malloc(nByte+1);
if( pCsr->zInput==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}else{
memcpy(pCsr->zInput, zByte, nByte);
pCsr->zInput[nByte] = 0;
rc = pTab->pMod->xOpen(pTab->pTok, pCsr->zInput, nByte, &pCsr->pCsr);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pCsr->pCsr->pTokenizer = pTab->pTok;
}
}
}
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
return fts3tokNextMethod(pCursor);
}
/*
** xEof - Return true if the cursor is at EOF, or false otherwise.
*/
static int fts3tokEofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
Fts3tokCursor *pCsr = (Fts3tokCursor *)pCursor;
return (pCsr->zToken==0);
}
/*
** xColumn - Return a column value.
*/
static int fts3tokColumnMethod(
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor to retrieve value from */
sqlite3_context *pCtx, /* Context for sqlite3_result_xxx() calls */
int iCol /* Index of column to read value from */
){
Fts3tokCursor *pCsr = (Fts3tokCursor *)pCursor;
/* CREATE TABLE x(input, token, start, end, position) */
switch( iCol ){
case 0:
sqlite3_result_text(pCtx, pCsr->zInput, -1, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
break;
case 1:
sqlite3_result_text(pCtx, pCsr->zToken, pCsr->nToken, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
break;
case 2:
sqlite3_result_int(pCtx, pCsr->iStart);
break;
case 3:
sqlite3_result_int(pCtx, pCsr->iEnd);
break;
default:
assert( iCol==4 );
sqlite3_result_int(pCtx, pCsr->iPos);
break;
}
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** xRowid - Return the current rowid for the cursor.
*/
static int fts3tokRowidMethod(
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor to retrieve value from */
sqlite_int64 *pRowid /* OUT: Rowid value */
){
Fts3tokCursor *pCsr = (Fts3tokCursor *)pCursor;
*pRowid = (sqlite3_int64)pCsr->iRowid;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Register the fts3tok module with database connection db. Return SQLITE_OK
** if successful or an error code if sqlite3_create_module() fails.
*/
int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){
static const sqlite3_module fts3tok_module = {
0, /* iVersion */
fts3tokConnectMethod, /* xCreate */
fts3tokConnectMethod, /* xConnect */
fts3tokBestIndexMethod, /* xBestIndex */
fts3tokDisconnectMethod, /* xDisconnect */
fts3tokDisconnectMethod, /* xDestroy */
fts3tokOpenMethod, /* xOpen */
fts3tokCloseMethod, /* xClose */
fts3tokFilterMethod, /* xFilter */
fts3tokNextMethod, /* xNext */
fts3tokEofMethod, /* xEof */
fts3tokColumnMethod, /* xColumn */
fts3tokRowidMethod, /* xRowid */
0, /* xUpdate */
0, /* xBegin */
0, /* xSync */
0, /* xCommit */
0, /* xRollback */
0, /* xFindFunction */
0, /* xRename */
0, /* xSavepoint */
0, /* xRelease */
0 /* xRollbackTo */
};
int rc; /* Return code */
rc = sqlite3_create_module(db, "fts3tokenize", &fts3tok_module, (void*)pHash);
return rc;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) */

507
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_tokenizer.c
View File

@ -1,507 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2007 June 22
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** This is part of an SQLite module implementing full-text search.
** This particular file implements the generic tokenizer interface.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS3 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS3 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3 is defined).
*/
#include "fts3Int.h"
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
#include <assert.h>
#include <string.h>
/*
** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying
** hash table. This function may be called as follows:
**
** SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>);
** SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>, <pointer>);
**
** where <function-name> is the name passed as the second argument
** to the sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable() function (e.g. 'fts3_tokenizer').
**
** If the <pointer> argument is specified, it must be a blob value
** containing a pointer to be stored as the hash data corresponding
** to the string <key-name>. If <pointer> is not specified, then
** the string <key-name> must already exist in the has table. Otherwise,
** an error is returned.
**
** Whether or not the <pointer> argument is specified, the value returned
** is a blob containing the pointer stored as the hash data corresponding
** to string <key-name> (after the hash-table is updated, if applicable).
*/
static void scalarFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
Fts3Hash *pHash;
void *pPtr = 0;
const unsigned char *zName;
int nName;
assert( argc==1 || argc==2 );
pHash = (Fts3Hash *)sqlite3_user_data(context);
zName = sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]);
nName = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[0])+1;
if( argc==2 ){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_TOKENIZER
void *pOld;
int n = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[1]);
if( zName==0 || n!=sizeof(pPtr) ){
sqlite3_result_error(context, "argument type mismatch", -1);
return;
}
pPtr = *(void **)sqlite3_value_blob(argv[1]);
pOld = sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, (void *)zName, nName, pPtr);
if( pOld==pPtr ){
sqlite3_result_error(context, "out of memory", -1);
return;
}
#else
sqlite3_result_error(context, "fts3tokenize: "
"disabled - rebuild with -DSQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_TOKENIZER", -1
);
return;
#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_TOKENIZER */
}else
{
if( zName ){
pPtr = sqlite3Fts3HashFind(pHash, zName, nName);
}
if( !pPtr ){
char *zErr = sqlite3_mprintf("unknown tokenizer: %s", zName);
sqlite3_result_error(context, zErr, -1);
sqlite3_free(zErr);
return;
}
}
sqlite3_result_blob(context, (void *)&pPtr, sizeof(pPtr), SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
}
int sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(char c){
static const char isFtsIdChar[] = {
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0x */
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 1x */
0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 2x */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 3x */
0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, /* 4x */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, /* 5x */
0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, /* 6x */
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 7x */
};
return (c&0x80 || isFtsIdChar[(int)(c)]);
}
const char *sqlite3Fts3NextToken(const char *zStr, int *pn){
const char *z1;
const char *z2 = 0;
/* Find the start of the next token. */
z1 = zStr;
while( z2==0 ){
char c = *z1;
switch( c ){
case '\0': return 0; /* No more tokens here */
case '\'':
case '"':
case '`': {
z2 = z1;
while( *++z2 && (*z2!=c || *++z2==c) );
break;
}
case '[':
z2 = &z1[1];
while( *z2 && z2[0]!=']' ) z2++;
if( *z2 ) z2++;
break;
default:
if( sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(*z1) ){
z2 = &z1[1];
while( sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(*z2) ) z2++;
}else{
z1++;
}
}
}
*pn = (int)(z2-z1);
return z1;
}
int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(
Fts3Hash *pHash, /* Tokenizer hash table */
const char *zArg, /* Tokenizer name */
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTok, /* OUT: Tokenizer (if applicable) */
char **pzErr /* OUT: Set to malloced error message */
){
int rc;
char *z = (char *)zArg;
int n = 0;
char *zCopy;
char *zEnd; /* Pointer to nul-term of zCopy */
sqlite3_tokenizer_module *m;
zCopy = sqlite3_mprintf("%s", zArg);
if( !zCopy ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
zEnd = &zCopy[strlen(zCopy)];
z = (char *)sqlite3Fts3NextToken(zCopy, &n);
if( z==0 ){
assert( n==0 );
z = zCopy;
}
z[n] = '\0';
sqlite3Fts3Dequote(z);
m = (sqlite3_tokenizer_module *)sqlite3Fts3HashFind(pHash,z,(int)strlen(z)+1);
if( !m ){
sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr, "unknown tokenizer: %s", z);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}else{
char const **aArg = 0;
int iArg = 0;
z = &z[n+1];
while( z<zEnd && (NULL!=(z = (char *)sqlite3Fts3NextToken(z, &n))) ){
int nNew = sizeof(char *)*(iArg+1);
char const **aNew = (const char **)sqlite3_realloc((void *)aArg, nNew);
if( !aNew ){
sqlite3_free(zCopy);
sqlite3_free((void *)aArg);
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
aArg = aNew;
aArg[iArg++] = z;
z[n] = '\0';
sqlite3Fts3Dequote(z);
z = &z[n+1];
}
rc = m->xCreate(iArg, aArg, ppTok);
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || *ppTok );
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr, "unknown tokenizer");
}else{
(*ppTok)->pModule = m;
}
sqlite3_free((void *)aArg);
}
sqlite3_free(zCopy);
return rc;
}
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
#include <tcl.h>
#include <string.h>
/*
** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers
** designed to be used in concert with the Tcl testing framework. This
** function must be called with two or more arguments:
**
** SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>, ..., <input-string>);
**
** where <function-name> is the name passed as the second argument
** to the sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable() function (e.g. 'fts3_tokenizer')
** concatenated with the string '_test' (e.g. 'fts3_tokenizer_test').
**
** The return value is a string that may be interpreted as a Tcl
** list. For each token in the <input-string>, three elements are
** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the
** second is the token text (folded, stemmed, etc.) and the third is the
** substring of <input-string> associated with the token. For example,
** using the built-in "simple" tokenizer:
**
** SELECT fts_tokenizer_test('simple', 'I don't see how');
**
** will return the string:
**
** "{0 i I 1 dont don't 2 see see 3 how how}"
**
*/
static void testFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
Fts3Hash *pHash;
sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p;
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer = 0;
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr = 0;
const char *zErr = 0;
const char *zName;
int nName;
const char *zInput;
int nInput;
const char *azArg[64];
const char *zToken;
int nToken = 0;
int iStart = 0;
int iEnd = 0;
int iPos = 0;
int i;
Tcl_Obj *pRet;
if( argc<2 ){
sqlite3_result_error(context, "insufficient arguments", -1);
return;
}
nName = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[0]);
zName = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]);
nInput = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[argc-1]);
zInput = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(argv[argc-1]);
pHash = (Fts3Hash *)sqlite3_user_data(context);
p = (sqlite3_tokenizer_module *)sqlite3Fts3HashFind(pHash, zName, nName+1);
if( !p ){
char *zErr2 = sqlite3_mprintf("unknown tokenizer: %s", zName);
sqlite3_result_error(context, zErr2, -1);
sqlite3_free(zErr2);
return;
}
pRet = Tcl_NewObj();
Tcl_IncrRefCount(pRet);
for(i=1; i<argc-1; i++){
azArg[i-1] = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(argv[i]);
}
if( SQLITE_OK!=p->xCreate(argc-2, azArg, &pTokenizer) ){
zErr = "error in xCreate()";
goto finish;
}
pTokenizer->pModule = p;
if( sqlite3Fts3OpenTokenizer(pTokenizer, 0, zInput, nInput, &pCsr) ){
zErr = "error in xOpen()";
goto finish;
}
while( SQLITE_OK==p->xNext(pCsr, &zToken, &nToken, &iStart, &iEnd, &iPos) ){
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(0, pRet, Tcl_NewIntObj(iPos));
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(0, pRet, Tcl_NewStringObj(zToken, nToken));
zToken = &zInput[iStart];
nToken = iEnd-iStart;
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(0, pRet, Tcl_NewStringObj(zToken, nToken));
}
if( SQLITE_OK!=p->xClose(pCsr) ){
zErr = "error in xClose()";
goto finish;
}
if( SQLITE_OK!=p->xDestroy(pTokenizer) ){
zErr = "error in xDestroy()";
goto finish;
}
finish:
if( zErr ){
sqlite3_result_error(context, zErr, -1);
}else{
sqlite3_result_text(context, Tcl_GetString(pRet), -1, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
}
Tcl_DecrRefCount(pRet);
}
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_TOKENIZER
static
int registerTokenizer(
sqlite3 *db,
char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p
){
int rc;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
const char zSql[] = "SELECT fts3_tokenizer(?, ?)";
rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
return rc;
}
sqlite3_bind_text(pStmt, 1, zName, -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3_bind_blob(pStmt, 2, &p, sizeof(p), SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3_step(pStmt);
return sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_TOKENIZER */
static
int queryTokenizer(
sqlite3 *db,
char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
){
int rc;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
const char zSql[] = "SELECT fts3_tokenizer(?)";
*pp = 0;
rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
return rc;
}
sqlite3_bind_text(pStmt, 1, zName, -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pStmt) ){
if( sqlite3_column_type(pStmt, 0)==SQLITE_BLOB ){
memcpy((void *)pp, sqlite3_column_blob(pStmt, 0), sizeof(*pp));
}
}
return sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
void sqlite3Fts3SimpleTokenizerModule(sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule);
/*
** Implementation of the scalar function fts3_tokenizer_internal_test().
** This function is used for testing only, it is not included in the
** build unless SQLITE_TEST is defined.
**
** The purpose of this is to test that the fts3_tokenizer() function
** can be used as designed by the C-code in the queryTokenizer and
** registerTokenizer() functions above. These two functions are repeated
** in the README.tokenizer file as an example, so it is important to
** test them.
**
** To run the tests, evaluate the fts3_tokenizer_internal_test() scalar
** function with no arguments. An assert() will fail if a problem is
** detected. i.e.:
**
** SELECT fts3_tokenizer_internal_test();
**
*/
static void intTestFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
int rc;
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p1;
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p2;
sqlite3 *db = (sqlite3 *)sqlite3_user_data(context);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(argc);
UNUSED_PARAMETER(argv);
/* Test the query function */
sqlite3Fts3SimpleTokenizerModule(&p1);
rc = queryTokenizer(db, "simple", &p2);
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
assert( p1==p2 );
rc = queryTokenizer(db, "nosuchtokenizer", &p2);
assert( rc==SQLITE_ERROR );
assert( p2==0 );
assert( 0==strcmp(sqlite3_errmsg(db), "unknown tokenizer: nosuchtokenizer") );
/* Test the storage function */
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_TOKENIZER
rc = registerTokenizer(db, "nosuchtokenizer", p1);
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
rc = queryTokenizer(db, "nosuchtokenizer", &p2);
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
assert( p2==p1 );
#endif
sqlite3_result_text(context, "ok", -1, SQLITE_STATIC);
}
#endif
/*
** Set up SQL objects in database db used to access the contents of
** the hash table pointed to by argument pHash. The hash table must
** been initialized to use string keys, and to take a private copy
** of the key when a value is inserted. i.e. by a call similar to:
**
** sqlite3Fts3HashInit(pHash, FTS3_HASH_STRING, 1);
**
** This function adds a scalar function (see header comment above
** scalarFunc() in this file for details) and, if ENABLE_TABLE is
** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header
** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both
** provide read/write access to the contents of *pHash.
**
** The third argument to this function, zName, is used as the name
** of both the scalar and, if created, the virtual table.
*/
int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(
sqlite3 *db,
Fts3Hash *pHash,
const char *zName
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
void *p = (void *)pHash;
const int any = SQLITE_ANY;
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
char *zTest = 0;
char *zTest2 = 0;
void *pdb = (void *)db;
zTest = sqlite3_mprintf("%s_test", zName);
zTest2 = sqlite3_mprintf("%s_internal_test", zName);
if( !zTest || !zTest2 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
#endif
if( SQLITE_OK==rc ){
rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, zName, 1, any, p, scalarFunc, 0, 0);
}
if( SQLITE_OK==rc ){
rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, zName, 2, any, p, scalarFunc, 0, 0);
}
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
if( SQLITE_OK==rc ){
rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, zTest, -1, any, p, testFunc, 0, 0);
}
if( SQLITE_OK==rc ){
rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, zTest2, 0, any, pdb, intTestFunc, 0, 0);
}
#endif
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
sqlite3_free(zTest);
sqlite3_free(zTest2);
#endif
return rc;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) */

161
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_tokenizer.h
View File

@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 July 10
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.
**
*************************************************************************
** Defines the interface to tokenizers used by fulltext-search. There
** are three basic components:
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer_module is a singleton defining the tokenizer
** interface functions. This is essentially the class structure for
** tokenizers.
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer is used to define a particular tokenizer, perhaps
** including customization information defined at creation time.
**
** sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor is generated by a tokenizer to generate
** tokens from a particular input.
*/
#ifndef _FTS3_TOKENIZER_H_
#define _FTS3_TOKENIZER_H_
/* TODO(shess) Only used for SQLITE_OK and SQLITE_DONE at this time.
** If tokenizers are to be allowed to call sqlite3_*() functions, then
** we will need a way to register the API consistently.
*/
#include "sqlite3.h"
/*
** Structures used by the tokenizer interface. When a new tokenizer
** implementation is registered, the caller provides a pointer to
** an sqlite3_tokenizer_module containing pointers to the callback
** functions that make up an implementation.
**
** When an fts3 table is created, it passes any arguments passed to
** the tokenizer clause of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement to the
** sqlite3_tokenizer_module.xCreate() function of the requested tokenizer
** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an
** sqlite3_tokenizer structure representing the specific tokenizer to
** be used for the fts3 table (customized by the tokenizer clause arguments).
**
** To tokenize an input buffer, the sqlite3_tokenizer_module.xOpen()
** method is called. It returns an sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor object
** that may be used to tokenize a specific input buffer based on
** the tokenization rules supplied by a specific sqlite3_tokenizer
** object.
*/
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module sqlite3_tokenizer_module;
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer sqlite3_tokenizer;
typedef struct sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor;
struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
/*
** Structure version. Should always be set to 0 or 1.
*/
int iVersion;
/*
** Create a new tokenizer. The values in the argv[] array are the
** arguments passed to the "tokenizer" clause of the CREATE VIRTUAL
** TABLE statement that created the fts3 table. For example, if
** the following SQL is executed:
**
** CREATE .. USING fts3( ... , tokenizer <tokenizer-name> arg1 arg2)
**
** then argc is set to 2, and the argv[] array contains pointers
** to the strings "arg1" and "arg2".
**
** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error
** code. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then *ppTokenizer should be set
** to point at the newly created tokenizer structure. The generic
** sqlite3_tokenizer.pModule variable should not be initialized by
** this callback. The caller will do so.
*/
int (*xCreate)(
int argc, /* Size of argv array */
const char *const*argv, /* Tokenizer argument strings */
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer /* OUT: Created tokenizer */
);
/*
** Destroy an existing tokenizer. The fts3 module calls this method
** exactly once for each successful call to xCreate().
*/
int (*xDestroy)(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer);
/*
** Create a tokenizer cursor to tokenize an input buffer. The caller
** is responsible for ensuring that the input buffer remains valid
** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method).
*/
int (*xOpen)(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* Tokenizer object */
const char *pInput, int nBytes, /* Input buffer */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Created tokenizer cursor */
);
/*
** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts3 module calls this
** method exactly once for each successful call to xOpen().
*/
int (*xClose)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor);
/*
** Retrieve the next token from the tokenizer cursor pCursor. This
** method should either return SQLITE_OK and set the values of the
** "OUT" variables identified below, or SQLITE_DONE to indicate that
** the end of the buffer has been reached, or an SQLite error code.
**
** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the
** normalized version of the token (i.e. after any case-folding and/or
** stemming has been performed). *pnBytes should be set to the length
** of this buffer in bytes. The input text that generated the token is
** identified by the byte offsets returned in *piStartOffset and
** *piEndOffset. *piStartOffset should be set to the index of the first
** byte of the token in the input buffer. *piEndOffset should be set
** to the index of the first byte just past the end of the token in
** the input buffer.
**
** The buffer *ppToken is set to point at is managed by the tokenizer
** implementation. It is only required to be valid until the next call
** to xNext() or xClose().
*/
/* TODO(shess) current implementation requires pInput to be
** nul-terminated. This should either be fixed, or pInput/nBytes
** should be converted to zInput.
*/
int (*xNext)(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Tokenizer cursor */
const char **ppToken, int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Normalized text for token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Byte offset of token in input buffer */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Byte offset of end of token in input buffer */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Number of tokens returned before this one */
);
/***********************************************************************
** Methods below this point are only available if iVersion>=1.
*/
/*
** Configure the language id of a tokenizer cursor.
*/
int (*xLanguageid)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr, int iLangid);
};
struct sqlite3_tokenizer {
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pModule; /* The module for this tokenizer */
/* Tokenizer implementations will typically add additional fields */
};
struct sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer; /* Tokenizer for this cursor. */
/* Tokenizer implementations will typically add additional fields */
};
int fts3_global_term_cnt(int iTerm, int iCol);
int fts3_term_cnt(int iTerm, int iCol);
#endif /* _FTS3_TOKENIZER_H_ */

234
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_tokenizer1.c
View File

@ -1,234 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2006 Oct 10
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** Implementation of the "simple" full-text-search tokenizer.
*/
/*
** The code in this file is only compiled if:
**
** * The FTS3 module is being built as an extension
** (in which case SQLITE_CORE is not defined), or
**
** * The FTS3 module is being built into the core of
** SQLite (in which case SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3 is defined).
*/
#include "fts3Int.h"
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "fts3_tokenizer.h"
typedef struct simple_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base;
char delim[128]; /* flag ASCII delimiters */
} simple_tokenizer;
typedef struct simple_tokenizer_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
const char *pInput; /* input we are tokenizing */
int nBytes; /* size of the input */
int iOffset; /* current position in pInput */
int iToken; /* index of next token to be returned */
char *pToken; /* storage for current token */
int nTokenAllocated; /* space allocated to zToken buffer */
} simple_tokenizer_cursor;
static int simpleDelim(simple_tokenizer *t, unsigned char c){
return c<0x80 && t->delim[c];
}
static int fts3_isalnum(int x){
return (x>='0' && x<='9') || (x>='A' && x<='Z') || (x>='a' && x<='z');
}
/*
** Create a new tokenizer instance.
*/
static int simpleCreate(
int argc, const char * const *argv,
sqlite3_tokenizer **ppTokenizer
){
simple_tokenizer *t;
t = (simple_tokenizer *) sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*t));
if( t==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(t, 0, sizeof(*t));
/* TODO(shess) Delimiters need to remain the same from run to run,
** else we need to reindex. One solution would be a meta-table to
** track such information in the database, then we'd only want this
** information on the initial create.
*/
if( argc>1 ){
int i, n = (int)strlen(argv[1]);
for(i=0; i<n; i++){
unsigned char ch = argv[1][i];
/* We explicitly don't support UTF-8 delimiters for now. */
if( ch>=0x80 ){
sqlite3_free(t);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
t->delim[ch] = 1;
}
} else {
/* Mark non-alphanumeric ASCII characters as delimiters */
int i;
for(i=1; i<0x80; i++){
t->delim[i] = !fts3_isalnum(i) ? -1 : 0;
}
}
*ppTokenizer = &t->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Destroy a tokenizer
*/
static int simpleDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
sqlite3_free(pTokenizer);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int simpleOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* The tokenizer */
const char *pInput, int nBytes, /* String to be tokenized */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **ppCursor /* OUT: Tokenization cursor */
){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pTokenizer);
c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*c));
if( c==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
c->pInput = pInput;
if( pInput==0 ){
c->nBytes = 0;
}else if( nBytes<0 ){
c->nBytes = (int)strlen(pInput);
}else{
c->nBytes = nBytes;
}
c->iOffset = 0; /* start tokenizing at the beginning */
c->iToken = 0;
c->pToken = NULL; /* no space allocated, yet. */
c->nTokenAllocated = 0;
*ppCursor = &c->base;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Close a tokenization cursor previously opened by a call to
** simpleOpen() above.
*/
static int simpleClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
sqlite3_free(c->pToken);
sqlite3_free(c);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Extract the next token from a tokenization cursor. The cursor must
** have been opened by a prior call to simpleOpen().
*/
static int simpleNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor, /* Cursor returned by simpleOpen */
const char **ppToken, /* OUT: *ppToken is the token text */
int *pnBytes, /* OUT: Number of bytes in token */
int *piStartOffset, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEndOffset, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPosition /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
simple_tokenizer_cursor *c = (simple_tokenizer_cursor *) pCursor;
simple_tokenizer *t = (simple_tokenizer *) pCursor->pTokenizer;
unsigned char *p = (unsigned char *)c->pInput;
while( c->iOffset<c->nBytes ){
int iStartOffset;
/* Scan past delimiter characters */
while( c->iOffset<c->nBytes && simpleDelim(t, p[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
/* Count non-delimiter characters. */
iStartOffset = c->iOffset;
while( c->iOffset<c->nBytes && !simpleDelim(t, p[c->iOffset]) ){
c->iOffset++;
}
if( c->iOffset>iStartOffset ){
int i, n = c->iOffset-iStartOffset;
if( n>c->nTokenAllocated ){
char *pNew;
c->nTokenAllocated = n+20;
pNew = sqlite3_realloc(c->pToken, c->nTokenAllocated);
if( !pNew ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
c->pToken = pNew;
}
for(i=0; i<n; i++){
/* TODO(shess) This needs expansion to handle UTF-8
** case-insensitivity.
*/
unsigned char ch = p[iStartOffset+i];
c->pToken[i] = (char)((ch>='A' && ch<='Z') ? ch-'A'+'a' : ch);
}
*ppToken = c->pToken;
*pnBytes = n;
*piStartOffset = iStartOffset;
*piEndOffset = c->iOffset;
*piPosition = c->iToken++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
}
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
/*
** The set of routines that implement the simple tokenizer
*/
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module simpleTokenizerModule = {
0,
simpleCreate,
simpleDestroy,
simpleOpen,
simpleClose,
simpleNext,
0,
};
/*
** Allocate a new simple tokenizer. Return a pointer to the new
** tokenizer in *ppModule
*/
void sqlite3Fts3SimpleTokenizerModule(
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const**ppModule
){
*ppModule = &simpleTokenizerModule;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) */

393
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_unicode.c
View File

@ -1,393 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2012 May 24
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** Implementation of the "unicode" full-text-search tokenizer.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE
#include "fts3Int.h"
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
#include <assert.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "fts3_tokenizer.h"
/*
** The following two macros - READ_UTF8 and WRITE_UTF8 - have been copied
** from the sqlite3 source file utf.c. If this file is compiled as part
** of the amalgamation, they are not required.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION
static const unsigned char sqlite3Utf8Trans1[] = {
0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x05, 0x06, 0x07,
0x08, 0x09, 0x0a, 0x0b, 0x0c, 0x0d, 0x0e, 0x0f,
0x10, 0x11, 0x12, 0x13, 0x14, 0x15, 0x16, 0x17,
0x18, 0x19, 0x1a, 0x1b, 0x1c, 0x1d, 0x1e, 0x1f,
0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x05, 0x06, 0x07,
0x08, 0x09, 0x0a, 0x0b, 0x0c, 0x0d, 0x0e, 0x0f,
0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x05, 0x06, 0x07,
0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x00,
};
#define READ_UTF8(zIn, zTerm, c) \
c = *(zIn++); \
if( c>=0xc0 ){ \
c = sqlite3Utf8Trans1[c-0xc0]; \
while( zIn!=zTerm && (*zIn & 0xc0)==0x80 ){ \
c = (c<<6) + (0x3f & *(zIn++)); \
} \
if( c<0x80 \
|| (c&0xFFFFF800)==0xD800 \
|| (c&0xFFFFFFFE)==0xFFFE ){ c = 0xFFFD; } \
}
#define WRITE_UTF8(zOut, c) { \
if( c<0x00080 ){ \
*zOut++ = (u8)(c&0xFF); \
} \
else if( c<0x00800 ){ \
*zOut++ = 0xC0 + (u8)((c>>6)&0x1F); \
*zOut++ = 0x80 + (u8)(c & 0x3F); \
} \
else if( c<0x10000 ){ \
*zOut++ = 0xE0 + (u8)((c>>12)&0x0F); \
*zOut++ = 0x80 + (u8)((c>>6) & 0x3F); \
*zOut++ = 0x80 + (u8)(c & 0x3F); \
}else{ \
*zOut++ = 0xF0 + (u8)((c>>18) & 0x07); \
*zOut++ = 0x80 + (u8)((c>>12) & 0x3F); \
*zOut++ = 0x80 + (u8)((c>>6) & 0x3F); \
*zOut++ = 0x80 + (u8)(c & 0x3F); \
} \
}
#endif /* ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION */
typedef struct unicode_tokenizer unicode_tokenizer;
typedef struct unicode_cursor unicode_cursor;
struct unicode_tokenizer {
sqlite3_tokenizer base;
int bRemoveDiacritic;
int nException;
int *aiException;
};
struct unicode_cursor {
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor base;
const unsigned char *aInput; /* Input text being tokenized */
int nInput; /* Size of aInput[] in bytes */
int iOff; /* Current offset within aInput[] */
int iToken; /* Index of next token to be returned */
char *zToken; /* storage for current token */
int nAlloc; /* space allocated at zToken */
};
/*
** Destroy a tokenizer allocated by unicodeCreate().
*/
static int unicodeDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
if( pTokenizer ){
unicode_tokenizer *p = (unicode_tokenizer *)pTokenizer;
sqlite3_free(p->aiException);
sqlite3_free(p);
}
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** As part of a tokenchars= or separators= option, the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE
** statement has specified that the tokenizer for this table shall consider
** all characters in string zIn/nIn to be separators (if bAlnum==0) or
** token characters (if bAlnum==1).
**
** For each codepoint in the zIn/nIn string, this function checks if the
** sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum() function already returns the desired result.
** If so, no action is taken. Otherwise, the codepoint is added to the
** unicode_tokenizer.aiException[] array. For the purposes of tokenization,
** the return value of sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum() is inverted for all
** codepoints in the aiException[] array.
**
** If a standalone diacritic mark (one that sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic()
** identifies as a diacritic) occurs in the zIn/nIn string it is ignored.
** It is not possible to change the behavior of the tokenizer with respect
** to these codepoints.
*/
static int unicodeAddExceptions(
unicode_tokenizer *p, /* Tokenizer to add exceptions to */
int bAlnum, /* Replace Isalnum() return value with this */
const char *zIn, /* Array of characters to make exceptions */
int nIn /* Length of z in bytes */
){
const unsigned char *z = (const unsigned char *)zIn;
const unsigned char *zTerm = &z[nIn];
int iCode;
int nEntry = 0;
assert( bAlnum==0 || bAlnum==1 );
while( z<zTerm ){
READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode);
assert( (sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode) & 0xFFFFFFFE)==0 );
if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode)!=bAlnum
&& sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(iCode)==0
){
nEntry++;
}
}
if( nEntry ){
int *aNew; /* New aiException[] array */
int nNew; /* Number of valid entries in array aNew[] */
aNew = sqlite3_realloc(p->aiException, (p->nException+nEntry)*sizeof(int));
if( aNew==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
nNew = p->nException;
z = (const unsigned char *)zIn;
while( z<zTerm ){
READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode);
if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode)!=bAlnum
&& sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(iCode)==0
){
int i, j;
for(i=0; i<nNew && aNew[i]<iCode; i++);
for(j=nNew; j>i; j--) aNew[j] = aNew[j-1];
aNew[i] = iCode;
nNew++;
}
}
p->aiException = aNew;
p->nException = nNew;
}
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Return true if the p->aiException[] array contains the value iCode.
*/
static int unicodeIsException(unicode_tokenizer *p, int iCode){
if( p->nException>0 ){
int *a = p->aiException;
int iLo = 0;
int iHi = p->nException-1;
while( iHi>=iLo ){
int iTest = (iHi + iLo) / 2;
if( iCode==a[iTest] ){
return 1;
}else if( iCode>a[iTest] ){
iLo = iTest+1;
}else{
iHi = iTest-1;
}
}
}
return 0;
}
/*
** Return true if, for the purposes of tokenization, codepoint iCode is
** considered a token character (not a separator).
*/
static int unicodeIsAlnum(unicode_tokenizer *p, int iCode){
assert( (sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode) & 0xFFFFFFFE)==0 );
return sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode) ^ unicodeIsException(p, iCode);
}
/*
** Create a new tokenizer instance.
*/
static int unicodeCreate(
int nArg, /* Size of array argv[] */
const char * const *azArg, /* Tokenizer creation arguments */
sqlite3_tokenizer **pp /* OUT: New tokenizer handle */
){
unicode_tokenizer *pNew; /* New tokenizer object */
int i;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
pNew = (unicode_tokenizer *) sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(unicode_tokenizer));
if( pNew==NULL ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
memset(pNew, 0, sizeof(unicode_tokenizer));
pNew->bRemoveDiacritic = 1;
for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<nArg; i++){
const char *z = azArg[i];
int n = (int)strlen(z);
if( n==19 && memcmp("remove_diacritics=1", z, 19)==0 ){
pNew->bRemoveDiacritic = 1;
}
else if( n==19 && memcmp("remove_diacritics=0", z, 19)==0 ){
pNew->bRemoveDiacritic = 0;
}
else if( n>=11 && memcmp("tokenchars=", z, 11)==0 ){
rc = unicodeAddExceptions(pNew, 1, &z[11], n-11);
}
else if( n>=11 && memcmp("separators=", z, 11)==0 ){
rc = unicodeAddExceptions(pNew, 0, &z[11], n-11);
}
else{
/* Unrecognized argument */
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
}
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
unicodeDestroy((sqlite3_tokenizer *)pNew);
pNew = 0;
}
*pp = (sqlite3_tokenizer *)pNew;
return rc;
}
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int unicodeOpen(
sqlite3_tokenizer *p, /* The tokenizer */
const char *aInput, /* Input string */
int nInput, /* Size of string aInput in bytes */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor **pp /* OUT: New cursor object */
){
unicode_cursor *pCsr;
pCsr = (unicode_cursor *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(unicode_cursor));
if( pCsr==0 ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
memset(pCsr, 0, sizeof(unicode_cursor));
pCsr->aInput = (const unsigned char *)aInput;
if( aInput==0 ){
pCsr->nInput = 0;
}else if( nInput<0 ){
pCsr->nInput = (int)strlen(aInput);
}else{
pCsr->nInput = nInput;
}
*pp = &pCsr->base;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(p);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Close a tokenization cursor previously opened by a call to
** simpleOpen() above.
*/
static int unicodeClose(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor){
unicode_cursor *pCsr = (unicode_cursor *) pCursor;
sqlite3_free(pCsr->zToken);
sqlite3_free(pCsr);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Extract the next token from a tokenization cursor. The cursor must
** have been opened by a prior call to simpleOpen().
*/
static int unicodeNext(
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pC, /* Cursor returned by simpleOpen */
const char **paToken, /* OUT: Token text */
int *pnToken, /* OUT: Number of bytes at *paToken */
int *piStart, /* OUT: Starting offset of token */
int *piEnd, /* OUT: Ending offset of token */
int *piPos /* OUT: Position integer of token */
){
unicode_cursor *pCsr = (unicode_cursor *)pC;
unicode_tokenizer *p = ((unicode_tokenizer *)pCsr->base.pTokenizer);
int iCode = 0;
char *zOut;
const unsigned char *z = &pCsr->aInput[pCsr->iOff];
const unsigned char *zStart = z;
const unsigned char *zEnd;
const unsigned char *zTerm = &pCsr->aInput[pCsr->nInput];
/* Scan past any delimiter characters before the start of the next token.
** Return SQLITE_DONE early if this takes us all the way to the end of
** the input. */
while( z<zTerm ){
READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode);
if( unicodeIsAlnum(p, iCode) ) break;
zStart = z;
}
if( zStart>=zTerm ) return SQLITE_DONE;
zOut = pCsr->zToken;
do {
int iOut;
/* Grow the output buffer if required. */
if( (zOut-pCsr->zToken)>=(pCsr->nAlloc-4) ){
char *zNew = sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->zToken, pCsr->nAlloc+64);
if( !zNew ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
zOut = &zNew[zOut - pCsr->zToken];
pCsr->zToken = zNew;
pCsr->nAlloc += 64;
}
/* Write the folded case of the last character read to the output */
zEnd = z;
iOut = sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(iCode, p->bRemoveDiacritic);
if( iOut ){
WRITE_UTF8(zOut, iOut);
}
/* If the cursor is not at EOF, read the next character */
if( z>=zTerm ) break;
READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode);
}while( unicodeIsAlnum(p, iCode)
|| sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(iCode)
);
/* Set the output variables and return. */
pCsr->iOff = (int)(z - pCsr->aInput);
*paToken = pCsr->zToken;
*pnToken = (int)(zOut - pCsr->zToken);
*piStart = (int)(zStart - pCsr->aInput);
*piEnd = (int)(zEnd - pCsr->aInput);
*piPos = pCsr->iToken++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Set *ppModule to a pointer to the sqlite3_tokenizer_module
** structure for the unicode tokenizer.
*/
void sqlite3Fts3UnicodeTokenizer(sqlite3_tokenizer_module const **ppModule){
static const sqlite3_tokenizer_module module = {
0,
unicodeCreate,
unicodeDestroy,
unicodeOpen,
unicodeClose,
unicodeNext,
0,
};
*ppModule = &module;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) */
#endif /* ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE */

365
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_unicode2.c
View File

@ -1,365 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2012 May 25
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
*/
/*
** DO NOT EDIT THIS MACHINE GENERATED FILE.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE
#if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4)
#include <assert.h>
/*
** Return true if the argument corresponds to a unicode codepoint
** classified as either a letter or a number. Otherwise false.
**
** The results are undefined if the value passed to this function
** is less than zero.
*/
int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(int c){
/* Each unsigned integer in the following array corresponds to a contiguous
** range of unicode codepoints that are not either letters or numbers (i.e.
** codepoints for which this function should return 0).
**
** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first
** codepoint in the range. The least significant 10 bits are used to store
** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value
** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint
** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints
** using this format.
*/
static const unsigned int aEntry[] = {
0x00000030, 0x0000E807, 0x00016C06, 0x0001EC2F, 0x0002AC07,
0x0002D001, 0x0002D803, 0x0002EC01, 0x0002FC01, 0x00035C01,
0x0003DC01, 0x000B0804, 0x000B480E, 0x000B9407, 0x000BB401,
0x000BBC81, 0x000DD401, 0x000DF801, 0x000E1002, 0x000E1C01,
0x000FD801, 0x00120808, 0x00156806, 0x00162402, 0x00163C01,
0x00164437, 0x0017CC02, 0x00180005, 0x00181816, 0x00187802,
0x00192C15, 0x0019A804, 0x0019C001, 0x001B5001, 0x001B580F,
0x001B9C07, 0x001BF402, 0x001C000E, 0x001C3C01, 0x001C4401,
0x001CC01B, 0x001E980B, 0x001FAC09, 0x001FD804, 0x00205804,
0x00206C09, 0x00209403, 0x0020A405, 0x0020C00F, 0x00216403,
0x00217801, 0x0023901B, 0x00240004, 0x0024E803, 0x0024F812,
0x00254407, 0x00258804, 0x0025C001, 0x00260403, 0x0026F001,
0x0026F807, 0x00271C02, 0x00272C03, 0x00275C01, 0x00278802,
0x0027C802, 0x0027E802, 0x00280403, 0x0028F001, 0x0028F805,
0x00291C02, 0x00292C03, 0x00294401, 0x0029C002, 0x0029D401,
0x002A0403, 0x002AF001, 0x002AF808, 0x002B1C03, 0x002B2C03,
0x002B8802, 0x002BC002, 0x002C0403, 0x002CF001, 0x002CF807,
0x002D1C02, 0x002D2C03, 0x002D5802, 0x002D8802, 0x002DC001,
0x002E0801, 0x002EF805, 0x002F1803, 0x002F2804, 0x002F5C01,
0x002FCC08, 0x00300403, 0x0030F807, 0x00311803, 0x00312804,
0x00315402, 0x00318802, 0x0031FC01, 0x00320802, 0x0032F001,
0x0032F807, 0x00331803, 0x00332804, 0x00335402, 0x00338802,
0x00340802, 0x0034F807, 0x00351803, 0x00352804, 0x00355C01,
0x00358802, 0x0035E401, 0x00360802, 0x00372801, 0x00373C06,
0x00375801, 0x00376008, 0x0037C803, 0x0038C401, 0x0038D007,
0x0038FC01, 0x00391C09, 0x00396802, 0x003AC401, 0x003AD006,
0x003AEC02, 0x003B2006, 0x003C041F, 0x003CD00C, 0x003DC417,
0x003E340B, 0x003E6424, 0x003EF80F, 0x003F380D, 0x0040AC14,
0x00412806, 0x00415804, 0x00417803, 0x00418803, 0x00419C07,
0x0041C404, 0x0042080C, 0x00423C01, 0x00426806, 0x0043EC01,
0x004D740C, 0x004E400A, 0x00500001, 0x0059B402, 0x005A0001,
0x005A6C02, 0x005BAC03, 0x005C4803, 0x005CC805, 0x005D4802,
0x005DC802, 0x005ED023, 0x005F6004, 0x005F7401, 0x0060000F,
0x0062A401, 0x0064800C, 0x0064C00C, 0x00650001, 0x00651002,
0x0066C011, 0x00672002, 0x00677822, 0x00685C05, 0x00687802,
0x0069540A, 0x0069801D, 0x0069FC01, 0x006A8007, 0x006AA006,
0x006C0005, 0x006CD011, 0x006D6823, 0x006E0003, 0x006E840D,
0x006F980E, 0x006FF004, 0x00709014, 0x0070EC05, 0x0071F802,
0x00730008, 0x00734019, 0x0073B401, 0x0073C803, 0x00770027,
0x0077F004, 0x007EF401, 0x007EFC03, 0x007F3403, 0x007F7403,
0x007FB403, 0x007FF402, 0x00800065, 0x0081A806, 0x0081E805,
0x00822805, 0x0082801A, 0x00834021, 0x00840002, 0x00840C04,
0x00842002, 0x00845001, 0x00845803, 0x00847806, 0x00849401,
0x00849C01, 0x0084A401, 0x0084B801, 0x0084E802, 0x00850005,
0x00852804, 0x00853C01, 0x00864264, 0x00900027, 0x0091000B,
0x0092704E, 0x00940200, 0x009C0475, 0x009E53B9, 0x00AD400A,
0x00B39406, 0x00B3BC03, 0x00B3E404, 0x00B3F802, 0x00B5C001,
0x00B5FC01, 0x00B7804F, 0x00B8C00C, 0x00BA001A, 0x00BA6C59,
0x00BC00D6, 0x00BFC00C, 0x00C00005, 0x00C02019, 0x00C0A807,
0x00C0D802, 0x00C0F403, 0x00C26404, 0x00C28001, 0x00C3EC01,
0x00C64002, 0x00C6580A, 0x00C70024, 0x00C8001F, 0x00C8A81E,
0x00C94001, 0x00C98020, 0x00CA2827, 0x00CB003F, 0x00CC0100,
0x01370040, 0x02924037, 0x0293F802, 0x02983403, 0x0299BC10,
0x029A7C01, 0x029BC008, 0x029C0017, 0x029C8002, 0x029E2402,
0x02A00801, 0x02A01801, 0x02A02C01, 0x02A08C09, 0x02A0D804,
0x02A1D004, 0x02A20002, 0x02A2D011, 0x02A33802, 0x02A38012,
0x02A3E003, 0x02A4980A, 0x02A51C0D, 0x02A57C01, 0x02A60004,
0x02A6CC1B, 0x02A77802, 0x02A8A40E, 0x02A90C01, 0x02A93002,
0x02A97004, 0x02A9DC03, 0x02A9EC01, 0x02AAC001, 0x02AAC803,
0x02AADC02, 0x02AAF802, 0x02AB0401, 0x02AB7802, 0x02ABAC07,
0x02ABD402, 0x02AF8C0B, 0x03600001, 0x036DFC02, 0x036FFC02,
0x037FFC01, 0x03EC7801, 0x03ECA401, 0x03EEC810, 0x03F4F802,
0x03F7F002, 0x03F8001A, 0x03F88007, 0x03F8C023, 0x03F95013,
0x03F9A004, 0x03FBFC01, 0x03FC040F, 0x03FC6807, 0x03FCEC06,
0x03FD6C0B, 0x03FF8007, 0x03FFA007, 0x03FFE405, 0x04040003,
0x0404DC09, 0x0405E411, 0x0406400C, 0x0407402E, 0x040E7C01,
0x040F4001, 0x04215C01, 0x04247C01, 0x0424FC01, 0x04280403,
0x04281402, 0x04283004, 0x0428E003, 0x0428FC01, 0x04294009,
0x0429FC01, 0x042CE407, 0x04400003, 0x0440E016, 0x04420003,
0x0442C012, 0x04440003, 0x04449C0E, 0x04450004, 0x04460003,
0x0446CC0E, 0x04471404, 0x045AAC0D, 0x0491C004, 0x05BD442E,
0x05BE3C04, 0x074000F6, 0x07440027, 0x0744A4B5, 0x07480046,
0x074C0057, 0x075B0401, 0x075B6C01, 0x075BEC01, 0x075C5401,
0x075CD401, 0x075D3C01, 0x075DBC01, 0x075E2401, 0x075EA401,
0x075F0C01, 0x07BBC002, 0x07C0002C, 0x07C0C064, 0x07C2800F,
0x07C2C40E, 0x07C3040F, 0x07C3440F, 0x07C4401F, 0x07C4C03C,
0x07C5C02B, 0x07C7981D, 0x07C8402B, 0x07C90009, 0x07C94002,
0x07CC0021, 0x07CCC006, 0x07CCDC46, 0x07CE0014, 0x07CE8025,
0x07CF1805, 0x07CF8011, 0x07D0003F, 0x07D10001, 0x07D108B6,
0x07D3E404, 0x07D4003E, 0x07D50004, 0x07D54018, 0x07D7EC46,
0x07D9140B, 0x07DA0046, 0x07DC0074, 0x38000401, 0x38008060,
0x380400F0,
};
static const unsigned int aAscii[4] = {
0xFFFFFFFF, 0xFC00FFFF, 0xF8000001, 0xF8000001,
};
if( c<128 ){
return ( (aAscii[c >> 5] & (1 << (c & 0x001F)))==0 );
}else if( c<(1<<22) ){
unsigned int key = (((unsigned int)c)<<10) | 0x000003FF;
int iRes = 0;
int iHi = sizeof(aEntry)/sizeof(aEntry[0]) - 1;
int iLo = 0;
while( iHi>=iLo ){
int iTest = (iHi + iLo) / 2;
if( key >= aEntry[iTest] ){
iRes = iTest;
iLo = iTest+1;
}else{
iHi = iTest-1;
}
}
assert( aEntry[0]<key );
assert( key>=aEntry[iRes] );
return (((unsigned int)c) >= ((aEntry[iRes]>>10) + (aEntry[iRes]&0x3FF)));
}
return 1;
}
/*
** If the argument is a codepoint corresponding to a lowercase letter
** in the ASCII range with a diacritic added, return the codepoint
** of the ASCII letter only. For example, if passed 235 - "LATIN
** SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS" - return 65 ("LATIN SMALL LETTER
** E"). The resuls of passing a codepoint that corresponds to an
** uppercase letter are undefined.
*/
static int remove_diacritic(int c){
unsigned short aDia[] = {
0, 1797, 1848, 1859, 1891, 1928, 1940, 1995,
2024, 2040, 2060, 2110, 2168, 2206, 2264, 2286,
2344, 2383, 2472, 2488, 2516, 2596, 2668, 2732,
2782, 2842, 2894, 2954, 2984, 3000, 3028, 3336,
3456, 3696, 3712, 3728, 3744, 3896, 3912, 3928,
3968, 4008, 4040, 4106, 4138, 4170, 4202, 4234,
4266, 4296, 4312, 4344, 4408, 4424, 4472, 4504,
6148, 6198, 6264, 6280, 6360, 6429, 6505, 6529,
61448, 61468, 61534, 61592, 61642, 61688, 61704, 61726,
61784, 61800, 61836, 61880, 61914, 61948, 61998, 62122,
62154, 62200, 62218, 62302, 62364, 62442, 62478, 62536,
62554, 62584, 62604, 62640, 62648, 62656, 62664, 62730,
62924, 63050, 63082, 63274, 63390,
};
char aChar[] = {
'\0', 'a', 'c', 'e', 'i', 'n', 'o', 'u', 'y', 'y', 'a', 'c',
'd', 'e', 'e', 'g', 'h', 'i', 'j', 'k', 'l', 'n', 'o', 'r',
's', 't', 'u', 'u', 'w', 'y', 'z', 'o', 'u', 'a', 'i', 'o',
'u', 'g', 'k', 'o', 'j', 'g', 'n', 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', 'r',
'u', 's', 't', 'h', 'a', 'e', 'o', 'y', '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0',
'\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 'a', 'b', 'd', 'd', 'e', 'f', 'g', 'h',
'h', 'i', 'k', 'l', 'l', 'm', 'n', 'p', 'r', 'r', 's', 't',
'u', 'v', 'w', 'w', 'x', 'y', 'z', 'h', 't', 'w', 'y', 'a',
'e', 'i', 'o', 'u', 'y',
};
unsigned int key = (((unsigned int)c)<<3) | 0x00000007;
int iRes = 0;
int iHi = sizeof(aDia)/sizeof(aDia[0]) - 1;
int iLo = 0;
while( iHi>=iLo ){
int iTest = (iHi + iLo) / 2;
if( key >= aDia[iTest] ){
iRes = iTest;
iLo = iTest+1;
}else{
iHi = iTest-1;
}
}
assert( key>=aDia[iRes] );
return ((c > (aDia[iRes]>>3) + (aDia[iRes]&0x07)) ? c : (int)aChar[iRes]);
}
/*
** Return true if the argument interpreted as a unicode codepoint
** is a diacritical modifier character.
*/
int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(int c){
unsigned int mask0 = 0x08029FDF;
unsigned int mask1 = 0x000361F8;
if( c<768 || c>817 ) return 0;
return (c < 768+32) ?
(mask0 & (1 << (c-768))) :
(mask1 & (1 << (c-768-32)));
}
/*
** Interpret the argument as a unicode codepoint. If the codepoint
** is an upper case character that has a lower case equivalent,
** return the codepoint corresponding to the lower case version.
** Otherwise, return a copy of the argument.
**
** The results are undefined if the value passed to this function
** is less than zero.
*/
int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
/* Each entry in the following array defines a rule for folding a range
** of codepoints to lower case. The rule applies to a range of nRange
** codepoints starting at codepoint iCode.
**
** If the least significant bit in flags is clear, then the rule applies
** to all nRange codepoints (i.e. all nRange codepoints are upper case and
** need to be folded). Or, if it is set, then the rule only applies to
** every second codepoint in the range, starting with codepoint C.
**
** The 7 most significant bits in flags are an index into the aiOff[]
** array. If a specific codepoint C does require folding, then its lower
** case equivalent is ((C + aiOff[flags>>1]) & 0xFFFF).
**
** The contents of this array are generated by parsing the CaseFolding.txt
** file distributed as part of the "Unicode Character Database". See
** http://www.unicode.org for details.
*/
static const struct TableEntry {
unsigned short iCode;
unsigned char flags;
unsigned char nRange;
} aEntry[] = {
{65, 14, 26}, {181, 64, 1}, {192, 14, 23},
{216, 14, 7}, {256, 1, 48}, {306, 1, 6},
{313, 1, 16}, {330, 1, 46}, {376, 116, 1},
{377, 1, 6}, {383, 104, 1}, {385, 50, 1},
{386, 1, 4}, {390, 44, 1}, {391, 0, 1},
{393, 42, 2}, {395, 0, 1}, {398, 32, 1},
{399, 38, 1}, {400, 40, 1}, {401, 0, 1},
{403, 42, 1}, {404, 46, 1}, {406, 52, 1},
{407, 48, 1}, {408, 0, 1}, {412, 52, 1},
{413, 54, 1}, {415, 56, 1}, {416, 1, 6},
{422, 60, 1}, {423, 0, 1}, {425, 60, 1},
{428, 0, 1}, {430, 60, 1}, {431, 0, 1},
{433, 58, 2}, {435, 1, 4}, {439, 62, 1},
{440, 0, 1}, {444, 0, 1}, {452, 2, 1},
{453, 0, 1}, {455, 2, 1}, {456, 0, 1},
{458, 2, 1}, {459, 1, 18}, {478, 1, 18},
{497, 2, 1}, {498, 1, 4}, {502, 122, 1},
{503, 134, 1}, {504, 1, 40}, {544, 110, 1},
{546, 1, 18}, {570, 70, 1}, {571, 0, 1},
{573, 108, 1}, {574, 68, 1}, {577, 0, 1},
{579, 106, 1}, {580, 28, 1}, {581, 30, 1},
{582, 1, 10}, {837, 36, 1}, {880, 1, 4},
{886, 0, 1}, {902, 18, 1}, {904, 16, 3},
{908, 26, 1}, {910, 24, 2}, {913, 14, 17},
{931, 14, 9}, {962, 0, 1}, {975, 4, 1},
{976, 140, 1}, {977, 142, 1}, {981, 146, 1},
{982, 144, 1}, {984, 1, 24}, {1008, 136, 1},
{1009, 138, 1}, {1012, 130, 1}, {1013, 128, 1},
{1015, 0, 1}, {1017, 152, 1}, {1018, 0, 1},
{1021, 110, 3}, {1024, 34, 16}, {1040, 14, 32},
{1120, 1, 34}, {1162, 1, 54}, {1216, 6, 1},
{1217, 1, 14}, {1232, 1, 88}, {1329, 22, 38},
{4256, 66, 38}, {4295, 66, 1}, {4301, 66, 1},
{7680, 1, 150}, {7835, 132, 1}, {7838, 96, 1},
{7840, 1, 96}, {7944, 150, 8}, {7960, 150, 6},
{7976, 150, 8}, {7992, 150, 8}, {8008, 150, 6},
{8025, 151, 8}, {8040, 150, 8}, {8072, 150, 8},
{8088, 150, 8}, {8104, 150, 8}, {8120, 150, 2},
{8122, 126, 2}, {8124, 148, 1}, {8126, 100, 1},
{8136, 124, 4}, {8140, 148, 1}, {8152, 150, 2},
{8154, 120, 2}, {8168, 150, 2}, {8170, 118, 2},
{8172, 152, 1}, {8184, 112, 2}, {8186, 114, 2},
{8188, 148, 1}, {8486, 98, 1}, {8490, 92, 1},
{8491, 94, 1}, {8498, 12, 1}, {8544, 8, 16},
{8579, 0, 1}, {9398, 10, 26}, {11264, 22, 47},
{11360, 0, 1}, {11362, 88, 1}, {11363, 102, 1},
{11364, 90, 1}, {11367, 1, 6}, {11373, 84, 1},
{11374, 86, 1}, {11375, 80, 1}, {11376, 82, 1},
{11378, 0, 1}, {11381, 0, 1}, {11390, 78, 2},
{11392, 1, 100}, {11499, 1, 4}, {11506, 0, 1},
{42560, 1, 46}, {42624, 1, 24}, {42786, 1, 14},
{42802, 1, 62}, {42873, 1, 4}, {42877, 76, 1},
{42878, 1, 10}, {42891, 0, 1}, {42893, 74, 1},
{42896, 1, 4}, {42912, 1, 10}, {42922, 72, 1},
{65313, 14, 26},
};
static const unsigned short aiOff[] = {
1, 2, 8, 15, 16, 26, 28, 32,
37, 38, 40, 48, 63, 64, 69, 71,
79, 80, 116, 202, 203, 205, 206, 207,
209, 210, 211, 213, 214, 217, 218, 219,
775, 7264, 10792, 10795, 23228, 23256, 30204, 54721,
54753, 54754, 54756, 54787, 54793, 54809, 57153, 57274,
57921, 58019, 58363, 61722, 65268, 65341, 65373, 65406,
65408, 65410, 65415, 65424, 65436, 65439, 65450, 65462,
65472, 65476, 65478, 65480, 65482, 65488, 65506, 65511,
65514, 65521, 65527, 65528, 65529,
};
int ret = c;
assert( c>=0 );
assert( sizeof(unsigned short)==2 && sizeof(unsigned char)==1 );
if( c<128 ){
if( c>='A' && c<='Z' ) ret = c + ('a' - 'A');
}else if( c<65536 ){
int iHi = sizeof(aEntry)/sizeof(aEntry[0]) - 1;
int iLo = 0;
int iRes = -1;
while( iHi>=iLo ){
int iTest = (iHi + iLo) / 2;
int cmp = (c - aEntry[iTest].iCode);
if( cmp>=0 ){
iRes = iTest;
iLo = iTest+1;
}else{
iHi = iTest-1;
}
}
assert( iRes<0 || c>=aEntry[iRes].iCode );
if( iRes>=0 ){
const struct TableEntry *p = &aEntry[iRes];
if( c<(p->iCode + p->nRange) && 0==(0x01 & p->flags & (p->iCode ^ c)) ){
ret = (c + (aiOff[p->flags>>1])) & 0x0000FFFF;
assert( ret>0 );
}
}
if( bRemoveDiacritic ) ret = remove_diacritic(ret);
}
else if( c>=66560 && c<66600 ){
ret = c + 40;
}
return ret;
}
#endif /* defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4) */
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE) */

5676
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3_write.c
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

122
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/fts3speed.tcl
View File

@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------
# This script contains several sub-programs used to test FTS3/FTS4
# performance. It does not run the queries directly, but generates SQL
# scripts that can be run using the shell tool.
#
# The following cases are tested:
#
# 1. Inserting documents into an FTS3 table.
# 2. Optimizing an FTS3 table (i.e. "INSERT INTO t1 VALUES('optimize')").
# 3. Deleting documents from an FTS3 table.
# 4. Querying FTS3 tables.
#
# Number of tokens in vocabulary. And number of tokens in each document.
#
set VOCAB_SIZE 2000
set DOC_SIZE 100
set NUM_INSERTS 100000
set NUM_SELECTS 1000
# Force everything in this script to be deterministic.
#
expr {srand(0)}
proc usage {} {
puts stderr "Usage: $::argv0 <rows> <selects>"
exit -1
}
proc sql {sql} {
puts $::fd $sql
}
# Return a list of $nWord randomly generated tokens each between 2 and 10
# characters in length.
#
proc build_vocab {nWord} {
set ret [list]
set chars [list a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z]
for {set i 0} {$i<$nWord} {incr i} {
set len [expr {int((rand()*9.0)+2)}]
set term ""
for {set j 0} {$j<$len} {incr j} {
append term [lindex $chars [expr {int(rand()*[llength $chars])}]]
}
lappend ret $term
}
set ret
}
proc select_term {} {
set n [llength $::vocab]
set t [expr int(rand()*$n*3)]
if {$t>=2*$n} { set t [expr {($t-2*$n)/100}] }
if {$t>=$n} { set t [expr {($t-$n)/10}] }
lindex $::vocab $t
}
proc select_doc {nTerm} {
set ret [list]
for {set i 0} {$i<$nTerm} {incr i} {
lappend ret [select_term]
}
set ret
}
proc test_1 {nInsert} {
sql "PRAGMA synchronous = OFF;"
sql "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS t1;"
sql "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE t1 USING fts4;"
for {set i 0} {$i < $nInsert} {incr i} {
set doc [select_doc $::DOC_SIZE]
sql "INSERT INTO t1 VALUES('$doc');"
}
}
proc test_2 {} {
sql "INSERT INTO t1(t1) VALUES('optimize');"
}
proc test_3 {nSelect} {
for {set i 0} {$i < $nSelect} {incr i} {
sql "SELECT count(*) FROM t1 WHERE t1 MATCH '[select_term]';"
}
}
proc test_4 {nSelect} {
for {set i 0} {$i < $nSelect} {incr i} {
sql "SELECT count(*) FROM t1 WHERE t1 MATCH '[select_term] [select_term]';"
}
}
if {[llength $argv]!=0} usage
set ::vocab [build_vocab $::VOCAB_SIZE]
set ::fd [open fts3speed_insert.sql w]
test_1 $NUM_INSERTS
close $::fd
set ::fd [open fts3speed_select.sql w]
test_3 $NUM_SELECTS
close $::fd
set ::fd [open fts3speed_select2.sql w]
test_4 $NUM_SELECTS
close $::fd
set ::fd [open fts3speed_optimize.sql w]
test_2
close $::fd
puts "Success. Created files:"
puts " fts3speed_insert.sql"
puts " fts3speed_select.sql"
puts " fts3speed_select2.sql"
puts " fts3speed_optimize.sql"

115
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/mkfts3amal.tcl
View File

@ -1,115 +0,0 @@
#!/usr/bin/tclsh
#
# This script builds a single C code file holding all of FTS3 code.
# The name of the output file is fts3amal.c. To build this file,
# first do:
#
# make target_source
#
# The make target above moves all of the source code files into
# a subdirectory named "tsrc". (This script expects to find the files
# there and will not work if they are not found.)
#
# After the "tsrc" directory has been created and populated, run
# this script:
#
# tclsh mkfts3amal.tcl
#
# The amalgamated FTS3 code will be written into fts3amal.c
#
# Open the output file and write a header comment at the beginning
# of the file.
#
set out [open fts3amal.c w]
set today [clock format [clock seconds] -format "%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S UTC" -gmt 1]
puts $out [subst \
{/******************************************************************************
** This file is an amalgamation of separate C source files from the SQLite
** Full Text Search extension 2 (fts3). By combining all the individual C
** code files into this single large file, the entire code can be compiled
** as a one translation unit. This allows many compilers to do optimizations
** that would not be possible if the files were compiled separately. It also
** makes the code easier to import into other projects.
**
** This amalgamation was generated on $today.
*/}]
# These are the header files used by FTS3. The first time any of these
# files are seen in a #include statement in the C code, include the complete
# text of the file in-line. The file only needs to be included once.
#
foreach hdr {
fts3.h
fts3_hash.h
fts3_tokenizer.h
sqlite3.h
sqlite3ext.h
} {
set available_hdr($hdr) 1
}
# 78 stars used for comment formatting.
set s78 \
{*****************************************************************************}
# Insert a comment into the code
#
proc section_comment {text} {
global out s78
set n [string length $text]
set nstar [expr {60 - $n}]
set stars [string range $s78 0 $nstar]
puts $out "/************** $text $stars/"
}
# Read the source file named $filename and write it into the
# sqlite3.c output file. If any #include statements are seen,
# process them approprately.
#
proc copy_file {filename} {
global seen_hdr available_hdr out
set tail [file tail $filename]
section_comment "Begin file $tail"
set in [open $filename r]
while {![eof $in]} {
set line [gets $in]
if {[regexp {^#\s*include\s+["<]([^">]+)[">]} $line all hdr]} {
if {[info exists available_hdr($hdr)]} {
if {$available_hdr($hdr)} {
section_comment "Include $hdr in the middle of $tail"
copy_file tsrc/$hdr
section_comment "Continuing where we left off in $tail"
}
} elseif {![info exists seen_hdr($hdr)]} {
set seen_hdr($hdr) 1
puts $out $line
}
} elseif {[regexp {^#ifdef __cplusplus} $line]} {
puts $out "#if 0"
} elseif {[regexp {^#line} $line]} {
# Skip #line directives.
} else {
puts $out $line
}
}
close $in
section_comment "End of $tail"
}
# Process the source files. Process files containing commonly
# used subroutines first in order to help the compiler find
# inlining opportunities.
#
foreach file {
fts3.c
fts3_hash.c
fts3_porter.c
fts3_tokenizer.c
fts3_tokenizer1.c
} {
copy_file tsrc/$file
}
close $out

875
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/tool/fts3view.c
View File

@ -1,875 +0,0 @@
/*
** This program is a debugging and analysis utility that displays
** information about an FTS3 or FTS4 index.
**
** Link this program against the SQLite3 amalgamation with the
** SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4 compile-time option. Then run it as:
**
** fts3view DATABASE
**
** to get a list of all FTS3/4 tables in DATABASE, or do
**
** fts3view DATABASE TABLE COMMAND ....
**
** to see various aspects of the TABLE table. Type fts3view with no
** arguments for a list of available COMMANDs.
*/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include "sqlite3.h"
/*
** Extra command-line arguments:
*/
int nExtra;
char **azExtra;
/*
** Look for a command-line argument.
*/
const char *findOption(const char *zName, int hasArg, const char *zDefault){
int i;
const char *zResult = zDefault;
for(i=0; i<nExtra; i++){
const char *z = azExtra[i];
while( z[0]=='-' ) z++;
if( strcmp(z, zName)==0 ){
int j = 1;
if( hasArg==0 || i==nExtra-1 ) j = 0;
zResult = azExtra[i+j];
while( i+j<nExtra ){
azExtra[i] = azExtra[i+j+1];
i++;
}
break;
}
}
return zResult;
}
/*
** Prepare an SQL query
*/
static sqlite3_stmt *prepare(sqlite3 *db, const char *zFormat, ...){
va_list ap;
char *zSql;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
int rc;
va_start(ap, zFormat);
zSql = sqlite3_vmprintf(zFormat, ap);
va_end(ap);
rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc ){
fprintf(stderr, "Error: %s\nSQL: %s\n", sqlite3_errmsg(db), zSql);
exit(1);
}
sqlite3_free(zSql);
return pStmt;
}
/*
** Run an SQL statement
*/
static int runSql(sqlite3 *db, const char *zFormat, ...){
va_list ap;
char *zSql;
int rc;
va_start(ap, zFormat);
zSql = sqlite3_vmprintf(zFormat, ap);
rc = sqlite3_exec(db, zSql, 0, 0, 0);
va_end(ap);
return rc;
}
/*
** Show the table schema
*/
static void showSchema(sqlite3 *db, const char *zTab){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT sql FROM sqlite_master"
" WHERE name LIKE '%q%%'"
" ORDER BY 1",
zTab);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
printf("%s;\n", sqlite3_column_text(pStmt, 0));
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
pStmt = prepare(db, "PRAGMA page_size");
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
printf("PRAGMA page_size=%s;\n", sqlite3_column_text(pStmt, 0));
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
pStmt = prepare(db, "PRAGMA journal_mode");
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
printf("PRAGMA journal_mode=%s;\n", sqlite3_column_text(pStmt, 0));
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
pStmt = prepare(db, "PRAGMA auto_vacuum");
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
const char *zType = "???";
switch( sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0) ){
case 0: zType = "OFF"; break;
case 1: zType = "FULL"; break;
case 2: zType = "INCREMENTAL"; break;
}
printf("PRAGMA auto_vacuum=%s;\n", zType);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
pStmt = prepare(db, "PRAGMA encoding");
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
printf("PRAGMA encoding=%s;\n", sqlite3_column_text(pStmt, 0));
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
/*
** Read a 64-bit variable-length integer from memory starting at p[0].
** Return the number of bytes read, or 0 on error.
** The value is stored in *v.
*/
int getVarint(const unsigned char *p, sqlite_int64 *v){
const unsigned char *q = p;
sqlite_uint64 x = 0, y = 1;
while( (*q&0x80)==0x80 && q-(unsigned char *)p<9 ){
x += y * (*q++ & 0x7f);
y <<= 7;
}
x += y * (*q++);
*v = (sqlite_int64) x;
return (int) (q - (unsigned char *)p);
}
/* Show the content of the %_stat table
*/
static void showStat(sqlite3 *db, const char *zTab){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT id, value FROM '%q_stat'", zTab);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
printf("stat[%d] =", sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0));
switch( sqlite3_column_type(pStmt, 1) ){
case SQLITE_INTEGER: {
printf(" %d\n", sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 1));
break;
}
case SQLITE_BLOB: {
unsigned char *x = (unsigned char*)sqlite3_column_blob(pStmt, 1);
int len = sqlite3_column_bytes(pStmt, 1);
int i = 0;
sqlite3_int64 v;
while( i<len ){
i += getVarint(x, &v);
printf(" %lld", v);
}
printf("\n");
break;
}
}
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
/*
** Report on the vocabulary. This creates an fts4aux table with a random
** name, but deletes it in the end.
*/
static void showVocabulary(sqlite3 *db, const char *zTab){
char *zAux;
sqlite3_uint64 r;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
int nDoc = 0;
int nToken = 0;
int nOccurrence = 0;
int nTop;
int n, i;
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(r), &r);
zAux = sqlite3_mprintf("viewer_%llx", zTab, r);
runSql(db, "BEGIN");
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT count(*) FROM %Q", zTab);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
nDoc = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
printf("Number of documents...................... %9d\n", nDoc);
runSql(db, "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE %s USING fts4aux(%Q)", zAux, zTab);
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT count(*), sum(occurrences) FROM %s WHERE col='*'",
zAux);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
nToken = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
nOccurrence = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 1);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
printf("Total tokens in all documents............ %9d\n", nOccurrence);
printf("Total number of distinct tokens.......... %9d\n", nToken);
if( nToken==0 ) goto end_vocab;
n = 0;
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT count(*) FROM %s"
" WHERE col='*' AND occurrences==1", zAux);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
n = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
printf("Tokens used exactly once................. %9d %5.2f%%\n",
n, n*100.0/nToken);
n = 0;
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT count(*) FROM %s"
" WHERE col='*' AND documents==1", zAux);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
n = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
printf("Tokens used in only one document......... %9d %5.2f%%\n",
n, n*100.0/nToken);
if( nDoc>=2000 ){
n = 0;
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT count(*) FROM %s"
" WHERE col='*' AND occurrences<=%d", zAux, nDoc/1000);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
n = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
printf("Tokens used in 0.1%% or less of docs...... %9d %5.2f%%\n",
n, n*100.0/nToken);
}
if( nDoc>=200 ){
n = 0;
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT count(*) FROM %s"
" WHERE col='*' AND occurrences<=%d", zAux, nDoc/100);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
n = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
printf("Tokens used in 1%% or less of docs........ %9d %5.2f%%\n",
n, n*100.0/nToken);
}
nTop = atoi(findOption("top", 1, "25"));
printf("The %d most common tokens:\n", nTop);
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT term, documents FROM %s"
" WHERE col='*'"
" ORDER BY documents DESC, term"
" LIMIT %d", zAux, nTop);
i = 0;
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
i++;
n = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 1);
printf(" %2d. %-30s %9d docs %5.2f%%\n", i,
sqlite3_column_text(pStmt, 0), n, n*100.0/nDoc);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
end_vocab:
runSql(db, "ROLLBACK");
sqlite3_free(zAux);
}
/*
** Report on the number and sizes of segments
*/
static void showSegmentStats(sqlite3 *db, const char *zTab){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
int nSeg = 0;
sqlite3_int64 szSeg = 0, mxSeg = 0;
int nIdx = 0;
sqlite3_int64 szIdx = 0, mxIdx = 0;
int nRoot = 0;
sqlite3_int64 szRoot = 0, mxRoot = 0;
sqlite3_int64 mx;
int nLeaf;
int n;
int pgsz;
int mxLevel;
int i;
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT count(*), sum(length(block)), max(length(block))"
" FROM '%q_segments'",
zTab);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
nSeg = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
szSeg = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 1);
mxSeg = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 2);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT count(*), sum(length(block)), max(length(block))"
" FROM '%q_segments' a JOIN '%q_segdir' b"
" WHERE a.blockid BETWEEN b.leaves_end_block+1 AND b.end_block",
zTab, zTab);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
nIdx = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
szIdx = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 1);
mxIdx = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 2);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT count(*), sum(length(root)), max(length(root))"
" FROM '%q_segdir'",
zTab);
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
nRoot = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
szRoot = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 1);
mxRoot = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 2);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
printf("Number of segments....................... %9d\n", nSeg+nRoot);
printf("Number of leaf segments.................. %9d\n", nSeg-nIdx);
printf("Number of index segments................. %9d\n", nIdx);
printf("Number of root segments.................. %9d\n", nRoot);
printf("Total size of all segments............... %9lld\n", szSeg+szRoot);
printf("Total size of all leaf segments.......... %9lld\n", szSeg-szIdx);
printf("Total size of all index segments......... %9lld\n", szIdx);
printf("Total size of all root segments.......... %9lld\n", szRoot);
if( nSeg>0 ){
printf("Average size of all segments............. %11.1f\n",
(double)(szSeg+szRoot)/(double)(nSeg+nRoot));
printf("Average size of leaf segments............ %11.1f\n",
(double)(szSeg-szIdx)/(double)(nSeg-nIdx));
}
if( nIdx>0 ){
printf("Average size of index segments........... %11.1f\n",
(double)szIdx/(double)nIdx);
}
if( nRoot>0 ){
printf("Average size of root segments............ %11.1f\n",
(double)szRoot/(double)nRoot);
}
mx = mxSeg;
if( mx<mxRoot ) mx = mxRoot;
printf("Maximum segment size..................... %9lld\n", mx);
printf("Maximum index segment size............... %9lld\n", mxIdx);
printf("Maximum root segment size................ %9lld\n", mxRoot);
pStmt = prepare(db, "PRAGMA page_size");
pgsz = 1024;
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
pgsz = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
printf("Database page size....................... %9d\n", pgsz);
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT count(*)"
" FROM '%q_segments' a JOIN '%q_segdir' b"
" WHERE a.blockid BETWEEN b.start_block AND b.leaves_end_block"
" AND length(a.block)>%d",
zTab, zTab, pgsz-45);
n = 0;
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
n = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
nLeaf = nSeg - nIdx;
printf("Leaf segments larger than %5d bytes.... %9d %5.2f%%\n",
pgsz-45, n, nLeaf>0 ? n*100.0/nLeaf : 0.0);
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT max(level%%1024) FROM '%q_segdir'", zTab);
mxLevel = 0;
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
mxLevel = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
for(i=0; i<=mxLevel; i++){
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT count(*), sum(len), avg(len), max(len), sum(len>%d),"
" count(distinct idx)"
" FROM (SELECT length(a.block) AS len, idx"
" FROM '%q_segments' a JOIN '%q_segdir' b"
" WHERE (a.blockid BETWEEN b.start_block"
" AND b.leaves_end_block)"
" AND (b.level%%1024)==%d)",
pgsz-45, zTab, zTab, i);
if( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW
&& (nLeaf = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0))>0
){
nIdx = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 5);
sqlite3_int64 sz;
printf("For level %d:\n", i);
printf(" Number of indexes...................... %9d\n", nIdx);
printf(" Number of leaf segments................ %9d\n", nLeaf);
if( nIdx>1 ){
printf(" Average leaf segments per index........ %11.1f\n",
(double)nLeaf/(double)nIdx);
}
printf(" Total size of all leaf segments........ %9lld\n",
(sz = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 1)));
printf(" Average size of leaf segments.......... %11.1f\n",
sqlite3_column_double(pStmt, 2));
if( nIdx>1 ){
printf(" Average leaf segment size per index.... %11.1f\n",
(double)sz/(double)nIdx);
}
printf(" Maximum leaf segment size.............. %9lld\n",
sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 3));
n = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 4);
printf(" Leaf segments larger than %5d bytes.. %9d %5.2f%%\n",
pgsz-45, n, n*100.0/nLeaf);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
}
/*
** Print a single "tree" line of the segdir map output.
*/
static void printTreeLine(sqlite3_int64 iLower, sqlite3_int64 iUpper){
printf(" tree %9lld", iLower);
if( iUpper>iLower ){
printf(" thru %9lld (%lld blocks)", iUpper, iUpper-iLower+1);
}
printf("\n");
}
/*
** Check to see if the block of a %_segments entry is NULL.
*/
static int isNullSegment(sqlite3 *db, const char *zTab, sqlite3_int64 iBlockId){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
int rc = 1;
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT block IS NULL FROM '%q_segments'"
" WHERE blockid=%lld", zTab, iBlockId);
if( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
rc = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
return rc;
}
/*
** Show a map of segments derived from the %_segdir table.
*/
static void showSegdirMap(sqlite3 *db, const char *zTab){
int mxIndex, iIndex;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt2 = 0;
int prevLevel;
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT max(level/1024) FROM '%q_segdir'", zTab);
if( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
mxIndex = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0);
}else{
mxIndex = 0;
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
printf("Number of inverted indices............... %3d\n", mxIndex+1);
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT level, idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, rowid"
" FROM '%q_segdir'"
" WHERE level/1024==?"
" ORDER BY level DESC, idx",
zTab);
pStmt2 = prepare(db,
"SELECT blockid FROM '%q_segments'"
" WHERE blockid BETWEEN ? AND ? ORDER BY blockid",
zTab);
for(iIndex=0; iIndex<=mxIndex; iIndex++){
if( mxIndex>0 ){
printf("**************************** Index %d "
"****************************\n", iIndex);
}
sqlite3_bind_int(pStmt, 1, iIndex);
prevLevel = -1;
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
int iLevel = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 0)%1024;
int iIdx = sqlite3_column_int(pStmt, 1);
sqlite3_int64 iStart = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 2);
sqlite3_int64 iLEnd = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 3);
sqlite3_int64 iEnd = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 4);
char rtag[20];
if( iLevel!=prevLevel ){
printf("level %2d idx %2d", iLevel, iIdx);
prevLevel = iLevel;
}else{
printf(" idx %2d", iIdx);
}
sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(rtag), rtag, "r%lld",
sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt,5));
printf(" root %9s\n", rtag);
if( iLEnd>iStart ){
sqlite3_int64 iLower, iPrev = 0, iX;
if( iLEnd+1<=iEnd ){
sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt2, 1, iLEnd+1);
sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt2, 2, iEnd);
iLower = -1;
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt2)==SQLITE_ROW ){
iX = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt2, 0);
if( iLower<0 ){
iLower = iPrev = iX;
}else if( iX==iPrev+1 ){
iPrev = iX;
}else{
printTreeLine(iLower, iPrev);
iLower = iPrev = iX;
}
}
sqlite3_reset(pStmt2);
if( iLower>=0 ){
if( iLower==iPrev && iLower==iEnd
&& isNullSegment(db,zTab,iLower)
){
printf(" null %9lld\n", iLower);
}else{
printTreeLine(iLower, iPrev);
}
}
}
printf(" leaves %9lld thru %9lld (%lld blocks)\n",
iStart, iLEnd, iLEnd - iStart + 1);
}
}
sqlite3_reset(pStmt);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt2);
}
/*
** Decode a single segment block and display the results on stdout.
*/
static void decodeSegment(
const unsigned char *aData, /* Content to print */
int nData /* Number of bytes of content */
){
sqlite3_int64 iChild = 0;
sqlite3_int64 iPrefix;
sqlite3_int64 nTerm;
sqlite3_int64 n;
sqlite3_int64 iDocsz;
int iHeight;
sqlite3_int64 i = 0;
int cnt = 0;
char zTerm[1000];
i += getVarint(aData, &n);
iHeight = (int)n;
printf("height: %d\n", iHeight);
if( iHeight>0 ){
i += getVarint(aData+i, &iChild);
printf("left-child: %lld\n", iChild);
}
while( i<nData ){
if( (cnt++)>0 ){
i += getVarint(aData+i, &iPrefix);
}else{
iPrefix = 0;
}
i += getVarint(aData+i, &nTerm);
if( iPrefix+nTerm+1 >= sizeof(zTerm) ){
fprintf(stderr, "term to long\n");
exit(1);
}
memcpy(zTerm+iPrefix, aData+i, (size_t)nTerm);
zTerm[iPrefix+nTerm] = 0;
i += nTerm;
if( iHeight==0 ){
i += getVarint(aData+i, &iDocsz);
printf("term: %-25s doclist %7lld bytes offset %lld\n", zTerm, iDocsz, i);
i += iDocsz;
}else{
printf("term: %-25s child %lld\n", zTerm, ++iChild);
}
}
}
/*
** Print a a blob as hex and ascii.
*/
static void printBlob(
const unsigned char *aData, /* Content to print */
int nData /* Number of bytes of content */
){
int i, j;
const char *zOfstFmt;
const int perLine = 16;
if( (nData&~0xfff)==0 ){
zOfstFmt = " %03x: ";
}else if( (nData&~0xffff)==0 ){
zOfstFmt = " %04x: ";
}else if( (nData&~0xfffff)==0 ){
zOfstFmt = " %05x: ";
}else if( (nData&~0xffffff)==0 ){
zOfstFmt = " %06x: ";
}else{
zOfstFmt = " %08x: ";
}
for(i=0; i<nData; i += perLine){
fprintf(stdout, zOfstFmt, i);
for(j=0; j<perLine; j++){
if( i+j>nData ){
fprintf(stdout, " ");
}else{
fprintf(stdout,"%02x ", aData[i+j]);
}
}
for(j=0; j<perLine; j++){
if( i+j>nData ){
fprintf(stdout, " ");
}else{
fprintf(stdout,"%c", isprint(aData[i+j]) ? aData[i+j] : '.');
}
}
fprintf(stdout,"\n");
}
}
/*
** Convert text to a 64-bit integer
*/
static sqlite3_int64 atoi64(const char *z){
sqlite3_int64 v = 0;
while( z[0]>='0' && z[0]<='9' ){
v = v*10 + z[0] - '0';
z++;
}
return v;
}
/*
** Return a prepared statement which, when stepped, will return in its
** first column the blob associated with segment zId. If zId begins with
** 'r' then it is a rowid of a %_segdir entry. Otherwise it is a
** %_segment entry.
*/
static sqlite3_stmt *prepareToGetSegment(
sqlite3 *db, /* The database */
const char *zTab, /* The FTS3/4 table name */
const char *zId /* ID of the segment to open */
){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
if( zId[0]=='r' ){
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT root FROM '%q_segdir' WHERE rowid=%lld",
zTab, atoi64(zId+1));
}else{
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT block FROM '%q_segments' WHERE blockid=%lld",
zTab, atoi64(zId));
}
return pStmt;
}
/*
** Print the content of a segment or of the root of a segdir. The segment
** or root is identified by azExtra[0]. If the first character of azExtra[0]
** is 'r' then the remainder is the integer rowid of the %_segdir entry.
** If the first character of azExtra[0] is not 'r' then, then all of
** azExtra[0] is an integer which is the block number.
**
** If the --raw option is present in azExtra, then a hex dump is provided.
** Otherwise a decoding is shown.
*/
static void showSegment(sqlite3 *db, const char *zTab){
const unsigned char *aData;
int nData;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
pStmt = prepareToGetSegment(db, zTab, azExtra[0]);
if( sqlite3_step(pStmt)!=SQLITE_ROW ){
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
return;
}
nData = sqlite3_column_bytes(pStmt, 0);
aData = sqlite3_column_blob(pStmt, 0);
printf("Segment %s of size %d bytes:\n", azExtra[0], nData);
if( findOption("raw", 0, 0)!=0 ){
printBlob(aData, nData);
}else{
decodeSegment(aData, nData);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
/*
** Decode a single doclist and display the results on stdout.
*/
static void decodeDoclist(
const unsigned char *aData, /* Content to print */
int nData /* Number of bytes of content */
){
sqlite3_int64 iPrevDocid = 0;
sqlite3_int64 iDocid;
sqlite3_int64 iPos;
sqlite3_int64 iPrevPos = 0;
sqlite3_int64 iCol;
int i = 0;
while( i<nData ){
i += getVarint(aData+i, &iDocid);
printf("docid %lld col0", iDocid+iPrevDocid);
iPrevDocid += iDocid;
iPrevPos = 0;
while( 1 ){
i += getVarint(aData+i, &iPos);
if( iPos==1 ){
i += getVarint(aData+i, &iCol);
printf(" col%lld", iCol);
iPrevPos = 0;
}else if( iPos==0 ){
printf("\n");
break;
}else{
iPrevPos += iPos - 2;
printf(" %lld", iPrevPos);
}
}
}
}
/*
** Print the content of a doclist. The segment or segdir-root is
** identified by azExtra[0]. If the first character of azExtra[0]
** is 'r' then the remainder is the integer rowid of the %_segdir entry.
** If the first character of azExtra[0] is not 'r' then, then all of
** azExtra[0] is an integer which is the block number. The offset
** into the segment is identified by azExtra[1]. The size of the doclist
** is azExtra[2].
**
** If the --raw option is present in azExtra, then a hex dump is provided.
** Otherwise a decoding is shown.
*/
static void showDoclist(sqlite3 *db, const char *zTab){
const unsigned char *aData;
sqlite3_int64 offset;
int nData;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
offset = atoi64(azExtra[1]);
nData = atoi(azExtra[2]);
pStmt = prepareToGetSegment(db, zTab, azExtra[0]);
if( sqlite3_step(pStmt)!=SQLITE_ROW ){
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
return;
}
aData = sqlite3_column_blob(pStmt, 0);
printf("Doclist at %s offset %lld of size %d bytes:\n",
azExtra[0], offset, nData);
if( findOption("raw", 0, 0)!=0 ){
printBlob(aData+offset, nData);
}else{
decodeDoclist(aData+offset, nData);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
/*
** Show the top N largest segments
*/
static void listBigSegments(sqlite3 *db, const char *zTab){
int nTop, i;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
sqlite3_int64 sz;
sqlite3_int64 id;
nTop = atoi(findOption("top", 1, "25"));
printf("The %d largest segments:\n", nTop);
pStmt = prepare(db,
"SELECT blockid, length(block) AS len FROM '%q_segments'"
" ORDER BY 2 DESC, 1"
" LIMIT %d", zTab, nTop);
i = 0;
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
i++;
id = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 0);
sz = sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 1);
printf(" %2d. %9lld size %lld\n", i, id, sz);
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
}
static void usage(const char *argv0){
fprintf(stderr, "Usage: %s DATABASE\n"
" or: %s DATABASE FTS3TABLE ARGS...\n", argv0, argv0);
fprintf(stderr,
"ARGS:\n"
" big-segments [--top N] show the largest segments\n"
" doclist BLOCKID OFFSET SIZE [--raw] Decode a doclist\n"
" schema FTS table schema\n"
" segdir directory of segments\n"
" segment BLOCKID [--raw] content of a segment\n"
" segment-stats info on segment sizes\n"
" stat the %%_stat table\n"
" vocabulary [--top N] document vocabulary\n"
);
exit(1);
}
int main(int argc, char **argv){
sqlite3 *db;
int rc;
const char *zTab;
const char *zCmd;
if( argc<2 ) usage(argv[0]);
rc = sqlite3_open(argv[1], &db);
if( rc ){
fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open %s\n", argv[1]);
exit(1);
}
if( argc==2 ){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
int cnt = 0;
pStmt = prepare(db, "SELECT b.sql"
" FROM sqlite_master a, sqlite_master b"
" WHERE a.name GLOB '*_segdir'"
" AND b.name=substr(a.name,1,length(a.name)-7)"
" ORDER BY 1");
while( sqlite3_step(pStmt)==SQLITE_ROW ){
cnt++;
printf("%s;\n", sqlite3_column_text(pStmt, 0));
}
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
if( cnt==0 ){
printf("/* No FTS3/4 tables found in database %s */\n", argv[1]);
}
return 0;
}
if( argc<4 ) usage(argv[0]);
zTab = argv[2];
zCmd = argv[3];
nExtra = argc-4;
azExtra = argv+4;
if( strcmp(zCmd,"big-segments")==0 ){
listBigSegments(db, zTab);
}else if( strcmp(zCmd,"doclist")==0 ){
if( argc<7 ) usage(argv[0]);
showDoclist(db, zTab);
}else if( strcmp(zCmd,"schema")==0 ){
showSchema(db, zTab);
}else if( strcmp(zCmd,"segdir")==0 ){
showSegdirMap(db, zTab);
}else if( strcmp(zCmd,"segment")==0 ){
if( argc<5 ) usage(argv[0]);
showSegment(db, zTab);
}else if( strcmp(zCmd,"segment-stats")==0 ){
showSegmentStats(db, zTab);
}else if( strcmp(zCmd,"stat")==0 ){
showStat(db, zTab);
}else if( strcmp(zCmd,"vocabulary")==0 ){
showVocabulary(db, zTab);
}else{
usage(argv[0]);
}
return 0;
}

1224
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/unicode/CaseFolding.txt
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

24428
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/unicode/UnicodeData.txt
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

694
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/unicode/mkunicode.tcl
View File

@ -1,694 +0,0 @@
source [file join [file dirname [info script]] parseunicode.tcl]
proc print_rd {map} {
global tl_lookup_table
set aChar [list]
set lRange [list]
set nRange 1
set iFirst [lindex $map 0 0]
set cPrev [lindex $map 0 1]
foreach m [lrange $map 1 end] {
foreach {i c} $m {}
if {$cPrev == $c} {
for {set j [expr $iFirst+$nRange]} {$j<$i} {incr j} {
if {[info exists tl_lookup_table($j)]==0} break
}
if {$j==$i} {
set nNew [expr {(1 + $i - $iFirst)}]
if {$nNew<=8} {
set nRange $nNew
continue
}
}
}
lappend lRange [list $iFirst $nRange]
lappend aChar $cPrev
set iFirst $i
set cPrev $c
set nRange 1
}
lappend lRange [list $iFirst $nRange]
lappend aChar $cPrev
puts "/*"
puts "** If the argument is a codepoint corresponding to a lowercase letter"
puts "** in the ASCII range with a diacritic added, return the codepoint"
puts "** of the ASCII letter only. For example, if passed 235 - \"LATIN"
puts "** SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS\" - return 65 (\"LATIN SMALL LETTER"
puts "** E\"). The resuls of passing a codepoint that corresponds to an"
puts "** uppercase letter are undefined."
puts "*/"
puts "static int ${::remove_diacritic}(int c)\{"
puts " unsigned short aDia\[\] = \{"
puts -nonewline " 0, "
set i 1
foreach r $lRange {
foreach {iCode nRange} $r {}
if {($i % 8)==0} {puts "" ; puts -nonewline " " }
incr i
puts -nonewline [format "%5d" [expr ($iCode<<3) + $nRange-1]]
puts -nonewline ", "
}
puts ""
puts " \};"
puts " char aChar\[\] = \{"
puts -nonewline " '\\0', "
set i 1
foreach c $aChar {
set str "'$c', "
if {$c == ""} { set str "'\\0', " }
if {($i % 12)==0} {puts "" ; puts -nonewline " " }
incr i
puts -nonewline "$str"
}
puts ""
puts " \};"
puts {
unsigned int key = (((unsigned int)c)<<3) | 0x00000007;
int iRes = 0;
int iHi = sizeof(aDia)/sizeof(aDia[0]) - 1;
int iLo = 0;
while( iHi>=iLo ){
int iTest = (iHi + iLo) / 2;
if( key >= aDia[iTest] ){
iRes = iTest;
iLo = iTest+1;
}else{
iHi = iTest-1;
}
}
assert( key>=aDia[iRes] );
return ((c > (aDia[iRes]>>3) + (aDia[iRes]&0x07)) ? c : (int)aChar[iRes]);}
puts "\}"
}
proc print_isdiacritic {zFunc map} {
set lCode [list]
foreach m $map {
foreach {code char} $m {}
if {$code && $char == ""} { lappend lCode $code }
}
set lCode [lsort -integer $lCode]
set iFirst [lindex $lCode 0]
set iLast [lindex $lCode end]
set i1 0
set i2 0
foreach c $lCode {
set i [expr $c - $iFirst]
if {$i < 32} {
set i1 [expr {$i1 | (1<<$i)}]
} else {
set i2 [expr {$i2 | (1<<($i-32))}]
}
}
puts "/*"
puts "** Return true if the argument interpreted as a unicode codepoint"
puts "** is a diacritical modifier character."
puts "*/"
puts "int ${zFunc}\(int c)\{"
puts " unsigned int mask0 = [format "0x%08X" $i1];"
puts " unsigned int mask1 = [format "0x%08X" $i2];"
puts " if( c<$iFirst || c>$iLast ) return 0;"
puts " return (c < $iFirst+32) ?"
puts " (mask0 & (1 << (c-$iFirst))) :"
puts " (mask1 & (1 << (c-$iFirst-32)));"
puts "\}"
}
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc an_load_separator_ranges {} {
global unicodedata.txt
set lSep [an_load_unicodedata_text ${unicodedata.txt}]
unset -nocomplain iFirst
unset -nocomplain nRange
set lRange [list]
foreach sep $lSep {
if {0==[info exists iFirst]} {
set iFirst $sep
set nRange 1
} elseif { $sep == ($iFirst+$nRange) } {
incr nRange
} else {
lappend lRange [list $iFirst $nRange]
set iFirst $sep
set nRange 1
}
}
lappend lRange [list $iFirst $nRange]
set lRange
}
proc an_print_range_array {lRange} {
set iFirstMax 0
set nRangeMax 0
foreach range $lRange {
foreach {iFirst nRange} $range {}
if {$iFirst > $iFirstMax} {set iFirstMax $iFirst}
if {$nRange > $nRangeMax} {set nRangeMax $nRange}
}
if {$iFirstMax >= (1<<22)} {error "first-max is too large for format"}
if {$nRangeMax >= (1<<10)} {error "range-max is too large for format"}
puts -nonewline " "
puts [string trim {
/* Each unsigned integer in the following array corresponds to a contiguous
** range of unicode codepoints that are not either letters or numbers (i.e.
** codepoints for which this function should return 0).
**
** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first
** codepoint in the range. The least significant 10 bits are used to store
** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value
** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint
** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints
** using this format.
*/
}]
puts -nonewline " static const unsigned int aEntry\[\] = \{"
set i 0
foreach range $lRange {
foreach {iFirst nRange} $range {}
set u32 [format "0x%08X" [expr ($iFirst<<10) + $nRange]]
if {($i % 5)==0} {puts "" ; puts -nonewline " "}
puts -nonewline " $u32,"
incr i
}
puts ""
puts " \};"
}
proc an_print_ascii_bitmap {lRange} {
foreach range $lRange {
foreach {iFirst nRange} $range {}
for {set i $iFirst} {$i < ($iFirst+$nRange)} {incr i} {
if {$i<=127} { set a($i) 1 }
}
}
set aAscii [list 0 0 0 0]
foreach key [array names a] {
set idx [expr $key >> 5]
lset aAscii $idx [expr [lindex $aAscii $idx] | (1 << ($key&0x001F))]
}
puts " static const unsigned int aAscii\[4\] = \{"
puts -nonewline " "
foreach v $aAscii { puts -nonewline [format " 0x%08X," $v] }
puts ""
puts " \};"
}
proc print_isalnum {zFunc lRange} {
puts "/*"
puts "** Return true if the argument corresponds to a unicode codepoint"
puts "** classified as either a letter or a number. Otherwise false."
puts "**"
puts "** The results are undefined if the value passed to this function"
puts "** is less than zero."
puts "*/"
puts "int ${zFunc}\(int c)\{"
an_print_range_array $lRange
an_print_ascii_bitmap $lRange
puts {
if( (unsigned int)c<128 ){
return ( (aAscii[c >> 5] & (1 << (c & 0x001F)))==0 );
}else if( (unsigned int)c<(1<<22) ){
unsigned int key = (((unsigned int)c)<<10) | 0x000003FF;
int iRes = 0;
int iHi = sizeof(aEntry)/sizeof(aEntry[0]) - 1;
int iLo = 0;
while( iHi>=iLo ){
int iTest = (iHi + iLo) / 2;
if( key >= aEntry[iTest] ){
iRes = iTest;
iLo = iTest+1;
}else{
iHi = iTest-1;
}
}
assert( aEntry[0]<key );
assert( key>=aEntry[iRes] );
return (((unsigned int)c) >= ((aEntry[iRes]>>10) + (aEntry[iRes]&0x3FF)));
}
return 1;}
puts "\}"
}
proc print_test_isalnum {zFunc lRange} {
foreach range $lRange {
foreach {iFirst nRange} $range {}
for {set i $iFirst} {$i < ($iFirst+$nRange)} {incr i} { set a($i) 1 }
}
puts "static int isalnum_test(int *piCode)\{"
puts -nonewline " unsigned char aAlnum\[\] = \{"
for {set i 0} {$i < 70000} {incr i} {
if {($i % 32)==0} { puts "" ; puts -nonewline " " }
set bFlag [expr ![info exists a($i)]]
puts -nonewline "${bFlag},"
}
puts ""
puts " \};"
puts -nonewline " int aLargeSep\[\] = \{"
set i 0
foreach iSep [lsort -integer [array names a]] {
if {$iSep<70000} continue
if {($i % 8)==0} { puts "" ; puts -nonewline " " }
puts -nonewline " $iSep,"
incr i
}
puts ""
puts " \};"
puts -nonewline " int aLargeOther\[\] = \{"
set i 0
foreach iSep [lsort -integer [array names a]] {
if {$iSep<70000} continue
if {[info exists a([expr $iSep-1])]==0} {
if {($i % 8)==0} { puts "" ; puts -nonewline " " }
puts -nonewline " [expr $iSep-1],"
incr i
}
if {[info exists a([expr $iSep+1])]==0} {
if {($i % 8)==0} { puts "" ; puts -nonewline " " }
puts -nonewline " [expr $iSep+1],"
incr i
}
}
puts ""
puts " \};"
puts [subst -nocommands {
int i;
for(i=0; i<sizeof(aAlnum)/sizeof(aAlnum[0]); i++){
if( ${zFunc}(i)!=aAlnum[i] ){
*piCode = i;
return 1;
}
}
for(i=0; i<sizeof(aLargeSep)/sizeof(aLargeSep[0]); i++){
if( ${zFunc}(aLargeSep[i])!=0 ){
*piCode = aLargeSep[i];
return 1;
}
}
for(i=0; i<sizeof(aLargeOther)/sizeof(aLargeOther[0]); i++){
if( ${zFunc}(aLargeOther[i])!=1 ){
*piCode = aLargeOther[i];
return 1;
}
}
}]
puts " return 0;"
puts "\}"
}
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc tl_create_records {} {
global tl_lookup_table
set iFirst ""
set nOff 0
set nRange 0
set nIncr 0
set lRecord [list]
foreach code [lsort -integer [array names tl_lookup_table]] {
set mapping $tl_lookup_table($code)
if {$iFirst == ""} {
set iFirst $code
set nOff [expr $mapping - $code]
set nRange 1
set nIncr 1
} else {
set diff [expr $code - ($iFirst + ($nIncr * ($nRange - 1)))]
if { $nRange==1 && ($diff==1 || $diff==2) } {
set nIncr $diff
}
if {$diff != $nIncr || ($mapping - $code)!=$nOff} {
if { $nRange==1 } {set nIncr 1}
lappend lRecord [list $iFirst $nIncr $nRange $nOff]
set iFirst $code
set nOff [expr $mapping - $code]
set nRange 1
set nIncr 1
} else {
incr nRange
}
}
}
lappend lRecord [list $iFirst $nIncr $nRange $nOff]
set lRecord
}
proc tl_print_table_header {} {
puts -nonewline " "
puts [string trim {
/* Each entry in the following array defines a rule for folding a range
** of codepoints to lower case. The rule applies to a range of nRange
** codepoints starting at codepoint iCode.
**
** If the least significant bit in flags is clear, then the rule applies
** to all nRange codepoints (i.e. all nRange codepoints are upper case and
** need to be folded). Or, if it is set, then the rule only applies to
** every second codepoint in the range, starting with codepoint C.
**
** The 7 most significant bits in flags are an index into the aiOff[]
** array. If a specific codepoint C does require folding, then its lower
** case equivalent is ((C + aiOff[flags>>1]) & 0xFFFF).
**
** The contents of this array are generated by parsing the CaseFolding.txt
** file distributed as part of the "Unicode Character Database". See
** http://www.unicode.org for details.
*/
}]
puts " static const struct TableEntry \{"
puts " unsigned short iCode;"
puts " unsigned char flags;"
puts " unsigned char nRange;"
puts " \} aEntry\[\] = \{"
}
proc tl_print_table_entry {togglevar entry liOff} {
upvar $togglevar t
foreach {iFirst nIncr nRange nOff} $entry {}
if {$iFirst > (1<<16)} { return 1 }
if {[info exists t]==0} {set t 0}
if {$t==0} { puts -nonewline " " }
set flags 0
if {$nIncr==2} { set flags 1 ; set nRange [expr $nRange * 2]}
if {$nOff<0} { incr nOff [expr (1<<16)] }
set idx [lsearch $liOff $nOff]
if {$idx<0} {error "malfunction generating aiOff"}
set flags [expr $flags + $idx*2]
set txt "{$iFirst, $flags, $nRange},"
if {$t==2} {
puts $txt
} else {
puts -nonewline [format "% -23s" $txt]
}
set t [expr ($t+1)%3]
return 0
}
proc tl_print_table_footer {togglevar} {
upvar $togglevar t
if {$t!=0} {puts ""}
puts " \};"
}
proc tl_print_if_entry {entry} {
foreach {iFirst nIncr nRange nOff} $entry {}
if {$nIncr==2} {error "tl_print_if_entry needs improvement!"}
puts " else if( c>=$iFirst && c<[expr $iFirst+$nRange] )\{"
puts " ret = c + $nOff;"
puts " \}"
}
proc tl_generate_ioff_table {lRecord} {
foreach entry $lRecord {
foreach {iFirst nIncr nRange iOff} $entry {}
if {$iOff<0} { incr iOff [expr (1<<16)] }
if {[info exists a($iOff)]} continue
set a($iOff) 1
}
set liOff [lsort -integer [array names a]]
if {[llength $liOff]>128} { error "Too many distinct ioffs" }
return $liOff
}
proc tl_print_ioff_table {liOff} {
puts -nonewline " static const unsigned short aiOff\[\] = \{"
set i 0
foreach off $liOff {
if {($i % 8)==0} {puts "" ; puts -nonewline " "}
puts -nonewline [format "% -7s" "$off,"]
incr i
}
puts ""
puts " \};"
}
proc print_fold {zFunc} {
set lRecord [tl_create_records]
set lHigh [list]
puts "/*"
puts "** Interpret the argument as a unicode codepoint. If the codepoint"
puts "** is an upper case character that has a lower case equivalent,"
puts "** return the codepoint corresponding to the lower case version."
puts "** Otherwise, return a copy of the argument."
puts "**"
puts "** The results are undefined if the value passed to this function"
puts "** is less than zero."
puts "*/"
puts "int ${zFunc}\(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic)\{"
set liOff [tl_generate_ioff_table $lRecord]
tl_print_table_header
foreach entry $lRecord {
if {[tl_print_table_entry toggle $entry $liOff]} {
lappend lHigh $entry
}
}
tl_print_table_footer toggle
tl_print_ioff_table $liOff
puts [subst -nocommands {
int ret = c;
assert( sizeof(unsigned short)==2 && sizeof(unsigned char)==1 );
if( c<128 ){
if( c>='A' && c<='Z' ) ret = c + ('a' - 'A');
}else if( c<65536 ){
const struct TableEntry *p;
int iHi = sizeof(aEntry)/sizeof(aEntry[0]) - 1;
int iLo = 0;
int iRes = -1;
assert( c>aEntry[0].iCode );
while( iHi>=iLo ){
int iTest = (iHi + iLo) / 2;
int cmp = (c - aEntry[iTest].iCode);
if( cmp>=0 ){
iRes = iTest;
iLo = iTest+1;
}else{
iHi = iTest-1;
}
}
assert( iRes>=0 && c>=aEntry[iRes].iCode );
p = &aEntry[iRes];
if( c<(p->iCode + p->nRange) && 0==(0x01 & p->flags & (p->iCode ^ c)) ){
ret = (c + (aiOff[p->flags>>1])) & 0x0000FFFF;
assert( ret>0 );
}
if( bRemoveDiacritic ) ret = ${::remove_diacritic}(ret);
}
}]
foreach entry $lHigh {
tl_print_if_entry $entry
}
puts ""
puts " return ret;"
puts "\}"
}
proc print_fold_test {zFunc mappings} {
global tl_lookup_table
foreach m $mappings {
set c [lindex $m 1]
if {$c == ""} {
set extra([lindex $m 0]) 0
} else {
scan $c %c i
set extra([lindex $m 0]) $i
}
}
puts "static int fold_test(int *piCode)\{"
puts -nonewline " static int aLookup\[\] = \{"
for {set i 0} {$i < 70000} {incr i} {
set expected $i
catch { set expected $tl_lookup_table($i) }
set expected2 $expected
catch { set expected2 $extra($expected2) }
if {($i % 4)==0} { puts "" ; puts -nonewline " " }
puts -nonewline "$expected, $expected2, "
}
puts " \};"
puts " int i;"
puts " for(i=0; i<sizeof(aLookup)/sizeof(aLookup\[0\]); i++)\{"
puts " int iCode = (i/2);"
puts " int bFlag = i & 0x0001;"
puts " if( ${zFunc}\(iCode, bFlag)!=aLookup\[i\] )\{"
puts " *piCode = iCode;"
puts " return 1;"
puts " \}"
puts " \}"
puts " return 0;"
puts "\}"
}
proc print_fileheader {} {
puts [string trim {
/*
** 2012 May 25
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
*/
/*
** DO NOT EDIT THIS MACHINE GENERATED FILE.
*/
}]
puts ""
if {$::generate_fts5_code} {
# no-op
} else {
puts "#ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE"
puts "#if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4)"
}
puts ""
puts "#include <assert.h>"
puts ""
}
proc print_test_main {} {
puts ""
puts "#include <stdio.h>"
puts ""
puts "int main(int argc, char **argv)\{"
puts " int r1, r2;"
puts " int code;"
puts " r1 = isalnum_test(&code);"
puts " if( r1 ) printf(\"isalnum(): Problem with code %d\\n\",code);"
puts " else printf(\"isalnum(): test passed\\n\");"
puts " r2 = fold_test(&code);"
puts " if( r2 ) printf(\"fold(): Problem with code %d\\n\",code);"
puts " else printf(\"fold(): test passed\\n\");"
puts " return (r1 || r2);"
puts "\}"
}
# Proces the command line arguments. Exit early if they are not to
# our liking.
#
proc usage {} {
puts -nonewline stderr "Usage: $::argv0 ?-test? ?-fts5? "
puts stderr "<CaseFolding.txt file> <UnicodeData.txt file>"
exit 1
}
if {[llength $argv]<2} usage
set unicodedata.txt [lindex $argv end]
set casefolding.txt [lindex $argv end-1]
set remove_diacritic remove_diacritic
set generate_test_code 0
set generate_fts5_code 0
set function_prefix "sqlite3Fts"
for {set i 0} {$i < [llength $argv]-2} {incr i} {
switch -- [lindex $argv $i] {
-test {
set generate_test_code 1
}
-fts5 {
set function_prefix sqlite3Fts5
set generate_fts5_code 1
set remove_diacritic fts5_remove_diacritic
}
default {
usage
}
}
}
print_fileheader
# Print the isalnum() function to stdout.
#
set lRange [an_load_separator_ranges]
print_isalnum ${function_prefix}UnicodeIsalnum $lRange
# Leave a gap between the two generated C functions.
#
puts ""
puts ""
# Load the fold data. This is used by the [rd_XXX] commands
# as well as [print_fold].
tl_load_casefolding_txt ${casefolding.txt}
set mappings [rd_load_unicodedata_text ${unicodedata.txt}]
print_rd $mappings
puts ""
puts ""
print_isdiacritic ${function_prefix}UnicodeIsdiacritic $mappings
puts ""
puts ""
# Print the fold() function to stdout.
#
print_fold ${function_prefix}UnicodeFold
# Print the test routines and main() function to stdout, if -test
# was specified.
#
if {$::generate_test_code} {
print_test_isalnum ${function_prefix}UnicodeIsalnum $lRange
print_fold_test ${function_prefix}UnicodeFold $mappings
print_test_main
}
if {$generate_fts5_code} {
# no-op
} else {
puts "#endif /* defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS4) */"
puts "#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE) */"
}

146
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts3/unicode/parseunicode.tcl
View File

@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Parameter $zName must be a path to the file UnicodeData.txt. This command
# reads the file and returns a list of mappings required to remove all
# diacritical marks from a unicode string. Each mapping is itself a list
# consisting of two elements - the unicode codepoint and the single ASCII
# character that it should be replaced with, or an empty string if the
# codepoint should simply be removed from the input. Examples:
#
# { 224 a } (replace codepoint 224 to "a")
# { 769 "" } (remove codepoint 769 from input)
#
# Mappings are only returned for non-upper case codepoints. It is assumed
# that the input has already been folded to lower case.
#
proc rd_load_unicodedata_text {zName} {
global tl_lookup_table
set fd [open $zName]
set lField {
code
character_name
general_category
canonical_combining_classes
bidirectional_category
character_decomposition_mapping
decimal_digit_value
digit_value
numeric_value
mirrored
unicode_1_name
iso10646_comment_field
uppercase_mapping
lowercase_mapping
titlecase_mapping
}
set lRet [list]
while { ![eof $fd] } {
set line [gets $fd]
if {$line == ""} continue
set fields [split $line ";"]
if {[llength $fields] != [llength $lField]} { error "parse error: $line" }
foreach $lField $fields {}
if { [llength $character_decomposition_mapping]!=2
|| [string is xdigit [lindex $character_decomposition_mapping 0]]==0
} {
continue
}
set iCode [expr "0x$code"]
set iAscii [expr "0x[lindex $character_decomposition_mapping 0]"]
set iDia [expr "0x[lindex $character_decomposition_mapping 1]"]
if {[info exists tl_lookup_table($iCode)]} continue
if { ($iAscii >= 97 && $iAscii <= 122)
|| ($iAscii >= 65 && $iAscii <= 90)
} {
lappend lRet [list $iCode [string tolower [format %c $iAscii]]]
set dia($iDia) 1
}
}
foreach d [array names dia] {
lappend lRet [list $d ""]
}
set lRet [lsort -integer -index 0 $lRet]
close $fd
set lRet
}
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Parameter $zName must be a path to the file UnicodeData.txt. This command
# reads the file and returns a list of codepoints (integers). The list
# contains all codepoints in the UnicodeData.txt assigned to any "General
# Category" that is not a "Letter" or "Number".
#
proc an_load_unicodedata_text {zName} {
set fd [open $zName]
set lField {
code
character_name
general_category
canonical_combining_classes
bidirectional_category
character_decomposition_mapping
decimal_digit_value
digit_value
numeric_value
mirrored
unicode_1_name
iso10646_comment_field
uppercase_mapping
lowercase_mapping
titlecase_mapping
}
set lRet [list]
while { ![eof $fd] } {
set line [gets $fd]
if {$line == ""} continue
set fields [split $line ";"]
if {[llength $fields] != [llength $lField]} { error "parse error: $line" }
foreach $lField $fields {}
set iCode [expr "0x$code"]
set bAlnum [expr {
[lsearch {L N} [string range $general_category 0 0]] >= 0
|| $general_category=="Co"
}]
if { !$bAlnum } { lappend lRet $iCode }
}
close $fd
set lRet
}
proc tl_load_casefolding_txt {zName} {
global tl_lookup_table
set fd [open $zName]
while { ![eof $fd] } {
set line [gets $fd]
if {[string range $line 0 0] == "#"} continue
if {$line == ""} continue
foreach x {a b c d} {unset -nocomplain $x}
foreach {a b c d} [split $line ";"] {}
set a2 [list]
set c2 [list]
foreach elem $a { lappend a2 [expr "0x[string trim $elem]"] }
foreach elem $c { lappend c2 [expr "0x[string trim $elem]"] }
set b [string trim $b]
set d [string trim $d]
if {$b=="C" || $b=="S"} { set tl_lookup_table($a2) $c2 }
}
}

252
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts5/extract_api_docs.tcl
View File

@ -1,252 +0,0 @@
#
# 2014 August 24
#
# The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
# a legal notice, here is a blessing:
#
# May you do good and not evil.
# May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
# May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
#
#--------------------------------------------------------------------------
#
# This script extracts the documentation for the API used by fts5 auxiliary
# functions from header file fts5.h. It outputs html text on stdout that
# is included in the documentation on the web.
#
set ::fts5_docs_output ""
if {[info commands hd_putsnl]==""} {
if {[llength $argv]>0} { set ::extract_api_docs_mode [lindex $argv 0] }
proc output {text} {
puts $text
}
} else {
proc output {text} {
append ::fts5_docs_output "$text\n"
}
}
if {[info exists ::extract_api_docs_mode]==0} {set ::extract_api_docs_mode api}
set input_file [file join [file dir [info script]] fts5.h]
set fd [open $input_file]
set data [read $fd]
close $fd
# Argument $data is the entire text of the fts5.h file. This function
# extracts the definition of the Fts5ExtensionApi structure from it and
# returns a key/value list of structure member names and definitions. i.e.
#
# iVersion {int iVersion} xUserData {void *(*xUserData)(Fts5Context*)} ...
#
proc get_struct_members {data} {
# Extract the structure definition from the fts5.h file.
regexp "struct Fts5ExtensionApi {(.*?)};" $data -> defn
# Remove all comments from the structure definition
regsub -all {/[*].*?[*]/} $defn {} defn2
set res [list]
foreach member [split $defn2 {;}] {
set member [string trim $member]
if {$member!=""} {
catch { set name [lindex $member end] }
regexp {.*?[(][*]([^)]*)[)]} $member -> name
lappend res $name $member
}
}
set res
}
proc get_struct_docs {data names} {
# Extract the structure definition from the fts5.h file.
regexp {EXTENSION API FUNCTIONS(.*?)[*]/} $data -> docs
set current_doc ""
set current_header ""
foreach line [split $docs "\n"] {
regsub {[*]*} $line {} line
if {[regexp {^ } $line]} {
append current_doc "$line\n"
} elseif {[string trim $line]==""} {
if {$current_header!=""} { append current_doc "\n" }
} else {
if {$current_doc != ""} {
lappend res $current_header $current_doc
set current_doc ""
}
set subject n/a
regexp {^ *([[:alpha:]]*)} $line -> subject
if {[lsearch $names $subject]>=0} {
set current_header $subject
} else {
set current_header [string trim $line]
}
}
}
if {$current_doc != ""} {
lappend res $current_header $current_doc
}
set res
}
proc get_tokenizer_docs {data} {
regexp {(xCreate:.*?)[*]/} $data -> docs
set res "<dl>\n"
foreach line [split [string trim $docs] "\n"] {
regexp {[*][*](.*)} $line -> line
if {[regexp {^ ?x.*:} $line]} {
append res "<dt><b>$line</b></dt><dd><p style=margin-top:0>\n"
continue
}
if {[regexp {SYNONYM SUPPORT} $line]} {
set line "</dl><h3>Synonym Support</h3>"
}
if {[string trim $line] == ""} {
append res "<p>\n"
} else {
append res "$line\n"
}
}
set res
}
proc get_api_docs {data} {
# Initialize global array M as a map from Fts5StructureApi member name
# to member definition. i.e.
#
# iVersion -> {int iVersion}
# xUserData -> {void *(*xUserData)(Fts5Context*)}
# ...
#
array set M [get_struct_members $data]
# Initialize global list D as a map from section name to documentation
# text. Most (all?) section names are structure member names.
#
set D [get_struct_docs $data [array names M]]
output "<dl>"
foreach {sub docs} $D {
if {[info exists M($sub)]} {
set hdr $M($sub)
set link " id=$sub"
} else {
set link ""
}
#output "<hr color=#eeeee style=\"margin:1em 8.4ex 0 8.4ex;\"$link>"
#set style "padding-left:6ex;font-size:1.4em;display:block"
#output "<h style=\"$style\"><pre>$hdr</pre></h>"
regsub -line {^ *[)]} $hdr ")" hdr
output "<dt style=\"white-space:pre;font-family:monospace;font-size:120%\""
output "$link>"
output "<b>$hdr</b></dt><dd>"
set mode ""
set margin " style=margin-top:0.1em"
foreach line [split [string trim $docs] "\n"] {
if {[string trim $line]==""} {
if {$mode != ""} {output "</$mode>"}
set mode ""
} elseif {$mode == ""} {
if {[regexp {^ } $line]} {
set mode codeblock
} else {
set mode p
}
output "<$mode$margin>"
set margin ""
}
output $line
}
if {$mode != ""} {output "</$mode>"}
output "</dd>"
}
output "</dl>"
}
proc get_fts5_struct {data start end} {
set res ""
set bOut 0
foreach line [split $data "\n"] {
if {$bOut==0} {
if {[regexp $start $line]} {
set bOut 1
}
}
if {$bOut} {
append res "$line\n"
}
if {$bOut} {
if {[regexp $end $line]} {
set bOut 0
}
}
}
set map [list /* <i>/* */ */</i>]
string map $map $res
}
proc main {data} {
switch $::extract_api_docs_mode {
fts5_api {
output [get_fts5_struct $data "typedef struct fts5_api" "^\};"]
}
fts5_tokenizer {
output [get_fts5_struct $data "typedef struct Fts5Tokenizer" "^\};"]
output [get_fts5_struct $data \
"Flags that may be passed as the third argument to xTokenize()" \
"#define FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED"
]
}
fts5_extension {
output [get_fts5_struct $data "typedef.*Fts5ExtensionApi" "^.;"]
}
Fts5ExtensionApi {
set struct [get_fts5_struct $data "^struct Fts5ExtensionApi" "^.;"]
set map [list]
foreach {k v} [get_struct_members $data] {
if {[string match x* $k]==0} continue
lappend map $k "<a href=#$k>$k</a>"
}
output [string map $map $struct]
}
api {
get_api_docs $data
}
tokenizer_api {
output [get_tokenizer_docs $data]
}
default {
}
}
}
main $data
set ::fts5_docs_output

578
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts5/fts5.h
View File

@ -1,578 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2014 May 31
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
** Interfaces to extend FTS5. Using the interfaces defined in this file,
** FTS5 may be extended with:
**
** * custom tokenizers, and
** * custom auxiliary functions.
*/
#ifndef _FTS5_H
#define _FTS5_H
#include "sqlite3.h"
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif
/*************************************************************************
** CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
**
** Virtual table implementations may overload SQL functions by implementing
** the sqlite3_module.xFindFunction() method.
*/
typedef struct Fts5ExtensionApi Fts5ExtensionApi;
typedef struct Fts5Context Fts5Context;
typedef struct Fts5PhraseIter Fts5PhraseIter;
typedef void (*fts5_extension_function)(
const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi, /* API offered by current FTS version */
Fts5Context *pFts, /* First arg to pass to pApi functions */
sqlite3_context *pCtx, /* Context for returning result/error */
int nVal, /* Number of values in apVal[] array */
sqlite3_value **apVal /* Array of trailing arguments */
);
struct Fts5PhraseIter {
const unsigned char *a;
const unsigned char *b;
};
/*
** EXTENSION API FUNCTIONS
**
** xUserData(pFts):
** Return a copy of the context pointer the extension function was
** registered with.
**
** xColumnTotalSize(pFts, iCol, pnToken):
** If parameter iCol is less than zero, set output variable *pnToken
** to the total number of tokens in the FTS5 table. Or, if iCol is
** non-negative but less than the number of columns in the table, return
** the total number of tokens in column iCol, considering all rows in
** the FTS5 table.
**
** If parameter iCol is greater than or equal to the number of columns
** in the table, SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Or, if an error occurs (e.g.
** an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
** returned.
**
** xColumnCount(pFts):
** Return the number of columns in the table.
**
** xColumnSize(pFts, iCol, pnToken):
** If parameter iCol is less than zero, set output variable *pnToken
** to the total number of tokens in the current row. Or, if iCol is
** non-negative but less than the number of columns in the table, set
** *pnToken to the number of tokens in column iCol of the current row.
**
** If parameter iCol is greater than or equal to the number of columns
** in the table, SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Or, if an error occurs (e.g.
** an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
** returned.
**
** This function may be quite inefficient if used with an FTS5 table
** created with the "columnsize=0" option.
**
** xColumnText:
** This function attempts to retrieve the text of column iCol of the
** current document. If successful, (*pz) is set to point to a buffer
** containing the text in utf-8 encoding, (*pn) is set to the size in bytes
** (not characters) of the buffer and SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise,
** if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final values
** of (*pz) and (*pn) are undefined.
**
** xPhraseCount:
** Returns the number of phrases in the current query expression.
**
** xPhraseSize:
** Returns the number of tokens in phrase iPhrase of the query. Phrases
** are numbered starting from zero.
**
** xInstCount:
** Set *pnInst to the total number of occurrences of all phrases within
** the query within the current row. Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or
** an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if an error occurs.
**
** This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
** "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
** with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
** (i.e. if it is a contentless table), then this API always returns 0.
**
** xInst:
** Query for the details of phrase match iIdx within the current row.
** Phrase matches are numbered starting from zero, so the iIdx argument
** should be greater than or equal to zero and smaller than the value
** output by xInstCount().
**
** Usually, output parameter *piPhrase is set to the phrase number, *piCol
** to the column in which it occurs and *piOff the token offset of the
** first token of the phrase. The exception is if the table was created
** with the offsets=0 option specified. In this case *piOff is always
** set to -1.
**
** Returns SQLITE_OK if successful, or an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM)
** if an error occurs.
**
** This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
** "detail=none" or "detail=column" option.
**
** xRowid:
** Returns the rowid of the current row.
**
** xTokenize:
** Tokenize text using the tokenizer belonging to the FTS5 table.
**
** xQueryPhrase(pFts5, iPhrase, pUserData, xCallback):
** This API function is used to query the FTS table for phrase iPhrase
** of the current query. Specifically, a query equivalent to:
**
** ... FROM ftstable WHERE ftstable MATCH $p ORDER BY rowid
**
** with $p set to a phrase equivalent to the phrase iPhrase of the
** current query is executed. For each row visited, the callback function
** passed as the fourth argument is invoked. The context and API objects
** passed to the callback function may be used to access the properties of
** each matched row. Invoking Api.xUserData() returns a copy of the pointer
** passed as the third argument to pUserData.
**
** If the callback function returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, the
** query is abandoned and the xQueryPhrase function returns immediately.
** If the returned value is SQLITE_DONE, xQueryPhrase returns SQLITE_OK.
** Otherwise, the error code is propagated upwards.
**
** If the query runs to completion without incident, SQLITE_OK is returned.
** Or, if some error occurs before the query completes or is aborted by
** the callback, an SQLite error code is returned.
**
**
** xSetAuxdata(pFts5, pAux, xDelete)
**
** Save the pointer passed as the second argument as the extension functions
** "auxiliary data". The pointer may then be retrieved by the current or any
** future invocation of the same fts5 extension function made as part of
** of the same MATCH query using the xGetAuxdata() API.
**
** Each extension function is allocated a single auxiliary data slot for
** each FTS query (MATCH expression). If the extension function is invoked
** more than once for a single FTS query, then all invocations share a
** single auxiliary data context.
**
** If there is already an auxiliary data pointer when this function is
** invoked, then it is replaced by the new pointer. If an xDelete callback
** was specified along with the original pointer, it is invoked at this
** point.
**
** The xDelete callback, if one is specified, is also invoked on the
** auxiliary data pointer after the FTS5 query has finished.
**
** If an error (e.g. an OOM condition) occurs within this function, an
** the auxiliary data is set to NULL and an error code returned. If the
** xDelete parameter was not NULL, it is invoked on the auxiliary data
** pointer before returning.
**
**
** xGetAuxdata(pFts5, bClear)
**
** Returns the current auxiliary data pointer for the fts5 extension
** function. See the xSetAuxdata() method for details.
**
** If the bClear argument is non-zero, then the auxiliary data is cleared
** (set to NULL) before this function returns. In this case the xDelete,
** if any, is not invoked.
**
**
** xRowCount(pFts5, pnRow)
**
** This function is used to retrieve the total number of rows in the table.
** In other words, the same value that would be returned by:
**
** SELECT count(*) FROM ftstable;
**
** xPhraseFirst()
** This function is used, along with type Fts5PhraseIter and the xPhraseNext
** method, to iterate through all instances of a single query phrase within
** the current row. This is the same information as is accessible via the
** xInstCount/xInst APIs. While the xInstCount/xInst APIs are more convenient
** to use, this API may be faster under some circumstances. To iterate
** through instances of phrase iPhrase, use the following code:
**
** Fts5PhraseIter iter;
** int iCol, iOff;
** for(pApi->xPhraseFirst(pFts, iPhrase, &iter, &iCol, &iOff);
** iCol>=0;
** pApi->xPhraseNext(pFts, &iter, &iCol, &iOff)
** ){
** // An instance of phrase iPhrase at offset iOff of column iCol
** }
**
** The Fts5PhraseIter structure is defined above. Applications should not
** modify this structure directly - it should only be used as shown above
** with the xPhraseFirst() and xPhraseNext() API methods (and by
** xPhraseFirstColumn() and xPhraseNextColumn() as illustrated below).
**
** This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
** "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
** with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
** (i.e. if it is a contentless table), then this API always iterates
** through an empty set (all calls to xPhraseFirst() set iCol to -1).
**
** xPhraseNext()
** See xPhraseFirst above.
**
** xPhraseFirstColumn()
** This function and xPhraseNextColumn() are similar to the xPhraseFirst()
** and xPhraseNext() APIs described above. The difference is that instead
** of iterating through all instances of a phrase in the current row, these
** APIs are used to iterate through the set of columns in the current row
** that contain one or more instances of a specified phrase. For example:
**
** Fts5PhraseIter iter;
** int iCol;
** for(pApi->xPhraseFirstColumn(pFts, iPhrase, &iter, &iCol);
** iCol>=0;
** pApi->xPhraseNextColumn(pFts, &iter, &iCol)
** ){
** // Column iCol contains at least one instance of phrase iPhrase
** }
**
** This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
** "detail=none" option. If the FTS5 table is created with either
** "detail=none" "content=" option (i.e. if it is a contentless table),
** then this API always iterates through an empty set (all calls to
** xPhraseFirstColumn() set iCol to -1).
**
** The information accessed using this API and its companion
** xPhraseFirstColumn() may also be obtained using xPhraseFirst/xPhraseNext
** (or xInst/xInstCount). The chief advantage of this API is that it is
** significantly more efficient than those alternatives when used with
** "detail=column" tables.
**
** xPhraseNextColumn()
** See xPhraseFirstColumn above.
*/
struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
int iVersion; /* Currently always set to 3 */
void *(*xUserData)(Fts5Context*);
int (*xColumnCount)(Fts5Context*);
int (*xRowCount)(Fts5Context*, sqlite3_int64 *pnRow);
int (*xColumnTotalSize)(Fts5Context*, int iCol, sqlite3_int64 *pnToken);
int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Context*,
const char *pText, int nText, /* Text to tokenize */
void *pCtx, /* Context passed to xToken() */
int (*xToken)(void*, int, const char*, int, int, int) /* Callback */
);
int (*xPhraseCount)(Fts5Context*);
int (*xPhraseSize)(Fts5Context*, int iPhrase);
int (*xInstCount)(Fts5Context*, int *pnInst);
int (*xInst)(Fts5Context*, int iIdx, int *piPhrase, int *piCol, int *piOff);
sqlite3_int64 (*xRowid)(Fts5Context*);
int (*xColumnText)(Fts5Context*, int iCol, const char **pz, int *pn);
int (*xColumnSize)(Fts5Context*, int iCol, int *pnToken);
int (*xQueryPhrase)(Fts5Context*, int iPhrase, void *pUserData,
int(*)(const Fts5ExtensionApi*,Fts5Context*,void*)
);
int (*xSetAuxdata)(Fts5Context*, void *pAux, void(*xDelete)(void*));
void *(*xGetAuxdata)(Fts5Context*, int bClear);
int (*xPhraseFirst)(Fts5Context*, int iPhrase, Fts5PhraseIter*, int*, int*);
void (*xPhraseNext)(Fts5Context*, Fts5PhraseIter*, int *piCol, int *piOff);
int (*xPhraseFirstColumn)(Fts5Context*, int iPhrase, Fts5PhraseIter*, int*);
void (*xPhraseNextColumn)(Fts5Context*, Fts5PhraseIter*, int *piCol);
};
/*
** CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
*************************************************************************/
/*************************************************************************
** CUSTOM TOKENIZERS
**
** Applications may also register custom tokenizer types. A tokenizer
** is registered by providing fts5 with a populated instance of the
** following structure. All structure methods must be defined, setting
** any member of the fts5_tokenizer struct to NULL leads to undefined
** behaviour. The structure methods are expected to function as follows:
**
** xCreate:
** This function is used to allocate and inititalize a tokenizer instance.
** A tokenizer instance is required to actually tokenize text.
**
** The first argument passed to this function is a copy of the (void*)
** pointer provided by the application when the fts5_tokenizer object
** was registered with FTS5 (the third argument to xCreateTokenizer()).
** The second and third arguments are an array of nul-terminated strings
** containing the tokenizer arguments, if any, specified following the
** tokenizer name as part of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement used
** to create the FTS5 table.
**
** The final argument is an output variable. If successful, (*ppOut)
** should be set to point to the new tokenizer handle and SQLITE_OK
** returned. If an error occurs, some value other than SQLITE_OK should
** be returned. In this case, fts5 assumes that the final value of *ppOut
** is undefined.
**
** xDelete:
** This function is invoked to delete a tokenizer handle previously
** allocated using xCreate(). Fts5 guarantees that this function will
** be invoked exactly once for each successful call to xCreate().
**
** xTokenize:
** This function is expected to tokenize the nText byte string indicated
** by argument pText. pText may or may not be nul-terminated. The first
** argument passed to this function is a pointer to an Fts5Tokenizer object
** returned by an earlier call to xCreate().
**
** The second argument indicates the reason that FTS5 is requesting
** tokenization of the supplied text. This is always one of the following
** four values:
**
** <ul><li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_DOCUMENT</b> - A document is being inserted into
** or removed from the FTS table. The tokenizer is being invoked to
** determine the set of tokens to add to (or delete from) the
** FTS index.
**
** <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY</b> - A MATCH query is being executed
** against the FTS index. The tokenizer is being called to tokenize
** a bareword or quoted string specified as part of the query.
**
** <li> <b>(FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY | FTS5_TOKENIZE_PREFIX)</b> - Same as
** FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY, except that the bareword or quoted string is
** followed by a "*" character, indicating that the last token
** returned by the tokenizer will be treated as a token prefix.
**
** <li> <b>FTS5_TOKENIZE_AUX</b> - The tokenizer is being invoked to
** satisfy an fts5_api.xTokenize() request made by an auxiliary
** function. Or an fts5_api.xColumnSize() request made by the same
** on a columnsize=0 database.
** </ul>
**
** For each token in the input string, the supplied callback xToken() must
** be invoked. The first argument to it should be a copy of the pointer
** passed as the second argument to xTokenize(). The third and fourth
** arguments are a pointer to a buffer containing the token text, and the
** size of the token in bytes. The 4th and 5th arguments are the byte offsets
** of the first byte of and first byte immediately following the text from
** which the token is derived within the input.
**
** The second argument passed to the xToken() callback ("tflags") should
** normally be set to 0. The exception is if the tokenizer supports
** synonyms. In this case see the discussion below for details.
**
** FTS5 assumes the xToken() callback is invoked for each token in the
** order that they occur within the input text.
**
** If an xToken() callback returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, then
** the tokenization should be abandoned and the xTokenize() method should
** immediately return a copy of the xToken() return value. Or, if the
** input buffer is exhausted, xTokenize() should return SQLITE_OK. Finally,
** if an error occurs with the xTokenize() implementation itself, it
** may abandon the tokenization and return any error code other than
** SQLITE_OK or SQLITE_DONE.
**
** SYNONYM SUPPORT
**
** Custom tokenizers may also support synonyms. Consider a case in which a
** user wishes to query for a phrase such as "first place". Using the
** built-in tokenizers, the FTS5 query 'first + place' will match instances
** of "first place" within the document set, but not alternative forms
** such as "1st place". In some applications, it would be better to match
** all instances of "first place" or "1st place" regardless of which form
** the user specified in the MATCH query text.
**
** There are several ways to approach this in FTS5:
**
** <ol><li> By mapping all synonyms to a single token. In this case, the
** In the above example, this means that the tokenizer returns the
** same token for inputs "first" and "1st". Say that token is in
** fact "first", so that when the user inserts the document "I won
** 1st place" entries are added to the index for tokens "i", "won",
** "first" and "place". If the user then queries for '1st + place',
** the tokenizer substitutes "first" for "1st" and the query works
** as expected.
**
** <li> By adding multiple synonyms for a single term to the FTS index.
** In this case, when tokenizing query text, the tokenizer may
** provide multiple synonyms for a single term within the document.
** FTS5 then queries the index for each synonym individually. For
** example, faced with the query:
**
** <codeblock>
** ... MATCH 'first place'</codeblock>
**
** the tokenizer offers both "1st" and "first" as synonyms for the
** first token in the MATCH query and FTS5 effectively runs a query
** similar to:
**
** <codeblock>
** ... MATCH '(first OR 1st) place'</codeblock>
**
** except that, for the purposes of auxiliary functions, the query
** still appears to contain just two phrases - "(first OR 1st)"
** being treated as a single phrase.
**
** <li> By adding multiple synonyms for a single term to the FTS index.
** Using this method, when tokenizing document text, the tokenizer
** provides multiple synonyms for each token. So that when a
** document such as "I won first place" is tokenized, entries are
** added to the FTS index for "i", "won", "first", "1st" and
** "place".
**
** This way, even if the tokenizer does not provide synonyms
** when tokenizing query text (it should not - to do would be
** inefficient), it doesn't matter if the user queries for
** 'first + place' or '1st + place', as there are entires in the
** FTS index corresponding to both forms of the first token.
** </ol>
**
** Whether it is parsing document or query text, any call to xToken that
** specifies a <i>tflags</i> argument with the FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED bit
** is considered to supply a synonym for the previous token. For example,
** when parsing the document "I won first place", a tokenizer that supports
** synonyms would call xToken() 5 times, as follows:
**
** <codeblock>
** xToken(pCtx, 0, "i", 1, 0, 1);
** xToken(pCtx, 0, "won", 3, 2, 5);
** xToken(pCtx, 0, "first", 5, 6, 11);
** xToken(pCtx, FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED, "1st", 3, 6, 11);
** xToken(pCtx, 0, "place", 5, 12, 17);
**</codeblock>
**
** It is an error to specify the FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED flag the first time
** xToken() is called. Multiple synonyms may be specified for a single token
** by making multiple calls to xToken(FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED) in sequence.
** There is no limit to the number of synonyms that may be provided for a
** single token.
**
** In many cases, method (1) above is the best approach. It does not add
** extra data to the FTS index or require FTS5 to query for multiple terms,
** so it is efficient in terms of disk space and query speed. However, it
** does not support prefix queries very well. If, as suggested above, the
** token "first" is subsituted for "1st" by the tokenizer, then the query:
**
** <codeblock>
** ... MATCH '1s*'</codeblock>
**
** will not match documents that contain the token "1st" (as the tokenizer
** will probably not map "1s" to any prefix of "first").
**
** For full prefix support, method (3) may be preferred. In this case,
** because the index contains entries for both "first" and "1st", prefix
** queries such as 'fi*' or '1s*' will match correctly. However, because
** extra entries are added to the FTS index, this method uses more space
** within the database.
**
** Method (2) offers a midpoint between (1) and (3). Using this method,
** a query such as '1s*' will match documents that contain the literal
** token "1st", but not "first" (assuming the tokenizer is not able to
** provide synonyms for prefixes). However, a non-prefix query like '1st'
** will match against "1st" and "first". This method does not require
** extra disk space, as no extra entries are added to the FTS index.
** On the other hand, it may require more CPU cycles to run MATCH queries,
** as separate queries of the FTS index are required for each synonym.
**
** When using methods (2) or (3), it is important that the tokenizer only
** provide synonyms when tokenizing document text (method (2)) or query
** text (method (3)), not both. Doing so will not cause any errors, but is
** inefficient.
*/
typedef struct Fts5Tokenizer Fts5Tokenizer;
typedef struct fts5_tokenizer fts5_tokenizer;
struct fts5_tokenizer {
int (*xCreate)(void*, const char **azArg, int nArg, Fts5Tokenizer **ppOut);
void (*xDelete)(Fts5Tokenizer*);
int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Tokenizer*,
void *pCtx,
int flags, /* Mask of FTS5_TOKENIZE_* flags */
const char *pText, int nText,
int (*xToken)(
void *pCtx, /* Copy of 2nd argument to xTokenize() */
int tflags, /* Mask of FTS5_TOKEN_* flags */
const char *pToken, /* Pointer to buffer containing token */
int nToken, /* Size of token in bytes */
int iStart, /* Byte offset of token within input text */
int iEnd /* Byte offset of end of token within input text */
)
);
};
/* Flags that may be passed as the third argument to xTokenize() */
#define FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY 0x0001
#define FTS5_TOKENIZE_PREFIX 0x0002
#define FTS5_TOKENIZE_DOCUMENT 0x0004
#define FTS5_TOKENIZE_AUX 0x0008
/* Flags that may be passed by the tokenizer implementation back to FTS5
** as the third argument to the supplied xToken callback. */
#define FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED 0x0001 /* Same position as prev. token */
/*
** END OF CUSTOM TOKENIZERS
*************************************************************************/
/*************************************************************************
** FTS5 EXTENSION REGISTRATION API
*/
typedef struct fts5_api fts5_api;
struct fts5_api {
int iVersion; /* Currently always set to 2 */
/* Create a new tokenizer */
int (*xCreateTokenizer)(
fts5_api *pApi,
const char *zName,
void *pContext,
fts5_tokenizer *pTokenizer,
void (*xDestroy)(void*)
);
/* Find an existing tokenizer */
int (*xFindTokenizer)(
fts5_api *pApi,
const char *zName,
void **ppContext,
fts5_tokenizer *pTokenizer
);
/* Create a new auxiliary function */
int (*xCreateFunction)(
fts5_api *pApi,
const char *zName,
void *pContext,
fts5_extension_function xFunction,
void (*xDestroy)(void*)
);
};
/*
** END OF REGISTRATION API
*************************************************************************/
#ifdef __cplusplus
} /* end of the 'extern "C"' block */
#endif
#endif /* _FTS5_H */

776
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts5/fts5Int.h
View File

@ -1,776 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2014 May 31
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
**
*/
#ifndef _FTS5INT_H
#define _FTS5INT_H
#include "fts5.h"
#include "sqlite3ext.h"
SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1
#include <string.h>
#include <assert.h>
#ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION
typedef unsigned char u8;
typedef unsigned int u32;
typedef unsigned short u16;
typedef short i16;
typedef sqlite3_int64 i64;
typedef sqlite3_uint64 u64;
#define ArraySize(x) ((int)(sizeof(x) / sizeof(x[0])))
#define testcase(x)
#define ALWAYS(x) 1
#define NEVER(x) 0
#define MIN(x,y) (((x) < (y)) ? (x) : (y))
#define MAX(x,y) (((x) > (y)) ? (x) : (y))
/*
** Constants for the largest and smallest possible 64-bit signed integers.
*/
# define LARGEST_INT64 (0xffffffff|(((i64)0x7fffffff)<<32))
# define SMALLEST_INT64 (((i64)-1) - LARGEST_INT64)
#endif
/*
** Maximum number of prefix indexes on single FTS5 table. This must be
** less than 32. If it is set to anything large than that, an #error
** directive in fts5_index.c will cause the build to fail.
*/
#define FTS5_MAX_PREFIX_INDEXES 31
#define FTS5_DEFAULT_NEARDIST 10
#define FTS5_DEFAULT_RANK "bm25"
/* Name of rank and rowid columns */
#define FTS5_RANK_NAME "rank"
#define FTS5_ROWID_NAME "rowid"
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
# define FTS5_CORRUPT sqlite3Fts5Corrupt()
int sqlite3Fts5Corrupt(void);
#else
# define FTS5_CORRUPT SQLITE_CORRUPT_VTAB
#endif
/*
** The assert_nc() macro is similar to the assert() macro, except that it
** is used for assert() conditions that are true only if it can be
** guranteed that the database is not corrupt.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
extern int sqlite3_fts5_may_be_corrupt;
# define assert_nc(x) assert(sqlite3_fts5_may_be_corrupt || (x))
#else
# define assert_nc(x) assert(x)
#endif
/* Mark a function parameter as unused, to suppress nuisance compiler
** warnings. */
#ifndef UNUSED_PARAM
# define UNUSED_PARAM(X) (void)(X)
#endif
#ifndef UNUSED_PARAM2
# define UNUSED_PARAM2(X, Y) (void)(X), (void)(Y)
#endif
typedef struct Fts5Global Fts5Global;
typedef struct Fts5Colset Fts5Colset;
/* If a NEAR() clump or phrase may only match a specific set of columns,
** then an object of the following type is used to record the set of columns.
** Each entry in the aiCol[] array is a column that may be matched.
**
** This object is used by fts5_expr.c and fts5_index.c.
*/
struct Fts5Colset {
int nCol;
int aiCol[1];
};
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_config.c. fts5_config.c contains contains code
** to parse the arguments passed to the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement.
*/
typedef struct Fts5Config Fts5Config;
/*
** An instance of the following structure encodes all information that can
** be gleaned from the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement.
**
** And all information loaded from the %_config table.
**
** nAutomerge:
** The minimum number of segments that an auto-merge operation should
** attempt to merge together. A value of 1 sets the object to use the
** compile time default. Zero disables auto-merge altogether.
**
** zContent:
**
** zContentRowid:
** The value of the content_rowid= option, if one was specified. Or
** the string "rowid" otherwise. This text is not quoted - if it is
** used as part of an SQL statement it needs to be quoted appropriately.
**
** zContentExprlist:
**
** pzErrmsg:
** This exists in order to allow the fts5_index.c module to return a
** decent error message if it encounters a file-format version it does
** not understand.
**
** bColumnsize:
** True if the %_docsize table is created.
**
** bPrefixIndex:
** This is only used for debugging. If set to false, any prefix indexes
** are ignored. This value is configured using:
**
** INSERT INTO tbl(tbl, rank) VALUES('prefix-index', $bPrefixIndex);
**
*/
struct Fts5Config {
sqlite3 *db; /* Database handle */
char *zDb; /* Database holding FTS index (e.g. "main") */
char *zName; /* Name of FTS index */
int nCol; /* Number of columns */
char **azCol; /* Column names */
u8 *abUnindexed; /* True for unindexed columns */
int nPrefix; /* Number of prefix indexes */
int *aPrefix; /* Sizes in bytes of nPrefix prefix indexes */
int eContent; /* An FTS5_CONTENT value */
char *zContent; /* content table */
char *zContentRowid; /* "content_rowid=" option value */
int bColumnsize; /* "columnsize=" option value (dflt==1) */
int eDetail; /* FTS5_DETAIL_XXX value */
char *zContentExprlist;
Fts5Tokenizer *pTok;
fts5_tokenizer *pTokApi;
/* Values loaded from the %_config table */
int iCookie; /* Incremented when %_config is modified */
int pgsz; /* Approximate page size used in %_data */
int nAutomerge; /* 'automerge' setting */
int nCrisisMerge; /* Maximum allowed segments per level */
int nHashSize; /* Bytes of memory for in-memory hash */
char *zRank; /* Name of rank function */
char *zRankArgs; /* Arguments to rank function */
/* If non-NULL, points to sqlite3_vtab.base.zErrmsg. Often NULL. */
char **pzErrmsg;
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
int bPrefixIndex; /* True to use prefix-indexes */
#endif
};
/* Current expected value of %_config table 'version' field */
#define FTS5_CURRENT_VERSION 4
#define FTS5_CONTENT_NORMAL 0
#define FTS5_CONTENT_NONE 1
#define FTS5_CONTENT_EXTERNAL 2
#define FTS5_DETAIL_FULL 0
#define FTS5_DETAIL_NONE 1
#define FTS5_DETAIL_COLUMNS 2
int sqlite3Fts5ConfigParse(
Fts5Global*, sqlite3*, int, const char **, Fts5Config**, char**
);
void sqlite3Fts5ConfigFree(Fts5Config*);
int sqlite3Fts5ConfigDeclareVtab(Fts5Config *pConfig);
int sqlite3Fts5Tokenize(
Fts5Config *pConfig, /* FTS5 Configuration object */
int flags, /* FTS5_TOKENIZE_* flags */
const char *pText, int nText, /* Text to tokenize */
void *pCtx, /* Context passed to xToken() */
int (*xToken)(void*, int, const char*, int, int, int) /* Callback */
);
void sqlite3Fts5Dequote(char *z);
/* Load the contents of the %_config table */
int sqlite3Fts5ConfigLoad(Fts5Config*, int);
/* Set the value of a single config attribute */
int sqlite3Fts5ConfigSetValue(Fts5Config*, const char*, sqlite3_value*, int*);
int sqlite3Fts5ConfigParseRank(const char*, char**, char**);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_config.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_buffer.c.
*/
/*
** Buffer object for the incremental building of string data.
*/
typedef struct Fts5Buffer Fts5Buffer;
struct Fts5Buffer {
u8 *p;
int n;
int nSpace;
};
int sqlite3Fts5BufferSize(int*, Fts5Buffer*, u32);
void sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendVarint(int*, Fts5Buffer*, i64);
void sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendBlob(int*, Fts5Buffer*, u32, const u8*);
void sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendString(int *, Fts5Buffer*, const char*);
void sqlite3Fts5BufferFree(Fts5Buffer*);
void sqlite3Fts5BufferZero(Fts5Buffer*);
void sqlite3Fts5BufferSet(int*, Fts5Buffer*, int, const u8*);
void sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendPrintf(int *, Fts5Buffer*, char *zFmt, ...);
char *sqlite3Fts5Mprintf(int *pRc, const char *zFmt, ...);
#define fts5BufferZero(x) sqlite3Fts5BufferZero(x)
#define fts5BufferAppendVarint(a,b,c) sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendVarint(a,b,c)
#define fts5BufferFree(a) sqlite3Fts5BufferFree(a)
#define fts5BufferAppendBlob(a,b,c,d) sqlite3Fts5BufferAppendBlob(a,b,c,d)
#define fts5BufferSet(a,b,c,d) sqlite3Fts5BufferSet(a,b,c,d)
#define fts5BufferGrow(pRc,pBuf,nn) ( \
(u32)((pBuf)->n) + (u32)(nn) <= (u32)((pBuf)->nSpace) ? 0 : \
sqlite3Fts5BufferSize((pRc),(pBuf),(nn)+(pBuf)->n) \
)
/* Write and decode big-endian 32-bit integer values */
void sqlite3Fts5Put32(u8*, int);
int sqlite3Fts5Get32(const u8*);
#define FTS5_POS2COLUMN(iPos) (int)(iPos >> 32)
#define FTS5_POS2OFFSET(iPos) (int)(iPos & 0xFFFFFFFF)
typedef struct Fts5PoslistReader Fts5PoslistReader;
struct Fts5PoslistReader {
/* Variables used only by sqlite3Fts5PoslistIterXXX() functions. */
const u8 *a; /* Position list to iterate through */
int n; /* Size of buffer at a[] in bytes */
int i; /* Current offset in a[] */
u8 bFlag; /* For client use (any custom purpose) */
/* Output variables */
u8 bEof; /* Set to true at EOF */
i64 iPos; /* (iCol<<32) + iPos */
};
int sqlite3Fts5PoslistReaderInit(
const u8 *a, int n, /* Poslist buffer to iterate through */
Fts5PoslistReader *pIter /* Iterator object to initialize */
);
int sqlite3Fts5PoslistReaderNext(Fts5PoslistReader*);
typedef struct Fts5PoslistWriter Fts5PoslistWriter;
struct Fts5PoslistWriter {
i64 iPrev;
};
int sqlite3Fts5PoslistWriterAppend(Fts5Buffer*, Fts5PoslistWriter*, i64);
void sqlite3Fts5PoslistSafeAppend(Fts5Buffer*, i64*, i64);
int sqlite3Fts5PoslistNext64(
const u8 *a, int n, /* Buffer containing poslist */
int *pi, /* IN/OUT: Offset within a[] */
i64 *piOff /* IN/OUT: Current offset */
);
/* Malloc utility */
void *sqlite3Fts5MallocZero(int *pRc, int nByte);
char *sqlite3Fts5Strndup(int *pRc, const char *pIn, int nIn);
/* Character set tests (like isspace(), isalpha() etc.) */
int sqlite3Fts5IsBareword(char t);
/* Bucket of terms object used by the integrity-check in offsets=0 mode. */
typedef struct Fts5Termset Fts5Termset;
int sqlite3Fts5TermsetNew(Fts5Termset**);
int sqlite3Fts5TermsetAdd(Fts5Termset*, int, const char*, int, int *pbPresent);
void sqlite3Fts5TermsetFree(Fts5Termset*);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_buffer.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_index.c. fts5_index.c contains contains code
** to access the data stored in the %_data table.
*/
typedef struct Fts5Index Fts5Index;
typedef struct Fts5IndexIter Fts5IndexIter;
struct Fts5IndexIter {
i64 iRowid;
const u8 *pData;
int nData;
u8 bEof;
};
#define sqlite3Fts5IterEof(x) ((x)->bEof)
/*
** Values used as part of the flags argument passed to IndexQuery().
*/
#define FTS5INDEX_QUERY_PREFIX 0x0001 /* Prefix query */
#define FTS5INDEX_QUERY_DESC 0x0002 /* Docs in descending rowid order */
#define FTS5INDEX_QUERY_TEST_NOIDX 0x0004 /* Do not use prefix index */
#define FTS5INDEX_QUERY_SCAN 0x0008 /* Scan query (fts5vocab) */
/* The following are used internally by the fts5_index.c module. They are
** defined here only to make it easier to avoid clashes with the flags
** above. */
#define FTS5INDEX_QUERY_SKIPEMPTY 0x0010
#define FTS5INDEX_QUERY_NOOUTPUT 0x0020
/*
** Create/destroy an Fts5Index object.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexOpen(Fts5Config *pConfig, int bCreate, Fts5Index**, char**);
int sqlite3Fts5IndexClose(Fts5Index *p);
/*
** Return a simple checksum value based on the arguments.
*/
u64 sqlite3Fts5IndexEntryCksum(
i64 iRowid,
int iCol,
int iPos,
int iIdx,
const char *pTerm,
int nTerm
);
/*
** Argument p points to a buffer containing utf-8 text that is n bytes in
** size. Return the number of bytes in the nChar character prefix of the
** buffer, or 0 if there are less than nChar characters in total.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexCharlenToBytelen(
const char *p,
int nByte,
int nChar
);
/*
** Open a new iterator to iterate though all rowids that match the
** specified token or token prefix.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexQuery(
Fts5Index *p, /* FTS index to query */
const char *pToken, int nToken, /* Token (or prefix) to query for */
int flags, /* Mask of FTS5INDEX_QUERY_X flags */
Fts5Colset *pColset, /* Match these columns only */
Fts5IndexIter **ppIter /* OUT: New iterator object */
);
/*
** The various operations on open token or token prefix iterators opened
** using sqlite3Fts5IndexQuery().
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IterNext(Fts5IndexIter*);
int sqlite3Fts5IterNextFrom(Fts5IndexIter*, i64 iMatch);
/*
** Close an iterator opened by sqlite3Fts5IndexQuery().
*/
void sqlite3Fts5IterClose(Fts5IndexIter*);
/*
** This interface is used by the fts5vocab module.
*/
const char *sqlite3Fts5IterTerm(Fts5IndexIter*, int*);
int sqlite3Fts5IterNextScan(Fts5IndexIter*);
/*
** Insert or remove data to or from the index. Each time a document is
** added to or removed from the index, this function is called one or more
** times.
**
** For an insert, it must be called once for each token in the new document.
** If the operation is a delete, it must be called (at least) once for each
** unique token in the document with an iCol value less than zero. The iPos
** argument is ignored for a delete.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexWrite(
Fts5Index *p, /* Index to write to */
int iCol, /* Column token appears in (-ve -> delete) */
int iPos, /* Position of token within column */
const char *pToken, int nToken /* Token to add or remove to or from index */
);
/*
** Indicate that subsequent calls to sqlite3Fts5IndexWrite() pertain to
** document iDocid.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexBeginWrite(
Fts5Index *p, /* Index to write to */
int bDelete, /* True if current operation is a delete */
i64 iDocid /* Docid to add or remove data from */
);
/*
** Flush any data stored in the in-memory hash tables to the database.
** If the bCommit flag is true, also close any open blob handles.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexSync(Fts5Index *p, int bCommit);
/*
** Discard any data stored in the in-memory hash tables. Do not write it
** to the database. Additionally, assume that the contents of the %_data
** table may have changed on disk. So any in-memory caches of %_data
** records must be invalidated.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexRollback(Fts5Index *p);
/*
** Get or set the "averages" values.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexGetAverages(Fts5Index *p, i64 *pnRow, i64 *anSize);
int sqlite3Fts5IndexSetAverages(Fts5Index *p, const u8*, int);
/*
** Functions called by the storage module as part of integrity-check.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexIntegrityCheck(Fts5Index*, u64 cksum);
/*
** Called during virtual module initialization to register UDF
** fts5_decode() with SQLite
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexInit(sqlite3*);
int sqlite3Fts5IndexSetCookie(Fts5Index*, int);
/*
** Return the total number of entries read from the %_data table by
** this connection since it was created.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5IndexReads(Fts5Index *p);
int sqlite3Fts5IndexReinit(Fts5Index *p);
int sqlite3Fts5IndexOptimize(Fts5Index *p);
int sqlite3Fts5IndexMerge(Fts5Index *p, int nMerge);
int sqlite3Fts5IndexLoadConfig(Fts5Index *p);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_index.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_varint.c.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5GetVarint32(const unsigned char *p, u32 *v);
int sqlite3Fts5GetVarintLen(u32 iVal);
u8 sqlite3Fts5GetVarint(const unsigned char*, u64*);
int sqlite3Fts5PutVarint(unsigned char *p, u64 v);
#define fts5GetVarint32(a,b) sqlite3Fts5GetVarint32(a,(u32*)&b)
#define fts5GetVarint sqlite3Fts5GetVarint
#define fts5FastGetVarint32(a, iOff, nVal) { \
nVal = (a)[iOff++]; \
if( nVal & 0x80 ){ \
iOff--; \
iOff += fts5GetVarint32(&(a)[iOff], nVal); \
} \
}
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_varint.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5.c.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5GetTokenizer(
Fts5Global*,
const char **azArg,
int nArg,
Fts5Tokenizer**,
fts5_tokenizer**,
char **pzErr
);
Fts5Index *sqlite3Fts5IndexFromCsrid(Fts5Global*, i64, Fts5Config **);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_hash.c.
*/
typedef struct Fts5Hash Fts5Hash;
/*
** Create a hash table, free a hash table.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5HashNew(Fts5Config*, Fts5Hash**, int *pnSize);
void sqlite3Fts5HashFree(Fts5Hash*);
int sqlite3Fts5HashWrite(
Fts5Hash*,
i64 iRowid, /* Rowid for this entry */
int iCol, /* Column token appears in (-ve -> delete) */
int iPos, /* Position of token within column */
char bByte,
const char *pToken, int nToken /* Token to add or remove to or from index */
);
/*
** Empty (but do not delete) a hash table.
*/
void sqlite3Fts5HashClear(Fts5Hash*);
int sqlite3Fts5HashQuery(
Fts5Hash*, /* Hash table to query */
const char *pTerm, int nTerm, /* Query term */
const u8 **ppDoclist, /* OUT: Pointer to doclist for pTerm */
int *pnDoclist /* OUT: Size of doclist in bytes */
);
int sqlite3Fts5HashScanInit(
Fts5Hash*, /* Hash table to query */
const char *pTerm, int nTerm /* Query prefix */
);
void sqlite3Fts5HashScanNext(Fts5Hash*);
int sqlite3Fts5HashScanEof(Fts5Hash*);
void sqlite3Fts5HashScanEntry(Fts5Hash *,
const char **pzTerm, /* OUT: term (nul-terminated) */
const u8 **ppDoclist, /* OUT: pointer to doclist */
int *pnDoclist /* OUT: size of doclist in bytes */
);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_hash.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_storage.c. fts5_storage.c contains contains
** code to access the data stored in the %_content and %_docsize tables.
*/
#define FTS5_STMT_SCAN_ASC 0 /* SELECT rowid, * FROM ... ORDER BY 1 ASC */
#define FTS5_STMT_SCAN_DESC 1 /* SELECT rowid, * FROM ... ORDER BY 1 DESC */
#define FTS5_STMT_LOOKUP 2 /* SELECT rowid, * FROM ... WHERE rowid=? */
typedef struct Fts5Storage Fts5Storage;
int sqlite3Fts5StorageOpen(Fts5Config*, Fts5Index*, int, Fts5Storage**, char**);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageClose(Fts5Storage *p);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageRename(Fts5Storage*, const char *zName);
int sqlite3Fts5DropAll(Fts5Config*);
int sqlite3Fts5CreateTable(Fts5Config*, const char*, const char*, int, char **);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageDelete(Fts5Storage *p, i64, sqlite3_value**);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageContentInsert(Fts5Storage *p, sqlite3_value**, i64*);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageIndexInsert(Fts5Storage *p, sqlite3_value**, i64);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageIntegrity(Fts5Storage *p);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageStmt(Fts5Storage *p, int eStmt, sqlite3_stmt**, char**);
void sqlite3Fts5StorageStmtRelease(Fts5Storage *p, int eStmt, sqlite3_stmt*);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageDocsize(Fts5Storage *p, i64 iRowid, int *aCol);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageSize(Fts5Storage *p, int iCol, i64 *pnAvg);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageRowCount(Fts5Storage *p, i64 *pnRow);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageSync(Fts5Storage *p, int bCommit);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageRollback(Fts5Storage *p);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageConfigValue(
Fts5Storage *p, const char*, sqlite3_value*, int
);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageDeleteAll(Fts5Storage *p);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageRebuild(Fts5Storage *p);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageOptimize(Fts5Storage *p);
int sqlite3Fts5StorageMerge(Fts5Storage *p, int nMerge);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_storage.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_expr.c.
*/
typedef struct Fts5Expr Fts5Expr;
typedef struct Fts5ExprNode Fts5ExprNode;
typedef struct Fts5Parse Fts5Parse;
typedef struct Fts5Token Fts5Token;
typedef struct Fts5ExprPhrase Fts5ExprPhrase;
typedef struct Fts5ExprNearset Fts5ExprNearset;
struct Fts5Token {
const char *p; /* Token text (not NULL terminated) */
int n; /* Size of buffer p in bytes */
};
/* Parse a MATCH expression. */
int sqlite3Fts5ExprNew(
Fts5Config *pConfig,
const char *zExpr,
Fts5Expr **ppNew,
char **pzErr
);
/*
** for(rc = sqlite3Fts5ExprFirst(pExpr, pIdx, bDesc);
** rc==SQLITE_OK && 0==sqlite3Fts5ExprEof(pExpr);
** rc = sqlite3Fts5ExprNext(pExpr)
** ){
** // The document with rowid iRowid matches the expression!
** i64 iRowid = sqlite3Fts5ExprRowid(pExpr);
** }
*/
int sqlite3Fts5ExprFirst(Fts5Expr*, Fts5Index *pIdx, i64 iMin, int bDesc);
int sqlite3Fts5ExprNext(Fts5Expr*, i64 iMax);
int sqlite3Fts5ExprEof(Fts5Expr*);
i64 sqlite3Fts5ExprRowid(Fts5Expr*);
void sqlite3Fts5ExprFree(Fts5Expr*);
/* Called during startup to register a UDF with SQLite */
int sqlite3Fts5ExprInit(Fts5Global*, sqlite3*);
int sqlite3Fts5ExprPhraseCount(Fts5Expr*);
int sqlite3Fts5ExprPhraseSize(Fts5Expr*, int iPhrase);
int sqlite3Fts5ExprPoslist(Fts5Expr*, int, const u8 **);
typedef struct Fts5PoslistPopulator Fts5PoslistPopulator;
Fts5PoslistPopulator *sqlite3Fts5ExprClearPoslists(Fts5Expr*, int);
int sqlite3Fts5ExprPopulatePoslists(
Fts5Config*, Fts5Expr*, Fts5PoslistPopulator*, int, const char*, int
);
void sqlite3Fts5ExprCheckPoslists(Fts5Expr*, i64);
void sqlite3Fts5ExprClearEof(Fts5Expr*);
int sqlite3Fts5ExprClonePhrase(Fts5Expr*, int, Fts5Expr**);
int sqlite3Fts5ExprPhraseCollist(Fts5Expr *, int, const u8 **, int *);
/*******************************************
** The fts5_expr.c API above this point is used by the other hand-written
** C code in this module. The interfaces below this point are called by
** the parser code in fts5parse.y. */
void sqlite3Fts5ParseError(Fts5Parse *pParse, const char *zFmt, ...);
Fts5ExprNode *sqlite3Fts5ParseNode(
Fts5Parse *pParse,
int eType,
Fts5ExprNode *pLeft,
Fts5ExprNode *pRight,
Fts5ExprNearset *pNear
);
Fts5ExprPhrase *sqlite3Fts5ParseTerm(
Fts5Parse *pParse,
Fts5ExprPhrase *pPhrase,
Fts5Token *pToken,
int bPrefix
);
Fts5ExprNearset *sqlite3Fts5ParseNearset(
Fts5Parse*,
Fts5ExprNearset*,
Fts5ExprPhrase*
);
Fts5Colset *sqlite3Fts5ParseColset(
Fts5Parse*,
Fts5Colset*,
Fts5Token *
);
void sqlite3Fts5ParsePhraseFree(Fts5ExprPhrase*);
void sqlite3Fts5ParseNearsetFree(Fts5ExprNearset*);
void sqlite3Fts5ParseNodeFree(Fts5ExprNode*);
void sqlite3Fts5ParseSetDistance(Fts5Parse*, Fts5ExprNearset*, Fts5Token*);
void sqlite3Fts5ParseSetColset(Fts5Parse*, Fts5ExprNearset*, Fts5Colset*);
void sqlite3Fts5ParseFinished(Fts5Parse *pParse, Fts5ExprNode *p);
void sqlite3Fts5ParseNear(Fts5Parse *pParse, Fts5Token*);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_expr.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_aux.c.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5AuxInit(fts5_api*);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_aux.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_tokenizer.c.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5TokenizerInit(fts5_api*);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_tokenizer.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to code in fts5_vocab.c.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5VocabInit(Fts5Global*, sqlite3*);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_vocab.c.
**************************************************************************/
/**************************************************************************
** Interface to automatically generated code in fts5_unicode2.c.
*/
int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeIsalnum(int c);
int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeIsdiacritic(int c);
int sqlite3Fts5UnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic);
/*
** End of interface to code in fts5_unicode2.c.
**************************************************************************/
#endif

562
query_classifier/qc_sqlite/sqlite-src-3110100.old/ext/fts5/fts5_aux.c
View File

@ -1,562 +0,0 @@
/*
** 2014 May 31
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
**
** May you do good and not evil.
** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
******************************************************************************
*/
#include "fts5Int.h"
#include <math.h> /* amalgamator: keep */
/*
** Object used to iterate through all "coalesced phrase instances" in
** a single column of the current row. If the phrase instances in the
** column being considered do not overlap, this object simply iterates
** through them. Or, if they do overlap (share one or more tokens in
** common), each set of overlapping instances is treated as a single
** match. See documentation for the highlight() auxiliary function for
** details.
**
** Usage is:
**
** for(rc = fts5CInstIterNext(pApi, pFts, iCol, &iter);
** (rc==SQLITE_OK && 0==fts5CInstIterEof(&iter);
** rc = fts5CInstIterNext(&iter)
** ){
** printf("instance starts at %d, ends at %d\n", iter.iStart, iter.iEnd);
** }
**
*/
typedef struct CInstIter CInstIter;
struct CInstIter {
const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi; /* API offered by current FTS version */
Fts5Context *pFts; /* First arg to pass to pApi functions */
int iCol; /* Column to search */
int iInst; /* Next phrase instance index */
int nInst; /* Total number of phrase instances */
/* Output variables */
int iStart; /* First token in coalesced phrase instance */
int iEnd; /* Last token in coalesced phrase instance */
};
/*
** Advance the iterator to the next coalesced phrase instance. Return
** an SQLite error code if an error occurs, or SQLITE_OK otherwise.
*/
static int fts5CInstIterNext(CInstIter *pIter){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
pIter->iStart = -1;
pIter->iEnd = -1;
while( rc==SQLITE_OK && pIter->iInst<pIter->nInst ){
int ip; int ic; int io;
rc = pIter->pApi->xInst(pIter->pFts, pIter->iInst, &ip, &ic, &io);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
if( ic==pIter->iCol ){
int iEnd = io - 1 + pIter->pApi->xPhraseSize(pIter->pFts, ip);
if( pIter->iStart<0 ){
pIter->iStart = io;
pIter->iEnd = iEnd;
}else if( io<=pIter->iEnd ){
if( iEnd>pIter->iEnd ) pIter->iEnd = iEnd;
}else{
break;
}
}
pIter->iInst++;
}
}
return rc;
}
/*
** Initialize the iterator object indicated by the final parameter to
** iterate through coalesced phrase instances in column iCol.
*/
static int fts5CInstIterInit(
const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi,
Fts5Context *pFts,
int iCol,
CInstIter *pIter
){
int rc;
memset(pIter, 0, sizeof(CInstIter));
pIter->pApi = pApi;
pIter->pFts = pFts;
pIter->iCol = iCol;
rc = pApi->xInstCount(pFts, &pIter->nInst);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = fts5CInstIterNext(pIter);
}
return rc;
}
/*************************************************************************
** Start of highlight() implementation.
*/
typedef struct HighlightContext HighlightContext;
struct HighlightContext {
CInstIter iter; /* Coalesced Instance Iterator */
int iPos; /* Current token offset in zIn[] */
int iRangeStart; /* First token to include */
int iRangeEnd; /* If non-zero, last token to include */
const char *zOpen; /* Opening highlight */
const char *zClose; /* Closing highlight */
const char *zIn; /* Input text */
int nIn; /* Size of input text in bytes */
int iOff; /* Current offset within zIn[] */
char *zOut; /* Output value */
};
/*
** Append text to the HighlightContext output string - p->zOut. Argument
** z points to a buffer containing n bytes of text to append. If n is
** negative, everything up until the first '\0' is appended to the output.
**
** If *pRc is set to any value other than SQLITE_OK when this function is
** called, it is a no-op. If an error (i.e. an OOM condition) is encountered,
** *pRc is set to an error code before returning.
*/
static void fts5HighlightAppend(
int *pRc,
HighlightContext *p,
const char *z, int n
){
if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK ){
if( n<0 ) n = (int)strlen(z);
p->zOut = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%.*s", p->zOut, n, z);
if( p->zOut==0 ) *pRc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
}
/*
** Tokenizer callback used by implementation of highlight() function.
*/
static int fts5HighlightCb(
void *pContext, /* Pointer to HighlightContext object */
int tflags, /* Mask of FTS5_TOKEN_* flags */
const char *pToken, /* Buffer containing token */
int nToken, /* Size of token in bytes */
int iStartOff, /* Start offset of token */
int iEndOff /* End offset of token */
){
HighlightContext *p = (HighlightContext*)pContext;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int iPos;
UNUSED_PARAM2(pToken, nToken);
if( tflags & FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED ) return SQLITE_OK;
iPos = p->iPos++;
if( p->iRangeEnd>0 ){
if( iPos<p->iRangeStart || iPos>p->iRangeEnd ) return SQLITE_OK;
if( p->iRangeStart && iPos==p->iRangeStart ) p->iOff = iStartOff;
}
if( iPos==p->iter.iStart ){
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, p, &p->zIn[p->iOff], iStartOff - p->iOff);
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, p, p->zOpen, -1);
p->iOff = iStartOff;
}
if( iPos==p->iter.iEnd ){
if( p->iRangeEnd && p->iter.iStart<p->iRangeStart ){
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, p, p->zOpen, -1);
}
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, p, &p->zIn[p->iOff], iEndOff - p->iOff);
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, p, p->zClose, -1);
p->iOff = iEndOff;
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = fts5CInstIterNext(&p->iter);
}
}
if( p->iRangeEnd>0 && iPos==p->iRangeEnd ){
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, p, &p->zIn[p->iOff], iEndOff - p->iOff);
p->iOff = iEndOff;
if( iPos<p->iter.iEnd ){
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, p, p->zClose, -1);
}
}
return rc;
}
/*
** Implementation of highlight() function.
*/
static void fts5HighlightFunction(
const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi, /* API offered by current FTS version */
Fts5Context *pFts, /* First arg to pass to pApi functions */
sqlite3_context *pCtx, /* Context for returning result/error */
int nVal, /* Number of values in apVal[] array */
sqlite3_value **apVal /* Array of trailing arguments */
){
HighlightContext ctx;
int rc;
int iCol;
if( nVal!=3 ){
const char *zErr = "wrong number of arguments to function highlight()";
sqlite3_result_error(pCtx, zErr, -1);
return;
}
iCol = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[0]);
memset(&ctx, 0, sizeof(HighlightContext));
ctx.zOpen = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(apVal[1]);
ctx.zClose = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(apVal[2]);
rc = pApi->xColumnText(pFts, iCol, &ctx.zIn, &ctx.nIn);
if( ctx.zIn ){
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = fts5CInstIterInit(pApi, pFts, iCol, &ctx.iter);
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = pApi->xTokenize(pFts, ctx.zIn, ctx.nIn, (void*)&ctx,fts5HighlightCb);
}
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, &ctx, &ctx.zIn[ctx.iOff], ctx.nIn - ctx.iOff);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_result_text(pCtx, (const char*)ctx.zOut, -1, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
}
sqlite3_free(ctx.zOut);
}
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_result_error_code(pCtx, rc);
}
}
/*
** End of highlight() implementation.
**************************************************************************/
/*
** Implementation of snippet() function.
*/
static void fts5SnippetFunction(
const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi, /* API offered by current FTS version */
Fts5Context *pFts, /* First arg to pass to pApi functions */
sqlite3_context *pCtx, /* Context for returning result/error */
int nVal, /* Number of values in apVal[] array */
sqlite3_value **apVal /* Array of trailing arguments */
){
HighlightContext ctx;
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */
int iCol; /* 1st argument to snippet() */
const char *zEllips; /* 4th argument to snippet() */
int nToken; /* 5th argument to snippet() */
int nInst = 0; /* Number of instance matches this row */
int i; /* Used to iterate through instances */
int nPhrase; /* Number of phrases in query */
unsigned char *aSeen; /* Array of "seen instance" flags */
int iBestCol; /* Column containing best snippet */
int iBestStart = 0; /* First token of best snippet */
int iBestLast; /* Last token of best snippet */
int nBestScore = 0; /* Score of best snippet */
int nColSize = 0; /* Total size of iBestCol in tokens */
if( nVal!=5 ){
const char *zErr = "wrong number of arguments to function snippet()";
sqlite3_result_error(pCtx, zErr, -1);
return;
}
memset(&ctx, 0, sizeof(HighlightContext));
iCol = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[0]);
ctx.zOpen = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(apVal[1]);
ctx.zClose = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(apVal[2]);
zEllips = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(apVal[3]);
nToken = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[4]);
iBestLast = nToken-1;
iBestCol = (iCol>=0 ? iCol : 0);
nPhrase = pApi->xPhraseCount(pFts);
aSeen = sqlite3_malloc(nPhrase);
if( aSeen==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = pApi->xInstCount(pFts, &nInst);
}
for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<nInst; i++){
int ip, iSnippetCol, iStart;
memset(aSeen, 0, nPhrase);
rc = pApi->xInst(pFts, i, &ip, &iSnippetCol, &iStart);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (iCol<0 || iSnippetCol==iCol) ){
int nScore = 1000;
int iLast = iStart - 1 + pApi->xPhraseSize(pFts, ip);
int j;
aSeen[ip] = 1;
for(j=i+1; rc==SQLITE_OK && j<nInst; j++){
int ic; int io; int iFinal;
rc = pApi->xInst(pFts, j, &ip, &ic, &io);
iFinal = io + pApi->xPhraseSize(pFts, ip) - 1;
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && ic==iSnippetCol && iLast<iStart+nToken ){
nScore += aSeen[ip] ? 1000 : 1;
aSeen[ip] = 1;
if( iFinal>iLast ) iLast = iFinal;
}
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && nScore>nBestScore ){
iBestCol = iSnippetCol;
iBestStart = iStart;
iBestLast = iLast;
nBestScore = nScore;
}
}
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = pApi->xColumnSize(pFts, iBestCol, &nColSize);
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = pApi->xColumnText(pFts, iBestCol, &ctx.zIn, &ctx.nIn);
}
if( ctx.zIn ){
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = fts5CInstIterInit(pApi, pFts, iBestCol, &ctx.iter);
}
if( (iBestStart+nToken-1)>iBestLast ){
iBestStart -= (iBestStart+nToken-1-iBestLast) / 2;
}
if( iBestStart+nToken>nColSize ){
iBestStart = nColSize - nToken;
}
if( iBestStart<0 ) iBestStart = 0;
ctx.iRangeStart = iBestStart;
ctx.iRangeEnd = iBestStart + nToken - 1;
if( iBestStart>0 ){
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, &ctx, zEllips, -1);
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = pApi->xTokenize(pFts, ctx.zIn, ctx.nIn, (void*)&ctx,fts5HighlightCb);
}
if( ctx.iRangeEnd>=(nColSize-1) ){
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, &ctx, &ctx.zIn[ctx.iOff], ctx.nIn - ctx.iOff);
}else{
fts5HighlightAppend(&rc, &ctx, zEllips, -1);
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_result_text(pCtx, (const char*)ctx.zOut, -1, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
}else{
sqlite3_result_error_code(pCtx, rc);
}
sqlite3_free(ctx.zOut);
}
sqlite3_free(aSeen);
}
/************************************************************************/
/*
** The first time the bm25() function is called for a query, an instance
** of the following structure is allocated and populated.
*/
typedef struct Fts5Bm25Data Fts5Bm25Data;
struct Fts5Bm25Data {
int nPhrase; /* Number of phrases in query */
double avgdl; /* Average number of tokens in each row */
double *aIDF; /* IDF for each phrase */
double *aFreq; /* Array used to calculate phrase freq. */
};
/*
** Callback used by fts5Bm25GetData() to count the number of rows in the
** table matched by each individual phrase within the query.
*/
static int fts5CountCb(
const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi,
Fts5Context *pFts,
void *pUserData /* Pointer to sqlite3_int64 variable */
){
sqlite3_int64 *pn = (sqlite3_int64*)pUserData;
UNUSED_PARAM2(pApi, pFts);
(*pn)++;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** Set *ppData to point to the Fts5Bm25Data object for the current query.
** If the object has not already been allocated, allocate and populate it
** now.
*/
static int fts5Bm25GetData(
const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi,
Fts5Context *pFts,
Fts5Bm25Data **ppData /* OUT: bm25-data object for this query */
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */
Fts5Bm25Data *p; /* Object to return */
p = pApi->xGetAuxdata(pFts, 0);
if( p==0 ){
int nPhrase; /* Number of phrases in query */
sqlite3_int64 nRow = 0; /* Number of rows in table */
sqlite3_int64 nToken = 0; /* Number of tokens in table */
int nByte; /* Bytes of space to allocate */
int i;
/* Allocate the Fts5Bm25Data object */
nPhrase = pApi->xPhraseCount(pFts);
nByte = sizeof(Fts5Bm25Data) + nPhrase*2*sizeof(double);
p = (Fts5Bm25Data*)sqlite3_malloc(nByte);
if( p==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}else{
memset(p, 0, nByte);
p->nPhrase = nPhrase;
p->aIDF = (double*)&p[1];
p->aFreq = &p->aIDF[nPhrase];
}
/* Calculate the average document length for this FTS5 table */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = pApi->xRowCount(pFts, &nRow);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = pApi->xColumnTotalSize(pFts, -1, &nToken);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) p->avgdl = (double)nToken / (double)nRow;
/* Calculate an IDF for each phrase in the query */
for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<nPhrase; i++){
sqlite3_int64 nHit = 0;
rc = pApi->xQueryPhrase(pFts, i, (void*)&nHit, fts5CountCb);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
/* Calculate the IDF (Inverse Document Frequency) for phrase i.
** This is done using the standard BM25 formula as found on wikipedia:
**
** IDF = log( (N - nHit + 0.5) / (nHit + 0.5) )
**
** where "N" is the total number of documents in the set and nHit
** is the number that contain at least one instance of the phrase
** under consideration.
**
** The problem with this is that if (N < 2*nHit), the IDF is
** negative. Which is undesirable. So the mimimum allowable IDF is
** (1e-6) - roughly the same as a term that appears in just over
** half of set of 5,000,000 documents. */
double idf = log( (nRow - nHit + 0.5) / (nHit + 0.5) );
if( idf<=0.0 ) idf = 1e-6;
p->aIDF[i] = idf;
}
}
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_free(p);
}else{
rc = pApi->xSetAuxdata(pFts, p, sqlite3_free);
}
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) p = 0;
}
*ppData = p;
return rc;
}
/*
** Implementation of bm25() function.
*/
static void fts5Bm25Function(
const Fts5ExtensionApi *pApi, /* API offered by current FTS version */
Fts5Context *pFts, /* First arg to pass to pApi functions */
sqlite3_context *pCtx, /* Context for returning result/error */
int nVal, /* Number of values in apVal[] array */
sqlite3_value **apVal /* Array of trailing arguments */
){
const double k1 = 1.2; /* Constant "k1" from BM25 formula */
const double b = 0.75; /* Constant "b" from BM25 formula */
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Error code */
double score = 0.0; /* SQL function return value */
Fts5Bm25Data *pData; /* Values allocated/calculated once only */
int i; /* Iterator variable */
int nInst = 0; /* Value returned by xInstCount() */
double D = 0.0; /* Total number of tokens in row */
double *aFreq = 0; /* Array of phrase freq. for current row */
/* Calculate the phrase frequency (symbol "f(qi,D)" in the documentation)
** for each phrase in the query for the current row. */
rc = fts5Bm25GetData(pApi, pFts, &pData);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
aFreq = pData->aFreq;
memset(aFreq, 0, sizeof(double) * pData->nPhrase);
rc = pApi->xInstCount(pFts, &nInst);
}
for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<nInst; i++){
int ip; int ic; int io;
rc = pApi->xInst(pFts, i, &ip, &ic, &io);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
double w = (nVal > ic) ? sqlite3_value_double(apVal[ic]) : 1.0;
aFreq[ip] += w;
}
}
/* Figure out the total size of the current row in tokens. */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
int nTok;
rc = pApi->xColumnSize(pFts, -1, &nTok);
D = (double)nTok;
}
/* Determine the BM25 score for the current row. */
for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<pData->nPhrase; i++){
score += pData->aIDF[i] * (
( aFreq[i] * (k1 + 1.0) ) /
( aFreq[i] + k1 * (1 - b + b * D / pData->avgdl) )
);
}
/* If no error has occurred, return the calculated score. Otherwise,
** throw an SQL exception. */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_result_double(pCtx, -1.0 * score);
}else{
sqlite3_result_error_code(pCtx, rc);
}
}
int sqlite3Fts5AuxInit(fts5_api *pApi){
struct Builtin {
const char *zFunc; /* Function name (nul-terminated) */
void *pUserData; /* User-data pointer */
fts5_extension_function xFunc;/* Callback function */
void (*xDestroy)(void*); /* Destructor function */
} aBuiltin [] = {
{ "snippet", 0, fts5SnippetFunction, 0 },
{ "highlight", 0, fts5HighlightFunction, 0 },
{ "bm25", 0, fts5Bm25Function, 0 },
};
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */
int i; /* To iterate through builtin functions */
for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<ArraySize(aBuiltin); i++){
rc = pApi->xCreateFunction(pApi,
aBuiltin[i].zFunc,
aBuiltin[i].pUserData,
aBuiltin[i].xFunc,
aBuiltin[i].xDestroy
);
}
return rc;
}

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More